2005 Manual of Motorcycle Sport

2005 Manual of Motorcycle Sport
INTRODUCTION TO THE 2005 EDITION
Vermeulen (Superbike), Garry McCoy
(Superbike), Casey Stoner (125 GP) and
Josh Brookes (Superport). Of the sextet,
McFarlane,
Vermuelen,
McCoy
and
Brookes were first-time winners in their
respective disciplines, with the latter’s
victory as a wildcard in the Australian round
of the Superport World Championship
particularly meritorious. Meanwhile, the
Yamaha-mounted McFarlane became just
the third Aussie to win a world motocross
race after Jeff Leisk and Chad Reed.
Welcome to the 2005 Manual of Motorcycle
Sport – and another year of two-wheel
competition. For those new to the
motorcycle racing caper, thank you for
joining the fray and we wish you all the
best. To those who are already a part of the
decore, welcome back.
Here’s a refrain to kick off proceedings –
“Australia has a rich history in motorcycle
racing”. More than ever, that oft-mentioned
verse holds true, with the country
continuing to nurture motorcycle racers of
the highest calibre who, more often than
not, make a seamless transition onto the
international arena.
On top of the triumvirate of world
championship winners, Parkes, Adams,
Vermeulen and Stoner all managed to
finish in the top five at season’s end, with
Parkes second behind Muggeridge in
Superport. For the record, Muggeride
became the third Australian world
Supersport winner in its six-year existance,
with Andrew Pitt (2001) and Vermeulen
(2003) doing the damage earlier on.
That success is not a result of chance, but
instead a function of the ultra-professional
way motorcycle racing at a domestic level
is conducted – melded with a liberal dose
of that trademark Aussie spirit and
determination.
Moreover,
the
sport
operates with unwavering support from
competitors, officials, spectators, sponsors,
adminstrators, the media and volunteers. In
particular, the sport relies heavily on its
volunteer base; we could not operate
successfully without them.
Muggeridge, like Vermuelen a year before,
will now step up to world Superbike in
2005, where he will be joined by six
countrymen – Australia’s largest-ever
representation in the championship.
Other luminaries on the international arena
in 2004 included Mathew Mladin, Aaron
Gobert and Chad Reed, who all won
American national championships. Mladin
won an unprecedented fifth Superbike title,
while Gobert, the 2000 Australian
Australian 250 Production champion,
emerged victorious in Superstock.
In 2004, a whopping nine Australian riders
won world championship events, with three
of them going all the way – Jason Crump
(speedway), Stefan Merriman (enduro) and
Karl Muggeridge (Supersport). The triple
treat – which equals previous Aussie efforts
in 1997 and 2003 – has taken the overall
Australian world championship count to 35,
kickstarted by Lionel van Praag’s victory in
the 1936 speedway title. Of the 35
victories, Mick Doohan (five 500cc GP
titles) and Merriman (four enduro) are the
pantheons – with the latter still at his
pernicious best.
As for Reed, he became just the third
foreigner to win the AMA 250cc supercross
title in its 31-year existence after
steamrolling the opposition. The 2003 world
supercross champion finished first or
second in every round on his factory
Yamaha YZ250, including a scintillating
bank of nine victories.
With
two
individual-level
world
championships (open level) still to be
decided at the time of writing – Supermoto
and Cross-Country Rallies – Australia’s
three successes represent the best ouput
by any country, ahead of the likes of Italy,
Spain and Finland (all two wins apiece).
Other domestic winners in 2004 included
the bespectacled Rory Schlien in the
Scottish speedway championship, and
Merriman, who near-whitewashed the
Italian enduro title for the second year
running.
In addition to Crump, Merriman and
Muggeridge, the remaining Aussie riders
who won world championship events in
2004 were Leigh Adams (speedway),
Andrew McFarlane (motocross), Chris
From a team perspective, Australia’s fiveman speedway operation failed to reach the
final of the British-hosted World Cup for the
1
INTRODUCTION
To keep abreast of all the news and results
at an international and national level,
please keep an eye on the all-new MA
website at www.ma.org.au. And while
you’re there, sign up for the regular
electronic newsletter – it’s free.
first time since 2000 after it was eliminated
in the last-chance qualifier. Australia is a
four-time winner of the World Cup, with
three of its triumphs coming since 1999.
That left Australia’s Trial des Nations team
as the beacon in 2004 after it finished
fourth in the second-tier International
Trophy division. Finally, the Dutch-held
Motocross of Nations saw an undermanned
Australia finished a respectable 13th.
On behalf of the board of Motorcycling
Australia, we wish you all a very successful
2005.
That was the international focus in 2004 –
and what a year it was at the domestic
level. The racing has been superb,
producing contests of the highest order.
Congratulations to the 83 individuals and
four teams who have been crowned
Australian champions thus far, with a
special mention to the five riders who
managed to win two classes in the same
championship – Adam Fergusson (road
racing), and the dirt track quartet Tom
Armstrong, Todd Kurtz (both juniors), Troy
Herfoss and Ken Bisley.
Fergusson, aboard Hondas, dominated the
Superbike and Supersport classes in the
Shell Advance Australian Superbike
Championship (SAASC), especially after
teammate Brookes – who had scythed
through the early rounds – broke his pelvis
in Perth and missed the final three hitouts.
Ron Kivovitch
David White
President
CEO
For news and information, visit:
www.ma.org.au
With
all
four
Japanese
marques
represented at the distributor-level in the
2004 SAASC, supported by a number of
highly credentialled privateers, the racing
was cut-throat. However, thanks to a posse
of naming rights’ sponsors, including
Yamaha, Honda, Akubra, Tom’s Cycle City
Yamaha, Jack Daniel’s and Trialzone, the
remaining Aussie titles were also highly
successful affairs – in both the senior and
junior divisions. For the top three in every
class at every Australia championship in
2003, go to page ?? of this year’s manual.
 2005. All material in this book is the copyright of
Motorcycling Australia Ltd (MA) and may not be
reproduced without prior written permission from the Chief
Executive Officer.
So what’s in the pipeline for 2005? As
usual, Phillip Island will play host to the
antipodean legs of the MotoGP, Superbike
and Supersport world titles, while the
Australian Safari will return to the CrossCountry Rallies World Championship
calendar. As well, a full complement of
Australian titles will again be held, kicking
off with the entire quota of speedway
events in the first quarter.
2
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.
2.
3.
JURISDICTION AND ADMINISTRATION....................................................................................37
1.1
THE RULES ........................................................................................................................37
1.1.1 Purpose of Rules............................................................................................................37
1.1.2 Recognition of Authority of FIM ......................................................................................37
1.2
REPEAL OF CURRENT GCRS ..........................................................................................37
1.3
BY - LAWS ..........................................................................................................................37
1.3.1 Making of By - Laws .......................................................................................................37
1.4
DEFINITIONS......................................................................................................................38
ADMINISTRATION .......................................................................................................................41
2.1
THE CONTROLLING BODIES............................................................................................41
2.1.1 Administration of Rules ..................................................................................................41
2.1.2 Agreements for Conduct of the Sport.............................................................................41
2.1.3 Conflict Between Code and Rules..................................................................................41
2.2
COMMISSIONS...................................................................................................................41
2.2.1 Establishment of Commissions ......................................................................................41
2.2.2 Functions and Membership of Commissions .................................................................41
2.3
SPORTS DEVELOPMENT LEVY .......................................................................................42
2.3.1 Collection and Distribution..............................................................................................42
2.4
THE SPORTS DEVELOPMENT ACCOUNT ......................................................................42
2.4.1 Operation........................................................................................................................42
2.5
OFFICIALS ..........................................................................................................................42
2.5.1 Powers and Authorities of Officials.................................................................................42
2.5.2 The Licensing of Officials ...............................................................................................43
2.5.3 Categories of Officials’ Licences ....................................................................................43
2.5.4 Stewards ........................................................................................................................44
2.5.5 Race Director .................................................................................................................45
2.5.6 Clerk of the Course ........................................................................................................45
2.5.7 Race Secretary...............................................................................................................45
2.5.8 Eligibility Scrutineer. .......................................................................................................46
2.5.9 Operational officials........................................................................................................46
2.5.10 Specialist Sub-Committees ............................................................................................46
2.5.11 Juries..............................................................................................................................46
COMPETITIONS...........................................................................................................................48
3.1
VENUES..............................................................................................................................48
3.1.1 Register of Venues.........................................................................................................48
3.1.2 Venue Inspectors ...........................................................................................................48
3.1.3 The Licensing of Venues................................................................................................48
3.1.4 NOTICES TO THE PUBLIC ...........................................................................................48
3.2
THE PROMOTION AND CONDUCT OF COMPETITIONS................................................49
3.2.1 Authority to Promote.......................................................................................................49
3.2.2 Competition Permits.......................................................................................................49
3.2.3 Refund of Permit Fees ...................................................................................................50
3.2.4 Forfeiture of Permit.........................................................................................................50
3.2.5 The Appointment of Officials ..........................................................................................50
3.2.6 Competitions between Categories of Machine...............................................................51
3.2.7 Invitations for Entries......................................................................................................51
3.2.8 Applications for Entries...................................................................................................51
3.2.9 Responsibilities of Promoters.........................................................................................51
3.2.10 Betting at Meetings.........................................................................................................52
3.2.11 Results ...........................................................................................................................52
3.2.12 Results in Australian Championships and MA Series ....................................................52
3.2.13 Supplementary Regulations ...........................................................................................52
3
3.2.14 Supplementary Regulations for Australian Championships and MA Series.................. 53
4.
5.
3.3
LICENSING......................................................................................................................... 53
3.3.1 The Licensing of Competitors ........................................................................................ 53
3.3.2 The Licensing of Entrants .............................................................................................. 55
3.3.3 The Licensing of Speedway Mechanics......................................................................... 56
3.4
OFFENCES ........................................................................................................................ 57
3.4.1 List of Offences.............................................................................................................. 57
3.4.2 The Imposition of Penalties During Events.................................................................... 58
3.4.3 Hearing and Determination of Charges during Meetings............................................... 59
3.4.4 Inspectors ...................................................................................................................... 59
3.4.5 Charges ......................................................................................................................... 59
3.4.6 Penalties ........................................................................................................................ 59
3.4.7 Default penalties ............................................................................................................ 61
3.4.8 Tests for Prohibited Substances.................................................................................... 61
3.4.9 Fines .............................................................................................................................. 61
3.4.10 Suspension and Disqualification.................................................................................... 61
3.4.11 Penalties – Juniors ........................................................................................................ 61
PROTESTS AND APPEALS ....................................................................................................... 62
4.1
PROTESTS ........................................................................................................................ 62
4.1.1 Right of Protest .............................................................................................................. 62
4.1.2 Protest Hearings ............................................................................................................ 62
4.1.3 Protests - Juniors........................................................................................................... 63
4.2
APPELLATE BODIES......................................................................................................... 63
4.2.1 The Appointment of Appellate Bodies ........................................................................... 63
4.2.2 Hearings by Appellate Bodies........................................................................................ 63
4.2.3 Decisions by Appellate Bodies ...................................................................................... 63
4.3
APPEALS ........................................................................................................................... 64
4.3.1 Right to Appeal .............................................................................................................. 64
4.3.2 Commencement of Appeals .......................................................................................... 64
4.3.3 Time Limits for Appeals ................................................................................................. 64
ALL DISCIPLINES ....................................................................................................................... 65
5.1
APPLICATION OF THIS CHAPTER .................................................................................. 65
5.1.1 Generality of Chapter..................................................................................................... 65
5.2
ELIGIBILITY ........................................................................................................................ 65
5.2.1 General Eligibility ........................................................................................................... 65
5.2.2 Juniors only to compete in Junior Competitions ............................................................ 65
5.2.3 Homologation................................................................................................................. 65
5.3
ENGINES – FORMULAE FOR CALCULATION OF CAPACITIES AND CLASSES.......... 65
5.3.1 Reciprocating Engines:.................................................................................................. 65
5.3.2 Wankel System Engines With A Triangular Piston: ...................................................... 66
5.3.3 Superchargers and Turbochargers................................................................................ 66
5.3.4 Engine Capacity Tolerances.......................................................................................... 66
5.4
NUMBER PLATES ............................................................................................................. 66
5.4.1 General .......................................................................................................................... 66
5.4.2 Number Plate Colours - Except for Enduro ................................................................... 67
5.4.3 Number Plate Figures.................................................................................................... 67
5.4.4 Number Plates – Juniors ............................................................................................... 68
5.4.5 Back Numbers – Juniors ............................................................................................... 68
5.5
FRAMES AND PARTS ....................................................................................................... 68
5.5.1 Streamlining................................................................................................................... 68
5.5.2 Fuel Tanks ..................................................................................................................... 68
5.5.3 Exhaust Systems ........................................................................................................... 68
5.5.4 Centre and Side Stands................................................................................................. 69
5.5.5 Footrests ........................................................................................................................ 69
5.5.6 Handlebars .................................................................................................................... 69
4
5.5.7
5.5.8
5.5.9
5.5.10
Kick Start Levers ............................................................................................................69
Drive Chain Protection ...................................................................................................70
Tyres...............................................................................................................................70
Mudguards......................................................................................................................70
5.6
FUEL ...................................................................................................................................70
5.6.1 Fuel Warning..................................................................................................................70
5.6.2 Fuel Requirements .........................................................................................................70
5.6.3 Fuel Testing....................................................................................................................70
5.6.4 Refuelling .......................................................................................................................71
5.6.5 Homologation of Fuel .....................................................................................................71
5.7
NOISE EMISSIONS ............................................................................................................71
5.7.1 Specifications .................................................................................................................71
5.7.2 Measurement .................................................................................................................72
5.8
GENERAL COMPETITION RULES ....................................................................................73
5.8.1 Measurements at Meetings ............................................................................................73
5.8.2 Measurements - Australian and State Championship Events........................................73
5.8.3 Starts ..............................................................................................................................73
5.8.4 Finishes ..........................................................................................................................74
5.8.5 Juniors - Starts and Finishes..........................................................................................74
5.8.6 Stopping Events .............................................................................................................74
5.8.7 Stopping And Re-Running Events .................................................................................74
5.8.8 Flags And Signals ..........................................................................................................75
5.8.9 Scoring ...........................................................................................................................76
5.8.10 Change Of Machine During A Competition ....................................................................76
5.8.11 Junior Competition Rules ...............................................................................................76
5.8.12 Junior Trail Bikes............................................................................................................78
5.9
JUNIOR CAPACITY CLASSES ..........................................................................................78
5.9.1 50cc Automatic Class.....................................................................................................78
5.9.2 Solo Wheels - All Classes..............................................................................................79
5.9.3 Sidecar Wheels - All Classes.........................................................................................79
5.9.4 Sidecars - All Classes – except Moto Trials...................................................................80
5.10 AUSTRALIAN CHAMPIONSHIPS.......................................................................................80
5.10.1 The Allocation of Australian Championships which do not form a Series......................80
5.10.2 The Allocation of Australian Championships Forming a Series .....................................81
5.10.3 Categories for Australian Championships......................................................................81
5.10.4 Promotion of Australian Championships ........................................................................83
5.10.5 Listing of Australian Championships in State Calendars ...............................................83
5.10.6 Radio communication.....................................................................................................83
5.10.7 Footwear.........................................................................................................................83
6.
ROAD RACING ............................................................................................................................84
6.1
PROTECTIVE CLOTHING..................................................................................................84
6.1.1 Helmets, Clothing, Gloves and Footwear.......................................................................84
6.1.2 Goggles and Visors ........................................................................................................84
6.1.3 Hair and Jewellery..........................................................................................................84
6.2
ENGINES ............................................................................................................................85
6.2.1 General...........................................................................................................................85
6.2.2 Fuel ................................................................................................................................85
6.3
FRAMES AND PARTS SOLO.............................................................................................85
6.3.1 Streamlining - Solo .........................................................................................................85
6.3.2 Brakes - Solo..................................................................................................................85
6.3.3 Superbikes .....................................................................................................................86
6.3.4 Production ......................................................................................................................86
6.3.5 Supersport......................................................................................................................87
6.3.6 Production Superbikes ...................................................................................................88
6.3.7 Superstock .....................................................................................................................90
6.4
ENGINES – SIDECARS......................................................................................................93
5
7.
8.
6.5
FORMULA ONE FRAMES AND PARTS - SIDECAR ........................................................ 93
6.5.1 Dimensions and Requirements - General ..................................................................... 93
6.6
FORMULA TWO – SIDECAR............................................................................................. 95
6.6.1 Engine and Gearbox...................................................................................................... 95
6.6.2 Frame ............................................................................................................................ 96
6.6.3 Wheels, Suspension and Brakes .................................................................................. 97
6.6.4 Fuel and Oil Tanks......................................................................................................... 97
6.6.5 Rider and Passenger ..................................................................................................... 97
6.6.6 Steering and Control Levers. ......................................................................................... 98
6.7
COMPETITION RULES ...................................................................................................... 98
6.7.1 Solo Road Race 80cc-Eligibility..................................................................................... 98
6.7.2 Solo Road Race 160cc .................................................................................................. 99
6.7.3 Junior ............................................................................................................................. 99
6.7.4 125cc GP Class ............................................................................................................. 99
6.7.5 Refueling........................................................................................................................ 99
6.7.6 Refueling Devices.......................................................................................................... 99
6.7.7 Starting Grid Format - Solo.......................................................................................... 100
6.7.8 Starting Grid Format - Sidecars ................................................................................... 101
6.7.9 Qualifying ..................................................................................................................... 101
6.7.10 Stopping and Re-Running ........................................................................................... 101
6.7.11 Scoring......................................................................................................................... 102
6.7.12 False Starts.................................................................................................................. 103
MOTOCROSS AND SUPERCROSS......................................................................................... 104
7.1
PROTECTIVE CLOTHING ............................................................................................... 104
7.1.1 Helmets, Clothing, Gloves and Footwear .................................................................... 104
7.1.2 No person may wear open footwear in the pits............................................................ 104
7.1.3 Goggles and Visors ..................................................................................................... 104
7.1.4 Junior Clothing............................................................................................................. 104
7.1.5 Hair and Jewellery ....................................................................................................... 104
7.2
FRAMES AND PARTS ..................................................................................................... 105
7.2.1 Solo.............................................................................................................................. 105
7.2.2 Sidecar......................................................................................................................... 105
7.3
SENIOR CAPACITY CLASSES ....................................................................................... 105
7.3.1 Machines Other Than Junior ....................................................................................... 105
7.4
JUNIOR............................................................................................................................. 106
7.4.1 50cc motorcycles are to comply with GCR 5.9. ........................................................... 106
7.4.2 80cc Four Stroke Class ............................................................................................... 106
7.5
FUEL................................................................................................................................. 106
7.5.1 Fuel.............................................................................................................................. 106
7.5.2 Fuel for all machines must be:..................................................................................... 106
7.6
COMPETITION RULES - ALL AGES AND CLASSES..................................................... 106
7.6.1 Starting ........................................................................................................................ 106
7.6.2 Finishing ...................................................................................................................... 107
7.7
SUPERCROSS................................................................................................................. 107
7.7.1 Supercross Licence Conditions ................................................................................... 107
7.7.2 No Jump Signals.......................................................................................................... 107
7.7.3 Warm Up Lap .............................................................................................................. 108
7.8
GRADING ......................................................................................................................... 108
7.8.1 Senior Grades - Motocross and Supercross................................................................ 108
7.9
FREESTYLE MOTOCROSS ............................................................................................ 108
7.9.1 Freestyle Motocross Licence Conditions ..................................................................... 108
DIRT TRACK.............................................................................................................................. 109
8.1
PROTECTIVE CLOTHING ............................................................................................... 109
8.1.1 Helmets, Clothing, Footwear and Gloves .................................................................... 109
8.1.2 Goggles and Visors ..................................................................................................... 109
6
8.1.3
9.
Hair and Jewellery........................................................................................................109
8.2
ENGINES - SENIOR .........................................................................................................110
8.2.1 Capacity Classes - Senior ............................................................................................110
8.2.2 Fuel ..............................................................................................................................110
8.3
FRAMES AND PARTS......................................................................................................110
8.3.1 Senior - Solo.................................................................................................................110
8.3.2 Senior - Sidecar............................................................................................................110
8.4
JUNIOR .............................................................................................................................111
8.4.1 50cc motorcycles are to comply with GCR 5.9.............................................................111
8.5
CLASSIC DIRT TRACK CHAMPIONSHIPS .....................................................................111
8.5.1 Age Group Classes ......................................................................................................111
8.6
COMPETITION RULES ....................................................................................................112
8.6.1 Entries ..........................................................................................................................112
8.6.2 Practice and Qualifying ................................................................................................112
8.6.3 Starts ............................................................................................................................112
SPEEDWAY AND TRACK .........................................................................................................113
9.1
PROTECTIVE CLOTHING................................................................................................113
9.1.1 Helmets, Colours, Clothing and Footwear....................................................................113
9.1.2 Goggles and Visors ......................................................................................................115
9.1.3 No person may wear open footwear in the pits. ...........................................................115
9.2
SPEEDWAY - ENGINES ..................................................................................................115
9.2.1 General.........................................................................................................................115
9.2.2 500 Solo .......................................................................................................................115
9.2.3 Sidecar .........................................................................................................................115
9.2.4 Junior – 125cc Solo......................................................................................................116
9.2.5 Junior - Sidecar ............................................................................................................116
9.3
SPEEDWAY - FRAMES AND PARTS..............................................................................116
9.3.1 General.........................................................................................................................116
9.3.2 500 Solo .......................................................................................................................117
9.3.3 Sidecar .........................................................................................................................118
9.3.4 Junior – 125cc Solo......................................................................................................120
9.3.5 Junior - Sidecar ............................................................................................................120
9.4
TRACK - ENGINES...........................................................................................................121
9.4.1 General.........................................................................................................................121
9.4.2 Motorcycle and Sidecar ................................................................................................121
9.5
TRACK - FRAMES AND PARTS ......................................................................................121
9.5.2 Motorcycle and Sidecar ................................................................................................121
9.6
TRACK - JUNIOR..............................................................................................................122
9.6.1 50cc motorcycles are to comply with GCR 5.9.............................................................122
9.7
FUEL .................................................................................................................................122
9.7.1 Senior ...........................................................................................................................122
9.7.2 Junior............................................................................................................................122
9.8
COMPETITION RULES - SPEEDWAY ............................................................................122
9.8.1 General.........................................................................................................................122
9.8.2 Change of Machines ....................................................................................................122
9.8.3 Identification of Machines.............................................................................................122
9.8.4 Log Books ....................................................................................................................123
9.8.5 New Competitors..........................................................................................................123
9.8.6 Late Arrival ...................................................................................................................123
9.8.7 Starting .........................................................................................................................123
9.8.8 Retirements ..................................................................................................................124
9.8.9 Reserves ......................................................................................................................124
9.8.10 Re-runs.........................................................................................................................125
9.8.11 Scoring .........................................................................................................................125
9.8.12 Dead Heats ..................................................................................................................125
7
9.8.13
9.8.14
9.8.15
9.8.16
9.8.17
9.8.18
9.9
Flags and Signals ........................................................................................................ 125
Pit Control .................................................................................................................... 125
Payments..................................................................................................................... 126
Referee - Speedway .................................................................................................... 126
Stewards - Long Track................................................................................................. 126
Junior - age groups and capacities - solo and sidecar ................................................ 126
COMPETITION RULES - TRACK .................................................................................... 126
9.9.1 Starts ........................................................................................................................... 126
9.9.2 Flags and Signals ........................................................................................................ 127
9.10 250CC INTERMEDIATE SPEEDWAY CLASS ................................................................ 127
9.10.1 Introduction .................................................................................................................. 127
9.10.2 Engines........................................................................................................................ 127
9.10.3 Frames and Parts ........................................................................................................ 127
9.10.4 Eligibility....................................................................................................................... 127
9.11 350CC SOLO SPEEDWAY CLASS. ................................................................................ 128
9.11.1 Permits may be issued, with the approval of MA, for the use of 350cc Solo
Speedway machines, to evaluate their suitability for competition......................... 128
9.11.2 Riders using these machines must be 14 years to under 17 years. ............................ 128
9.11.3 Other special conditions will apply to the use of these machines and these
conditions will be made available from MA upon request..................................... 128
9.12 CLASSIC LONG TRACK AND CLASSIC SPEEDWAY ................................................... 128
9.12.1 Eligibility - solo ............................................................................................................. 128
9.12.2 Engine Specifications .................................................................................................. 128
9.12.3 Gearbox - Classic Long Track ..................................................................................... 128
9.12.4 Frame - Classic Long Track ........................................................................................ 128
9.12.5 Frame - Classic Speedway.......................................................................................... 128
9.13 ELIGIBILITY – SIDECARS ............................................................................................... 128
9.13.1 Engine Specifications for Sidecars .............................................................................. 128
9.13.2 Frames for Sidecars .................................................................................................... 128
9.14
DIAGRAMS – SOLO......................................................................................................... 129
9.15
DIAGRAM - SIDECAR ...................................................................................................... 130
10. MOTO-TRIALS........................................................................................................................... 131
10.1 PROTECTIVE CLOTHING ............................................................................................... 131
10.1.1 Helmets Clothing and Footwear .................................................................................. 131
10.2 FUEL................................................................................................................................. 131
10.2.1 Fuel for machines other than Classic competition must be: ........................................ 131
10.3 MACHINE SPECIFICATIONS .......................................................................................... 131
10.3.1 Tyre Types ................................................................................................................... 131
10.3.2 Ignition cut-out switch .................................................................................................. 131
10.4 MOTO-TRIALS - SIDECAR .............................................................................................. 131
10.4.1 Designs and Dimensions ............................................................................................. 131
10.5 COMPETITION RULES .................................................................................................... 132
10.5.1 General ........................................................................................................................ 132
10.5.2 Courses ....................................................................................................................... 132
10.5.3 Penalties - Competitions.............................................................................................. 133
10.5.4 Minder - Moto-trials ...................................................................................................... 134
10.6 CLASSES AND GRADES ................................................................................................ 134
10.6.1 Classes ........................................................................................................................ 134
10.6.2 Description of Classes ................................................................................................. 135
10.6.3 Grades - Identification.................................................................................................. 135
10.6.4 Identification Plates...................................................................................................... 135
10.6.5 Junior ........................................................................................................................... 135
10.7 CLASSIC TRIALS ............................................................................................................. 136
10.7.1 Eligibility....................................................................................................................... 136
8
11. ENDURO AND RELIABILITY TRIALS.......................................................................................137
11.1 PROTECTIVE CLOTHING................................................................................................137
11.1.1 Helmets, Clothing and Footwear ..................................................................................137
11.1.2 Goggles and Visors ......................................................................................................137
11.2 FRAMES AND PARTS......................................................................................................137
11.2.1 Solo Classes ................................................................................................................137
11.3 FUEL .................................................................................................................................138
11.3.1 Fuel must be:................................................................................................................138
11.4 JUNIOR .............................................................................................................................138
11.4.1 Solo wheel sizes:..........................................................................................................138
11.4.2 Handlebars ...................................................................................................................138
11.5 COMPETITION RULES ....................................................................................................138
11.5.1 Courses ........................................................................................................................138
11.5.2 Entries ..........................................................................................................................139
11.5.3 The Starting Area .........................................................................................................139
11.5.4 Preliminary Examination...............................................................................................140
11.5.5 Starting Order and Numbers ........................................................................................140
11.5.6 Starting Procedures......................................................................................................140
11.5.7 Event Procedures.........................................................................................................141
11.5.8 Restarts ........................................................................................................................141
11.5.9 Time Cards, Route Cards and Itinerary........................................................................141
11.5.10
Maintenance, Repair, Alteration and Refueling.....................................................142
11.5.11
Assistance .............................................................................................................143
11.5.12
Inspection and Marking .........................................................................................143
11.5.13
Timed Tests ..........................................................................................................143
11.5.14
Cross Tests and Enduro Tests..............................................................................143
11.5.15
Final Test...............................................................................................................144
11.5.16
Finish of Event.......................................................................................................144
11.5.17
Penalties................................................................................................................144
11.5.18
Classification .........................................................................................................145
11.5.19
Exclusion from an Event .......................................................................................145
11.5.20
Exclusion for a Day ...............................................................................................146
11.5.21
Explanation of Results...........................................................................................146
12. QUADS .......................................................................................................................................147
12.1 PROTECTIVE CLOTHING................................................................................................147
12.1.1 Helmets, Clothing, Gloves and Footwear.....................................................................147
12.1.2 Goggles and Visors ......................................................................................................147
12.1.3 Junior Clothing .............................................................................................................147
12.1.4 Hair and Jewellery........................................................................................................147
12.2 FRAMES AND PARTS......................................................................................................148
12.2.1 General.........................................................................................................................148
12.3 CLASSES..........................................................................................................................148
12.3.1 Club Level Racing ........................................................................................................148
12.3.2 Stadium Classes ..........................................................................................................149
12.3.3 Tolerances....................................................................................................................149
12.4 FUEL .................................................................................................................................149
12.4.1 Fuel must be:................................................................................................................149
12.5
TYRES...............................................................................................................................149
12.6 COMPETITION RULES ....................................................................................................149
12.6.1 Starting .........................................................................................................................149
12.6.2 Finishing .......................................................................................................................150
12.6.3 Age Groups ..................................................................................................................150
13. HISTORIC ROAD RACING ........................................................................................................151
13.1
AN OVERVIEW .................................................................................................................151
13.2
PROTECTIVE CLOTHING................................................................................................151
9
13.2.1 Helmets, Clothing, Footwear, Gloves and Goggles..................................................... 151
13.2.2 Goggles and Visors ..................................................................................................... 151
13.3 SOLO AND SIDECAR ...................................................................................................... 152
13.3.1 Categories ................................................................................................................... 152
13.3.2 Classes ........................................................................................................................ 152
13.3.3 Eligibility....................................................................................................................... 152
13.3.4 Modification.................................................................................................................. 153
13.3.5 Capacities .................................................................................................................... 153
13.3.6 Noise Control ............................................................................................................... 153
13.3.7 Engine Cut Out Switch................................................................................................. 153
13.4 SOLO - REQUIREMENTS................................................................................................ 153
13.4.1 Periods 1 and 2............................................................................................................ 153
13.4.2 Period 3 ....................................................................................................................... 153
13.4.3 Period 4 ....................................................................................................................... 154
13.4.4 Period 5 ....................................................................................................................... 154
13.5 SOLO - PROHIBITED USES............................................................................................ 154
13.5.1 Periods 1 and 2............................................................................................................ 154
13.5.2 Period 3 ....................................................................................................................... 154
13.5.3 Period 4 ....................................................................................................................... 154
13.5.4 For all periods except period 5:.................................................................................... 154
13.5.5 Period 5 ....................................................................................................................... 155
13.6 SOLO - PERMITTED USES ............................................................................................. 155
13.6.1 Periods 1 and 2............................................................................................................ 155
13.6.2 Period 3 ....................................................................................................................... 155
13.6.3 Period 4 ....................................................................................................................... 155
13.6.4 Period 5 ....................................................................................................................... 155
13.7 SIDECARS AND CYCLECARS- REQUIREMENTS ........................................................ 155
13.7.1 Period 1&2 ................................................................................................................... 155
13.7.2 Period 3 ....................................................................................................................... 156
13.7.3 Period 4 ....................................................................................................................... 156
13.7.4 Period 5 ....................................................................................................................... 156
13.8 SIDECARS AND CYCLECARS. PROHIBITED USES..................................................... 157
13.8.1 Period 3 ....................................................................................................................... 157
13.8.2 Period 4 ....................................................................................................................... 157
13.8.3 Period 5 ....................................................................................................................... 157
13.9 SIDECARS AND CYCLECARS. PERMITTED USES...................................................... 158
13.9.1 Period 3 ....................................................................................................................... 158
13.9.2 Period 4 ....................................................................................................................... 158
13.9.3 Period 5 ....................................................................................................................... 158
13.10 FUEL................................................................................................................................. 158
14. CLASSIC MOTOCROSS ........................................................................................................... 159
14.1 PROTECTIVE CLOTHING ............................................................................................... 159
14.1.1 Helmets, Clothing, Gloves and Footwear .................................................................... 159
14.1.2 Goggles and Visors ..................................................................................................... 159
14.2 ELIGIBILITY ...................................................................................................................... 159
14.2.1 Eligible Machines......................................................................................................... 159
14.2.2 Classes ........................................................................................................................ 159
14.2.3 Age Groups.................................................................................................................. 160
14.2.4 Machine Requirements................................................................................................ 160
14.2.5 Chassis ........................................................................................................................ 161
14.2.6 Modifications ................................................................................................................ 161
14.2.7 Tables of Machines and Components - Pre 1960 ....................................................... 162
14.2.8 1st January 1960 to 31st December 1964..................................................................... 162
14.2.9 Specials - Table of Machines....................................................................................... 163
14.2.10
Table of Acceptable Components Pre 1965 Only ................................................ 164
14.2.11
Table of Machines - 1st January 1965 to 31st December 1969. .......................... 164
10
14.2.12
14.2.13
14.2.14
14.2.15
Table of Machines - 1st January 1970 to 31st December 1974............................164
Pre 78 Classes and Eligibility................................................................................165
Eligibility - Sidecars ...............................................................................................167
Evolution Class .....................................................................................................168
14.3 CLASSIC DIRT TRACK ....................................................................................................168
14.3.1 Eligibility .......................................................................................................................168
14.3.2 Classic Engine Types...................................................................................................169
15. SUPERMOTO.............................................................................................................................170
15.1 PROTECTIVE CLOTHING................................................................................................170
15.1.1 Helmets, Clothing, Gloves and Footwear.....................................................................170
15.1.2 Goggles and Visors ......................................................................................................170
15.2 ENGINES ..........................................................................................................................170
15.2.1 General.........................................................................................................................170
15.2.2 Fuel ..............................................................................................................................171
15.3 FRAMES AND PARTS......................................................................................................171
15.3.1 Tyres.............................................................................................................................171
15.3.2 Rims .............................................................................................................................171
15.3.3 Brakes ..........................................................................................................................171
15.4 CAPACITY CLASSES.......................................................................................................171
15.4.1 Capacities.....................................................................................................................171
15.5 COMPETITION RULES ....................................................................................................172
15.5.1 Starting .........................................................................................................................172
15.5.2 Grid Positions ...............................................................................................................172
15.5.3 Stopping and Re-Running ............................................................................................172
16. CHAMPIONSHIP MEDALLIONS AND TROPHIES...................................................................174
16.1 CHAMPIONSHIP MEDALLIONS.......................................................................................174
16.1.1 Individual Competitions ................................................................................................174
16.1.2 Teams Competitions ....................................................................................................174
16.1.3 All Competitions ...........................................................................................................174
16.2
DUKE OF EDINBURGH TROPHIES ................................................................................174
17. AUSTRALIAN FOUR DAY ENDURO ........................................................................................175
17.1 AUSTRALIAN ENDURO CHAMPIONSHIPS:...................................................................175
17.1.1 Description of A4DE .....................................................................................................175
17.1.2 Solo Classes ................................................................................................................175
17.1.3 Change of Machine ......................................................................................................175
17.1.4 Eligibility .......................................................................................................................175
17.1.5 Cancellation..................................................................................................................176
17.2 THE COURSE...................................................................................................................176
17.2.1 Requirements ...............................................................................................................176
17.2.2 Completion of Course...................................................................................................176
17.2.3 Tests.............................................................................................................................176
17.3 PRELIMINARY EXAMINATION.........................................................................................177
17.3.1 Marking of Parts ...........................................................................................................177
17.4 PUBLICATION OF RESULTS...........................................................................................177
17.4.1 Requirements ...............................................................................................................177
17.5 A4DE AWARDS: ...............................................................................................................177
17.5.1 The Challenge Trophy.................................................................................................177
17.5.2 The Junior Trophy ........................................................................................................178
17.5.3 The Club Team Awards ...............................................................................................178
17.5.4 The Motorcycle Trade Team Awards ...........................................................................178
17.5.5 The Individual Riders Medals .......................................................................................178
18. AUSTRALIAN ROAD RACE CHAMPIONSHIPS ......................................................................179
18.1 SHELL ADVANCE AUSTRALIAN SUPERBIKE CHAMPIONSHIP ..................................179
18.1.1 Allocation of Numbers ..................................................................................................179
11
18.1.2
18.1.3
18.1.4
18.1.5
18.1.6
18.1.7
Starting ........................................................................................................................ 179
Restriction on Tyres ..................................................................................................... 179
SAASC Points ............................................................................................................. 179
Ties 179
SAASC Race Distances .............................................................................................. 179
Delivery of Machines for eligibility scrutineering .......................................................... 179
18.2 AUSTRALIAN HISTORIC ROAD RACE CHAMPIONSHIPS ........................................... 179
18.2.1 Format ......................................................................................................................... 179
18.2.2 Log Books.................................................................................................................... 179
19. AUSTRALIAN MOTOCROSS AND SUPERCROSS CHAMPIONSHIPS................................. 180
19.1 AUSTRALIAN PRO-LITE & PRO-OPEN MOTOCROSS CHAMPIONSHIPS.................. 180
19.1.1 Classes ........................................................................................................................ 180
19.1.2 Format ......................................................................................................................... 180
19.1.3 Practice and Qualifying................................................................................................ 180
19.1.4 The Event .................................................................................................................... 180
19.1.5 Numbers ...................................................................................................................... 180
19.1.6 Scoring for Each Race................................................................................................. 181
19.2 AUSTRALIAN JUNIOR MOTOCROSS CHAMPIONSHIPS............................................. 181
19.2.1 Format ......................................................................................................................... 181
19.2.2 Venues......................................................................................................................... 181
19.2.3 Eligibility....................................................................................................................... 181
19.3 AUSTRALIAN SUPERCROSS CHAMPIONSHIP ............................................................ 181
19.3.1 Classes ........................................................................................................................ 181
19.3.2 Format ......................................................................................................................... 181
19.3.3 Qualifying ..................................................................................................................... 181
19.3.4 Grid Positions .............................................................................................................. 182
19.3.5 Support Events ............................................................................................................ 182
19.3.6 Awards......................................................................................................................... 182
19.3.7 Practice........................................................................................................................ 182
19.3.8 Points........................................................................................................................... 182
19.3.9 Numbers ...................................................................................................................... 182
20. AUSTRALIAN DIRT TRACK CHAMPIONSHIPS...................................................................... 184
20.1 FORMATS ........................................................................................................................ 184
20.1.1 Solo Format for more than 12 entries per class........................................................... 184
20.1.2 Qualifying ..................................................................................................................... 184
20.1.3 Heats and Final............................................................................................................ 184
20.1.4 Solo Format for less than 12 entries per class ............................................................ 184
20.1.5 Sidecar Format for more than Six entries per class..................................................... 184
20.1.6 Heats and Final............................................................................................................ 184
20.1.7 Sidecar Format for Six entries or Fewer per class....................................................... 185
20.2 SCORING ......................................................................................................................... 185
20.2.1 Scoring......................................................................................................................... 185
20.3
PREFERRED CHAMPIONSHIPS DATES ....................................................................... 185
20.4 AUSTRALIAN JUNIOR DIRT TRACK CHAMPIONSHIPS............................................... 185
20.4.1 Solo Format for more than 12 entries per class........................................................... 185
20.4.2 Heats and Final............................................................................................................ 185
20.4.3 Solo Format for less than 12 entries per class ............................................................ 185
20.4.4 Sidecar Format for more than 6 entries per class........................................................ 185
20.4.5 Heats and Final............................................................................................................ 185
20.4.6 Sidecar Format for less than 6 entries per class ......................................................... 185
20.5 JUNIOR FORMAT ............................................................................................................ 185
20.5.1 Scoring......................................................................................................................... 185
20.5.2 Race Distance ............................................................................................................. 186
20.5.3 Venues......................................................................................................................... 186
12
21. SPEEDWAY CHAMPIONSHIPS................................................................................................187
21.1 WORLD SOLO CHAMPIONSHIPS...................................................................................187
21.1.1 Eligibility and Qualifying................................................................................................187
21.2 AUSTRALIAN CHAMPIONSHIPS.....................................................................................187
21.2.1 Applications to Conduct................................................................................................187
21.2.2 Dates for Conduct ........................................................................................................187
21.2.3 Selection Committee ....................................................................................................187
21.2.4 Selection and Qualification...........................................................................................187
21.2.5 Alternate Qualification ..................................................................................................187
21.2.6 Practice ........................................................................................................................188
21.2.7 21 Race Format............................................................................................................188
21.2.8 12 Race Format............................................................................................................189
21.2.9 Examination before an Event .......................................................................................189
21.2.10
Carburettor Examination .......................................................................................190
21.3 AUSTRALIAN TEAMS CHAMPIONSHIPS .......................................................................190
21.3.1 Qualifying......................................................................................................................190
21.3.2 Practice ........................................................................................................................190
21.3.3 14 Heat Format - Teams ..............................................................................................191
21.3.4 Ties ..............................................................................................................................192
21.3.5 Finals............................................................................................................................192
21.4 TEST MATCHES...............................................................................................................192
21.4.1 Definition ......................................................................................................................192
21.4.2 Format ..........................................................................................................................192
21.4.3 Bonus Points ................................................................................................................193
21.4.4 Starting Positions .........................................................................................................193
21.4.5 Reserves ......................................................................................................................193
22. AUSTRALIAN TRACK CHAMPIONSHIPS................................................................................194
22.1 AUSTRALIAN JUNIOR LONG TRACK CHAMPIONSHIPS .............................................194
22.1.1 Solo Format for more than 12 entries per class ...........................................................194
22.1.2 Heats and Final ............................................................................................................194
22.1.3 Solo Format for less than 12 entries per class .............................................................194
22.1.4 Sidecar Format for more than 6 entries per class ........................................................194
22.1.5 Heats and Final ............................................................................................................194
22.1.6 Sidecar Format for less than 6 entries per class ..........................................................194
22.2 FORMAT ...........................................................................................................................194
22.2.1 Scoring .........................................................................................................................194
22.2.2 Race Distance ..............................................................................................................194
22.2.3 Venues .........................................................................................................................194
23. AUSTRALIAN MOTO-TRIALS CHAMPIONSHIPS ...................................................................195
23.1 AUSTRALIAN MOTO-TRIALS CHAMPIONSHIPS...........................................................195
23.1.1 Use of Course ..............................................................................................................195
23.1.2 Time of Event ...............................................................................................................195
23.1.3 Standards .....................................................................................................................195
23.1.4 Handicap ......................................................................................................................195
24. INTERNATIONAL EVENTS .......................................................................................................196
24.1 NATIONAL TEAMS SELECTION POLICY .......................................................................196
24.1.1 Objectives.....................................................................................................................196
24.1.2 Process of Selection.....................................................................................................196
24.1.3 General Selection Policy ..............................................................................................196
24.1.4 Other Criteria................................................................................................................196
24.1.5 Appeals ........................................................................................................................197
24.1.6 Injuries/Misadventure ...................................................................................................197
24.1.7 Removal from National Squad .....................................................................................197
25. RELEVANT FIM REGULATIONS ..............................................................................................198
25.1
APPROVAL LABELS FOR HELMETS..............................................................................198
13
26. RELEVANT CONTROLLING BODY ......................................................................................... 199
26.1 MA EVENTS ..................................................................................................................... 199
26.1.1 Events for which MA is the RCB.................................................................................. 199
26.2 PROTOCOLS ................................................................................................................... 199
26.2.1 Protocols for MA Series Events and International Meetings........................................ 199
26.2.2 Protocols for Australian Championships Not Forming a Series................................... 199
26.2.3 SR and Entry Forms .................................................................................................... 200
26.2.4 Protest Fees, Licence Declaration Fees and Fines ..................................................... 200
26.2.5 Venues......................................................................................................................... 200
27. MEMBER PROTECTION REGULATION.................................................................................. 201
27.1 MEMBER PROTECTION REGULATION ......................................................................... 201
27.1.1 Policy Availability ......................................................................................................... 201
27.2 CODE OF CONDUCT ...................................................................................................... 201
27.2.1 Background.................................................................................................................. 201
27.2.2 Competitors ................................................................................................................. 201
27.2.3 Officials ........................................................................................................................ 201
27.2.4 Parent/Guardian .......................................................................................................... 201
27.2.5 Coaches....................................................................................................................... 202
27.2.6 Spectators.................................................................................................................... 202
28. MOTORCYCLING AUSTRALIA’ S ANTI-DOPING POLICY .................................................... 203
28.1
WHAT IS MA'S POSITION ON DOPING? ....................................................................... 203
28.2
WHO DOES THIS POLICY APPLY TO?.......................................................................... 203
28.3 OBLIGATIONS.................................................................................................................. 203
28.3.1 Standards .................................................................................................................... 203
28.3.2 Roles and responsibilities – Riders:............................................................................. 203
28.3.3 Roles and responsibilities – Rider Support Personnel must:....................................... 203
28.3.4 Roles and responsibilities – National Anti-Doping Organisations (including ASC
and ASDA) must:.................................................................................................. 204
28.3.5 Roles and responsibilities – MA must:......................................................................... 204
28.4
DEFINITION OF DOPING ................................................................................................ 204
28.5 ANTI-DOPING RULE VIOLATIONS ................................................................................. 204
28.5.1 The presence of a Prohibited Substance or its Metabolites or Markers in a Rider's
bodily Specimen.................................................................................................... 204
28.5.2 Use or Attempted Use of a Prohibited Substance or a Prohibited Method.................. 205
28.5.3 Refusing....................................................................................................................... 205
28.5.4 Violation of the requirements regarding Rider availability............................................ 205
28.5.5 Tampering or Attempting to tamper, with any part of Doping Control.......................... 205
28.5.6 Possession of Prohibited Substances and Methods..................................................... 205
28.5.7 Trafficking in any Prohibited Substance or Prohibited Method. .................................... 205
28.5.8 Violation of the requirements regarding Rider availability............................................ 205
28.6 PROOF OF DOPING ........................................................................................................ 205
28.6.1 Burdens and Standards of Proof. ................................................................................ 205
28.6.2 Methods of Establishing Facts and Presumptions....................................................... 206
28.7 THE PROHIBITED LIST ................................................................................................... 206
28.7.1 Incorporation of the Prohibited List. ............................................................................. 206
28.7.2 Prohibited Substances and Prohibited Methods Identified on the Prohibited List. ......... 206
28.7.3 Criteria for Including Substances and Methods on the Prohibited L i s t . ..................... 206
28.7.4 Therapeutic Use. ......................................................................................................... 206
28.8 TESTING .......................................................................................................................... 207
28.8.1 Authority to Test........................................................................................................... 207
28.8.2 Responsibility for FIM Testing...................................................................................... 207
28.8.3 Testing Standards ........................................................................................................ 207
28.8.4 Coordination of Testing................................................................................................ 207
28.8.5 Rider Whereabouts Requirements .............................................................................. 207
28.8.6 Retirement and Return to Competition. ....................................................................... 208
14
28.8.7 Selection of Riders to be tested. ..................................................................................209
28.9 ANALYSIS OF SAMPLES.................................................................................................209
28.9.1 Use of Approved Laboratories......................................................................................209
28.9.2 Substances Subject to Detection. ..................................................................................209
28.9.3 Research on Samples...................................................................................................209
28.9.4 Standards for Sample Analysis and Reporting Riders. ................................................209
28.10 RESULTS MANAGEMENT ...............................................................................................209
28.10.1
Notification of an Alleged Anti-Doping Rule Violation. ..........................................210
28.10.2
The ADCO will:......................................................................................................210
28.10.3
The ADCO will refer the matter to a hearing in accordance with Rule 28.11........210
28.10.4
The ADCO may decide not to refer the matter to hearing if the Person in
writing: ...................................................................................................................210
28.10.5
Provisional Suspensions. ......................................................................................210
28.11 RIGHT TO A FAIR HEARING ...........................................................................................211
28.11.1
Principles of a Fair Hearing ...................................................................................211
28.11.2
ADCO Waiting Period ...........................................................................................211
28.11.3
The hearing body or the CAS will determine:........................................................211
28.11.4
The hearing body will give the ADCO a written statement of: ...............................211
28.11.5
Reporting...............................................................................................................211
28.11.6
Hearings ................................................................................................................211
28.11.7
Attendance Rights .................................................................................................212
28.11.8
Decisions...............................................................................................................212
28.11.9
Hearing decisions..................................................................................................212
28.11.10 International Meetings..............................................................................................212
28.12 AUTOMATIC DISQUALIFICATION OF INDIVIDUAL RESULTS......................................212
28.13 SANCTIONS ON INDIVIDUALS .......................................................................................212
28.13.1
Disqualification of Results in Event During which an Anti-Doping Rule Violation
Occurs. ..................................................................................................................212
28.13.2
Imposition of Suspension for Prohibited Substances and Prohibited Methods. .....212
28.13.3
Specified Substances............................................................................................212
28.13.4
Optional Sanction ..................................................................................................213
28.13.5
Suspension for Other Anti-Doping Rule Violations. ..............................................213
28.13.6
The period of Suspension for other violations of these Anti-Doping Rules shall
be: .........................................................................................................................213
28.13.7
Elimination or Reduction of Period of Suspension Based on Exceptional
Circumstances. .....................................................................................................213
28.13.8
Rules for Certain Potential Multiple Violations. .....................................................214
28.13.9
Disqualification of Results in Meetings Subsequent to Sample Collection. ..............214
28.13.10 Commencement of Suspension Period. ................................................................215
28.13.11 Status During Suspension.....................................................................................215
28.13.12 Reinstatement T e s t i n g . .....................................................................................215
28.14 CONSEQUENCES TO TEAM...........................................................................................215
28.14.1
Teams.....................................................................................................................215
28.15 REVIEW OF A FINDING OF AN ANTI-DOPING RULE VIOLATION OR A SANCTION..216
28.15.1
Review...................................................................................................................216
28.15.2
The Application Must:............................................................................................216
28.15.3
Application Consideration .....................................................................................216
28.15.4
Application of Rules ..............................................................................................216
28.15.5
Sanction ................................................................................................................216
28.15.6
The ADCO must inform:........................................................................................216
28.16 APPEALS ..........................................................................................................................216
28.16.1
Decisions Subject to Appeal. ................................................................................216
28.16.2
Appeals from Decisions Regarding Anti-Doping Rule Violations, Consequences,
and Provisional Suspensions..................................................................................216
28.16.3
Appeals from Decisions Granting or Denying a Therapeutic Use Exemption.......217
28.16.4
Time for Filing Appeals. ........................................................................................218
15
28.17 CONFIDENTIALITY AND REPORTING........................................................................... 218
28.17.1
Incorporation of the FIM Code. ............................................................................. 218
28.17.2
Statistical Reporting.............................................................................................. 218
28.17.3
Recognition of Decisions by the FIM and other FMNs ......................................... 218
28.17.4
Incorporation of Relevant Anti-Doping Rules........................................................ 218
28.17.5
Public Disclosure. ................................................................................................. 218
28.18 RECOGNITION OF DECISIONS BY OTHER ORGANISATIONS ................................... 218
28.18.1
The FIM. ............................................................................................................... 218
28.18.2
Another organisation recognised by the ASC,...................................................... 218
28.19 STATUTE OF LIMITATIONS............................................................................................ 218
28.20 AMENDMENT AND INTERPRETATION OF ANTI-DOPING RULES.............................. 219
28.20.1
Amendments and Interpretations.......................................................................... 219
28.21 APPENDIX 1 – DEFINITIONS .......................................................................................... 219
28.22 APPENDIX 2 – ACKNOWLEDGEMENT AND AGREEMENT ......................................... 222
28.23 APPENDIX 3 – THE 2005 INTERNATIONAL STANDARDS – PROHIBITED LIST ....... 223
28.24 APPENDIX 4 – PROCEDURE FOR ALCOHOL BREATH TESTING .............................. 223
28.24.1
Overview............................................................................................................... 223
28.24.2
Notification to Competitors or Officials ................................................................. 223
28.24.3
Requirements of Competitors or Officials............................................................. 223
28.24.4
Requirements for Testing ..................................................................................... 223
28.24.5
Procedure for Testing ........................................................................................... 223
28.24.6
Procedure for Processing a “Double Positive” Result .......................................... 224
28.24.7
Procedure following a report of a “Double Positive” Result .................................. 224
28.24.8
Report by Testing Official ..................................................................................... 224
28.25 APPENDIX 5 – ALCOHOL BLOOD TESTING ................................................................. 224
28.25.1
Alcohol Blood Testing........................................................................................... 224
29. RECREATIONAL MOTORCYCLE ACTIVITY........................................................................... 225
29.1 THE BY LAWS ................................................................................................................. 225
29.1.1 Purpose of By-laws ...................................................................................................... 225
29.2 THE CONTROLLING BODIES ......................................................................................... 225
29.2.1 Administration of By laws............................................................................................. 225
29.3 OFFICIALS........................................................................................................................ 225
29.3.1 The Licensing and Powers of Officials......................................................................... 225
29.4
VENUES ........................................................................................................................... 225
29.5 THE PROMOTION AND CONDUCT OF RECREATIONAL ACTIVITY ........................... 225
29.5.1 Authority to Promote .................................................................................................... 225
29.6
RECREATIONAL PERMITS............................................................................................. 225
29.7
RECREATIONAL ACTIVITY............................................................................................. 226
29.8
ENTRIES .......................................................................................................................... 226
29.9
LICENSING OF PARTICIPANTS ..................................................................................... 226
30. MINIKHANA ............................................................................................................................... 228
30.1
INTRODUCTION .............................................................................................................. 228
30.2 PROTECTIVE CLOTHING ............................................................................................... 228
30.2.1 Helmets, Clothing, Gloves and Footwear .................................................................... 228
30.2.2 Goggles and Visors ..................................................................................................... 228
30.2.3 Hair and Jewellery ....................................................................................................... 228
30.3
ENGINES.......................................................................................................................... 229
30.4
FRAMES AND PARTS ..................................................................................................... 229
30.5 COMPETITION RULES .................................................................................................... 229
30.5.1 Age Groups.................................................................................................................. 229
30.5.2 Grading ........................................................................................................................ 229
30.5.3 Scoring......................................................................................................................... 230
30.5.4 Number Plates ............................................................................................................. 230
16
30.6 GENERAL EVENT RULES ...............................................................................................231
30.6.1 Starting Procedure .......................................................................................................231
30.6.2 Fault .............................................................................................................................232
30.6.3 Flags and Signals.........................................................................................................232
30.7 COURSES.........................................................................................................................232
30.7.1 Witch’s Hats .................................................................................................................232
30.7.2 Basic Course ................................................................................................................232
30.8 ORANGE ...........................................................................................................................233
30.8.1 Course..........................................................................................................................233
30.8.2 Procedure.....................................................................................................................233
30.8.3 Elimination....................................................................................................................233
30.9 LOOPING ..........................................................................................................................234
30.9.1 Course and Procedure .................................................................................................234
30.10 RING RETURN .................................................................................................................235
30.10.1
Course...................................................................................................................235
30.10.2
Procedure..............................................................................................................235
30.10.3
Elimination.............................................................................................................235
30.11 BENDING ..........................................................................................................................236
30.11.1
Course...................................................................................................................236
30.11.2
Procedure..............................................................................................................236
30.11.3
Elimination.............................................................................................................236
30.12 RING BENDING ................................................................................................................237
30.12.1
Course...................................................................................................................237
30.12.2
Procedure..............................................................................................................237
30.12.3
Elimination.............................................................................................................237
30.13 SLOW ................................................................................................................................238
30.13.1
Course...................................................................................................................238
30.13.2
Procedure..............................................................................................................238
30.13.3
Elimination.............................................................................................................238
30.14 CLOVER............................................................................................................................239
30.14.1
Course...................................................................................................................239
30.14.2
Procedure..............................................................................................................239
30.14.3
Elimination.............................................................................................................239
30.15 NO FOOTING CLOVER....................................................................................................240
30.15.1
Course and Procedure ..........................................................................................240
30.16 START AND PARK ...........................................................................................................240
30.16.1
Course...................................................................................................................240
30.16.2
Procedure..............................................................................................................240
30.16.3
Elimination.............................................................................................................240
30.17 O RING RELAY .................................................................................................................241
30.17.1
Course and Procedure ..........................................................................................241
30.18 MINICROSS ......................................................................................................................242
30.18.1
Course...................................................................................................................242
30.18.2
Procedure..............................................................................................................242
30.18.3
Practice .................................................................................................................242
30.18.4
Elimination.............................................................................................................242
30.18.5
Footing and No Footing Minicross.........................................................................242
30.19 MINI TRIALS......................................................................................................................243
30.19.1
Course...................................................................................................................243
30.19.2
Procedure..............................................................................................................243
30.19.3
Failure ...................................................................................................................243
30.19.4
Footing ..................................................................................................................243
30.19.5
Marking..................................................................................................................243
30.20 MINI ENDURO ..................................................................................................................243
30.20.1
Course and Procedure ..........................................................................................243
17
30.21 HILL CLIMB....................................................................................................................... 244
30.21.1
Course and Procedure.......................................................................................... 244
30.22 ACCELERATION AND BRAKING.................................................................................... 244
30.22.1
Course and Procedure.......................................................................................... 244
30.22.2
Penalties ............................................................................................................... 244
31. ALTERNATIVE FORMS OF COMPETITION ............................................................................ 245
31.1 INTRODUCTION .............................................................................................................. 245
31.1.1 Activities....................................................................................................................... 245
31.2 THE CONTROLLING BODIES ......................................................................................... 245
31.2.1 Administration of By Laws ........................................................................................... 245
31.3 OFFICIALS........................................................................................................................ 245
31.3.1 The Licensing and Powers of Officials......................................................................... 245
31.4 VENUES ........................................................................................................................... 245
31.4.1 Venue Licensing .......................................................................................................... 245
31.5 PERMITS .......................................................................................................................... 245
31.5.1 Permit Applications ...................................................................................................... 245
31.6 SUPPLEMENTARY REGULATIONS ............................................................................... 245
31.6.1 Competition Details...................................................................................................... 245
31.7 COMPETITORS................................................................................................................ 246
31.7.1 Licensing of Competitors ............................................................................................. 246
31.8 MACHINES ....................................................................................................................... 246
31.8.1 Technical Specifications .............................................................................................. 246
32. JUDICIAL COMMITTEE GUIDELINES ..................................................................................... 247
32.1 MA HEARING GUIDELINES ............................................................................................ 247
32.1.1 Guidelines on the Conduct of Hearings ....................................................................... 247
33. MODEL SUPPLEMENTARY REGULATIONS.......................................................................... 249
33.1.1 Announcement and Jurisdiction................................................................................... 249
33.1.2 Entries.......................................................................................................................... 249
33.1.3 Awards......................................................................................................................... 249
33.1.4 Officials ........................................................................................................................ 249
33.1.5 Description - Reliability Trials ...................................................................................... 249
33.1.6 Description - Speed Meetings...................................................................................... 250
34. SPORTING COMMISSIONS AND COMMITTEES OF MA....................................................... 251
34.1 BACKGROUND: ............................................................................................................... 251
34.1.1 Creation of Commissions ............................................................................................ 251
34.1.2 Structure of the Sporting Commissions: ...................................................................... 251
34.1.3 Structure of the Standing Committees and Special Sub-Committees......................... 251
34.1.4 Objectives of the Sporting Commissions..................................................................... 252
34.1.5 Terms of Reference of the Sporting Commissions...................................................... 252
34.1.6 Responsibilities of the Sporting Commissions............................................................. 252
34.1.7 Meetings of the Sporting Commissions ....................................................................... 252
34.1.8 Casual Vacancies ........................................................................................................ 253
34.1.9 Powers of the Sporting Commissions.......................................................................... 253
34.1.10
Procedure for Consideration of Items by Commission. ........................................ 253
35. NATIONAL COACHING ACCREDITATION SCHEME ............................................................. 254
35.1 BACKGROUND: ............................................................................................................... 254
35.1.1 Establishment .............................................................................................................. 254
35.1.2 Levels of Accreditation................................................................................................. 254
35.1.3 Details of Level One Coaching Accreditation .............................................................. 254
35.1.4 Details of Level Two Coaching Accreditation .............................................................. 254
35.1.5 Details of Level Three Coaching Accreditation............................................................ 254
35.1.6 Coaching Workshops .................................................................................................. 255
36. NATIONAL OFFICIALS’ ACCREDITATION SCHEME............................................................. 256
36.1
BACKGROUND ................................................................................................................ 256
18
36.1.1 Establishment...............................................................................................................256
36.2 LEVELS OF ACCREDITATION ........................................................................................256
36.2.1 Level O - Basic "Orientation" Level ..............................................................................256
36.2.2 Level 1 - Club Level......................................................................................................256
36.2.3 Level 2 - Inter Club/Zone Level ....................................................................................256
36.2.4 Level 3 - National Event/State Championship Level ....................................................256
36.2.5 Level 4 - National Championship Level........................................................................257
36.2.6 International (FIM) Accreditation ..................................................................................257
36.3
LICENSING: ......................................................................................................................257
36.4
NATIONAL OFFICIALS SUB-COMMITTEE GUIDELINES:..............................................257
36.5
STATE OFFICIALS' REVIEW PANEL GUIDELINES: ......................................................257
37. NATIONAL PERSONAL ACCIDENT INSURANCE OUTLINE .................................................259
37.1.1 Covering .......................................................................................................................259
37.1.2 Situation - Anywhere in Australia .................................................................................259
37.1.3 Capital Benefits ............................................................................................................259
37.1.4 Weekly Benefits ...........................................................................................................260
37.1.5 Parents’ Inconvenience Allowance...............................................................................260
37.1.6 Weekly Benefits Excess - 30 days. ..............................................................................260
37.1.7 Weekly Benefit Period - One Hundred and Four (104) weeks maximum. ...................260
37.2 DEFINITIONS....................................................................................................................260
37.2.1 Home Help Weekly Benefit ..........................................................................................260
37.2.2 Student Tutorial Weekly Benefit...................................................................................260
37.2.3 Parents’ Inconvenience Allowance...............................................................................261
37.2.4 Total Disablement ........................................................................................................261
38. FEES...........................................................................................................................................262
39. TRACK INFORMATION/LAP RECORDS..................................................................................263
19
OFFICE BEARERS
MOTORCYCLING AUSTRALIA
Chief Executive Officer
General Manager
Commissions & Committees Manager
Sport & Development Manager
Media Manager
Road Riding Manager
Office Manager
Administration Officers
Admin/Reception
Address
Postal
Phone
Fax
Email
Web
David White
Brian-R Payne
Ross Martin
Daniel Hutchinson
Mark Fattore
Dan Rotman
Jamie Nind
Kate Edwards, Sian Smith (part-time)
Narelle Smith
147 Montague Street
South Melbourne
Vic 3205.
PO Box 134
South Melbourne
Vic 3205.
+61 (03) 9684 0500
+61 (03) 9684 0555
mail@ma.org.au
www.ma.org.au
OFFICE BEARERS OF MOTORCYCLING AUSTRALIA
President
Vice President
Patron
Auditor
National Director of Coaching
Ron Kivovitch
John Thomson
Tony Street
Terrence Jasper & Associates
Stephen Gall
Councillors:
New South Wales
Queensland
South Australia
Tasmania
Victoria
Western Australia
Northern Territory
Board of Directors:
Kevin McDonald
Ray Jonkers
Stephen Foody
Peter Kitto
Darryl Hiddle
Les Thomas
Ian Jordan
Ron Kivovitch (President)
John Thomson (Vice President)
Brendon Gledhill
Jim Scaysbrook
Kevin Magee
Beach Thomas
David White (Chief Executive Officer)
Commissions: (Convenor - bolded)
Enduro
Historic Road Racing
Classic Motocross
Junior Sport &
Development
Motocross/Supercross
Road Racing
Speedway/Track
Dirt Track
Trials
Tim Shearer (2005), Collin Jennings (2006), Doug Lees (2007)
David Morgan (2005), Allan Kidd (2006), Keith Roberts (2007)
Brian Clarke (2005), David Tanner (2006), Ray Atkins (2007)
John Tisdale (2005), Kerrie O’Halloran (2006), Lorraine Heidke (2007)
Rob Twyerould (2005), Gary Benn (2006), Kevin Mortimer (2007)
Phil Tainton (2005), David Noice (2006), Mark Bracks (2007)
Ivan Golding (2005), Rodney Colquhoun (2005), Neil Gould (2006)
Barry Collyer (2005), Kevin McDonald (2006), Melissa Diffey (2007)
Chris Leighfield (2005),TBA, Jan Finlayson (2007)
20
OFFICE BEARERS
The members of the Committees are as follows:
Finance
Shaun Lennard
(Chairman)
International
Darryl Hiddle
(Chairman)
Policy & Planning Board of Directors
Volunteers
Kevin McDonald
(Chairman)
Coaching
Les Thomas
(Chairman)
Officials
Andrew Graham
(Chairman)
Rules
Ian Jordan
(Chairman)
Medical / Safety Ivan Golding
(Chairman)
Judicial Legal Members
Richard Lawson
(President)
Motorcycle
Ross Earl
Member
Environment
Darryl Hiddle
TBA
TBA
John Thomson
David White
Ray Le Nevez
Chris Baker
Ian Willis
Rod Jenner
Lorraine Bunt
Peter Bell
Robert Madden
TBA
Geoff Lanigan
Lyal Allen
Ray Le Nevez
John Urquhart
Dale Wyatt
Ralph Freeman
Andrew Graham
Dan Seketa
21
Peter Sparshott
Darral Holman
AFFILIATED STATE CONTROLLING BODIES
MOTORCYCLING NEW SOUTH WALES
Chief
Executive
Officer
President
Address
Postal
Phone
Fax
Email
Web
MOTORCYCLING AUSTRALIA SOUTH
AUSTRALIA
ROB MADDEN
General
Manager
President
Address
CHRISTINE TICKNER
67 High Street, Harris Park
NSW 2150
PO Box 9172, Harris Park
NSW 2150
+61 (02) 9635 9177
+61 (02) 9635 5277
mnsw@motorcycling.com.au
http://www.motorcycling.com.au
Phone
Fax
Email
Web
DEE McLEAN
STEVE FOODY
251 The Parade, Beulah Park
SA 5067
+61 (08) 8332 9000
+61 (08) 8332 9100
administration@motorcyclingsa.org.au
http://www.motorcyclingsa.org.au
MOTORCYCLING AUSTRALIA VICTORIA
MOTORCYCLING TASMANIA (MTAS)
General
Manager
President
Address
Administrator
President
Postal
Phone
Fax
E-mail
Web
Postal
Phone
Fax
Email
Web
PETER WRIGHT
DARRYL HIDDLE
10 Hilton Street, Clifton Hill, Vic
3068
PO Box 414, Clifton Hill, Vic 3068
+61 (03) 9482 5422
+61 (03) 9482 5488
motorvic@motorcyclingvic.com.au
http://www.motorcyclingvic.com.au
MOTORCYCLING AUSTRALIA
NORTHERN TERRITORY
MOTORCYCLING AUSTRALIA
QUEENSLAND
Manager
Postal
General
Manager
President
Address
Phone
Fax
E-mail
Postal
Phone
Fax
Email
Web
LINDSAY GRANGER
RAY JONKERS
Tivoli Raceway, Coal Road,
North Ipswich, Qld 4305
PO Box 2072, North Ipswich,
Qld 4305
+61 (07) 3281 2255
+61 (07) 3812 2742
info@mqld.org.au
www.mqld.org.au
MOTORCYCLING AUSTRALIA WESTERN
AUSTRALIA
Executive
Director
President
Address
Phone
Fax
Email
Web
FRED BESSELL
PETER KITTO
PO Box 270, Latrobe, Tas 7307
+61 (03) 6228 2400
+61 (03) 6228 0855
mtas@southcom.com.au
http://www.mtas.org.au
RICK GILL
LES THOMAS
Suite 25/168, Guildford Road,
Maylands, WA 6051
+61 (08) 9371 5333
+61 (08) 9371 5311
mail@motorcyclingwa.org.au
www.motorcyclingwa.org.au
22
IAN JORDAN
PO Box 154, Howard Springs
NT 0835
+61 (08) 8983 2200
+61 (08) 8983 2200
mant@bigpond.com.au
HISTORY OF MOTORCYCLING AUSTRALIA
A full-time National Development Officer
was appointed in early 1993, reflecting the
growth of the sport and the organisation’s
commitment to support and encourage that
growth. At the 1993 annual conference,
there was an overwhelming vote in favour
of change for the long-term benefit of the
sport, including plans for restructuring the
organisation.
In 1928, the Auto Cycle Council of Australia
(ACCA) was formed to represent the
interests of motorcycle clubs and state
associations at a national level. The ACCA
would eventually become Motorcycling
Australia, the representative body for
motorcycle racing in this country.
But organised motorcycle sport was
established many years before the ACCA.
Speedway racing was the first form of
competition to be organised in a
professional manner. The late John
Hoskins was credited with presenting
speedway to the world, when he conducted
his first meetings at the West Maitland
Showgrounds (NSW) in 1923. His efforts
laid the foundation for future Australian
successes in the world championship.
The following year, at the annual
conference, the council approved a
restructuring of the organisation. National
commissions
were
established
and
commissioners appointed for each branch
of
the
sport.
Each
three-person
commission was responsible for rule
changes and the national development of
its discipline.
Special sub-committees,
responsible for the business aspect of the
sport, were also established. In 1998, the
Northern Territory was formally admitted as
a member.
National conferences were biennial affairs
until 1972, before becoming annual from
1973. Delegates from each State
Controlling Body (SCB) participated at the
conferences. These high-level gatherings
had the primary purpose of updating the
General Competition Rules (GCRs) and
determining future directions of the sport.
At the 2000 annual conference in Hobart, a
new constitution was adopted which
empowered the independent board of
directors. Councillors were reduced to one
from each state. In the same year a
Motorsport Manager was appointed to
administer Australian championships. That
role would eventually become that of Sport
and Development Manager, merging the
duties of National Development Officer and
Motorsport Manager into one role. In 2001,
Motorcycling Australia appointed a Media
Manager and in late 2002, a new role of
General Manager was created, replacing
that of Operations Manager.
In 1975, the then ACCA moved into the
international sphere by affiliating with the
Federation Internationale de Motocyclisme
(FIM).
By the 1980s, sport was no longer an
amateur business and it was unfeasible to
operate in the traditional way. In 1989, the
ACCA established a permanent office in
Melbourne,
staffed
by
a
full-time
administrator and assistant. By 1991, a
new full-time National Executive Director
was appointed, replacing the administrator.
It was clear that the organisation had to
change with the times and provide the
professionalism demanded by modern
sport.
Today, the organisation has in excess of
21,000 competitors, more than 350
affiliated clubs, and over 3000 registered
officials.
Motorcycling Australia will continue to serve
its members and the motorcycle sport
community, to ensure the healthy future of
motorcycle sport.ddddddddddddddddddddd
Subsequently, in late 1992, the name
“Motorcycling Australia” replaced ACCA, to
reflect a more modern and progressive
image, and to ensure easy identification
with motorcycling sport. A new logo was
introduced at the same time, to match the
improved image.
23
2004 AUSTRALIAN CHAMPIONS
WORLD CHAMPIONSHIP RESULTS
1936
1938
1951-52
1957
1961
1969
1979/81
1983
1987
1992
1994-98
1995
1996
1997
1997
2000
2000
2001
2001
2001
2001
2002
2003
2003
2003
2004
2004
2004
Lionel Van Praag
Bluey Wilkinson
Jack Young
Keith Campbell
Tom Phillis
Kel Carruthers
Barry Smith
Steve Baker
Wayne Gardner
Leigh Adams
Michael Doohan
Jason Crump
Troy Corser
Shane Watts
Peter Goddard
Stefan Merriman
Warwick Nowland
Troy Bayliss
Andrew Pitt
Heinz Platacis
Stefan Merriman
Warwick Nowland
Stefan Merriman
Chad Reed
Chris Vermeulen
Karl Muggeridge
Stefan Merriman
Jason Crump
Speedway
Speedway
Speedway
Road racing (350cc)
Road racing (125cc)
Road racing (250cc)
Road racing (Formula TT)
Speedway (under 21)
Road racing (500cc)
Speedway (under 21)
Road racing (500cc)
Speedway (under 21)
Road racing (Superbikes)
Enduro (125cc)
Road racing (Endurance)
Enduro (250cc)
Road racing (Endurance)
Road racing (Superbikes)
Road racing (Supersport)
Road racing (Endurance)
Enduro (400cc)
Road racing (Endurance)
Enduro (250cc)
Supercross (250cc)
Road racing (Supersport)
Road racing (Supersport)
Enduro E1 (125cc 2T v 250 4T)
Speedway
SECOND PLACE WORLD RANKINGS
1961
1964
1968
1970
1978-79
1983
1986/88
1989
1991-92
1995
1995
1996
2001
2001-03
2002
2003
2004
Tom Phillis
Jack Ahearn
Jack Findlay
Kel Carruthers
Gregg Hansford
Billy Sanders
Wayne Gardner
Jeff Leisk
Michael Doohan
Daryl Beattie
Troy Corser
Ryan Sullivan
Chad Reed
Jason Crump
Troy Bayliss
Warwick Nowland
Broc Parkes
Road racing (250cc)
Road racing (500cc)
Road racing (500cc)
Road racing (250cc and 350cc)
Road racing (250cc)
Speedway
Road racing (500cc)
Motocross (500cc)
Road racing (500cc)
Road racing (500cc)
Road racing (Superbikes)
Speedway (under 21)
Motocross (250cc)
Speedway
Road racing (Superbikes)
Road racing (Endurance)
Road racing (Supersport)
24
2004 AUSTRALIAN CHAMPIONS
THIRD PLACE WORLD RANKINGS
1936
1950
1951
1954
1958
1959
1966
1968
1968-69
1973
1976
1978-79
1980
1990
1990
1991
1991-92
1993
1994
1994
1995
1996
1998
2002
Bluey Wilkinson
Graham Warren
Jack Biggs
Ken Kavanagh
Aub Lawson
Bob Brown
Jack Findlay
Kel Carruthers
Barry Smith
John Dodds
Phil Crump
Gregg Hansford
Billy Sanders
Michael Doohan
Todd Wiltshire
Jason Lyons
Rob Phillis
Daryl Beattie
Jason Crump
Craig Boyce
Ryan Sullivan
Shane Watts
Troy Corser
Ryan Sullivan
Speedway
Speedway
Speedway
Road racing (500cc)
Speedway
Road racing (350cc and 500cc)
Road racing (500cc)
Road Racing (350cc)
Road racing (50cc)
Road racing (250cc)
Speedway
Road racing (350cc)
Speedway
Road Racing (500cc)
Speedway
Speedway (under 21)
Road racing (Superbikes)
Road racing (500cc)
Speedway (under 21)
Speedway
Speedway (under 21)
Enduro (250cc)
Road racing (Superbikes)
Speedway
AUSTRALIAN TEAMS
1974
1976
1990
1994
1995
1998
1999
1999
2001
2002
2003
Pairs Speedway
Team Speedway (Phil Crump, Billy Sanders, Phil Hearne, John
Boulger)
Pairs Speedway
ISDE Junior Trophy
ISDE Junior Trophy
(Ian Cunningham, Shane Watts, Shawn Reed Jamie
Cunningham)
ISDE World Trophy
ISDE Junior Trophy
Team Speedway (Jason Crump, Leigh Adams, Ryan Sullivan
Jason Lyons, Todd Wiltshire)
ISDE World Trophy
Team Speedway (Jason Crump, Leigh Adams, Ryan Sullivan,
Todd Wiltshire, Craig Boyce, Jason Lyons)
Team Speedway (Ryan Sullivan, Todd Wiltshire, Leigh Adams,
Jason Crump, Jason Lyons)
Team Speedway
25
2nd
1st
2nd
2nd
1st
3rd
3rd
1st
3rd
1st
1st
2nd
2004 AUSTRALIAN CHAMPIONS
Enduro Trophy
1.
Vic
Matthew Parkinson, David Fleming, Graeme Dewez, Mike Shearer, Brett Barrett, Evan
Blackstock
2.
NSW
Jason Cater, Ben Grabham, Brad Williscroft, Craig Douglas, Damian Smith, Stuart Bennett
3.
NZ
Shaun Prescott, Chris Birch, Karl Power, Sean Clarke, Chris Power, Marke Whyte
Junior Trophy
1.
Qld
Anthony Roberts, Michael Oliver, Ryan Smart, Chris Reading
2.
Vic
Jehi Willis, Mathew Fish, Paul Robbins, David Robbins
3.
NSW
Shannon Lewry, Adam Lees, Glenn Kearney, Jake Stapleton
Up to 200cc two-stroke
500cc and over four-stroke
1.
Jake Stapleton
1
Stuart Bennett
2.
Ben Grabham
2
Tim Jackson
3.
David Fleming
3
Adam Lees
Over 220cc two-stroke
Veteran (35-44 years, all capacities)
1.
Glenn Kearney
1.
Geoff Ballard
2.
Kirk Hutton
2.
Phil Arnott
3.
Graeme Dewez
3.
Trevor Ruedin
Up to 250cc four-stroke
Masters (45 years plus, all capacities)
1.
Damian Smith
1.
Robert Haskins
2.
Mike Shearer
2.
Andrew Cornthwaite
3.
Brett Barrett
3.
Neville Thorley
270-450cc four-stroke
1.
Evan Blackstock
2.
Adam Schneller
3.
Craig Douglas
Road Racing
Superbikes
1.
Adam Fergusson
2.
Shannon Johnson
3.
Shawn Giles
1.
2.
3.
Supersport
Adam Fergusson
Glenn Allerton
Russell Holland
1.
2.
3.
125 GP
Bryan Staring
Mick Kelly
Matthew Kuhne
1
2
3
FX Pro-Twins
Craig McMartin
Benn Archibald
John Allen
1.
2.
3.
NakedBike
Benn Archibald
John Allen
Simon Rattenbury
1.
2.
3
Sidecars F1
Neville Lush/Martin Scott
Vincent Messina/Alison Scoullar
Steve Hutchinson/Darren Dewhurst
1.
2.
3.
250 GP
Shaun Geronimi
Mick Kelly
Troy Elliot
26
2004 AUSTRALIAN CHAMPIONS
Motocross
Pro Open
1. Darryll King
2. Shayne King
3. Jay Marmont
1.
2.
3.
Pro Lite
Cody Cooper
Cameron Taylor
Troy Dorron
Speedway
Senior
1. Ryan Sullivan
2. Leigh Adams
3. Todd Wiltshire
Sidecar
1. Glenn O’Brien/Nathan O’Brien
2. Mark Drew/Stephen Blair
3. Scott Christopher/Trent Koppe
Sidecar Teams
1. Andrew Cleave/Dave Power (Vic 1)
Jayden Mayes/Jaeben Underhill (Vic 1)
2. Grant Bond/Victor Gavenlock (NSW)
Ricky Howes/Shane Stacey (NSW)
3. Warren Monson/Scott Cameron (Vic 2)
Byren Gates/Dean Keeble (Vic 2)
Junior Long Track
65cc 7-U9 years
1. Shay O’Neill
2. Jake Allan
3. Josh McGrath
85cc 9-U11
1. Nicolas Waters
2. Joe Goodwin
3. Mitchell Grant
85cc 11-U13
1. Brodie Waters
2. Glenn Scott
3. Matthew Walters
80cc four-stroke 8-U11
1. Corey Schaffer
2. Ryan Barnett
3. Jake Moore
80/100cc Big Wheel 11-U16
1. Luke Richards
2. Glenn Scott
3. Samuel Masters
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
Junior (under 21)
Rory Schlien
Robert Ksiezak
Matt Wethers
Under 16
Aaron Summers
Sam Masters
Bob King
Under 16 teams
Jason Norman/Sam Martin (SA)
Ryan Sedgman/Justin Sedgman (Vic)
Sam Masters/Korey Williams (NSW)
65cc 9-U12
Matthew Walters
Taylor Poole
Tyson Harris
85cc 13-U16
Samuel Masters
Luke Richards
Zach Thackeray
80cc four-stroke 11-U14
Darcy Ward
Jackson Leigh-Smith
Jacob Richardson
250cc four-stroke 13-U16
Josh Grajczonek
Cameron Palmer
Tysen Thackeray
125cc 13-U16
Dylan Trengrouse
Tyson Thackeray
Jace Castles
27
2004 AUSTRALIAN CHAMPIONS
Senior Long Track
125cc
1. Christopher Holder
2. Luke Johnson
3. Scott Brown
500cc
1. Darren Herrick
2. Josh Waters
3. Ben Grabham
Over 450cc four-stroke
1. Jarrod Koppe
2. Troy Herfoss
3. Tim Spencer
1100cc Dirt Track Sidecar
1. Anthony Davies-Harold McCahon
2. Barry Raffin-Ernie Raffin
3. Aaron Murnane-Robbie Taggett
Supercross
Pro Open
1. Troy Carroll
2. Jay Marmont
3. Robbie Marshall
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
250cc
Darren Herrick
Luke Johnson
Troy Herfoss
Up to 450cc four-stroke
Paul Caslick
Josh Waters
Ben Grabham
500cc Slider
Troy Batchelor
Rodney McDonald
Jason Stewart
Evolution Motocross
125cc
1. Ron Martin
2. John Kemp
3. David Wagner
263cc and over
1. Geoff Holmes
2. John Kittle
3. Bill Nolan
Pro Lite
Cameron Taylor
Ryan Marmont
Matt Moss
Historic Road Racing
Unlimited Period 2 (1920-1945)
1. Simon Thomas
2. Gary Lawton
3. Peter Dunster
350cc Period 3 (1946-1962)
1. Phil Paton
2. Keith Campbell
3. Calvin Merlo
350cc Period 5 (1973-1980)
1. Craig Morris
2. Stuart Garner
3. Joshua Forster
Unlimited Period 4 (1963-1972)
1. Karl Corpe
2. Malcolm Campbell
3. David Johnson
Sidecar Period 4
1. Howard Ford
2. Max Hooper
3. Steve Reilly
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
350cc Period 4
Gordon Macdonald
Adam Senior
Joe Ahern
500cc Period 3
Dave Cole
Kal Carrick
Mike Soderland
Unlimited Period 3
Peter Guest
John Maher
Joe Ahern
Unlimited Period 5
Stuart Loly
Mike Soderland
Rick Zakelj
500cc Period 4
Craig Ditchburn
David Woolsey
Robert Marriner
250cc Period 4
Linden Bebbington
Adam Senior
Clive Harrop
28
1.
2.
3.
250cc
Glen Bell
Bryan Flemming
Ricky Redding
2004 AUSTRALIAN CHAMPIONS
Junior Dirt Track
65cc 7-U9 years
1. Matthew Davies
2. Hayden Demamiel
3. Brady Kurtz
85cc 9-U11
1. Nicholas Waters
2. Mitchell Grant
3. Corey Schaffer
85cc 13-U16
1. Luke Richards
2. Matthew Sims
3. Samuel Masters
80cc four-stroke 11-U14
1. Jackson Leigh-Smith
2. Todd Kurtz
3. Jacob Richardson
125cc 13-U16
1. Tom Armstrong
2. Zach Thackeray
3. Chris Thomson
250cc four-stroke 13-U16
1. Rick Olson
2. Rohan Tungate
3. Zach Thackeray
Junior Motocross
65cc 7-U9 years
1. Joel Milesevic
2. Hayden Mellross
3. Jayden Archer
65cc 11-U13
1. Sam Southey
2. Luke Arbon
3. James Iconomou
85cc 12-U14
1. Todd Waters
2. Harley Quinlan
3. Tye Simmonds
125cc 13-U15
1. Louis Calvin
2. Shaun Williamson
3. Kade Mosig
250cc four-stroke 13-U16
1. Kirk Gibbs
2. Jacob Smith
3. Ben Potter
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
65cc 9-U12
Todd Kurtz
Corey Schaffer
Todd Pelowski
85cc 11-U13
Todd Kurtz
Brodie Waters
Grant Charnock
80cc four-stroke 8-U11
Corey Schaffer
Todd Pelowski
Dean Deeks-Boss
80/100cc Big Wheel 11-U16
Blake Leigh-Smith
Luke Richards
Glenn Scott
80-160cc four-stroke 11-U16
Tom Armstrong
Daniel Wicks
Jesse Davies
65cc 9-U11
Dylan Berwick
James Booth-Elliot
Josh Carlson
85cc 9-U12
Luke Arbon
Jacob Blomfield
Dylan Gosling
85cc 14-U16
Shaun Williamson
Adam Monea
Kade Mosig
125cc 15 Years
Kirk Gibbs
David Baxter
Jacob Smith
29
2004 AUSTRALIAN CHAMPIONS
Dirt Track
125cc
1. Rowan Tegart
2. David Armstrong
3. Adrian Gow
500cc
1. Ken Bisley
2. Darren Herrick
3. Troy Herfoss
600cc Sidecar
1. Barrie Raffin/Ernie Raffin
2. Mark Morgan/Rob Thistleton
3. Anthony Davies/Harold McMahon
1.
2.
3.
Over 450cc Thumper
Ken Bisley
Rohan Pask
Brad Gow
Moto Trials
Open
1. Colin Zarczynski
2. Kevin Zarczynski
3. Dylan Rees
Junior
1. Kyle Middleton
2. James Blackwell
3. Christopher Cox
Post-classic
1. Andrew Clements
2. Toby Coleman
3. Joshua Lewis
Classic
1. Chris Leighfield
2. Rowan Gibson
3. Neil Solomano
Sidecar
1. Justin Gough/Maurice Blanchard
2. Chris Schultz/Stuart Gerhardy
3. Todd Kuerschner/Steve Sparkes
Supermoto
S1 (over 450cc 2T and 450-700cc 4T)
1. Josh McFarlane
2. Michael Brummell
3. Brock Wilson
S3 (125-200cc 2T and up to 250cc 4T)
1. Rodney Taplin
2. Nick Mawkes
3. Michael Avard
1.
2.
3.
250cc
Troy Herfoss
Darren Herrick
Graeme Smith
450cc Thumper
Troy Herfoss
Darren Herrick
Michael Kirkness
1100cc Sidecar
David Grainger/Brian Pritchard
Warren Fenton/ Peter Cooke
Joel Eaton/Rob Vernon
1.
2.
3.
500cc Slider
Rodney McDonald
Matt Saggus
Rodney Anderson
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
Greybeards (40 years and over)
Steve Holzhauser
Paul Moore
Michael Frith
Masters (35 years and over)
Don Murray
Graeme Peace
Kerrin Phillips
Women
Michelle Owen
Bev Anderson-Tranter
Felicity Harvie
Junior Women
Kate Field
Marney Day
Tiarna Spence
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
S2 (250cc 2T and up to 450cc 4T)
Shannon Johnson
Stuart Bennett
Mark Avard
30
THE GENERAL COMPETITION RULES
THE PHILOSOPHY OF THE GENERAL COMPETITION RULES
There will inevitably be a period of
adjustment to the new rules and it is hoped
that all concerned will be tolerant.
Motorcycling
Australia
(MA)
seeks
constructive criticism of the rules and
encourages all who have to use the rules to
pass on suggestions to MA as to any
improvements that may be demonstrated
as the new rules begin to operate. MA’s
rules committee will continue in existence
for this purpose.
No set of rules can ever anticipate every
problem, which may arise in the conduct of
a sport with as wide a variety of disciplines
and competing interests as exist in
motorcycling. The philosophy of these new
rules is that, at all levels of the sport, good
sense, cooperation and a fair and
reasonable interpretation of reasonable
rules, will take over from “rule book racing”.
Rulebook racing holds that if a situation
arises in the conduct of the sport, the
answer is to be found, not by the exercise
of independent judgment, but by looking up
the book. If that does not provide the
answer, then pass a new rule to “plug the
hole”.
Rulebook racing assumes that
controlling bodies have little or no interest
in working effectively with each other, and
with promoters, for the benefit of the sport
and of those who participate in it. It also
assumes that officials have no common
sense or understanding of the sport.
Neither proposition is true or fair.
STRUCTURE OF THE RULES
The rules are divided into 15 chapters
followed by a series of by-laws and other
provisions.
The first five chapters apply to all
disciplines of the sport and the remaining
ten to the specific disciplines.
We
recognise that there will be a cross over of
the rules from the first five chapters to the
specific disciplines and that some of the
general rules contained in those chapters
need to be added to or varied according to
the needs of a particular discipline.
These new rules confer on the controlling
bodies, and on their representatives in the
conduct of the sport, officials, discretion in
the application and interpretation of the
rules. It is intended that the discretion will
be exercised, as is stated in the very first
rule in the rulebook, in a way that ensures
that competition is “safe, free and fair”.
These rules are drafted to be user friendly
so that anyone who wants to compete in a
discipline needs to go to as few places in
the rule book as possible to ascertain the
rules applicable to them.
The first five chapters are as follows:
For the controlling bodies, this is intended
to convey that instead of there being
disagreement and disputation as to
competing authority under the rules, there
will be cooperation and agreement.
Chapter 1 - Jurisdiction and
Administration.
This chapter states the purposes and
principles underlying the rules. The rules
are to be applied fairly and according to the
principles of natural justice.
They are
binding not only on competitors but also all
controlling bodies, that is Motorcycling
Australia (MA) and the State Controlling
Bodies (SCBs).
Officials are intended to exercise judgment
wisely and fairly, on the understanding that
if they do not, their decisions, other than
those made in the heat of competition, will
be liable to review through protest and
appeal.
They will be trained and
encouraged to take responsibility for the
value and fairness of their actions, and to
apply them in a way, which supports the
underlying philosophy of the rules.
The chapter provides for the making by MA
and SCBs, of by-laws for a wide variety of
purposes. The by-laws must be consistent
with the rules.
31
GENERAL COMPETITION RULES
As with the FIM, the SCBs agreed to be
bound by the decisions of MA as part of the
agreement that they entered into with each
other when MA was formed. The SCBs
are, in effect, the owners of MA, and their
control over MA is exercised through the
Board of MA. It is the Board which has the
power, under the Articles of Association of
MA, to make competition rules. Thus the
SCBs have agreed to be bound by the
competition rules of MA.
A number of the terms that are used in
these rules are defined in this chapter. For
example an “event” is defined as a
competition involving the use of one or
more motorcycles and a “race” is an event
where speed is the only factor determining
the result.
Chapter 2 - The Controlling Bodies.
General - Generally, this very important
chapter sets out the authority of the various
controlling bodies and identifies and
empowers
the
people
and
the
instrumentalities
through
whom
the
controlling bodies exercise their authority.
In so doing, the SCBs, through the Board,
have determined that MA’s powers in the
control of competitions under the rules are
limited to the types of competitions which
are listed above, that is, national and some
international, competitions.
The SCBs
have control over all other competitions.
Under the pre 1998 rules there was doubt
about the areas in which MA and the SCBs
exercised their respective powers. For
example, if support events were being
conducted at an international meeting, who
had control of the support events, MA or
the SCB in whose territory the events were
being conducted? It is intended that the
new rules will resolve such conflicts and
give certainty to those who have charge of
events.
Relevant Controlling Bodies – These rules
use the expression “relevant controlling
body” (RCB) throughout. That term is
defined in chapter 1 as meaning the body
having control of a competition under the
rules. If it is an international competition
other than a world championship or FIM
prize event, an Australian championship or
part of an MA series, the RCB is MA,
otherwise the RCB is the SCB in the State
where the competition is being held.
This is achieved by defining the areas in
which the three groups of controlling bodies
concerned with the sport may operate.
They are as follows:
§
FIM - World Championship and FIM
Prize Events.
§
MA - International meetings other
than World Championship and FIM
Prize Events, Australian
Championships and all MA Series.
§
SCBs - All other competitions.
Rule 2.1.2 is a very important rule, which in
many ways typifies the philosophy, which
underpins these Rules. In providing for the
making of agreements, the rules are
clearing the way for the resolution of
differences among controlling bodies, and
between controlling bodies and promoters,
by consultation, discussion and agreement
rather than by disputation and resort to an
all encompassing “manual”.
This division of authority is intended to
reflect that the FIM is a federation of which
MA is a member, and that MA is a
federation of which the SCBs are members.
The significance of the above statement is
that the FIM would not exist without the
cooperation and involvement of its
members, who are the various nations of
the world who have joined the FIM, and the
same principles apply to MA.
Officials - Stewards remain the supreme
officials at meetings, unless a jury has
been appointed. Their functions are to
represent MA and to be the final arbiter of
any issue that may arise at a meeting. The
clerk of course will continue to be the
executive officer of a meeting, although the
clerk of course can always be overruled by
the steward.
The FIM is not bound by the document
which constitutes MA nor is it bound by the
competition rules of MA but has its own
statutes and competition rules which are in
turn binding on MA. MA agreed to those
conditions when it joined the FIM.
A new position called Race Director has
been created to control MA Championship
Series and develop a degree of consistency
in decisions at rounds of these series.
32
GENERAL COMPETITION RULES
practice this means that the body having
control of a particular event may issue a
licence for that event, leaving it to another
RCB to issue another licence for another
event. For example, a venue could be
licensed by MA specifically for a national or
international event with particular conditions
attached. An LCB, in issuing a licence for
the same venue for a different event under
its control could impose different conditions
or not issue a licence at all.
The rules provide for MA, either
independently or jointly with one or more of
the SCBs to establish and conduct training
courses for officials.
Speedway Referees - The special position
of a referee in speedway has been
recognised.
Although the functions of
referee are the same for the purposes of
the rules as those of the steward, the rules
have been drawn so that the traditional role
of the referee continues. The referee has
always had supreme control of a speedway
meeting and the clerk of course has always
been under the direction of the referee.
The rules are intended to make it clear that
the authority of the referee, while the same
as those of a Steward in other disciplines,
is exercised in a more immediate and direct
way.
It is to be hoped that there will be high
levels of cooperation between MA and the
SCBs to ensure the smooth operation of
this aspect of the rules. Rule 2.1.2 was
enacted specifically to facilitate cooperation
between RCBs and promoters.
The
Promotion
and
Conduct
of
Competitions - As under the old rules, a
promoter must obtain a permit to conduct a
meeting. The application for the permit
must be to the RCB for the meeting.
Specialist Sub-Committees
This rule provides for the establishment by
a controlling body of sub-committees
whose functions are to determine and
regulate eligibility. They are not mandatory.
It is intended that the sub-committees will
be used in connection with Historic
eligibility and the issue of log books, where
provision is made for them. However, such
sub-committees are not limited to Historics
and can be used in any discipline as and
when a controlling body thinks fit.
The RCB may issue the permit, may refuse
to issue it or may issue it subject to
conditions.
No permit may be issued
unless the promoter is insured to the
satisfaction of the RCB.
An RCB may conduct a meeting and is not
required to issue itself with a permit.
Applications to enter must be made in the
prescribed form to the promoter, and the
application may be accepted or rejected.
There is a right of appeal against a decision
to reject an application. An applicant may
be required by the promoter to produce a
medical certificate of fitness to compete.
Juries - The chapter confers on an RCB the
power to appoint a jury at any meeting. It is
not expected that this will be a common
practice but the present rules do contain
some reference to juries and it was felt that
it provided greater flexibility to allow for the
practice in cases where it may be
necessary or traditional.
Supplementary Regulations - These
provisions enable RCBs to make SR for an
event conducted under its jurisdiction.
Chapter 3 - Competitions
It is intended that the present procedures
for the making of SR will continue, that is,
the presentation by the promoter of draft
regulations in proper time for a meeting to
the RCB, and the approval by the RCB of
those regulations. The important difference
is that the SR will have the legal status of
rules and must actually be approved by the
RCB. The SR thereby acquire the legal
status of rules and are enforceable as
such. SR must be consistent with the
rules.
General - The intent of this long chapter is
to continue as far as possible with the
present practices throughout the sport.
Venues - From 1998 the Rules have
abandoned the practice of having set rules
under which all venues are to operate.
From 1/1/98 on, each SCB must establish
and maintain a register of venues, whether
permanent or temporary, in its state or
territory.
No venue may operate without a venue
licence and for the purposes an RCB may
appoint venue inspectors. It is to be noted
that it is to the RCB to whom an application
for a venue licence is to be made. In
The Licensing of Competitors
These rules provide for, but do not make
mandatory, the establishment by MA, either
33
GENERAL COMPETITION RULES
independently or jointly with one or more
SCBs, of training courses for competitors.
§
There are categories of licences ranging
from junior to World Championship.
There is no right of appeal against a
penalty imposed during the course of an
event provided the decision has been
notified, if practicable, to the rider or his
representative during the event.
A licensee may not compete in any
competition above that person’s level of
licence.
(There are some conditions on the
above - see rule 3.4.2).
For the purposes of the rules (see rules
5.8.3 & 5.8.4) an event starts when the
order to start is given or, for a flying start,
when the start line is crossed, and finishes
when the finish flag is waved or displayed.
MA, or any LCB on its behalf, may issue a
competition licence.
There is a right of appeal against the
refusal of a licence or the imposition of a
condition on a licence.
Penalties imposed in that time are final.
Although it is recognised that a right of
appeal which existed under the pre 1998
GCRs has been removed, in practical
terms it makes little or no difference. The
present rules provide that there is no right
of appeal against a finding of fact, a rule
which was intended to limit appeals arising
from infringements during events, and also
that no event can be ordered to be rerun
after an appeal. Most decisions made
during the course of an event (eg, time and
penalty points) are of a kind that it is
difficult to redress by protest or appeal.
Moreover, a decision made in relation to an
event, can be appealed if it is made before
or after the event, so that, for example, a
decision to impose penalty points in an
enduro or trials event will be appellable if it
is made after the event, even if the decision
relates to an incident during the event.
Similar rules apply to the licensing of
entrants and speedway mechanics.
Offences
There is a list of offences prescribed in the
new rules, including offences for the use
and consumption of a prescribed list of
prohibited substances.
There is also provision for drug and alcohol
testing under the auspices of the Australian
Sports Drug Agency. There are penalties
for those who test positive and for those
who refuse to submit to testing.
MA may declare any substance, in addition
to those prohibited under the rules, to be
prohibited.
The Imposition of Penalties During
Events
The rules provide specifically for the
imposition of fines, exclusion, penalty
points, time points, and relegation, by a
steward or clerk of course during the
course of an event. The power to do so is
intended to operate where:
§
§
A machine has left the track and
thereby gained an advantage;
This is an innovation intended to
provide a means of bringing charges
for actions which do not occur at
competitions.
§
It is not mandatory.
§
A competitor has been guilty of
unsafe or unfair conduct;
§
§
A competitor has received outside
assistance;
It is not intended that there be people
in uniforms walking around at
competitions looking for breaches of
the rules.
§
A machine is dangerous;
§
§
A machine does not comply with the
rules or the SR;
It is expected, but not mandatory, that
inspectors will be the general
manager of an SCB or the General
Manager of MA.
§
A competitor has refused to comply
with a medical test that a steward has
been authorised to require;
§
§
There has been a breach of the
refuelling rules.
The function of inspectors will be to
lay charges and ensure that those
charges are brought before the
appellate body as quickly as possible.
Inspectors
34
GENERAL COMPETITION RULES
Charges - These provisions are intended to
ensure that charges, other than those
arising out of a competition, are heard and
determined by the RCB or the appellate
body of MA or of the SCB in whose territory
the offence is alleged to have been
committed.
Chapter 5 - All Disciplines
Interpretation - One of the most important
aspects of interpretation of these rules is
that they are permissive rather than
prohibitive. In other words, in almost all
cases, the rules describe the things that
may be done rather than the things that
may not. If the rules say that certain things
may be done in the conduct of the sport,
then those things may be done but nothing
else.
For example, rule 6.3.5.8
(Supersport)
contains
a
list
of
manufactured parts which may be
replaced.
That list is exhaustive and
means that no other parts may be replaced.
Scale of Penalties - These provisions
regulate the penalties that can be imposed
and follow the existing scale of penalties.
Chapter 4 - Protests and Appeals
Protests
§
§
These provisions follow the earlier
rules that limit the right of protest to
decisions other than those made
during the course of an event.
General - This chapter contains the rules
which apply to all disciplines. Any rule in
one of the discipline specific chapters will,
unless otherwise stated, be in addition to
the provisions of Chapter 5. Thus, the
provisions of Chapter 5 and the relevant
discipline specific chapter, are intended to
operate side by side. It will only be when a
discipline specific rule says so that it will
override a rule in chapter 5.
The principles which officials who
hear and determine protests must
apply are clearly set out in the rules.
Appeals
§
To have a right of appeal, a person
must have a “material interest” in the
outcome of a protest.
§
This is intended to limit those who
have the right of appeal to those
whose interest is more than just
casual, eg, a spectator.
§
The kind of interest anticipated of
another competitor who stands to
gain or lose points from the outcome
of an appeal, but it would not be
expected to extend to the member of
a competitor’s team. It will be for the
appellate body to determine in each
case whether an appellant has a
material interest.
§
Eligibility - This important rule:
Appellate bodies must have as chair a
legal practitioner and for that reason it
is expected that the general
requirements of the law as to the
subject matter of appeals will apply.
Those requirements normally prevent
an appellant from having a rehearing
of a finding of fact, although an
appellate body may give leave to an
appellant to present new evidence. In
other words, although the rule that a
finding of fact cannot be challenged
without the leave of the appellate
body has been removed, in practice
the situation will not change.
§
Prevents, with the exception of
Observed Trials, Enduro and 125cc
GP Road Racing juniors from
competing in other than junior
competitions;
§
Prevents a person from competing in
any competition unless and until that
person’s machine and clothing have
been examined by a scrutineer and
requires the production of any
documents (eg, log books where they
are mandatory) in support of eligibility;
§
States that proof of eligibility rests on
the person who seeks to prove it.
This applies to all disciplines.
§
Makes it clear that any rule, which
prohibits the modification of a
machine, means the machine must
be as manufactured by the
manufacturer.
Homologation - This rule provides a
procedure for homologation of machines in
production classes.
Starts and Finishes - The new rules more
clearly define starts and finishes although it
is not intended that by so doing current
practices will change.
35
GENERAL COMPETITION RULES
Chapters 6 to 15 - The Discipline
Specific Chapters
Junior Competition Rules
The new rules put beyond doubt that a
person who is over the age of 16 years may
not compete in a junior competition, and
that a person who is under 16 may not
compete in a senior competition.
As far as possible, the discipline specific
chapters follow a common format as
follows:
A junior who turns 16 during a series may
complete the series.
Australian Championships - These rules
prescribe the allocation, categories and
listing of Australian Championships.
§
Protective clothing;
§
Engines;
§
Frames and parts;
§
Fuel; and
§
Competition rules.
Chapters 16 to 30 - By Laws
These chapters are concerned with matters
of medallions and trophies, championships,
design, eligibility, format, team selection, a
code
of
conduct
and
so
on.
36
MOTORCYCLING AUSTRALIA - GENERAL COMPETITION RULES
1. JURISDICTION AND ADMINISTRATION
1.1 THE RULES
1.1.1 Purpose of Rules
1.1.1.1
The purpose of these Rules is to regulate and control motorcycle competition.
a) The Rules are to be interpreted with the intent that competition will be
safe, free and fair and conducted applying the principles of natural justice.
b) The Rules are Competition Rules made under clause 71 of the
Constitution.
c) The Rules, and any determination made under them and in accordance
with them, bind all controlling bodies and all participants in the sport.
1.1.2 Recognition of Authority of FIM
1.1.2.1
By these Rules MA acknowledges and recognises:
a) FIM is the world controlling body of motorcycle competition.
b) It is desirable that there be consistent standards and rules of competition
at all levels.
1.2 REPEAL OF CURRENT GCRs
1.2.1.1
The General Competition Rules of MA in operation at the date of
commencement of these Rules are hereby repealed but such repeal will not
affect the operation of the repealed GCRs in relation to any competition
conducted there under.
1.3 BY - LAWS
1.3.1 Making of By - Laws
1.3.1.1
MA may make by-laws, which must be consistent with these Rules, and which
may:
a) Proclaim model supplementary regulations.
b) Prescribe forms and fees as required under these Rules.
c) Prescribe fines for any breach of these Rules.
d) Prescribe the requirements for, and conditions of, insurance under these
Rules.
e) Establish national and state championships, titled events, series,
competitions and meetings and for such purposes:
i)
Define criteria for the eligibility of licensees.
ii)
Define criteria for the eligibility of machines.
iii)
Publish calendars.
iv)
Create prizes, trophies and medallions.
v)
Prescribe competition formats.
vi)
Prescribe traveling and other expenses.
vii)
Attach any relevant FIM rule or regulation.
f)
Prescribe manuals and procedures for the performance by any person or
body of any power, duty or function under these Rules.
g) Provide for the establishment and operation of training and educational
courses under these Rules.
37
JURISDICTION AND ADMINISTRATION
h)
1.3.1.2
1.3.1.3
1.3.1.4
Prescribe the design, function and operation of apparatus, instruments
and equipment used for timing, measuring, weighing, counting or
calculating for the purposes of these Rules.
i)
Prescribe levels of noise, atmospheric and other emissions from
motorcycles.
j)
Prescribe fuel contents and standards.
k) Prescribe laboratories for fuel testing.
l)
Prescribe track and venue conditions, designs and standards.
m) Prescribe the weights, measurements and other dimensions of
motorcycles; and
n) Provide for or prescribe such acts matters or things as shall be necessary
for the full and effectual operation of these Rules.
Subject to this Rule, an SCB may make by-laws, which must be consistent with
these Rules, and which may:
a) Proclaim model supplementary regulations;
b) Establish state and territory championships, titled events, series,
competitions and meetings and for such purposes:
i)
Publish calendars;
ii)
Create prizes, trophies and medallions.
iii)
Prescribe competition formats.
iv)
Prescribe traveling and other expenses.
c) Provide for the establishment and operation of training and educational
courses under these Rules.
d) Prescribe noise, atmospheric and other emissions from motorcycles.
e) Prescribe track and venue conditions, designs and standards.
f)
Provide for or prescribe such acts, matters or things as shall be necessary
for the full and effectual operation of by-laws.
An SCB must, not less than one month after any by-law has been made by that
SCB, forward a copy thereof to the Board.
The Board may amend or revoke any by-law made under these Rules.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
“ASC” means Australian Sports Commission.
"ASC Doping Policy" means the document bearing that name, or any amendment or
equivalent thereof.
"ASDA" means the Australian Sports Drug Agency.
”Board” means the Board of Directors of MA.
“Club” means an incorporated or unincorporated body formed for the primary
purpose of promoting the sport and being affiliated to an SCB.
"Competition" includes any competition, event, race or race meeting and all
associated practices, tests and qualifying sessions.
"Code" means the Sporting Code of FIM
“Constitution” means the constitution of MA.
"Consume" in relation to any prohibited substances includes inject, swallow or inhale
and "Consumption" has a corresponding meaning.
"Council" means the Council of MA.
"Disqualify" means to forbid the disqualified person, body or machine from taking part
in any competition under these Rules and "disqualification" has a corresponding
meaning.
"Event" means any competition involving the use of one or more motorcycles.
"Exclude" means to forbid the excluded person, body or machine from taking further
part in, or being recognised as having taken part in, the competition from which such
person body or machine has been excluded and "exclusion" has a corresponding
meaning.
"FIM" means Federation Internationale de Motocyclisme.
38
JURISDICTION AND ADMINISTRATION
"FMN" means a Federation Member Nation under the FIM Statutes.
"International meeting" means any competition inscribed as such in the FIM
calendar.
“Junior competition” means a competition which only competitors who are under the
age of sixteen years may compete and “junior competitor” has a corresponding
meaning.
"MA" means Motorcycling Australia.
“MA series” means a series of competitions conducted in more than one state or
territory.
"Meeting" means a meeting at which one or more motorcycling events are
conducted.
"Motorcycle" means and includes:
a) Solo - a one track vehicle with wheels with the drive through the rear
wheel.
b) Sidecar - a two track vehicle with three road wheels, with the drive through
the rear wheel of the vehicle.
c) Cycle car - a three track vehicle with three wheels that is driven by either
one or two wheels.
d) Trike - a three-track vehicle with three wheels that is driven by its rear
wheels.
e) Quad - a two track vehicle with four wheels driven by the rear or all wheels
and on which a rider may be accommodated astride the vehicle having
control of the steering by way of handle bars operating the front wheels.
“OEM” means original equipment manufacturer.
"Prohibited substance" means any substance prohibited under these Rules.
"Promoter" means the holder of a competition permit.
"Race" means any event where speed is the determining factor in the result.
"RCB” means the relevant controlling body having control of any competition or
recreational activity under Rule 2.1.
“Recreational Activity” means authorized motorcycle activity, which has no
competitive element.
"Record" means an event where speed, distance and time, or any combination of
those factors, determine the result.
“Repealed GCRs” means the Competition Rules of MA in force until the date of
commencement of these Rules.
"SCB" means State Controlling Body being any Member under the Articles.
“Senior competition” means a competition which only competitors who have attained
the age of 16 years may compete and “Senior competitor” has a corresponding
meaning.
“Sports development account” means the sports development account established
under the repealed GCRs and continued by these Rules.
“Sports development levy” means the levy established by these Rules.
“SR” means supplementary regulations.
"Steward" includes a referee.
"Suspend" means to forbid the suspended person, body or machine from taking part
in any competition under these Rules during the period of suspension and
"suspension" has a corresponding meaning.
39
JURISDICTION AND ADMINISTRATION
“Venue” means a permanent or temporary place or facility, which has been approved
by the RCB for the conduct of motorcycle competition or recreational activity.
40
2. ADMINISTRATION
2.1 THE CONTROLLING BODIES
2.1.1 Administration of Rules
2.1.1.1
Subject to the provisions of the Code, the bodies with authority and
responsibility for the administration of rules regulating the conduct of
competitions and recreational activity in all disciplines are as follows:
a) FIM - World Championships and FIM Prize Events as the same are
defined in the Code;
b) MA:
i)
International meetings other than World Championship and FIM
Prize Events;
ii)
Australian championships;
iii)
MA series;
iv)
Australian Record attempts;
v)
Events which have a course traversing more than one state;
vi)
Support events at World Championships.
c) SCBs - All other competitions and recreational activity within the territorial
borders of their state unless permission has been granted by the SCB
within the territory of the proposed event for another SCB to permit the
activity..
2.1.2 Agreements for Conduct of the Sport
2.1.2.1
Subject to these Rules, any controlling body may enter into agreements or
arrangements with any one or more of the other, and with any promoter, for the
conduct of competitions. If any such agreement or arrangement:a) Includes FIM; and
b) Is for the conduct of a meeting which includes both international and
national events; these rules will apply to the national events conducted at
the meeting but in all other respects the FIM Rules will apply and be
binding on all participants.
2.1.3 Conflict Between Code and Rules
2.1.3.1
If these Rules and the Code are in conflict in relation to any matter to which
both apply, the Code will prevail over these Rules.
2.2 COMMISSIONS
2.2.1 Establishment of Commissions
2.2.1.1
The following are the commissions of the sport:
a) Road Racing
b) Motocross and Supercross
c) Speedway and Track
d) Enduro
e) Moto-Trials
f)
Historic Road Racing
g) Classic Motocross
h) Junior Sport and Development
i)
Dirt Track
2.2.2 Functions and Membership of Commissions
2.2.2.1
The functions of the commissions are:
a) To assist, advise, and be responsible to the Board and to act in the best
interests of MA and the sport;
41
ADMINISTRATION
b)
2.2.2.2
2.2.2.3
To prepare and propose any amendments to these Rules, or any by-laws,
so as to ensure the orderly conduct of competitions; and
c) To assist and advise each other and any committee of the Board.
The members of the commissions will be appointed by the Board. The terms
and conditions of appointment of members of commissions will be determined
by the Board.
In appointing members of commissions the Board must have regard to:
a) The advancement and welfare of the Sport and of the relevant discipline;
and
b) The need to appoint skilled and experienced persons to the commissions.
2.3 SPORTS DEVELOPMENT LEVY
2.3.1 Collection and Distribution
2.3.1.1
In all disciplines there may be a sports development levy at the discretion of the
RCB.
2.3.1.2
In each year an RCB may prescribe the amount of the sports development levy
for that year.
2.3.1.3
The promoter of a meeting must, no more than 14 days after the end of the
meeting, pay to the RCB the prescribed sports development levy imposed on
takings from:
a) Charges for admission by the public to the meeting venue; and
b) Sales of programs for the meeting.
2.4 THE SPORTS DEVELOPMENT ACCOUNT
2.4.1 Operation
2.4.1.1
MA must pay any proceeds it receives from the sports development levy into
the sports development account no more than 28 days after receipt thereof.
2.4.1.2
In each year the Board may determine the purpose for and the amount of any
distribution from the sports development account.
2.4.1.3
The Board may impose any conditions on the recipients of grants from the
Sports Development Account.
2.5 OFFICIALS
2.5.1 Powers and Authorities of Officials
2.5.1.1
In the administration of these Rules the powers and authorities of the
controlling bodies are exercisable by and through officials. For these purposes
the controlling bodies may license any one or more of the following officials:
a) Key officials:
i)
Stewards or Referees
ii)
Race Directors
iii)
Clerks of the Course
iv)
Race Secretaries
b) Operational officials:
i)
Marshals
ii)
Time keepers and Scorers
iii)
Measurers
iv)
Machine Examiners
v)
Scrutineers
vi)
Eligibility Scrutineers
vii)
Judges
viii)
Observers
42
ADMINISTRATION
c)
ix)
Handicappers
x)
Starters
xi)
Final Control Officials
Other licensed officials
i)
Coaches
ii)
Announcers
2.5.2 The Licensing of Officials
2.5.2.1
MA, or an SCB on behalf of MA, may issue, renew, re-categorize or revoke an
official's licence. The form of an official's licence will be as prescribed in bylaws.
2.5.2.2
No person will be issued with an official's licence unless that person has
achieved the minimum required standards at a training course established and
conducted under these Rules.
2.5.2.3
A licence for a key official must not be issued to person under 18 years of age.
2.5.2.4
An official's licence remains in force for no more than four years from the day
of its issue.
2.5.2.5
An application for an official's licence and for the renewal or re-categorization
thereof must:
a) Be to the controlling body having authority in the State or Territory in which
the applicant ordinarily resides;
b) Be in the prescribed form; and
c) Be accompanied by the prescribed fee.
2.5.2.6
An SCB which issues an official's licence must, within one month of issue,
notify MA which must enter the information on a register of licensed officials to
be maintained for that purpose and kept at the registered office of MA.
2.5.2.7
An RCB, which orders an investigation into the conduct of a meeting, may
stand down any official involved in the subject meeting, until the investigation is
concluded.
2.5.3 Categories of Officials’ Licences
2.5.3.1
Officials’ licences:
a) Are accredited at the following levels and must be appropriately endorsed:
i)
Level 0 - basic level
ii)
Level 1 - club level
iii)
Level 2 - inter club/zone level
iv)
Level 3 - open event/state championship level
v)
Level 4 – MA series and national championship level
vi)
International; and
b) Are accredited in the following disciplines:
i)
Dirt Track
ii)
Enduro
iii)
Minikhana
iv)
Motocross
v)
Moto-Trials
vi)
Road Racing
vii)
Speedway
viii)
Supercross
ix)
Track
c) May be endorsed with more than one category.
2.5.3.2
A licensed official:
a) Must not carry out any duty or function to which that official's licence
category does not apply but may have an assistant whose licence is
endorsed with a different category;
b) May apply for a different category of licence. An application for variation
must be dealt with in the same way as an application for a licence.
43
ADMINISTRATION
c)
2.5.3.3
2.5.3.4
May not, without the authority of the Clerk of the Course, compete in any
competition at which the official is officiating.
d) Must comply with these Rules and with the proper directions of any official
having authority under these Rules to impose such directions.
e) Must carry out all duties honestly, diligently and fairly.
f)
Must be in attendance no later than one hour prior to the official start time
of the meeting (including practice) and remain until the completion of their
duties at the conclusion of the meeting.
MA may, either independently or in conjunction with other controlling bodies
conduct official's training courses. The content of the courses must:
a) Have regard to the various disciplines of the sport.
b) Provide practical and theoretical training.
c) Be as prescribed from time to time in by-laws.
No person may compete at any meeting to which they have been appointed a
key official.
2.5.4 Stewards
2.5.4.1
A controlling body may appoint one or more stewards for any competition and,
if more than one steward is appointed, those stewards may collectively or
individually exercise the powers set out in these Rules. Where more than one
steward is appointed under this Rule the controlling body must nominate a
senior steward, whose determination on any matter in relation to the meeting
will be binding.
2.5.4.2
In the absence of a jury, and subject to Rule 2.5.5 stewards of a competition
have supreme control and authority over the conduct of that competition and
may:
a) Amend any supplementary regulation applicable to the meeting if, in the
opinion of the steward, exceptional circumstances arise requiring
amendments.
b) Amend the program for the meeting.
c) Give any instruction or direction to the clerk of the course of the meeting.
d) Determine the time for the commencement and conclusion of the meeting.
e) Stop the meeting or any part of it.
f)
Order any event to be restarted or rerun.
g) Hear and determine any protest.
h) Institute, hear and determine any prosecution for any offence committed
during the meeting and impose any penalty or penalties under these
Rules.
i)
Abandon any meeting provided that all entry fees must be refunded unless
otherwise provided for in the SR for the meeting.
j)
Order any competitor to submit to a medical examination to determine if
the competitor is fit to participate in the meeting.
k) Order the administration of any fuel, drug, or other test.
l)
Impose on a competitor or entrant any penalty of relegation time or points
penalty, exclusion, fine or suspension as provided for in these rules.
m) Order any machine, which the steward considers does not comply with
these Rules or the relevant SR, to be impounded at the end of the meeting
and detained under the control or direction of the steward for such period
as may reasonably be necessary for it to be examined.
n) Do any act, publish any document and make any declaration, not
inconsistent with these Rules, which is necessary for the fair and proper
conduct of the meeting.
o) Refer any matter to the RCB.
2.5.4.3
As soon as possible, and no more than five days after the conclusion of a
meeting, a steward of the meeting must complete a steward’s report in the
prescribed form which must:
a) For any meeting, be delivered as soon as practicable to the RCB; and
b) Be accompanied by a copy of the program; and
44
ADMINISTRATION
c)
Contain the results of the meeting.
2.5.5 Race Director
2.5.5.1
MA may appoint a Race Director for any MA series.
2.5.5.2
The Race Director’s responsibilities are:
a) To ensure proper observance of the rules and regulations;
b) To ensure the efficient running of practices and races;
c) To ensure effective communication between promoters and stewards.
2.5.5.3
The Race Director shall have overriding authority in relation to.
a) The control of practices and races, including modifying the program.
b) The stopping of any race or session.
c) Starting procedure.
2.5.5.4
A Race Director may:
a) Amend any series supplementary regulation if, in the opinion of the Race
Director, exceptional circumstances arise requiring amendments.
b) Amend the series program.
c) Institute, any prosecution for any offence committed during a meeting.
d) Do any act, publish any document and make any declaration, not
inconsistent with these Rules, which is necessary for the fair and proper
conduct of the series.
2.5.6 Clerk of the Course
2.5.6.1
Subject to the control and direction of the Steward or Race Director of a
meeting, the Clerk of the Course is responsible for its conduct and for that
purpose may:
a) Inform and instruct operational officials;
b) Inspect the venue and do whatever is necessary to ensure the venue is in
good and safe condition;
c) Ensure that all operational officials are carrying out their duties fully and
effectively.
d) Receive any protest and convey it to the Steward;
e) Impose on a competitor or entrant any penalty of exclusion or relegation or
any time or points penalty or fine as provided for under these rules;
f)
Stop any event;
g) Exclude any competitor from any competition for any reason provided for
in these Rules;
h) Exclude from any event any machine which the Clerk of the Course
considers to be dangerous;
i)
Order any event to be restarted or rerun
j)
Collate all necessary information from any operational official and present
it to the Steward at the Steward's request and direction;
k) Do any act, publish any document and make any declaration necessary
for the conduct of the meeting;
l)
Authorise any operational official to compete in any event in the meeting.
NOTE: For an exception to this rule see 9.8.16.1.
2.5.7 Race Secretary
2.5.7.1
The Race Secretary is responsible for the organisation and management of a
meeting and for those purposes:
a) Must comply with the instructions of the Steward and the Clerk of the
Course
b) May publish notices and documents as directed;
c) May ensure that operational officials are informed of their functions and
duties and properly equipped.
d) Must provide the Steward with a copy of the program and the results of
events conducted at the meeting.
45
ADMINISTRATION
2.5.8 Eligibility Scrutineer.
2.5.8.1
An eligibility scrutineer is a person appointed by the RCB or the promoter
at a meeting comprising of events for historic or classic machines. The
eligibility scrutineer has the authority to determine whether entered
machines comply with the relevant eligibility regulations.
2.5.9 Operational officials
2.5.9.1
In carrying out their duties operational officials must:
a) At the beginning of the meeting report to the Clerk of the Course for
instructions;
b) Only use apparatus authorised under these Rules;
c) Provide the Clerk of the Course with reports as required;
d) Comply with the directions and instructions of the Steward/Referee and
the Clerk of the Course.
2.5.9.2
Operational officials must carry out their functions to the best of their abilities
and in accordance with these Rules.
2.5.9.3
Officials must be paid such fees, expenses and allowances as are prescribed
from time to time.
2.5.10 Specialist Sub-Committees
2.5.10.1
A controlling body may appoint specialist sub-committees for the following
purposes:
a) To examine any machine to determine if the machine, or the class or
group of machines of which the machine is an example, is eligible to
compete;
b) To issue, in respect of any machine, any log book or other record of
eligibility;
c) To direct the issue of a replacement log book for any machine; and
d) To grant any exemption, in respect of any machine, class or period group
of machines, for the use of any part or parts as provided for under these
Rules.
2.5.10.2
The relevant commission will, unless otherwise determined in by-laws, be the
specialist sub-committee for each SCB.
2.5.10.3
Specialist sub-committees will be appointed for such term and upon such
conditions as the controlling body determines.
2.5.10.4
A specialist sub-committee may have expertise in more than one discipline of
the sport.
2.5.10.5
A determination of a specialist sub-committee applies to, and binds:
a) The owner or entrant of any machine;
b) Any subsequent owner or entrant.
2.5.11 Juries
2.5.11.1
Subject to the following two Rules, an RCB may appoint, in addition to, or in
lieu of, a steward, a jury which must comprise a president and at least 2
members.
2.5.11.2
If a meeting is in Speedway:
a) A jury may not be appointed in lieu of the referee;
b) The functions of a jury are to hear and determine any protest against any
decision or determination of the referee.
2.5.11.3
No person may be a member of a jury unless that person is:
a) Appointed in writing by the RCB under this Rule; and
b) A Steward
2.5.11.4
The RCB may appoint to a jury, such persons as it thinks have sufficient
expertise to be members of a jury. The RCB must appoint the President of the
jury.
2.5.11.5
The steward of a meeting may not be a member of the jury for that meeting.
2.5.11.6
If, during a meeting, there is a vacancy in the membership of a jury, the jury
President may appoint a substitute in accordance with these Rules.
46
ADMINISTRATION
2.5.11.7
2.5.11.8
2.5.11.9
2.5.11.10
No member of a jury may participate in any deliberations of the jury if that
person has an interest in the outcome of the deliberations and must,
immediately on becoming aware of any such conflict of interest, notify the other
members of the jury and withdraw from the jury.
The president of a jury:
a) Must convene the jury at the commencement of the meeting;
b) Must ensure that the proceedings of the jury are conducted in accordance
with these Rules;
c) Must ensure that the acts and instructions of the jury are carried out; and
d) May admit any person as an observer of the jury's deliberation and must
exclude any person who, in the opinion of the jury, has no interest in the
proceedings or is not entitled to be present.
Where a jury is appointed in addition to a steward, the authority of the jury will
prevail over that of the steward.
In these Rules any reference to a steward in any discipline other than
speedway will, in respect of a meeting for which a jury has been appointed, be
interpreted, as if it were a reference to a jury.
47
3. COMPETITIONS
3.1 VENUES
3.1.1 Register of Venues
3.1.1.1
Each SCB must, for its area of responsibility, establish and maintain a register
of:
a) Permanent venues; and
b) Temporary venues for special events; which may be altered by the
addition, removal or modification of, any one or more venues.
3.1.2 Venue Inspectors
3.1.2.1
An RCB may appoint venue inspectors whose responsibilities are:
a) To inspect venues;
b) To ensure that venues comply with any guidelines established under these
Rules; and
c) To make recommendations for the issue of licences for venues.
3.1.3 The Licensing of Venues
3.1.3.1
No venue may be operated without a venue licence.
3.1.3.2
An application for the issue of a venue licence must be in the prescribed form
to the RCB.
3.1.3.3
The RCB may, in respect of a venue:
a) Issue a licence subject to such terms and conditions as it thinks fit or may
refuse to issue a licence; and
b) Revoke or suspend a venue licence if the venue licensee fails to comply
with the licence or any condition.
3.1.4 NOTICES TO THE PUBLIC
3.1.4.1
At all meetings to which the public have access, other than Reliability Trials on
a public road, the following standard notice warning the public that a motorcycle
competition is in progress shall be prominently displayed.
WARNING TO THE PUBLIC
Motor racing is DANGEROUS, and spectators attending this track do so
entirely at their own risk. It is a condition of admission that all persons
having a connection with the promotion, and/or organisation, and/or
conduct of the meeting, including the owners of the land and the riders
and owners of vehicles and passengers in the vehicles, are absolved
from all liability arising out of the accidents causing damage or personal
injury to spectators or ticket holders, except where due care and skill has
not been exercised
3.1.4.2
Wherever at such meetings, it is considered desirable by the promoters of the
meetings, or is a condition of the grant of a Venue Licence. That the public
shall be excluded from a certain area, the following standard form of notice
prohibiting the public from access to that area shall be prominently displayed.
PROHIBITED AREA
The Public is not permitted in this
area.
48
COMPETITIONS
3.1.4.3
3.1.4.4
No other form of notice for warning the public generally or for prohibiting access
to certain areas shall be displayed. The standard form of notice as shown
above measures 550mm x 450mm.
A sign must be prominently displayed in pit areas warning that the carrying or
consumption of alcoholic beverages by all personnel in the area is prohibited.
The sign shall measure 550mm x 450mm and shall read:
WARNING
The carrying or consumption of alcoholic beverages in the pit area is
prohibited.
By Order,
Motorcycling Australia Ltd
NOTICE
No Animals Allowed.
Guide Dogs Excepted
By Order,
Motorcycling Australia Ltd
3.1.4.5
At the entrances to any venue a promoter must prominently display the
following sign:
The riding of motorcycles in the pit area is only allowed in marked access
lanes.
By Order,
Motorcycling Australia Ltd
3.1.4.6
Pit areas must be clearly defined. A promoter must prominently display the
following sign at the entrance to the pit area. In all pit areas the following rule
will apply: Riding of motorcycles is prohibited in the pit area unless in marked
access lanes at walking pace, and the marked access lanes are prohibited for
pedestrians.
3.2 THE PROMOTION AND CONDUCT OF COMPETITIONS
3.2.1 Authority to Promote
3.2.1.1
Subject to these Rules, competitions may be promoted or conducted by:
a) A controlling body; or
b) A promoter.
3.2.1.2
Promoters must be affiliated to the RCB.
a) Where an SCB is the RCB, promoters must affiliate with an SCB;
b) Where MA is the RCB, promoters must affiliate with MA if they have not
already affiliated with an SCB.
3.2.1.3
SCBs must notify MA of the details of affiliated promoters within one month of
them affiliating.
3.2.2 Competition Permits
3.2.2.1
No competition may be promoted or conducted without a competition permit.
3.2.2.2
An application for a competition permit must be in the prescribed form to the
RCB and must:
a) Be accompanied by the prescribed fee;
b) For any meeting forming part of an Australian Championship, be
submitted at least three months before the date set for the meeting;
c) For international meetings (i.e. involving licensees from federations other
than MA and MNZ), MA series or national meetings, be submitted at least
eight weeks before the date set for the meeting.
49
COMPETITIONS
d)
3.2.2.3
3.2.2.4
For any other meeting, be submitted at least fourteen days before the date
set for the meeting;.
e) Be accompanied by proposed SR.
f)
Identify the proposed venue.
An RCB may issue a competition permit subject to terms and conditions or may
refuse to issue a permit.
a) At the time of issue of a competition permit to a promoter, the RCB may
require the promoter to deposit with the RCB a bond which:
i)
Is equivalent to the prize money.
ii)
Is an estimate by the RCB of the gate levy payable
b) Where a bond is not required the RCB will assume responsibility for the
prize money.
c) A permit must not be issued unless the promoter making application is
insured to the satisfaction of the RCB.
Where any of the conditions of a competition permit are not satisfied the RCB
may revoke the permit.
3.2.3 Refund of Permit Fees
3.2.3.1
If a meeting does not take place, any fee paid for the permit must be repaid
unless in the opinion of the RCB the meeting did not take place because of the
conduct of the permit holder. In that event, the RCB may withhold the refund
wholly or in part at its discretion.
3.2.4 Forfeiture of Permit
3.2.4.1
A promoter will be liable to forfeit a permit if the promoter breaches any of
these Rules, and in all things done in relation to a meeting, must comply with,
and is bound by:
a) These Rules;
b) All conditions of the permit;
c) Any SR; and
d) All venue safety and other standards proclaimed under these Rules.
3.2.5 The Appointment of Officials
3.2.5.1
A meeting must not take place unless there are present at least the following
officials:
a) A Steward, a Jury, or a Referee.
b) A Clerk of the Course.
c) A Race Secretary.
d) A Scrutineer.
3.2.5.2
Officials for Australian Championships forming a series must:
a) In respect of stewards, juries and race directors, be appointed by MA.
b) In respect of all other key officials, chief marshals, eligibility scrutineers
and chief technical scrutineers, be nominated by the host SCB for MA
approval.
c) In respect of all other officials, be appointed by the promoter.
3.2.5.3
Officials for Australian Championships which do not form part of a series must:
a) In respect of stewards, Jury Presidents and eligibility scrutineers be
appointed by MA.
b) In respect of all other key officials, chief marshals and chief technical
scrutineers be appointed by the host SCB.
c) In respect of all other officials, be appointed by the promoter.
3.2.5.4
Officials for meetings controlled by MA which are not Australian Championships
must:
a) In respect of stewards, be appointed by MA.
b) In respect of all other officials, be appointed by the promoter.
3.2.5.5
Officials for meetings controlled by SCBs will be appointed in accordance with
the by laws of the host SCB.
50
COMPETITIONS
3.2.6 Competitions between Categories of Machine
3.2.6.1
In respect of any competition:
a) Unless otherwise provided for by these Rules or any relevant SR, no two
machines of a different category may compete in any event.
b) No competition may be conducted under these Rules between a
motorcycle and any other vehicle.
3.2.7 Invitations for Entries
3.2.7.1
A promoter may invite and receive entries to any competition authorised by the
permit. Every invitation to enter and every entry form sent out to a potential
participant must:
a) Specify the closing date for applications to enter.
b) Specify the amount of the entry fee.
c) Be accompanied by a copy of the SR for the competition.
3.2.8 Applications for Entries
3.2.8.1
A competition licensee wishing to participate in a meeting may apply to enter
the meeting. The application must:
a) Be in the prescribed form and contain the prescribed information;
b) Be accompanied by the prescribed fee;
c) If required by the RCB, be accompanied by a medical certificate that the
applicant is fit to participate in the meeting.
d) Contain no false or misleading information.
e) Comply with the SR for the meeting.
3.2.8.2
The promoter to whom such an application is submitted may accept or reject it
and, if the application is rejected, must inform the applicant of the rejection.
3.2.9 Responsibilities of Promoters
3.2.9.1
A promoter, on or before the day of the meeting must:
a) Publish a program which must contain:
i)
The names of all competitors and the identity of each
competitor’s entrant, club and state.
ii)
The identification number of each competitor and motorcycle.
iii)
Any applicable starting position and handicap.
iv)
The status and identity of all key officials.
v)
All relevant information about the events to be conducted.
b) Provide copies of the program to all key officials, entrants and
competitors;
c) Appoint officials and in so doing may appoint assistant pit and flag
marshals who need not be the holders of officials' licences. No assistant
pit or flag marshal may carry out any duty unless directly supervised by a
licensed official;
d) Provide fire extinguishers to the satisfaction of the RCB;
e) Where MA is the RCB, at any event where speed is the determining
factor, provide an ambulance which is;
i)
Permitted to transport injured persons on public roads.
ii)
Manned by paramedics.
f)
At all other events where speed is the determining factor provide, to the
satisfaction of the SCB:
i)
An ambulance; or
ii)
First aid vehicle; or
iii)
A medical room, which may be mobile.
g) Ensure medical facilities are operated by qualified first aid personnel.
h) Ensure that spectators:
i)
At speedway/track events are not permitted inside the circuit.
ii)
At all other events are not permitted in areas, which may
endanger themselves or riders.
51
COMPETITIONS
iii)
3.2.9.2
3.2.9.3
3.2.9.4
3.2.9.5
Notify the nearest police station and the nearest hospital
the event is to take place. These notifications must be
given at least 21 days prior to the event.
A promoter must, no more than twenty one days after a meeting pay all fees,
traveling and accommodation expenses due to controlling bodies, riders and
officials in respect of that meeting.
A promoter is responsible for the payment of all officials’ fees and expenses
other than the steward’s fee and any costs associated with the Race Director.
Unless otherwise instructed by the RCB a promoter must, no more seven days
after the results have been declared official, pay all prize monies and prizes
due to the riders.
At events where drug or fuel testing has taken place an RCB may instruct the
promoter to delay payments of prize monies until the results of those tests are
published.
3.2.10 Betting at Meetings
3.2.10.1
No person involved in the conduct of any meeting may conduct any bet or
wager at a competition in respect of that meeting.
3.2.11 Results
3.2.11.1
As soon as practicable and no more than five days, after the completion of a
meeting, the steward must send the results to the RCB.
3.2.11.2
Unless and until all protests and appeals arising from a meeting are finally
determined the results will be provisional.
3.2.11.3
In respect of any provisional results, any public announcement or
advertisement concerning those results must state that they are provisional;
and are subject to official confirmation.
3.2.11.4
As soon as practicable and no more than five days, after the final determination
of all protests and appeals in relation to any meeting, the RCB must announce
that the results are final.
3.2.11.5
A meeting will commence and conclude at the times fixed by the steward.
3.2.12 Results in Australian Championships and MA Series
3.2.12.1
Results in any Australian titled event or MA series event:
a) Must be faxed or e-mailed to MA by the steward by 9am on the Monday
next following the event.
b) Must include the names of all finishers in the event.
3.2.13 Supplementary Regulations
3.2.13.1
An RCB may make SR, which must be consistent with these Rules, for the
purposes of the promotion and conduct of any competition.
3.2.13.2
SR:
a) Have the force and effect of these Rules;
b) Must comply, as closely as possible, with the model SR in the by-laws;
c) Must be printed and in the prescribed form;
d) Must be delivered to those persons or bodies whom the RCB considers
necessary to enable the competition to be conducted fairly and efficiently;
e) Must be published and displayed in a place to which officials and
competitors have reasonable access.
f)
Must not be amended after delivery and publication in accordance with
this Rule unless, in the opinion of the steward, exceptional circumstances
arise requiring amendments.
3.2.13.3
SR for competitions may prescribe:
a) Venue descriptions.
b) Dates, times and places of competitions.
c) Entry times, methods and forms.
d) Competitor and other numbers and number plates.
e) Methods of machine examination.
f)
Methods of practicing and qualifying.
52
COMPETITIONS
g)
h)
i)
j)
k)
l)
m)
n)
o)
Methods of starting and finishing.
Flags and signals.
Competition officials.
Entry and other fees.
Prizes and trophies.
Competition formats.
Methods of scoring.
Timetables.
Such other facts, matters or things as are necessary to ensure the fair and
safe conduct of competitions.
3.2.14 Supplementary Regulations for Australian Championships and MA Series
3.2.14.1
A draft of proposed SR for an Australian Championship and MA series must be:
a) Sent to MA at least three months prior to the date of the event.
b) In electronic form (disc or email).
3.3 LICENSING
3.3.1 The Licensing of Competitors
3.3.1.1
A person may not compete in any competition unless licensed under these
Rules.
3.3.1.2
MA may, either independently or in conjunction with other controlling bodies,
establish and conduct training courses for competition licensees. The content
of the courses must have regard to:
a) The interests of the sport.
b) The need for safety in all aspects of the sport.
c) The desirability of fair and even competition between competitors having
the highest possible skills at each level of competition.
d) The graduated development of the skills of competitors.
3.3.1.3
In the event of courses being established under the above Rule, no person who
has not successfully completed an appropriate course may apply for, or be
issued with, a competition licence.
3.3.1.4
Competition licences are divided into the following categories and must be
appropriately endorsed:
a) Junior one meeting
b) Junior club
c) Junior National
d) One meeting
e) Club
f)
National
g) International
h) FIM Prize Event
i)
World Championship
3.3.1.5
Non Competitive licences are divided into the following categories.
a) Nipper
b) Single Use Recreational
c) Recreational
3.3.1.6
No competition licensee may compete in any competition above the level
endorsed on that person's licence.
53
COMPETITIONS
Meeting Type
Licence Type
3.3.1.7
3.3.1.8
3.3.1.9
3.3.1.10
3.3.1.11
3.3.1.12
One meeting
Club
National
Practice
a
a
a
Club
a
a
a
Interclub
a
a
a
a
National
A competition licensee from any country in which there is an FMN recognised
by the FIM:
a) May compete in Australia as if that person were a competition licensee
under these Rules; but
b) Must compete at the level, or its nearest equivalent, endorsed on that
person's licence; and
c) May not compete unless and until that person satisfies the steward of a
meeting in which that person seeks to participate that that person is
appropriately insured and is authorised by that FMN.
No person other than a licensee competing under the previous Rule may be
issued with a competition licence unless that person is a member of a Club.
This rule does not apply to applicants for a Single Use Recreational Licence.
MA, or an SCB on behalf of MA, may issue a competition licence to any
person. The form of a competition licence will be as prescribed in by-laws.
MA may issue international licences on behalf of FIM to holders of a current
national licence with insurance to FIM standard.
An application for a competition licence, other than a one meeting licence and
international licence, must:
a) Be to the SCB of the State or Territory in which the applicant ordinarily
resides;
b) Be in the prescribed form;
c) Be accompanied by:
i)
Two passport photographs of the applicant.
ii)
Proof of the age of the applicant.
iii)
Proof that the applicant has passed an appropriate licence test.
iv)
Proof the applicant has current ambulance subscription.
v)
The prescribed fee.
d) If the applicant is a minor, be accompanied by the written authorisation of
at least one of the applicant's parents or the legal guardian of the
applicant.
e) If the applicant has never been the holder of a competition licence, be
accompanied by any one of the following:
i)
The applicant's current road motorcycle licence;
ii)
Proof that the applicant has attended a motorcycle training
course conducted by, or with the approval of, a state
government authority;
iii)
Proof that the applicant has attended any SCB accredited
training school;
iv)
Proof that the applicant has attended a training school
conducted by an accredited coach; or
v)
Endorsement on the application by a club official authorised by
the SCB that in the opinion of that official the applicant is
capable of controlling a motorcycle.
A first time licence applicant must undertake a test of knowledge of these rules.
54
COMPETITIONS
3.3.1.13
3.3.1.14
3.3.1.15
3.3.1.16
3.3.1.17
3.3.1.18
3.3.1.19
3.3.1.20
3.3.1.21
3.3.1.22
3.3.1.23
3.3.1.24
An application for renewal of a competition licence must:
a) Be to the SCB of the State or Territory in which the applicant ordinarily
resides;
b) Be in the prescribed form;
c) Be accompanied by:
i)
Two passport photographs of the applicant.
ii)
The licence to be renewed.
iii)
Proof the applicant has current ambulance subscription.
iv)
The prescribed fee.
On receipt of an application for the issue or renewal of a competition licence
the SCB may:
a) Delay the issue or renewal for no more than fourteen days.
b) Issue or renew the licence unconditionally.
c) Refuse to issue or renew the licence; or
d) Issue or renew the licence on such terms and conditions as it thinks fit.
An applicant for a competition licence who is aggrieved by a decision of the
SCB under the previous Rule may appeal to the appellate body of that SCB.
MA, or each SCB on behalf of MA, must, in each year, deliver to every person
issued with a twelve month competition licence a copy of these Rules.
An SCB which issues a competition licence must, within one month of issue,
notify MA which must enter the information on a register of licensed
competitors maintained for that purpose by MA and kept at the registered office
of MA.
A competition licence, other than a one meeting licence, continues in force for
twelve months from the date of issue except:
a) a renewal application which is lodged within 3 months after the expiry date
in which case the licence will continue in force for twelve months from the
date the application was received by the SCB; or
b) A renewal application which is lodged more than 3 months after the expiry
date in which case it will be treated as a first time application.
A competition licensee must:
a) Produce the licence on demand to any key official during any meeting; or
b) If unable to produce the licence, complete a licence declaration certifying
compliance with the licence requirements of these Rules and forthwith pay
the prescribed non-production fee.
No person who is serving a suspension from the FIM or any federation may be
issued with a licence during that period of suspension.
Any period of licence suspension ordered by the FIM or another federation will
concurrently apply to the competitor’s MA licence.
Subject to the next Rule, an SCB may not issue a competition licence to, or
renew the competition licence of, any person who has not been a resident of
that SCBs State or Territory for at least three months.
An SCB may issue a competition licence to any person who is not a resident of
that SCBs State or Territory:
a) If that person has not been the holder of a licence in any other state or
territory; or
b) If that person, being the holder of a licence in another State or Territory, is
authorised in writing by the controlling body of that other State or Territory
to apply for a licence outside that other State or Territory; or
c) If that person has recently arrived in Australia from another Federation and
has a clearance from that Federation to apply for an MA licence.
Any competition licensee whose licence is lost or destroyed may apply to an
SCB for the issue of a replacement. The SCB may charge the prescribed
replacement fee to replace the licence.
3.3.2 The Licensing of Entrants
3.3.2.1
A person or body corporate may not enter any rider to participate in any
competition unless that person or body corporate is licensed as an entrant.
55
COMPETITIONS
3.3.2.2
3.3.2.3
3.3.2.4
3.3.2.5
3.3.2.6
3.3.2.7
3.3.2.8
MA, or an SCB on behalf of MA, may issue an entrant's licence to any person
or body corporate. The form of an entrant's licence will be as prescribed in bylaws.
An application for an entrant's licence and for renewal thereof, must:
a) Be to the SCB of the State or Territory in which the applicant ordinarily
resides;
b) Be in the prescribed form.
c) Be accompanied by the prescribed fee.
On receipt of an application for the issue or renewal of an entrant's licence the
SCB may:
a) Issue or renew the licence unconditionally.
b) Refuse to issue or renew the licence; or
c) Issue or renew the licence on such terms and conditions as it thinks fit.
An applicant for an entrant's licence who is aggrieved by a decision of the SCB
under the previous Rule may appeal to the appellate body of the SCB.
MA, or each SCB on behalf of MA, must, in each year, deliver to each licensee
a copy of these Rules.
An SCB which issues an entrant's licence must, within one month of issue,
notify MA which must enter the information on a register of licensed entrants
maintained for that purpose by MA and kept at the registered office of MA.
An entrant's licence continues in force for 12 months from the date of issue.
3.3.3 The Licensing of Speedway Mechanics
3.3.3.1
In speedway a person may not work as a mechanic for any rider in any
competition unless that person:
a) Is licensed as a mechanic.
b) Is not less than sixteen years of age.
3.3.3.2
MA, or an SCB on behalf of MA, may issue a mechanic's licence to any person.
The form of a mechanic's licence will be as prescribed in by-laws.
3.3.3.3
An application for a mechanic's licence and for renewal thereof, must:
a) Be to the SCB of the State or Territory in which the applicant ordinarily
resides;
b) Be in the prescribed form;
c) Be accompanied by:
i)
Two passport photographs of the applicant;
ii)
Proof of the age of the applicant;
iii)
Proof the applicant has current ambulance subscription.
iv)
The prescribed fee.
3.3.3.4
On receipt of an application for the issue or renewal of a mechanic's licence the
SCB may:
a) Issue or renew the licence unconditionally;
b) Refuse to issue or renew the licence; or
c) Issue or renew the licence on such terms and conditions, as it thinks fit.
3.3.3.5
An applicant for a mechanic's licence who is aggrieved by a decision of the
SCB under the previous Rule may appeal to the appellate body of that SCB.
3.3.3.6
MA, or each SCB on behalf of MA, must, in each year, deliver to each licensee
a copy of these Rules.
3.3.3.7
An SCB which issues a mechanic's licence must, within one month of issue,
notify MA which must enter the information on a register of licensed mechanics
maintained for that purpose by MA and kept at the registered offices of MA
3.3.3.8
A mechanic's licence continues in force for 12 months from the date of issue.
3.3.3.9
A mechanic's licensee must:
a) Carry the licence at all times during any meeting;
b) Produce the licence on demand to any key official during any meeting.
56
COMPETITIONS
c)
If unable to produce the licence, complete a statutory declaration certifying
compliance with the licence requirements of these Rules and forthwith pay
the prescribed non-production fee.
3.4 OFFENCES
3.4.1 List of Offences
3.4.1.1
Any promoter, licensee or parent/guardian of a licensee who is a minor,
who:
a) Breaches any of these Rules, or any SR;
b) Acts in a manner which is prejudicial to the sport or breaches the Code of
Conduct;
c) Bribes or attempts to bribe, directly or indirectly, any competitor,
controlling body, appellate body or official exercising authority under these
Rules.
d) Offers, receives or offers to receive, directly or indirectly, any bribe in
respect of the exercise of any authority under these Rules.
e) Being a promoter advertises, and/or programmes riders who have not
entered the meeting.
f)
Being a promoter, club, entrant, or rider knowingly publishes false
information concerning the results of any competition.
g) Enters, or attempts to enter, any ineligible person, body or machine in any
competition.
h) Does any act the direct or indirect purpose of which is to breach or cause
to be breached any agreement between any promoter, entrant, or rider in
respect of any competition.
i)
Acts in a reckless or dangerous manner while competing.
j)
Disobeys the lawful direction, order or requirement of any controlling body,
appellate body, inspector or official under these Rules.
k) Obstructs or misleads any official in the exercise of any of the powers and
duties conferred on that official by these Rules.
l)
Behaves in an offensive or abusive manner toward any competitor or any
official exercising authority under these Rules.
m) Assaults any competitor or any official exercising authority under these
Rules.
n) Without reasonable cause, fails to participate in a competition for which
entrant fees have been paid by or on behalf of that person or body or in
the case of speedway a competitor who has nominated for that
competition.
o) Participates in any competition for which that person or body has failed to
complete an entry form or pay entrant fees.
p) Promotes, participates in, or officiates at any competition which is capable
of being sanctioned by MA but which is not authorized under these Rules.
q) Uses other than the prescribed fuel in any competition.
r)
Fails to comply with the direction of an authorised official to submit to a
fuel test under these Rules.
s) Being an entrant causes or permits the rider entered by the entrant, or any
mechanic or assistant of that rider, not to comply with any of these Rules.
t)
Being a competitor where any of their mechanics, assistants, team
members or in the case of a competitor under the age of 18 years, their
parents, fails to comply with any of these rules.
u) Commits a doping offence under MA’s Anti-Doping Policy
v) Being an official knowingly:
i)
Signs a record of measurement as a personal record when it
was not;
ii)
Assists in the promotion or conduct of any competition which is
not authorised under these rules; or
57
COMPETITIONS
3.4.1.2
3.4.1.3
iii)
Fails to comply with these rules.
— is liable to be penalised under these Rules.
Note: Should a member of a rider’s team or family breach any of the above
rules, the rider may be held responsible.
Subject to Rule 3.4.1.3, a prosecution for any alleged offence under Rule
3.4.1.1 committed during the course of a meeting must be:
a) If instituted by the Clerk of the Course;
i)
Heard and determined by the Clerk of the Course; or
ii)
Referred to the Steward; or
b) If instituted by the Steward
i)
Heard and determined by the Steward; or
ii)
Referred to the RCB; or
c) If instituted by a duly appointed Inspector, heard and determined by the
RCB.
A prosecution for any alleged offence under Rule 3.4.1.1 committed during the
course of a meeting being part of an MA series must be:
a) If instituted by the Clerk of the Course;
i)
Heard and determined by the Clerk of Course; or
ii)
Referred to the Steward; or
b) If instituted by the Race Director;
i)
Referred to the Steward; or
c) If instituted by the Steward;
i)
Heard and determined by the Steward; or
ii)
Referred to the RCB; or
d) If instituted by a duly appointed Inspector, heard and determined by the
RCB.
3.4.2 The Imposition of Penalties During Events
3.4.2.1
In any event during the course of a meeting, a steward or Clerk of the Course
may fine, exclude, impose penalty or time points on, or relegate, any
competitor, if:
a) The whole or any part of that competitor's machine has left the track and
thereby gained an advantage, unless such action was:
i)
For the safety of other competitors; or
ii)
Due to the action of other competitors.
b) The competitor has gained an advantage as a result of an unfair start.
c) The competitor has been guilty of unfair or unsafe conduct.
d) The competitor receives outside assistance other than:
i)
By a relevant official at the start of an event; or
ii)
In the interests of safety,
iii)
Outside assistance includes radio communication, provided
that SR may permit outside assistance.
e) The competitor's machine is dangerous.
f)
The competitor's machine does not comply with the requirements of these
Rules or any SR.
g) The competitor has unreasonably refused to submit to a medical test
required by the Steward under these Rules
h) The competitor, or the competitor's team, has breached the refuelling
Rule.
3.4.2.2
No person may protest against, or appeal from, a decision to impose a penalty
during an event. For the purposes of this Rule a decision does not operate as
such unless and until it is notified to the competitor affected by it or to that
competitor’s team, providing such notification is practicable within the context of
the event.
58
COMPETITIONS
3.4.3 Hearing and Determination of Charges during Meetings
3.4.3.1
In any proceeding relating to the imposition of penalties for offences committed
during the course of a meeting:
a) The Steward or Clerk of the Course:
i)
May act on their own initiative;
ii)
May act on such information and in such manner as they think
fit having regard to the conduct for which a penalty is to be
imposed;
iii)
Must, in respect of all prosecutions other than those under Rule
3.4.2, conduct a hearing;
iv)
Must, as soon as practicable after determining the penalty,
inform the competitor and the competitor's team of the penalty
imposed; and
v)
May not impose any fine greater than the maximum prescribed
in by-laws.
b) No person may be represented by a legal practitioner.
3.4.4 Inspectors
3.4.4.1
A controlling body may, by written authority, appoint Inspectors.
3.4.4.2
The powers and duties of Inspectors are:
a) To institute prosecutions for offences under these Rules other than
offences alleged to have been committed by competitors during the
course of a event; and
b) To collect and collate evidence reasonably required for the preparation of
any prosecutions under these Rules and to present such evidence to the
RCB.
c) To investigate the conduct of meetings and make recommendations to the
RCB.
3.4.4.3
In performing duties under these Rules an Inspector:
a) May ask questions and give directions as reasonably required;
b) Must comply with all directions of any appellate body; and
c) Must maintain proper and accurate records of all investigations
undertaken and any proceedings arising there from;
3.4.5 Charges
3.4.5.1
Charges for offences under these Rules, other than by Stewards, Race Director
or Clerks of the Course may only be instituted by inspectors.
3.4.5.2
In relation to any charge instituted by an inspector:
a) The offence will not be taken to have been committed unless proved to the
satisfaction of the RCB;
b) The person charged may be represented by a legal practitioner or other
advocate or may be unrepresented;
c) The person charged may give evidence, may call any witness, may
produce any exhibit, or may remain silent and no adverse inference may
be drawn from the exercise of the right of silence;
d) The RCB must have regard to the principles set out in the next Rule;
e) The RCB must deliver to the person charged, written reasons for the
finding, whether of guilt or innocence, and for the penalty imposed;
f)
The RCB may refer charges to its appellate body.
3.4.6 Penalties
3.4.6.1
In imposing any penalty, the Steward, Clerk of the Course, RCB or the
appellate body must have regard to the following principles:
a) No penalty should be imposed unless and until the offender has been
given the opportunity to make representations as to the nature and extent
of the penalty;
b) In ordinary circumstances a single penalty should be imposed for a single
offence;
59
COMPETITIONS
c)
3.4.6.2
3.4.6.3
3.4.6.4
3.4.6.5
3.4.6.6
3.4.6.7
The punishment for an offence should be commensurate with the gravity
and effects of the offence;
d) The interests of the sport are paramount;
e) The severity of penalties imposed on an individual should increase if that
individual continues to commit offences against these Rules;
f)
Mitigating factors put by or on behalf of an offender must be taken into
account, as must the effects on others of the actions of the offender.
The Clerk of the Course may impose the following penalties for any offence
committed under these Rules:
a) A reprimand;
b) A fine no greater than $1,000;
c) Relegation;
d) Exclusion;
The Steward may impose the following penalties for any offence committed
under these Rules:
a) A reprimand;
b) A fine no greater than $2,000;
c) Relegation;
d) Exclusion;
e) Suspension of no more than 6 months.
The RCB may impose the following penalties for any offence committed under
these Rules:
a) A reprimand;
b) A fine no greater than $5,000;
c) Relegation;
d) Exclusion;
e) Suspension of no more than 24 months.
The RCB may determine a period during which a licence will not be issued to
persons falsely completing a licence declaration under rule 3.3.1.17. b)
An appellate body may impose the following penalties for any offence
committed under these Rules:
a) A reprimand;
b) A fine no greater than $10,000;
c) Relegation;
d) Exclusion;
e) Suspension;
f)
Disqualification.
In imposing a penalty under these Rules an appellate body may:
a) Fix a time for payment of any fine;
b) Suspend the operation of any penalty unconditionally or subject to terms
and conditions;
c) Fix a time for the commencement of any penalty, but in the absence of
such fixing, the penalty will commence from the moment of its
pronouncement;
d) Impose such conditions as are in the circumstances just and expedient;
e) Require the offender to deliver any document, record, material, object,
piece of equipment, machine or thing as is reasonably necessary to
ensure:
i)
That the penalty is carried into full force and effect;
ii)
That all persons or bodies affected are made aware of the
penalty; and
iii)
That any consequential orders or directions are complied with.
f)
Make such consequential orders or directions as the appellate body
considers necessary and reasonable for the full and effectual operation of
the penalty.
60
COMPETITIONS
3.4.6.8
Unless otherwise ordered:
a) Every decision of an appellate body will take effect from the moment of
pronouncement of the penalty.
b) The operation of a decision of an appellate body will be suspended upon
the lodging of a notice of appeal against the decision.
3.4.7 Default penalties
3.4.7.1
Any person or body having power to impose any fine under these Rules must:
a) Fix a time within which the fine is to be paid.
3.4.7.2
An RCB may impose, as a penalty in default of payment of the fine within that
time, a penalty of suspension or disqualification, which may be double the
period the payment of the fine was in default.
3.4.8 Tests for Prohibited Substances
3.4.8.1
A person who commits a doping offence contrary to the MA Anti-Doping Policy
will be sanctioned by MA in accordance with that policy which is published in
this manual.
3.4.8.2
For the purposes of this Rule:
a) An SCB may, by instrument in writing, delegate to MA its authority to
administer tests under this Rule, and in that case MA will be deemed to be
the RCB in relation to the administration of tests;
b) The RCB is responsible for the receipt of the results of tests.
3.4.8.3
Prohibited substances:
Refer to the World Anti-Doping Agencies 2004 Prohibited List under rule 28.23
for prohibited substances.
3.4.9 Fines
3.4.9.1
Fines are payable to the RCB.
3.4.10 Suspension and Disqualification
3.4.10.1
An order for suspension of any person or body will operate throughout the
period thereof so as to prevent that person or body from participating in any
competition.
3.4.10.2
An order for suspension or disqualification from competition may operate so as
to prevent from participation in competition a machine or machines of a
particular manufacturer provided that no such order may be made unless the
appellate body is satisfied that the offence or offences leading to the making of
the order were committed with the knowledge, or at the instigation, of the
manufacturer or the manufacturer's agent.
3.4.10.3
Any person or body who is the subject of:
a) An order of exclusion.
b) An order for suspension or disqualification for any offence committed at,
connected with, or arising from, any competition;
— is liable to forfeit the right to receive or retain any award, trophy or prize in
respect of that competition.
3.4.10.4
If any penalty imposed alters the result of any competition, the RCB must, as
soon as practicable after being notified of the penalty, alter the record of that
competition so as to reflect the alteration.
3.4.11 Penalties – Juniors
3.4.11.1
The Steward may fine or exclude any junior competitor for the actions of the
agents or parents of the competitor.
61
4. PROTESTS AND APPEALS
4.1 PROTESTS
4.1.1 Right of Protest
4.1.1.1
With the exception of penalties imposed during an event any entrant or
competitor may protest:
a) Against a decision to reject an application by a competition licence holder
to compete in any competition.
b) Against a decision, action or determination of any official.
c) Against the action or conduct of any other competitor, entrant, mechanic
or team member during the course of any event.
4.1.1.2
Any protest must:
a) Be in writing.
b) Be accompanied by the prescribed fee which must be remitted to the RCB
irrespective of the outcome of the protest.
c) Be made to a steward of the relevant meeting.
d) Comply with the following time limits:
i)
For a protest under sub Rules a) and b) of the previous Rule,
as soon as practicable after being informed of the decision.
ii)
For a protest under sub Rule c) of the previous Rule, no more
than thirty minutes after the action or conduct.
iii)
For a protest under sub-Rule c) in a speedway or Supercross
meeting, no more than five minutes after the action or conduct.
4.1.2 Protest Hearings
4.1.2.1
A steward must hear and determine any protest and must notify the outcome to
the protester, and any person materially affected, within a reasonable time.
4.1.2.2
A steward may refer any question raised in any protest, or the protest itself, to
the relevant appellate body and must:
a) Notify such referral to the protester, and to any person materially affected
by the protest;
b) Provide to the appellate body all evidence and exhibits submitted to the
steward in relation to that protest.
c) Comply with all directions and instructions of the appellate body.
4.1.2.3
In hearing and determining any protest a steward may:
a) Direct any reasonable alteration or modification to any course.
b) Alter or amend any programme.
c) Overrule, vary or amend any decision or direction of an official.
d) Substitute for any decision of an official the decision of the steward with or
without conditions.
e) Give such directions, instructions or orders as the steward thinks fit for the
efficient and fair conduct of any competition.
f)
Alter, vary or amend the result of, or prize for, any competition.
g) Do whatever is necessary for the proper consideration of the protest.
4.1.2.4
In hearing and determining any protest a steward must apply the following
principles:
a) The protester and any person materially affected or likely to be so affected
by the outcome of the protest must be notified of the protest and the time
and place fixed for the hearing;
b) The determination of the protest must be in writing and published to the
protester and any person affected by the determination.
c) The principles of natural justice must apply.
62
PROTESTS AND APPEALS
d)
e)
f)
g)
The protester and any person materially affected or likely to be so affected
by the determination may not be represented by a legal practitioner.
The steward is not bound by the rules of evidence and may be informed of
facts in such manner as the steward thinks fit.
The steward must determine the protest according to equity, good
conscience and the substantial merits of the case.
Unless otherwise ordered every decision made by a steward will take
effect from the moment of pronouncement of the decision.
4.1.3 Protests - Juniors
4.1.3.1
In addition to the Rules regulating the making of protests in all competitions,
juniors must comply with the following:
a) A protest may only be made by a competitor.
b) The competitor must indicate the protest to an official prior to returning to
the pits.
c) The Clerk of the Course must designate an area, to be announced at the
riders' briefing and to be marked by a purple flag, where an official must
be present to note any indications of protest.
d) No discussion on the content of the protest may take place at the marked
position.
e) A competitor who indicates a protest must return to the pits and present
the protest to the Clerk of the Course.
4.2 APPELLATE BODIES
4.2.1 The Appointment of Appellate Bodies
4.2.1.1
Each controlling body must appoint a suitably qualified person or persons as an
appellate body. A person is suitably qualified if:
a) In the case of an appellate body consisting of one member, that person is
an admitted practitioner of the Supreme Court of any state or territory of
Australia; or
b) In the case of an appellate body of three members, the chair is held by an
admitted practitioner of the Supreme Court of any state or territory of
Australia and the other members have knowledge of, and experience in,
any aspect of the sport.
4.2.1.2
No person may sit as a member of an appellate body, hearing any appeal, if
that person has an interest in the outcome of the appeal.
4.2.2 Hearings by Appellate Bodies
4.2.2.1
An appellate body must hear and determine each appeal and in so doing:
a) Is not bound by the rules of evidence.
b) May inform itself in such manner as it thinks fit.
c) Must act according to equity, good conscience and the substantial merits
of the case.
d) May affirm, quash or vary the decision appealed against in such manner
and subject to such conditions as it thinks fit.
e) May not impose any fine greater than that prescribed in by-laws.
f)
Must publish reasons for its decision.
g) May, at its discretion, award such costs to any party as it thinks fit.
4.2.2.2
An appellate body may not direct that an event be re-run.
4.2.3 Decisions by Appellate Bodies
4.2.3.1
Unless otherwise ordered:
a) Every decision made by an appellate body will take effect from the
moment of pronouncement of the decision.
b) The operation of a decision of an appellate body will be suspended upon
the lodging of a notice of appeal against the decision.
63
PROTESTS AND APPEALS
4.3 APPEALS
4.3.1 Right to Appeal
4.3.1.1
A person or body having a material interest in a decision of:
a) A steward or jury arising from a protest; or
b) A specialist sub-committee.
may appeal to the appellate body of the RCB.
4.3.1.2
A person or body, including a steward of a meeting having a material interest in
a decision of an SCB or the appellate body of an SCB may appeal to the
appellate body of MA.
4.3.2 Commencement of Appeals
4.3.2.1
Appeals must be commenced by notice of appeal which must be:
a) In writing and signed by the appellant;
b) Lodged with the relevant appellate body; and
c) Accompanied by the prescribed filing fee.
4.3.3 Time Limits for Appeals
4.3.3.1
The time for lodging a notice of appeal is twenty one days after the decision
has been notified to the appellant.
4.3.3.2
An appellate body may extend the time for lodging a notice of appeal if it
considers that it is just and equitable so to do.
4.3.3.3
Unless otherwise directed by the appellate body, appeals must be heard and
determined no more than four months after lodgment of the notice of appeal.
64
5. ALL DISCIPLINES
5.1 APPLICATION OF THIS CHAPTER
5.1.1 Generality of Chapter
5.1.1.1
The Rules set out in this chapter are for all disciplines.
5.1.1.2
Unless otherwise stated, the requirements of any discipline-specific chapter
override the requirements of this chapter.
5.1.1.3
Everything that is not authorised and prescribed in this chapter, or in the
discipline specific chapters, is strictly prohibited.
5.2 ELIGIBILITY
5.2.1 General Eligibility
5.2.1.1
No person may participate in any non Australian Championship competition
unless and until that person's clothing and machine have been examined and
approved by the scrutineer for that competition.
5.2.1.2
No person may participate in an Australian Championship unless and until that
person’s clothing and machine have been examined and approved by the
scrutineer for that meeting or, if stipulated in SR, the person provided the
scrutineer with a signed checklist that the clothing and machine have been selfscrutineered.
5.2.1.3
At scrutineering, competitors must produce documents or other evidence as
required to verify engine and frame identity.
5.2.1.4
The onus of proving that a competitor, and the competitor's machine and
clothing, are eligible to compete, is on the person seeking to prove it.
5.2.1.5
Where any Rule prohibits the modification of any machine or class of
machines, that machine or that class will be deemed to have been modified if
any part or parts thereof have been altered from the machine or class as
manufactured by the machine manufacturer.
5.2.1.6
In the interpretation of any Rule relating to the design requirements for any
machine or class of machines reference may be made to relevant diagrams
appearing in these Rules.
5.2.2 Juniors only to compete in Junior Competitions
5.2.2.1
Subject to rules 6.9.2, 10.6.5 and 11.4, no person who is under the age of
sixteen years may compete in other than a junior competition unless that
competition is:
a) Moto-trials;
b) 125cc GP Road Race only. Junior riders cannot compete in combined
races.
c) Enduro.
5.2.3 Homologation
5.2.3.1
For any competition, MA may require that any machine, or any part of a
machine, including tyres, be homologated. For homologation details contact
MA.
5.3 ENGINES – FORMULAE FOR CALCULATION OF CAPACITIES AND CLASSES
5.3.1 Reciprocating Engines:
Cubic capacity = (D2 x 3.1416 x C x N)
4
65
ALL DISCIPLINES
Where:
D = Bore;
C = Stroke.
N = Number of cylinders. (D & C are in centimetres).
Rotary Engines:
Cubic capacity = (Z x V)
N
Where:
V = capacity of each chamber comprising the engine;
N = number of turns of the motor necessary to complete one cycle in a chamber and
Z = Combustion cycles per revolution. (V is in cubic centimetres)
5.3.2 Wankel System Engines With A Triangular Piston:
Cubic capacity = 2 x V x D
Where:
V = capacity of a single chamber.
D = the number of rotors.
Wankel system engines are classified as 4 strokes.
5.3.3 Superchargers and Turbochargers
5.3.3.1
Superchargers and turbochargers may only be used as follows:
a) In drag racing or record attempts.
b) In Production Class or Improved Touring racing when fitted as factory
equipment.
In these classes the capacity of a supercharged or
turbocharged engine must be no more than half the capacity of a normally
aspirated engine.
c) For Historic Road Race Period Two machines when fitted with a
supercharger as factory equipment.
5.3.4 Engine Capacity Tolerances
5.3.4.1
Unless otherwise specified in the following table, the actual engine capacity of a
machine competing in a capacity class may not exceed the prescribed capacity
for that class by more than 2%:
Permitted
excess
5%
5%
5%
Nil
Nil
Nil
Class
Sidecar and cycle car machines except road race
Period 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 Historic Road Race, Classic Dirt Track and Classic Motocross
80cc 2 stroke machines manufactured prior to 1/1/95
Record attempts and senior speedway / track.
65cc & 85cc machines
Road race sidecars
5.4 NUMBER PLATES
5.4.1 General
5.4.1.1
Three number plates must be fitted, one at the front and one each side for all
competitions except moto-trials.
5.4.1.2
Number plates must:
a) Be produced to a matt finish;
b) Where they are not an integral part of the machine or streamlining and are
under 1.6mm in thickness, have rolled or wired edges;
c) In the case of rectangular plates, have the corners formed to a 38mm
radius;
66
ALL DISCIPLINES
d)
5.4.1.3
5.4.1.4
5.4.1.5
Be made from a rigid material with minimum dimensions of 235mm height
and 285mm width; and
e) For sidecars, be positioned so that they are visible from the front and each
side of the sidecar.
Front number plates must have figures which are clearly visible at a distance of
20 metres and a solid 10mm wide border.
Side number plates must:
a) Be fitted above a horizontal line drawn through the rear axle;
b) Be fitted so that the front edge of the plate is behind a vertical line drawn
at 200mm to the rear of the riders footrest.
c) For machines with streamlining, be attached to a suitable surface which is
flat or with a curvature not exceeding 50mm from the true plane.
Advertising must be at least 25mm clear of the background of a number plate
unless the advertising is an integral part of the back plate cover.
5.4.2 Number Plate Colours - Except for Enduro
5.4.2.1
Colours must be as follows:
Up to 125cc
Up to 125cc 2 stroke, up to 250cc 4
stroke, MX/SX only
126cc to 250cc 2 stroke, 251cc to
450cc 4 stroke MX / SX only
126cc to 250cc
251cc to 350cc
351cc to 500cc
501cc to 750cc
751cc to 1000cc
Long Track 500cc
Dirt Track 251 to 450cc 4 stroke
Dirt Track over 450cc 4 stroke
Superbikes
Up to 500cc Sidecar
Over 500cc Sidecar
Formula Two Sidecar
5.4.2.2
5.4.2.3
5.4.2.4
Black background with White figures
Black background with White figures
White background with Black figures
Green background with White figures
Blue background with White figures
Yellow background with Black figures
White background with Black figures
Red background with White figures
White background with Black figures
Blue background with White figures
White background with Black figures
White background with Black figures (front)
Yellow background with Black figures
White background with Black figures
Red Background with White figures
Base colours must be Dark Green, Mid Blue, Canary Yellow, Mail Box Red,
White, and Black.
Additional colour combinations may be used at the discretion of the RCB.
Production Superbikes and Superbikes may use any contrasting colour on side
number plates providing they are legible at 20 metres.
5.4.3 Number Plate Figures
5.4.3.1
Figures must be one of the following fonts:
a) Arial rounded;
b) Brush script italic; or
c) Lucida sans italic.
5.4.3.2
A machine must display its number in one only of the above fonts.
5.4.3.3
Figures must be clearly legible, the minimum dimensions being,
Height
Width of each figure
Space between figures
Space between figures and edge of plate
67
140mm
70mm
25mm
12mm
ALL DISCIPLINES
5.4.3.4
Advertising is permitted on all machines but must be at least 25mm clear of the
number plate background and the rider's name by either a gap or a contrasting
colour strip.
5.4.4 Number Plates – Juniors
5.4.4.1
Number plates for juniors must be as follows:
a) A minimum plate size of 225mm width and 200mm height.
b) Figures with minimum sizes of 100mm height and 20mm width of stroke
and with one of the following fonts:
i)
Arial rounded; or
ii)
Lucida sans italic.
c) Colours for age group racing:
Under 10 years
10 to under 12 years
12 to under 14 years
14 to under 16 years
d)
Blue background with White figures
Yellow background with Black figures
Red background with White figures
Black background with Yellow figures
For 50cc automatic:
i)
A minimum plate size of 200mm width and 150mm height.
ii)
The figures on the plates must be 100mm height and 20mm
width of stroke.
iii)
The front plate must be fitted so that it does not extend above
the height of the handlebars or grips.
5.4.5 Back Numbers – Juniors
5.4.5.1
No junior may compete, except in enduros, unless wearing the machine
identification number on his or her back in contrasting colours and with a
minimum size of 125mm height and 20mm width of stroke
5.5 FRAMES AND PARTS
5.5.1 Streamlining
5.5.1.1
All streamlining fitted to motorcycles or sidecars must be free of all sharp edges
on exposed extremities.
5.5.1.2
For fibreglass construction, edges must be rounded to their own thickness but
need not be wired.
5.5.1.3
All forward streamlining attached to solo and sidecar machines must have a
minimum of three attachment points, at least one supporting the forward
section of the shell and one on each side supporting the rear portion of the
shell.
5.5.1.4
Identification plates must have corners and edges smoothed.
5.5.2 Fuel Tanks
5.5.2.1
Fuel tanks may be constructed from any material provided that, it has been
approved by the Australian Standards Association, as a petrol or fuel container
material.
5.5.3 Exhaust Systems
5.5.3.1
Exhaust systems must comply with the following:
a) Systems must be fitted with silencers. If silencers are re-packable,
securing bolts must be safety wired;
b) Systems must terminate at a point not more than 25mm beyond the
extremity of the rear tyre tread;
68
ALL DISCIPLINES
c)
d)
Systems must be attached as closely as practicable to the machine and in
a manner that does not in the opinion of the scrutineer create a hazard to
other competitors.
Separate silencers must have a minimum of two mountings or locking
screws on all machines which have a capacity in excess of 85cc.
5.5.4 Centre and Side Stands
5.5.4.1
Centre and side stands must be removed for all types of competition other
than:
a) Moto-Trials.
b) Enduro.
c) Natural Terrain Motocross at Club and Interclub competitions.
d) The 50cc class of all disciplines.
5.5.4.2
Centre and Side Stands which remain on machines under the previous rule
must be secured in the closed position.
5.5.5 Footrests
5.5.5.1
Footrests:
a) Must be well rounded and the edges designed so as to ensure that no
dangerous edges are created due to wear.
b) Must not touch the ground at lean unless they are hinged or pivoted and
controlled by a return spring.
5.5.6 Handlebars
5.5.6.1
The ends of the handlebars or twist grip sleeves must be securely plugged so
as to present a flush or rounded end.
5.5.6.2
Handlebar levers must;
a) Have ball ends attached with:
i)
A minimum diameter of 15mm for levers longer than 76mm.
ii)
A minimum diameter of 10mm for levers shorter than 76mm.
b) Measure no more than 200mm from the fulcrum to the extremity of the
ball.
5.5.6.3
Throttle controls must be self closing.
5.5.6.4
A lanyard operated ignition cut-out switch, operating on the primary circuit,
must be fitted for the following:
Speedway – junior & senior
Motocross – junior & senior
Dirt track
Track
Road race
5.5.6.5
5.5.6.6
Solo & Sidecar machines
Sidecar machines
Sidecar machines
Sidecar machines
Sidecar machines
For road race, motocross and dirt track the lanyard must have a maximum
length of 1 metre.
For speedway and long track the lanyard:
i)
Must be attached around the rider's right wrist whenever the
engine is operating.
ii)
Must not be taped to the handlebar unless the tape is easily
torn.
iii)
Must have a maximum length of 500mm.
5.5.7 Kick Start Levers
5.5.7.1
Kick start levers, other than transverse, must be folding.
69
ALL DISCIPLINES
5.5.8 Drive Chain Protection
5.5.8.1
Primary drives must be guarded so as to prevent direct access to the chain or
sprockets with the fingers. The guard must be constructed of:
a) Metal having a minimum thickness of 1.6mm, which may be mesh or
expanded metal provided the openings do not exceed 10mm; or
b) Fibreglass having a minimum thickness of 3mm.
c) If a plastic, fibreglass or part open chain guard is used, a steel bolt of not
less than 10mm minimum diameter, placed outside the bottom rear
quadrant of the clutch sprocket. This bolt, if damaged, must be replaced.
5.5.8.2
Projecting sprockets, which are not behind a clutch assembly or directly behind
a frame member, must be guarded where the sprocket teeth are further than
30mm from a frame member or swinging arm.
5.5.8.3
A counter shaft sprocket, which is more than 30mm from the outside of the
swing arm pivot, must be covered.
5.5.9 Tyres
5.5.9.1
Tyres must comply with the following:
a) Metal studs, spikes, chain, rope or other non-skid attachments may not be
used unless permitted by the relevant SR.
b) Treads on tyres must be at least 1mm deep on any part of the tyre that
comes in contact with the ground.
c) The tread depth indicating holes on slick tyres must be clearly visible and
at least 0.5mm deep.
d) Paddle or scoop treaded tyres may not be fitted.
e) Valve caps must be used for all competitions.
5.5.10 Mudguards
5.5.10.1
Either a rear mudguard or a seat must be fitted which extends at least twenty
degrees to the rear of a vertical line drawn through the rear wheel axle.
5.5.10.2
All mudguards must be made of a material, which is not liable to cause
personal injury if deformed.
5.6 FUEL
5.6.1 Fuel Warning
5.6.1.1
Fuels and lubricants are highly specialized substances and participants must
be aware they may contain substances that are extremely dangerous to one’s
health if misused, inhaled or allowed to contact human skin.
5.6.1.2
Some of the contents of fuel and lubricants are suspected of having the
potential to cause cancer in rare circumstances.
5.6.1.3
The use of petrol as a general cleaning and washing agent is a common
misuse of a potentially dangerous substance.
5.6.1.4
All fuels should be used and stored with extreme care and in accordance with
the manufacturer’s instructions.
5.6.2 Fuel Requirements
5.6.2.1
The fuel requirements of each discipline is detailed in discipline specific
chapters.
5.6.3 Fuel Testing
5.6.3.1
For any event, meeting or series, the RCB may direct that no fuels other than
fuels of prescribed specifications and from a prescribed source may be used.
a) Tests to ensure that only prescribed fuels are used in an event, meeting or
series may be administered at any time and place during the course of the
same.
b) The Clerk of the Course, Race Director or Chief Scrutineer may direct the
administration of fuel tests.
70
ALL DISCIPLINES
c)
d)
Fuel tests must comply with the following procedures:
i)
All containers for holding samples must be clean and
constructed of robust non-reactive impermeable material, must
be sealable, and must have provision for identification.
ii)
Equipment used for the extraction of fuel from machines must
be clean and constructed of fuel non-reactive material.
iii)
All samples must be divided into two lots (Sample A and
Sample B) of not less than 5ml each, which must be placed in
separate containers.
iv)
Once samples are placed in containers the containers must
immediately be sealed and identified by reference to the
machine from which the sample was taken. This information
must be entered on a fuel sample certificate which must certify
the date, place and time of taking the sample, the identity of the
machine from which the sample was taken and the identity of
the rider.
v)
Both samples must remain in the control of the official who
administered the test. The rider or the representative must sign
the fuel sample certificate acknowledging samples have been
taken and are sealed.
vi)
All samples held by the official must be delivered as soon as
practicable after the competition to the RCB which must deliver
the Sample A as soon as practicable to a laboratory approved
by MA where they must be tested for content and quality in
accordance with standard scientific procedures.
vii)
The RCB must as soon as practicable after receipt of the
results notify the rider or rider's team representative and MA.
If the rider is dissatisfied with the test result of sample A, they may request
sample B be tested at an MA approved laboratory in their presence.
5.6.4 Refuelling
5.6.4.1
During refuelling, each machine must be stationary with the engine stopped.
5.6.4.2
Refuelling will be deemed to have commenced when the fuel tank has been
opened and completed when the tank is reclosed.
5.6.5 Homologation of Fuel
5.6.5.1
Unleaded fuel produced by an oil company for sale in the Australian general
transport fuel market through retail petrol pumps in at least three states does
not have to be homologated.
5.6.5.2
Organisations seeking homologation of fuel must provide MA with:
a) Two 1 litre sealed containers of the fuel for analysis.
b) Details of the fuels characteristics.
c) The distribution network.
d) The price structure.
e) A homologation fee of $1500 in the first year and $1000 per year
thereafter.
f)
Approved fuels under this rule will be published at www.ma.org.au.
5.7 NOISE EMISSIONS
5.7.1 Specifications
5.7.1.1
Noise emissions must not exceed 102dB(A) unless otherwise provided for in
SR. This sub-Rule does not apply to Record Attempts.
5.7.1.2
The noise emission level for speedway is 98dB(A).
71
ALL DISCIPLINES
5.7.2 Measurement
5.7.2.1
Noise emissions must be measured with a microphone placed at 500mm from
the exhaust pipe at an angle of 45 degrees measured from the centre line of
the exhaust end, and at the height of the exhaust pipe, but at least 200mm
above the ground. The reading must be taken with the engine running at a
crankshaft speed equivalent to a calculation based on a mean piston speed of
13m per second for two-stroke and 11m per second for four-stroke engines
using the following table.
5.7.2.2
5.7.2.3
Stroke
in mm
2 Stroke
Rd/Racing
Motocross
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
13,000
12,581
12,188
11,818
11,471
11,143
10,833
10,541
10,263
10,000
9,750
9,512
9,286
9,070
8,864
8,667
8,478
8,298
8,125
7,959
7,800
7,647
7,500
7,358
7,222
7,091
6,964
6,842
6,724
6,610
6,500
6,393
6,290
6,190
6,094
6,000
4 Stroke
Trial/ISDE
Rd/Racing
Motocross
Speedway
11,000
10,645
10,313
10,000
9,706
9,429
9,167
8,919
8,684
8,462
8,250
8,049
7,857
7,674
7,500
7,333
7,174
7,021
6,875
6,735
6,600
6,471
6,346
6,226
6,111
6,000
5,893
5,789
5,690
5,593
5,500
5,410
5,323
5,238
5,156
5,077
Stroke
in mm
2 Stroke
Rd/Racing
Motocross
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
5,909
5,821
5,735
5,652
5,571
5,493
5,417
5,342
5,270
5,200
5,132
5,065
5,000
4,937
4,875
4,815
4,756
4,699
4,643
4,588
4,535
4,483
4,432
4,382
4,333
4,286
4,239
4,194
4,149
4,105
4,063
4,021
3,980
3,939
3,900
4 Stroke
Trial/ISDE
Rd/Racing
Motocross
Speedway
5,000
4,925
4,853
4,783
4,714
4,648
4,583
4,521
4,459
4,400
4,342
4,286
4,231
4,177
4,125
4,074
4,024
3,976
3,929
3,882
3,837
3,793
3,750
3,708
3,667
3,626
3,587
3,548
3,511
3,474
3,438
3,402
3,367
3,333
3,300
Where government regulations or planning orders exist in relation to noise
testing, those regulations or orders will prevail over rules 5.7.1.
No person may compete in any event on a machine whose noise emissions
exceed the prescribed levels.
72
ALL DISCIPLINES
5.8 GENERAL COMPETITION RULES
5.8.1 Measurements at Meetings
5.8.1.1
A steward of a meeting may direct the measurement of the capacity of the
engine of any machine, to be carried out at the conclusion of the meeting. Until
the measurement is completed the machine must remain under the control of
the RCB.
5.8.1.2
If an engine is measured at the request of a rider or entrant, the rider or entrant
is liable for the cost of the measurement.
5.8.1.3
If an engine is measured for the purposes of a protest, the party against whom
the decision is made is liable for the cost of the measurement, and the machine
may, if the engine is found to be oversize, be retained until such cost is paid.
5.8.2 Measurements - Australian and State Championship Events
5.8.2.1
For all Australian and State championship events:
a) All machines must have provision for the placement of sealing wire.
b) An entrant may request that the entrant’s machine be measured and
sealed before the event. As soon as practicable after receiving the
request the measurer for the event must measure and seal the machine.
Any machine examined under this sub-rule may, on application by the
entrant, at the discretion of the measurer, be exempted from further
examination at the event.
c) The first, second, third and fourth placed machines must be impounded
for a period of thirty minutes immediately following the event, pending any
protest, and the event result will be provisional.
d) At the conclusion of that period, if no protest is received, the result will be
final.
e) If the machines are to be ridden in another event within that period, they
must be sealed before being returned to the competitor for that event.
f)
If no protest is received within that period, the seals may be removed.
g) Any machine sealed as the result of a protest may only be measured by a
measurer. All measurer’s reports, together with the seals, must be
delivered to the RCB within 21 days after the event.
h) No prize monies may be paid until measurer’s reports and seals are
received or the expiration of 21 days whichever first occurs.
5.8.3 Starts
5.8.3.1
All competitors must, in relation to the start of any event, comply with directions
issued by, and under the authority of, the starter. For such purposes the
starter, may, on the instructions of a key official:
a) Delay a start;
b) Direct a restart;
c) Direct a competitor to start from:
i)
The back of the starting grid;
ii)
The pit lane;
iii)
The rear of the field; or
iv)
Such other position as shall be required for the safe, fair and
orderly start of the event.
d) Exclude a competitor who is late for the start.
5.8.3.2
The method of starting will be as prescribed by SR.
5.8.3.3
The start of an event occurs:
a) When the order to start is given; or
b) For flying starts, when the starting line is crossed.
73
ALL DISCIPLINES
5.8.4 Finishes
5.8.4.1
For events where speed is the determinant:
a) A chequered flag must be displayed to each competitor as each crosses
the line, with the flag being displayed:
i)
To the first to complete the event, who will, subject to the
results of any protests, be the winner; and
ii)
Thereafter to each competitor who:
a) Has completed not less than 75% of the event distance.
b) Is still competing in the event on the lap in which the
chequered flag is displayed to the winner, with the
sequence of completion of the event being the
determinant of placings.
b) The finish of the event occurs when the flag is displayed to the last
competitor under sub-rule a);
c) The finish occurs for each machine when the foremost part of the machine
crosses the line.
d) Where there are two competitors required to be on one machine together
both must finish the event on the machine. On a solo machine the
competitor must finish the event on the machine.
e) In case of a dead heat between competitors for a place:
i)
The places and the awards for those places will be combined.
ii)
The participants in the dead heat will share the places and
awards equally.
iii)
The remaining places will be relegated by the number of
participants in the dead heat.
5.8.5 Juniors - Starts and Finishes
5.8.5.1
In addition to the general requirements for all competitors juniors must comply
as follows:
a) Competitors may use up to two starting blocks (one per side)up to a
maximum of 100mm high and must be able to start in the event unaided
while sitting on the machine.
b) When assembled for the start of an event, and during the event, no
competitor may receive outside assistance other than at the direction of
the Steward, the Clerk of the Course or the Starter.
c) Pit board signals will not be used in junior competition.
i)
Riders/Pit crew who fail to obey this instruction are liable to
exclusion for the duration of the competition. Refer rule 3.4.10.
d) When the number of competitors exceeds one full grid:
i)
Elimination heats and semi - finals must be held.
ii)
The RCB may direct that events be decided by a final or finals,
consisting of a number of rounds.
5.8.6 Stopping Events
5.8.6.1
Where an incident causes an event to be stopped, the Steward or Clerk of the
Course may declare the event complete if at least 75% of the event distance or
time, whichever is the less, has been run. The results so declared will be
based on the placings at the finish line of the last full lap completed before the
incident but will exclude those competitors who:
a) Caused the incident; or
b) Having been involved in the incident, could not continue in the event.
5.8.7 Stopping And Re-Running Events
5.8.7.1
The Steward or Clerk of the Course who has excluded a competitor for unfair
conduct and considers that such conduct has:
a) Given an advantage to the team of which the offender is a member; or
74
ALL DISCIPLINES
b)
5.8.7.2
5.8.7.3
5.8.7.4
In the case of a non-team event, jeopardised the fair chances of one or
more of the other competitors in the event; may declare the event void and
order a re-run.
If the event continues, any competitor unable to cross the finish line as a result
of such conduct on the part of the excluded competitor may be deemed to have
finished the race in the place:
a) Held immediately before such conduct; or
b) having regard to any advancement in placing following the exclusion, in
some other place.
A Steward or Clerk of the Course may stop an event and order it to be re-run if
it would be dangerous for it to continue.
In any re-run:
a) Any competitor who:
i)
Fell in the stopped event as a result of having been fouled.
ii)
Intentionally laid down his or her machine in the interests of
safety; or
iii)
Left the course in the interests of safety; may participate.
b) Any competitor who:
i)
Caused or contributed to the event being stopped.
ii)
Failed to start in.
iii)
Retired from.
iv)
Was excluded from.
v)
Had been lapped during the course of the stopped event. may
not participate.
5.8.8 Flags And Signals
5.8.8.1
The dimensions of all flags must be a minimum of 500mm x 500mm.
5.8.8.2
Track flags and signals have the following meanings:
National flag dropped or raised.
Start.
Red flag displayed.
Race or practice stopped. Competitors must slow down, must
not overtake and must slowly proceed to the parc ferme, pits, or
other area indicated to them by officials.
Black flag held stationary and black board Competitor with number indicated on black board must stop at
with rider's number.
the pits on the next lap.
Yellow flag held stationary
Danger, drive slowly, overtaking is forbidden.
Yellow flag waved.
Immediate danger, slow down, prepare to stop, overtaking
forbidden.
Yellow with Black diagonal cross
Last lap flag for Speedway only.
No Jump Light
Danger, Overtaking/Jumping Forbidden
Yellow flag with red stripes held stationary. Deterioration of adhesion of the track.
White flag waved.
Slow moving intervention vehicle on track.
Blue flag held stationary.
Overtaking signal warning that competitor is soon to be
overtaken.
Blue flag waved.
Overtaking signal warning that rider is about to be overtaken.
Green flag waved.
Course Clear.
Last lap board
The last lap of the race is about to commence
Purple Flag.
Protest Flag for junior competitors.
Black and white chequered flag waved.
Finish of Race.
75
ALL DISCIPLINES
5.8.8.3
5.8.8.4
The national flag signifying the start of an event may be replaced by:
a) A light signal.
b) A starting tape.
c) A rubber band.
d) A dropping gate.
Flag signals may be supplemented by light signals as follows:
One or two flashing yellow lights
Green light
Red light
Yellow flag.
Green flag
Red flag
5.8.9 Scoring
5.8.9.1
For events, other than The Australian Supercross Championship which have
fewer than 15 start gates, where a point scoring system is used, points will be
allocated from first to twentieth placing as shown in the following table:
Place
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
5.8.9.2
5.8.9.3
5.8.9.4
Points
25
22
20
18
16
15
14
Place
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Points
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
Place
15
16
17
18
19
20
Points
6
5
4
3
2
1
An alternative points scoring system may be approved for an MA series event.
If a tie on points occurs for any position in an event which is conducted over
more than one leg, the tying competitor who has the higher finishing position in
the final leg of the event will be awarded the position.
If a tie on points occurs for any position in a series, the tying competitor who
has the greatest number of higher placings in the series will be awarded the
position.
5.8.10 Change Of Machine During A Competition
5.8.10.1
During any competition, other than an attempt at a record, no machine may be
exchanged for another unless permitted under these Rules or any SR.
5.8.11 Junior Competition Rules
5.8.11.1
Subject to the next sub-Rule, no person who:
a) Has attained the age of 16 years; or
b) Is unable to lift his or her machine unaided from the horizontal to the
vertical;
may compete in any junior competition.
5.8.11.2
A junior who is under the age of 9 years may compete on a 50cc automatic
machine notwithstanding that the junior is unable to lift the machine unaided
from the horizontal to the vertical.
a) No junior who has attained the age of 9 years may participate on a 50cc
automatic machine.
b) A person who attains the age of 16 years during the course of a
competition or series may continue to compete as a junior in the
competition or series until the same is complete.
c) Junior competitors in the following age groups may compete in the
corresponding classes:
76
ALL DISCIPLINES
JUNIOR DIRT TRACK & LONG TRACK
4-U9 yrs
50cc Auto Div. 1
6-U9yrs
50cc Auto Div 2
7-U13yrs
Up to 80cc solo 4 stroke.
7-U13yrs
65cc Solo
9-U16yrs
85cc Solo 2 Stroke
8-U16yrs
Up to 100cc Solo 4 Stroke
11-U16yrs
80/100cc Solo Big wheel
11-U16yrs
80cc up to 160cc Solo Four stroke
13-U16yrs
125cc Solo
13-U16yrs
250cc Solo Four stroke
-U16yrs
80/100cc Sidecar (Rider & Passenger)
JUNIOR MOTOCROSS
4-U9yrs
50cc Auto Div. 1
6-U9yrs
50cc Auto Div 2
7-U13yrs
65cc Solo
9-U12yrs
85cc Solo 2 Stroke (standard wheel only)
12-U16yrs 85cc Solo 2 Stroke (standard or big
wheels)
9-U16 yrs
80cc up to 160cc Solo Four stroke
13-U16yrs 100cc – 125cc
13-U16yrs 250cc Solo Four stroke
9-U16yrs
80/100cc Sidecar (Rider & Passenger)
d)
5.8.11.3
Unless otherwise permitted in writing by the RCB, for any event there must
be no greater age variation between competitors than four years.
e) No participant in the 50cc automatic class may compete in any other class
other than at Club level competitions. No participant who has competed
on a geared machine above club level competition may return to the 50cc
automatic class.
f)
In the 4 years to Under 7 years 50cc automatic class all riders are entitled
to receive a prize or award.
g) Subject to the following two Rules, an RCB may permit either age group
racing, graded racing, or a combination of both.
h) Age group racing:
i)
Subject to sub-Rule ii), only competitors in the same age
groups may compete against each other.
ii)
Competitors from different age groups in the following classes
may compete with each other if there are insufficient entries for
each class:
a) 85cc big wheels single cylinder, 100cc single cylinder and
125cc single cylinder.
b) 125cc single cylinder and 250cc four-stroke.
c) Sidecars
iii)
A person who attains a higher age during the course of a
competition may continue to compete in the lower age
category until the competition is complete or may
nominate for the higher age category for the entire
competition.
i)
An RCB may grade junior competitors according to their respective skills
j)
Division 1 is to be considered as a non competitive class.
Four-stroke machines up to 160cc approved for competition under the following
conditions: use limited to natural terrain Motocross (no man-made jumps) and
Dirt track competitions only. Exhaust systems may be modified or changed.
77
ALL DISCIPLINES
5.8.12 Junior Trail Bikes
5.8.12.1
The following machines are eligible for club and interclub competitions:
a) 7 to under 13 years 65cc class
i)
PW80.
ii)
DS80.
iii)
XR70.
iv)
KLX110.
v)
TT-R90.
vi)
And similar machines approved by Board.
b) 9 to under 16 years 85cc class:
i)
RT100.
ii)
XR100.
iii)
KE100.
iv)
And similar machines approved by Board.
5.9 JUNIOR CAPACITY CLASSES
5.9.1 50cc Automatic Class
5.9.1.1
Division 1 machines.
a) PW50, QR50, JR50, KDX50, KTM Mini Adventurer, Husky Boy Junior, HM
Baja Junior, LEM LX1, LXR50, Kazuma Tiger Cat 50 and similarly
specified machines as approved by the Board may be used.
b) The engine capacity must not exceed 50cc.
c) The gearbox must have one gear.
d) Standard gear ratios must be retained.
e) The clutch must be of centrifugal type.
f)
10” wheels must be fitted.
g) The appearance of a machine must remain as manufactured provided that
the following parts may be altered:
i)
Colour.
ii)
Seat.
iii)
Mudguards.
iv)
Handlebars.
v)
Grips.
vi)
Levers.
vii)
Cables.
viii)
Chains.
ix)
Tyre brand and tread pattern.
x)
Carburettor Jets.
xi)
Spark Plug
h) The frame of a machine may be gusseted and strengthened but not so as
to alter the geometry of the frame. A certificate issued by a qualified
engineer in respect of any such gusseting and strengthening must be
available at machine examination.
i)
The restricting washer in the exhaust header pipe abutting the cylinder
barrel may be removed.
j)
Any throttle limiting device may be removed.
k) A separate kill switch may be installed in place of the standard.
l)
Steel serrated foot pegs may replace standard rubber pegs.
m) Handlebars must be securely plugged and be no wider than 630mm.
n) Engine, Carburettor, Fuel system, Exhaust System, Electrics & Air Box
MUST remain as per manufacturers specifications.
o) All engines must be air cooled.
78
ALL DISCIPLINES
5.9.1.2
p) Carburettor size must not exceed 14mm.
Division 2 machines.
a) Italjet, Action Outlaw, LEM R2, LEM R3, LEM LX2F-USA, LEM LX2S, LEM
CR2, LEM CR2S, KTM SXR PRO SNR, KTM SXR PRO JNR, KTM 50SX,
Malagutti RCX10, Husqvarna Husky Boy SF03, HM CRX 10/10 Senior,
HM Baja 10/10, Polini X3R, Gas Gas EC 50, and similarly specified
machines as approved by the Board may be used.
b) The engine capacity must not exceed 50cc.
c) The gearbox must have one gear.
d) External gearing may be altered.
e) The clutch must be of centrifugal type.
f)
10” rear wheels must be fitted.10” or 12” front wheels may be fitted.
g) The appearance of a machine must remain as manufactured provided that
the following parts may be altered:
i)
Colour.
ii)
Seat.
iii)
Mudguards.
iv)
Handlebars.
v)
Grips.
vi)
Levers.
vii)
Cables.
viii)
Chains.
ix)
Tyre brand and tread pattern.
h) The frame of a machine may be gusseted and strengthened but not so as
to alter the geometry of the frame. A certificate issued by a qualified
engineer in respect of any such gusseting and strengthening must be
available at machine examination.
i)
Any throttle limiting device may be removed.
j)
A separate kill switch may be installed in place of the standard.
k) Steel serrated foot pegs may replace standard rubber pegs.
l)
Handlebars must be securely plugged and be no wider than 630mm.
m) After market exhaust systems and silencers are permitted provided
horsepower does not exceed 11.5hp. (8.579 Kw)
5.9.2 Solo Wheels - All Classes
50cc Auto Div 1
50cc Auto Div 2
52cc & 65cc
85cc 2&4 stroke
85cc Big Wheel
100cc
125cc & Over
250cc 4 Stroke
Front
254mm (10”)
254mm (10” or 305mm (12”)
356mm (14”) to 381mm (15”)
381mm (15”) to 432mm (17”)
482mm (19”) to 534mm (21”)
457mm (18”) to 534mm (21”)
432mm (17”) to 534mm (21”)
432mm (17”) to 586mm (23”)
Rear
254mm (10”)
254mm (10”)
305mm (12”)
356mm (14”)
407mm (16”) to 482mm (19”)
407mm (16”) to 482mm (19”)
407mm (16”) to 482mm (19”)
407mm (16”) to 482mm (19”)
5.9.3 Sidecar Wheels - All Classes
5.9.3.1
The maximum wheel rim sizes for all relevant classes are:
a) Front:432mm (17”)
b) Rear: 356mm (14”)
c) Sidecar: 356mm (14”): Handlebars - All Classes
79
ALL DISCIPLINES
5.9.3.2
Solo handlebars must be plugged and have no greater than the following
widths.
50cc Automatic Standard
52cc-(painted white)
65cc
85cc
Over 85cc
630mm
750mm
750mm
800mm
850mm
5.9.4 Sidecars - All Classes – except Moto Trials
5.9.4.1
Left hand and right hand sidecars may not compete against each other after
1/1/2002.
5.9.4.2
Sidecars, in addition to complying with the requirements for solos, must be as
follows:
a) The sidecar body width must be 890mm measured from the closest
mounting point to the extremity of the sidecar body including any step.
b) The track must be a minimum of 580mm and a maximum of 860mm.
c) Ground clearance must be a minimum of 88mm and a maximum of
160mm.
d) The sidecar must have at least four mounting points.
e) The inside of the sidecar wheel must be enclosed to floor level.
f)
Rear sprockets and chains must be enclosed around the passenger's
working area.
g) Any step must have a maximum width of 200mm from the sidecar.
h) A minimum of two hand grips must be fitted.
i)
Front mounted exhaust systems must not protrude beyond the outermost
edges of the sidecar.
j)
All outer edge sidecar chassis corners must have a minimum 25mm
radius.
k) The machine and sidecar must have front and rear wheel brakes.
l)
The machine must be fitted with a lanyard type cut-out switch.
m) Sidecar wheel drive is prohibited.
5.10 AUSTRALIAN CHAMPIONSHIPS
5.10.1 The Allocation of Australian Championships which do not form a Series
5.10.1.1
A promoter may apply to the host SCB for the allocation of an Australian
championship.
5.10.1.2
SCBs will make application to MA on behalf of its preferred promoter.
5.10.1.3
The protocols for Australian Championships are detailed in Chapter 26.
5.10.1.4
In considering applications, MA may have regard to any one or more of the
following considerations:
a) The likely level of media exposure of, and public support for, the event.
b) The level of support for the discipline by the relevant SCB.
c) The regularity and frequency with which state championships in the
discipline in the area of the relevant SCB.
d) The financial resources of the promoter and of any proposed promoter of
the event.
e) The quality of any proposed venue.
f)
The provision of access to any proposed venue, and accommodation, for
spectators.
g) The availability of quality officials.
h) The previous record of the promoter in conducting Australian
championships.
80
ALL DISCIPLINES
i)
5.10.1.5
5.10.1.6
In case of the Australian Speedway Championships, recommendation of
the Australian Speedway Promoters’ Association.
j)
Such other considerations, as MA considers relevant.
MA may refuse the application or may grant the same and may impose such
conditions as it considers are necessary and reasonable for the fair, safe and
effectual conduct of the event. Within 1 month of receipt of written notification
of the issue of the grant, the SCB must pay the prescribed permit fee to MA.
In the event of a promoter to which an Australian championship has been
granted failing to pay the permit fee or to conduct the event in accordance with
the grant:
a) The performance bond will be forfeited and may be applied by MA in
reduction of the permit fee payable by any other promoter to whom the
conduct of the event is granted.
b) MA may offer the event to another promoter.
5.10.2 The Allocation of Australian Championships Forming a Series
5.10.2.1
Promoters in each State may apply to MA to host a round of the relevant
championship.
5.10.3 Categories for Australian Championships
5.10.3.1
Seniors
Speedway
Solo
Under 21
Sidecar
Track
125cc Solo
250cc Solo
500cc 2 stroke FTX Solo
Up to 450cc 4 stroke FTX Solo
Over 450cc 4 stroke FTX Solo
500cc Long Track Solo
1100cc Long Track Sidecar
1100cc Dirt Track Sidecar
Dirt Track
125cc
250cc 4 stroke.
250cc 2 stroke.
500cc Slider
500cc
450cc 4 stroke
Over 450cc 4 stroke
Sidecar – 600cc
1100cc Sidecar
Moto-Trials
Solo
Sidecar
Open Junior
Classic
Post Classic
Greybeard
Masters
Women
Historic Road Racing
Solo-up to 125cc
Solo-132cc-250cc
Solo-263cc-350cc
Solo-368cc-500cc
Solo-526cc-1300cc
Sidecar-up to 1300cc
Classic Dirt Track
125cc
Motocross
Pro-Lites
250cc
500cc Slider
500cc
Unlimited
Sidecars – up to 650cc
Unlimited Sidecars
Up to 125cc 2 stroke
Up to 250cc 4 stroke
Pro-Open
126cc-250cc 2 stroke
251cc-450cc 4 stroke
Road Racing
125cc GP
250cc GP
NakedBike
Supersport
Pro-Twins
Sidecars F1
Production Superbikes
Supercross
SX-Lites
Up to 125cc 2 stroke
Up to 250cc 4 stroke
SX-Open
126cc-250cc 2 stroke
251cc-450cc 4 stroke
81
ALL DISCIPLINES
Enduro
Up to 200cc 2 Stroke
Over 220cc 2 Stroke
Up to 250cc 4 Stroke
270cc to 450cc 4
Stroke
Over 500cc 4 Stroke
State Trophy Team
Junior Trophy Team
Veterans
Masters
Classic Motocross
Pre 1960 Solo All Powers
Pre 1965 Solo 250cc
Pre 1965 Solo 263cc – over
Pre 1970 Solo 250cc
Pre 1970 Solo 263cc – over
Pre 1975 Solo 125cc
Pre 1975 Solo 132cc – 250cc
Pre 1975 Solo 300cc – over
Pre 1975 4 stroke – All
Powers
Pre 1975 Sidecar All Powers
Evolution
Supermoto
S1. Over 250cc 2 stroke & over 450cc to 700cc 4 stroke
S2. Up to 250cc 2 stroke & up to 450cc 4 stroke
S3. 125cc to 200cc 2 stroke & up to 250cc 4 stroke
5.10.3.2
Juniors
Track, Dirt Track
65cc Solo
85cc Solo
80cc Four stroke
100cc Big wheel
125cc Solo
Up to 250cc 4 stroke
80/100cc Sidecar
7-U9yrs, 9-U13yrs,
9-U11yrs, 11-U13yrs, 13-U16yrs,
8-U11yrs, 11-U14yrs
11-U16yrs
13-U16yrs
13-U16yrs
9-U13yrs, 13-U16yrs (rider & passenger)
Motocross
50cc Division 2
65cc Solo
85cc Solo (Standard wheel)
85cc Solo (Stand / Big Wheel)
Up to 250cc 4stroke
100cc-125cc Solo
6-U9yrs
7-U9yrs, 9-U11yrs, 11-U13yrs
9-U12yrs
12-U14yrs, 14-U16yrs
13-U16yrs
13-U15yrs, 15yrs
Speedway
Under 16 years 125 Solo Ind.
Under 16 years 125 Solo Teams
5.10.3.3
5.10.3.4
Medallions and points will be awarded in the Australian Road Race
Championships where there are:
a) 15 or more starters for solo classes which actually participate in practice,
qualifying or races.
b) 10 or more starters for sidecar classes which actually participate in
practice, qualifying or races.
Medallions and points will be awarded in all other Australian championships
except Moto-Trials where there are:
a) 10 or more starters for solo classes which actually participate in practice,
qualifying or races.
b) 6 or more starters for sidecar classes which actually participate in practice,
qualifying or races.
82
ALL DISCIPLINES
5.10.3.5
5.10.3.6
For the purposes of determining eligibility to compete for medallions, the
capacity categories set out in the above table for pre 1975 Classic Motocross
are divided into the following age group classes:
a) 16 years to under 30.
b) 30 years to under 40.
c) 40 years to under 50.
d) 50 years and over.
e) 60 years and over.
For Moto-Trials, the minimum number of starters shall be five.
5.10.4 Promotion of Australian Championships
5.10.4.1
Programs for Australian championships must
a) Indicate on the front cover the nature of the event.
b) Give visual prominence to title events over support events.
5.10.4.2
At all Australian championships
a) An MA flag and banner must be on display at the start or finish line at the
event.
b) Competitors must place an MA supplied logo on the front number plate of
their machines.
5.10.4.3
The MA logo must be displayed:
a) On all publications relating to the event.
b) On the front cover of the event programme.
5.10.5 Listing of Australian Championships in State Calendars
5.10.5.1
The event calendar of an SCB hosting one or more Australian championships
in any year:
a) Must list each Australian championship being hosted by that SCB in that
year.
b) Must be sent to MA and all other SCBs by no later than 31st October of the
preceding year
5.10.6 Radio communication
5.10.6.1
Radio communications with riders is not allowed, and will be classed as outside
assistance.
5.10.7 Footwear.
5.10.7.1
No person may wear open footwear in the pits.
83
6. ROAD RACING
6.1 PROTECTIVE CLOTHING
6.1.1 Helmets, Clothing, Gloves and Footwear
6.1.1.1
No competitor may practice, start or compete in any road racing competition
unless wearing:
a) An approved and correctly fitting full-faced helmet which must:
i)
Carry the Standards Association of Australia "AS 1698" label;
or
ii)
Be approved under Rule 01.69 & 01.70 of the Road Racing FIM
Technical Rules.
b) A one piece suit or jacket and trousers constructed of leather or other
material of similar or greater durability.
i)
Where jackets or one piece suits are fitted with front opening
slide fasteners a safety strap must be fitted and secured at the
neck.
ii)
In the case of jackets and trousers, provision must be made to
attach the rear of the jacket securely to the trousers.
iii)
The following areas must be padded with at least a double layer
of leather or enclosed plastic foam at least 8mm thick.
a) Shoulders.
b) Elbows.
c) Both sides of torso and hip joint.
d) Knees.
c) A back protector which is commercially manufactured.
d) Boots with ankle and calf protection which:
i)
Must be constructed of leather or other material of similar or
greater durability but must not be constructed of rubber.
ii)
Must at least overlap the suit or trousers when the rider is in the
normal riding position.
iii)
Must not have soft leather soles.
iv)
Sidecar rider and passengers may wear ankle length boots.
e) Gloves of leather or other material of similar or greater durability provided
that gloves need not be worn by passengers on sidecars.
f)
Goggles or visors as specified in rule 6.1.2
6.1.1.2
No person may wear open footwear in the pit lane.
6.1.2 Goggles and Visors
6.1.2.1
Spectacles, protective goggles, helmet visors and "tear-offs" may be worn
provided:
a) Eye protectors and spectacles are made of non-shattering material.
b) Eye protectors which cause visual disturbance are not to be used.
c) Visors are an integral part of the helmet.
d) Metal or perspex face shields are not used.
e) Eye shades or peaks are of a flexible material.
6.1.3 Hair and Jewellery
6.1.3.1
a) Hair longer than shoulder length must be confined in the helmet or jacket.
6.1.3.2
b) Body jewellery is to be removed or securely covered with tape prior to
competition.
84
ROAD RACING
6.2 ENGINES
6.2.1 General
6.2.1.1
Plugs or caps which, if removed, permit the discharge of any lubricating,
cooling or hydraulic fluids, must be wire-locked or otherwise secured in a
manner approved by the scrutineer in the tightened position.
6.2.1.2
Where flexible oil lines other than those supplied as standard equipment by the
original machine manufacturer are used, they must incorporate high pressure
hose secured by high pressure connections. For other than historic machines,
worm drive hose clamps may not be used.
6.2.1.3
All hoses must be securely fitted and guarded to prevent contact with:
a) The ground.
b) Tyres or other moving parts over the full movement of the suspension.
6.2.1.4
All four stroke motorcycles must be equipped with an oil catch tank with a
minimum volume of 300cc to be emptied after each event.
6.2.1.5
The only liquid coolant permitted is water.
6.2.1.6
Lubricating, cooling and hydraulic fluid levels must be maintained within
manufacturers' specifications.
6.2.1.7
A self-closing throttle must be fitted.
6.2.1.8
With the exception of:
a) Period 1-5 Historic machines.
b) Production based machines without a lower fairing which have ADR
compliance.
c) All machines, including sidecars, must be fitted with an integral lower
fairing dam or separate catch tray, which must be constructed:
i)
Of a material and capacity to trap and hold at least 5 litres, for 4
strokes machines, and 2.5 litres, for 2 stroke machines, for:
a) Engine oil; and
b) Engine coolant.
In the event of engine breakdown.
i)
With no less than two holes, each of 25mm, which may only be
open in wet race conditions.
6.2.2 Fuel
6.2.2.1
Fuel for Production Racing, Superbike, Production Superbike, Supersport,
Superstock, Harley Davidson Sportster and Sidecars must be:
a) Unleaded.
b) Be no more than 98 RON.
c) Contain no additives other than those added at the point of manufacture
except for lubricating oil for two stroke engines.
d) Be readily available from retail petrol pumps within Australia; or
e) Be a brand of fuel homologated by MA that is compatible with the “Fuel
Quality Standards Act 2000”.
6.2.2.2
Fuel for classes other than those listed in the previous rule may be leaded
provided:
a) The fuel is purchased from suppliers approved by Environment Australia.
b)
The fuel purchased is logged in a Leaded Fuel Passbook issued by
Environment Australia through MA.
6.3 FRAMES AND PARTS SOLO
6.3.1 Streamlining - Solo
6.3.1.1
Streamlining must leave the front wheel and mudguard exposed.
6.3.2 Brakes - Solo
6.3.2.1
At least two efficient brakes must operate independently of each other on the
front and rear wheels.
85
ROAD RACING
6.3.3 Superbikes
6.3.3.1
Superbike machines must comply with the applicable specifications contained
in the FIM Road Racing Technical Rules.
6.3.4 Production
6.3.4.1
Subject to the required and permitted alterations set out below, solo production
machines must:
a) Carry all relevant compliance plates.
b) Be eligible for registration in all states and territories in which they
compete.
c) Be of a make and model lawfully sold in Australia.
d) Be as constructed by, or modified with the approval of, the manufacturer
so as to conform with Australian Design Rules for normal road use.
6.3.4.2
Tyres must be homologated by MA and comply with the following:
a) Be commercially available in Australia.
b) Be manufactured for road use in all weather conditions.
c) Be not less than the machine manufacturer’s recommended speed and
load rating
d) Be worn no more than to the minimum tread depth indicators.
e) Not be manufactured for only competition use.
f)
Not have an augmented or modified tread pattern.
g) Comply with the service description (load and speed rating) as
permanently moulded on the OEM tyre side wall.
h) Comply with the relevant requirements of the nominated standard. e.g.
ETRTO, JATMA and T&R ASSOC.
6.3.4.3
The following must be removed:
a) Headlamp.
b) Tail lamp.
c) Reflectors.
d) Horn.
e) Traffic indicators.
f)
Rear vision mirrors.
g) Centre and side stands.
h) Registration plate / bracket and label holder.
6.3.4.4
Any sharp edges left by the removal of the above components must be
protected by a rolled edge or beading of minimum 3mm diameter.
6.3.4.5
The following may be replaced or modified:
a) Fairing, screen, rear bodywork, seat, mudguards, tank covers and side
covers, but replacements must be the same in shape and appearance as,
and no lighter in weight than, the original.
b) Mounting bracket for fairing, screen and instruments, but replacements
must be mounted in the original position on the frame.
c) Handlebars, but replacements must be mounted in the original position on
the fork assembly.
d) Instruments and handlebar switches, provided disconnections are made at
the standard connectors and the main wiring loom is not cut.
e) Passenger footrests.
f)
A steering damper may be fitted.
g) Fuel metering jets, but not carburettor slides or needles. Replacements
must be within a numerical tolerance of plus or minus 10% of the original.
h) Spark plug type, leads and caps;
i)
External gearing, but not chain pitch.
j)
Brake friction materials.
86
ROAD RACING
6.3.5 Supersport
6.3.5.1
Subject to the required and permitted alterations set out below, Supersport
machines must:
a) Carry all relevant compliance plates;
b) Be eligible for registration in all states and territories in which they
compete;
c) Be of a make and model lawfully sold in Australia;
d) Be as constructed by, or modified with the approval of, the manufacturer
so as to conform with Australian Design Rules for normal road use;
e) For four cylinder engines, have an engine capacity of no more than 600cc;
and
f)
For two cylinder engines, have an engine capacity of no more than 750cc.
g) At least 20 machines of that make and model must have been imported
into Australia, by the manufacturer or the Australian distributor
representing the manufacturer.
6.3.5.2
Tyres must be homologated by MA and comply with the following:
a) Be commercially available in Australia.
b) Be manufactured for road use in all weather conditions.
c) Be not less than the machine manufacturer’s recommended speed and
load rating
d) Be worn no more than to the minimum tread depth indicators.
e) Not be manufactured for only competition use.
f)
Not have an augmented or modified tread pattern.
g) Comply with the service description (load and speed rating) as
permanently moulded on the OEM tyre side wall.
h) Comply with the relevant requirements of the nominated standard. e.g.
ETRTO, JATMA and T&R ASSOC.
6.3.5.3
Only when a race or practice has been declared “wet”, the use of a special tyre
commonly known as a wet tyre is allowed. Homologation is not required for wet
tyres.
6.3.5.4
To be permitted to compete, a machine, without rider, empty of fuel, but with all
other fluids at optimum levels, must weigh no less than 162kg for 600cc and
170kg for 750cc. 1% tolerance at post race control will be allowed.
6.3.5.5
The following must be removed:
a) Headlamp.
b) Tail lamp.
c) Reflectors.
d) Horns.
e) Traffic indicators.
f)
Rear vision mirrors.
g) Centre and side stands.
h) Registration plate / bracket and label holder.
Any sharp edges left by the removal of these components must be protected by
a rolled edge or beading of minimum 3mm diameter.
6.3.5.6
Engine and gearbox breathing hoses and tubes, and the radiator overflow bottle
vent, must exhaust into the airbox to the rear of the carburettor intakes. The
lower airbox breather tube must be blocked.
6.3.5.7
The following may be removed:
a) Passenger handholds and footrest assemblies.
b) Instruments and associated cables.
c) Chain guard and registration plate brackets.
d) Air injection pollution control system.
e) Carburettor anti-icing device.
f)
Rear fender.
87
ROAD RACING
6.3.5.8
6.3.5.9
6.3.5.10
g) Registration plate/bracket and label holder.
h) Steering damper.
The following may be added:
a) Steering damper.
b) Ride height adjuster.
The following may be replaced with parts not manufactured by the
manufacturer of the machine.
a) Brake pads, linings and brake hoses.
b) Fairings, screens, rear bodywork and rear seat so as to provide for the
mounting of a rear number plate, rider’s seat, mudguards, air intake lids in
bodywork, airbox intake tubes, tank covers and side covers, but
replacements must be the same in shape and appearance as the original.
c) Mounting brackets for fairings and screens but the replacements must be
mounted on the frame at the original mounting points.
d) Handlebars, handlebar mounted levers, master cylinders and controls.
e) Footrests and foot controls, but the replacements must be mounted on the
frame at the original mounting points.
f)
Instruments.
g) External gearing.
h) Exhaust system.
i)
Fuel metering jets and needles, but no other castings.
j)
Ignition igniter / Wiring Loom and MA approved Fuel Injection Control Unit.
k) Spark plugs and high tension leads.
l)
Rear suspension damping units and springs.
m) Clutch plates and springs.
n) Engine end casings.
o) Radiator expansion tank.
p) Battery, but the replacement must be capable of starting the machine
prior to, and post race.
q) Fasteners for fitting external components where the motorcycle
manufacturer has no specified torque setting or it is less than 10Nm.
r)
Engine cam wheels, provided they are manufactured in the same material
as the original.
s) Head Gasket.
t)
Camshaft may be replaced but the lift must remain standard.
u) Valve springs, collets and retainers.
v) Front suspension, springs and damping parts may be modified or
replaced, but the external appearance of the forks must not be changed.
w) Air filters, providing the dimensions remain identical to the standard
filter.
The following may be modified to equipment constructed by the manufacturer
of the machine:
a) Engine cam wheels may be slotted to alter valve timing.
b) Gearbox drive dogs may be undercut.
c) Cylinder head valve seats may be recut.
d) Cylinder head and cylinder block mating surfaces may be machined.
e) Ignition igniters.
f)
Carburettor slides.
6.3.6 Production Superbikes
6.3.6.1
Subject to the required and permitted alterations set out below, Production
Superbike machines must:
a) Carry all relevant compliance plates.
b) Be eligible for registration in all states and territories in which they
compete.
88
ROAD RACING
c)
d)
6.3.6.2
6.3.6.3
6.3.6.4
6.3.6.5
6.3.6.6
6.3.6.7
Be of a make and model lawfully sold in Australia.
Be as constructed by, or modified with the approval of, the manufacturer
so as to conform to Australian Design Rules for normal road use.
e) Be fitted with a four stroke engine with a capacity greater than 800cc.
f)
Be homologated in accordance with chapter 5, provided that, before any
machine of a particular make and model may compete in any event.
i)
The range of vehicle identification numbers for each model
must be provided to MA.
ii)
At least 20 machines of that make and model must have been
imported into Australia, by the manufacturer or the Australian
distributor representing that manufacturer.
The choice of tyre type is optional but any restriction on the number of tyres
which may be used must be included in SR.
To be permitted to compete, a machine, without rider, empty of fuel, but with all
other fluids at optimum levels, must weigh no less than 165kg. 1% tolerance at
post race control will be allowed.
The following must be removed:
a) Headlamp.
b) Tail lamp.
c) Reflectors.
d) Horns.
e) Traffic indicators.
f)
Rear vision mirrors.
g) Centre and side stands.
h) Registration plate / bracket and label holder.
Any sharp edges left by the removal of these components must be protected by
a rolled edge or beading of minimum 3mm diameter.
Engine and gearbox breathing hoses and tubes, and the radiator overflow bottle
vent, must exhaust into the airbox to the rear of the carburettor intakes. The
lower airbox breather tube must be blocked.
The following may be removed:
a) Passenger handholds and footrest assemblies.
b) Instruments and associated cables.
c) Chain guard and registration plate brackets.
d) Air injection pollution control system.
e) Carburettor anti-icing device.
f)
Rear fender.
g) Rear number plate bracket.
h) Air filter element.
i)
Starter Motor and starter motor drive system.
j)
Alternator.
k) Steering damper.
The following may be added:
a) Steering damper.
b) Ride height adjuster. The link arm rod may be changed or modified but the
suspension linkage must remain standard.
c) Data acquisition, computers, recording equipment (Note telemetry and
devices other than official automatic onboard lap timing devices are
prohibited).
d) When items under the preceding rule are added, then a scrutineering
downloading access plug connector is mandatory.
e) MA approved fuel injection control devices.
89
ROAD RACING
6.3.6.8
6.3.6.9
6.3.6.10
The following may be replaced with parts not manufactured by the
manufacturer of the machine.
a) Brake pads, linings and brake hoses.
b) Fairings, screens, rear bodywork and rear seat so as to provide for the
mounting of a rear number plate, rider’s seat, mudguards, air intake lids in
bodywork, airbox intake tubes, tank covers and side covers, but
replacements must be the same in shape and appearance as the original.
c) Mounting brackets for fairings and screens but the replacements must be
mounted on the frame at the original mounting points.
d) Handlebars, handlebar mounted levers, master cylinders and controls.
e) Footrests and foot controls, but the replacements must be mounted on the
frame at the original mounting points.
f)
Instruments.
g) External gearing.
h) Exhaust system.
i)
Fuel metering jets, needles, air jets, air funnels (velocity stacks) and
carburettor vacuum/slide springs, but not other castings.
j)
Ignition igniters, wiring loom and fuel injection control units.
k) Spark plugs and high tension leads.
l)
Rear suspension damping units and springs.
m) Clutch plates and springs.
n) Engine end cases.
o) Radiator expansion tank.
p) Battery and alternator.
q) Fasteners for fitting external components where the motorcycle
manufacturer has no specified torque setting or it is less than 10Nm.
r)
Air filter element.
s) Valve retainers and valve springs.
t)
Camshafts and cam wheels.
u) Carburettor jets, valves, needles and gaskets.
v) Head gaskets.
w) Front suspension springs and damping parts, but the external appearance
of the forks must not be changed.
The following may be replaced by other parts made by the manufacturer and
fitted as OEM equipment on another Australian Design Rules approved model
sold in Australia:
a) Wheels. Providing diameter is the same as original fitment.
The following may be modified to equipment constructed by the manufacturer
of the machine:
a) Engine cam wheels may be slotted or replaced to alter valve timing.
b) Water pump impeller.
c) Gearbox drive dogs may be undercut.
d) Cylinder head valve seats may be recut.
e) Cylinder head ports by removal of material only.
f)
Cylinder head and cylinder block mating surfaces may be machined.
g) Alternator cover.
h) Ignition igniters, wiring loom and fuel injection control units.
i)
OEM piston valve pocket machining.
6.3.7 Superstock
6.3.7.1
Eligible to C & D Grade competitors only and subject to the required and
permitted alterations set out below, Superstock machines must:
a) Carry all relevant compliance plates.
b) Be eligible for registration in all states and territories in which they
compete.
90
ROAD RACING
c)
d)
6.3.7.2
6.3.7.3
6.3.7.4
6.3.7.5
Be of a make and model lawfully sold in Australia.
Be as constructed by, or modified with the approval of, the manufacturer
so as to conform with Australian design laws for normal road use.
e) For four cylinder engines, have an engine capacity of no more than 600cc.
f)
For two cylinder engines, have an engine capacity of no more than 750cc.
g) At least 20 machines of that make and model must have been imported
into Australia, by the manufacturer or the Australian distributor
representing the manufacturer.
Tyres must be homologated by MA and comply with the following:
a) Be commercially available in Australia.
b) Be manufactured for road use in all weather conditions.
c) Be not less than the machine manufacturer’s recommended speed and
load rating
d) Be worn no more than to the minimum tread depth indicators.
e) Not be manufactured for only competition use.
f)
Not have an augmented or modified tread pattern.
g) Comply with the service description (load and speed rating) as
permanently moulded on the OEM tyre side wall.
h) Comply with the relevant requirements of the nominated standard. e.g.
ETRTO, JATMA and T&R ASSOC.
To be permitted to compete, a machine, without rider, empty of fuel, but with all
other fluids at optimum levels, must weigh no less than 162kg for 600cc and
170kg for 750cc. 1% tolerance at post race control will be allowed.
The following must be removed:
a) Head lamp.
b) Tail lamp.
c) Reflectors.
d) Horn.
e) Traffic indicators.
f)
Rear vision mirrors.
g) Centre and side stands.
h) Registration plate / bracket and label holder.
The following may be replaced or modified:
a) Fairing, screen, rear body work, seat, mudguards, tank covers and frame
side covers, but replacements must be the same in shape and
appearance as the original.
b) Mounting bracket for fairing, screen and instruments, but replacements
must be mounted in the original position on the frame.
c) Passenger footrests.
d) Spark plug type, leads and cap.
e) External gearing and chain, but not chain pitch.
f)
Brake pads, linings and brake hoses.
g) The muffler and tail connecter pipe at the bolt on or slip on flange joints
only, the original header pipes must remain as supplied by the
manufacturer.
h) Front and rear suspension springs and internal components but external
appearance must remain unchanged.
i)
Handlebars but replacements must be mounted in the original position on
the fork assembly and have the same profile and shape as the original
assembly.
j)
Fuel metering jets, but not carburettor slides or needles. Replacements
must be within a numerical tolerance of plus or minus 10% of the original.
k) Footrests and foot controls, but the replacements must be mounted
at the original mounting points.
91
ROAD RACING
6.3.7.6
6.3.7.7
6.3.7.8
The following may be added:
a) Steering damper.
b) Ride height adjuster providing there is no modification or
alteration to frame or rear suspension unit.
NakedBike This class can only be run with the approval of Formula Xtreme
Promotions. For specifications of this class, refer to MA.
Pro-Twins. This class can only be run with the approval of Formula Xtreme
Promotions. For specifications of this class, refer to MA.
92
ROAD RACING
6.4 ENGINES – SIDECARS
6.4.1.1
6.4.1.2
6.4.1.3
6.4.1.4
Formula One eligible engines are:
a) Four strokes (maximum four cylinders) 1200 cc maximum;
b) The four stroke engines must be commercially manufactured and readily
available to the public;
c) Bore and stroke must be as specified by engine manufacturer. Increasing
the bore size to reach class limits is not allowed.
d)
Note: Engines manufactured prior to 1993, and 1997/8 Honda CBR 1100
XX engines, are exempt from rule 6.4.1.1(c) until 31 December 2005.
The gearbox must have no more than 6 gear ratios.
The following may be altered or replaced:
a) The original cylinder head, but the number of ports must remain as
originally produced by the manufacturer;
b) Camshaft, but method of cam drive must remain as originally produced by
the manufacturer.
c) Pistons, rings and pins.
d) Conrods, however titanium or carbon rods are not permitted.
e) The ignition system, but maximum rpm is restricted to 13,000.
f)
Carburettors.
g) Crankshaft by lightening and balancing.
h) Clutch basket, clutch plates, springs and hub.
i)
Oil lines containing positive pressure, but must be of metal reinforced
construction with swaged or threaded connectors.
The following are permitted if originally fitted by the manufacturer:
a) Dry clutch.
b) Fuel injection. Throttle bodies must be as originally produced by engine
manufacturer.
c) Vacuum slides may be removed or fixed in the open position.
d) Secondary throttle valves and shafts may be removed or fixed in the
open position and the electronics may be disconnected or removed.
6.5 FORMULA ONE FRAMES AND PARTS - SIDECAR
6.5.1 Dimensions and Requirements - General
6.5.1.1
The distance between the tracks left by the centre lines of the rear motorcycle
wheel and the sidecar wheel must be at least 800mm and not more than
1150mm.
6.5.1.2
The overall width of the motorcycle and sidecar, including exhausts, must not
exceed 1700mm.
6.5.1.3
The overall height of the motorcycle and sidecar must not exceed
800mm.However, the airbox and the immediate bodywork over the airbox only
may be a maximum of 950mm.
6.5.1.4
The overall length of the motorcycle and sidecar must not exceed 3300mm.
6.5.1.5
The wheelbase must not exceed 2300mm.
6.5.1.6
The minimum weight of the sidecar including passenger and rider at the
completion of practice, qualifying or racing is 375 kg
6.5.1.7
The ground clearance, measured at the lowest point of the motorcycle and
sidecar, race ready with rider and passenger on board and with the handlebars
in the straight ahead position, must be not less than 65mm.No devices are
permitted to reduce the ground clearance during the course of a race.
After the race, a tolerance of -5mm is authorized. After a wet race this
check is not performed.
93
ROAD RACING
6.5.1.8
6.5.1.9
6.5.1.10
6.5.1.11
6.5.1.12
6.5.1.13
6.5.1.14
6.5.1.15
6.5.1.16
6.5.1.17
6.5.1.18
6.5.1.19
6.5.1.20
The passenger must be carried in a suitably constructed sidecar with minimum
platform dimensions, measured at a height of 150mm above the platform, of
800mm x 300mm.
Sidecar measurements.
a) The body must be forward of the centre line of the baseboard, a forward
portion of which must have an area of 230mm high, 300mm wide and
300mm long with at least 25mm radius to all corners.
b) The body must be covered in at the front end.
Where a fairing is fitted:
a) The forward extremity of the streamlining must not be more than 400 mm
in front of the foremost part of the front tyre;
b) The extreme rear edge of the streamlining must not be more than 400 mm
beyond the extreme edge of the rear wheel;
c) The rear wheel and sidecar wheel must be enclosed down to the level of
the sidecar platform on the inside and to the top of the rim flange on the
outside;
d) Spoilers and other aerodynamic devices must not extend beyond the
overall dimensions of the bodywork, and must be an integral part of the
fairing and body.
The maximum space between motorcycle and sidecar baseboard must be
50mm with the rider in a normal racing position.
Riders seat
a) In the normal riding position, the rider’s feet must be positioned behind the
knees;
b) The riders seat must have a minimum height of 150 mm above ground
level, and a minimum width of 200 mm.
c) Notwithstanding the provisions of the preceding two sub-rules, "feet
forward" sidecars constructed before the 1st January 1998:
i)
May compete below state championship level.
ii)
Must be registered with MA.
The underside of the platform must be flat.
The lean of the motorcycle must not exceed 10 degrees from the vertical.
Banking sidecars are prohibited.
Passenger stirrup fittings for the feet are not permitted.
Attachment points between motorcycle and sidecar:
a) Must be not less than four if the sidecar is not integrated with the
motorcycle.
b) Must not allow movement at the joints.
c) If the angle of inclination is changeable, must be secured by locking and
not merely clamped.
The engine
a) Must be positioned in such a way that the centre line of the engine must
not exceed 160 mm beyond the centre line of the rear wheel of the
motorcycle.
b) Must be positioned in front of the rear wheel.
The drive must be transmitted to the ground only through the rear wheel.
Steering.
a) Steering must be to the front wheel only, and may be by direct or indirect
linkage.
b) The motorcycle must be steered by handlebars.
c) The handle bar extremities must not be lower than the front wheel axle nor
more than 500 mm behind the front wheel axle position.
d) Whatever the position of the handlebars, there must be a space of at least
20 mm between the streamlining and the ends of the handlebars or other
steering systems including any attachments thereto.
e) The steering axis must not be offset more than 75 mm from the
motorcycle front wheel centre line.
94
ROAD RACING
6.5.1.21
6.5.1.22
6.5.1.23
6.5.1.24
6.5.1.25
6.5.1.26
6.5.1.27
6.5.1.28
A suitable passenger hand hold must be provided on the outer side of the rear
wheel.
All hand holds:
a) Must be moulded or positioned so as to prevent direct access by the rider
or passenger to any moving parts of the machine.
b) Must not project beyond the outer edge of the sidecar mudguard or
bodywork.
c) The lower fairing must be constructed:
d) In the area directly below the engine, the oil containment tray must be
constructed to hold, in the case of an engine breakdown, at least half of
the total oil and engine coolant capacity used in the engine (minimum 5
litres). The surrounding edges of the tray must be at least 50mm above
the bottom of the tray. The rear wheel must be protected from any
possible oil spray. Tray to have a frontal edge from the wall that
extends upward to arrive at the base of the barrel or assumed bottom
of the barrel line if barrel is integral.
The underside of fuel tanks, engine casings and drain plugs must be protected
from direct contact with the road surface by location, or by the fitting of an
underpan, which must cover the area of the underside of the tank, case or plug.
Where a guard or underpan is used it must be either steel of minimum
thickness 1.6mm or aluminium or fibreglass of minimum thickness 3mm. Metal
guards must have wired or rolled edges and fibreglass guards must have edges
rounded and smoothed.
Machines must have a solid and effective protective barrier between the engine
and the rider’s torso.
Brakes must be fitted which have:
a) One main system with at least two circuits operating independently, one of
which must operate the sidecar and rear wheel, the other must operate the
front wheel.
b) One circuit must operate the sidecar and rear wheel and the other must
operate the front wheel.
c) The system must be designed so that if one circuit fails the other works
efficiently.
d) Carbon Brakes are not permitted.
Oil cooler and oil tanks must be mounted below the main body, in a crash
secure position.
Sidecars must be equipped with a functional rear red anti-fog lamp measuring a
minimum of 35 cm2 and a maximum of 100 cm2 fitted with a 2.5 watt halogen
bulb or 10 watt conventional bulb or LED lights. The light must be installed at
the rear of the main body and mounted above the driving wheel, at minimum 40
cm above the ground. The anti-fog lamp must be visible at all times and
switched on when the track is declared wet.
A non return valve must be fitted to the petrol tank breather pipe which
must discharge into a catch tank with a minimum capacity of 500cc. The
outlet of any oil breather pipe fitted must discharge into a catch tank in an
easily accessible position which tank must be empty before the start of
each meeting. The minimum capacity of the oil catch tank must be 2.0L.
All fuel and oil lines must be of an approved type with high pressure
fittings.
6.6 FORMULA TWO – SIDECAR
6.6.1 Engine and Gearbox
6.6.1.1
The only permitted engines are:
Two cylinder four strokes
Four cylinder four strokes
1,000cc maximum
600cc maximum
95
ROAD RACING
6.6.1.2
6.6.1.3
6.6.1.4
6.6.1.5
6.6.1.6
6.6.1.7
6.6.1.8
6.6.1.9
6.6.1.10
The maximum number of gear ratios is six.
The engine must be positioned such that the lateral centre line of the engine
must not be more than 160mm beyond the centre line of the rear wheel of the
motorcycle.
The engine must be positioned behind the steering head and in front of the
driver.
The drive must be transmitted through the rear wheel.
Exhaust fumes must be discharged towards the rear but not so as to raise dust,
foul the tyres or brakes or inconvenience a passenger or any other rider.
The furthest extremity of the exhaust pipe must not exceed a vertical line drawn
at a tangent to the rear edge of the sidecar platform.
On the side opposite the sidecar, the exhaust pipes must not extend beyond
the streamlining.
On the other side, the exhaust pipe must not extend beyond the width of the
sidecar.
Exhaust pipes must be fitted and positioned so as to prevent entanglement with
other machines.
6.6.2 Frame
6.6.2.1
Hinged sidecars and steerable sidecar wheels are not permitted.
6.6.2.2
The driver and passenger must not be attached to the machine or in any way
restrained from separating from the machine.
6.6.2.3
Glass Rear view mirrors are not permitted.
6.6.2.4
Hub centre steering, remote steering linkages and the use of articulated joints
in the steering mechanism are not permitted.
6.6.2.5
The frame tubing must be of good quality steel tube, with a maximum diameter
of 100mm at the broadest point.
6.6.2.6
Reinforcement of the steering head is allowed to a maximum of 225mm from
the centre line of the steering head.
6.6.2.7
Monocoque construction is not permitted.
6.6.2.8
Composite construction may only be used in the sidecar platform.
6.6.2.9
Titanium may not be used in the construction of the frame, front forks,
handlebars, swinging arm and wheel axles.
6.6.2.10
Light alloys may not be used for wheel axles.
6.6.2.11
Dimensions:
Minimum weight without fuel
Maximum overall width
Maximum overall height
Maximum wheelbase
6.6.2.12
Track, measured from the centre of the track left by the rear wheel to the centre
of the track left by the sidecar wheel.
Minimum
Maximum
6.6.2.13
6.6.2.14
6.6.2.15
6.6.2.16
136.5 kg.
1700mm
800mm
1651mm
800mm
1100mm
Ground clearance for the whole of the underside of the machine, measured
with the machine handlebars in the straight ahead position must be 65mm
laden.
The streamlining must be easily detachable for scrutineering.
Aero foils or spoilers on streamlining are not permitted.
The forward extremity of the streamlining must not be more than 400mm in
front of the foremost part of the front tyre.
96
ROAD RACING
6.6.2.17
6.6.2.18
6.6.2.19
6.6.2.20
6.6.2.21
6.6.2.22
6.6.2.23
6.6.2.24
The extreme rear edge of the streamlining must not be more than 400mm to
the rear extreme edge of the rear tyre.
Whatever the position of the handlebars, there must be a space of at least
20mm between the streamlining and the ends of the handlebars or any other
parts of the steering mechanism or front wheel.
A solid and effective protection must be fitted between the driver and the
engine, so as to prevent:
a) Direct contact between the rider's body or clothing.
b) Escaping flames or leaking fuel or oil.
The rider's seat must measure at least 200mm in length and 150mm in width
and be fitted at a minimum height of 150mm above the sidecar platform.
The passenger platform must be at least 800mm long and 300mm wide,
measured 150mm above the platform.
Cooling air intakes must have no forward projection or protrusion.
The battery must be covered such that neither the driver nor the passenger can
come into contact with the battery or its contents.
Throttle controls must be self-closing.
6.6.3 Wheels, Suspension and Brakes
6.6.3.1
The minimum diameter of an inflated tyre must be 400mm.
6.6.3.2
All wheels must be of metal construction and unmodified from original
manufacture.
6.6.3.3
The front suspension must be either a leading or trailing fork, or links with the
wheel equally supported on each side.
6.6.3.4
The rear suspension must be of the swinging arm type and may be single
sided.
6.6.3.5
Minimum suspension travel must be 20mm.
6.6.3.6
A sidecar must have a brake which must consist of:
a) One main system with at least two circuits operating separately, one of
which must operate on at least two of the three wheels.
b) An emergency system operated by a handlebar lever with a simple circuit
operating on either the front or rear wheel of the motorcycle.
6.6.3.7
The rear mudguard must cover at least 240 degrees of the rear wheel on the
side nearest to the sidecar wheel.
6.6.3.8
The rear driving wheel must be covered down to the level of the sidecar
platform and around the periphery.
6.6.3.9
The sidecar wheel must be enclosed from the sidecar platform and level with
the sidecar platform on the outside and around the periphery.
6.6.3.10
Sidecars must be equipped with a functional rear red anti-fog lamp measuring a
minimum of 35 cm2 and a maximum of 100 cm2 fitted with a 2.5 watt halogen
bulb or 10 watt conventional bulb or LED lights. The light must be installed at
the rear of the main body and mounted above the driving wheel, at minimum 40
cm above the ground. The anti-fog lamp must be visible at all times and
switched on when the track is declared wet.
6.6.4 Fuel and Oil Tanks
6.6.4.1
The fuel tank must be independently protected from the ground.
6.6.4.2
A no-return valve must be fitted to the petrol tank breather pipe which must
discharge into a catch tank with a minimum capacity of 500 cc.
6.6.4.3
The fuel filler cap must be in such a position that it does not protrude from the
fairing and cannot be torn off in a crash.
6.6.4.4
The outlet of any oil breather pipe fitted must discharge into a catch tank in an
easily accessible position which must be empty before the start of the meeting
6.6.4.5
The minimum capacity of the oil catch tank must be 500 ml.
6.6.5 Rider and Passenger
6.6.5.1
The rider in the normal driving position must be completely visible, with the
exception of the rider's forearms, from the side opposite the sidecar and from
above.
97
ROAD RACING
6.6.5.2
6.6.5.3
6.6.5.4
The rider's legs must not to be enclosed.
The rider's position, regardless of whether a driving seat is fitted, must be such
that the rider's feet are positioned behind the knees when viewed from above.
The passenger must be able to lean out to either side of the sidecar and for this
purpose the vehicle must be fitted with suitable closed loop type hand holds.
6.6.6 Steering and Control Levers.
6.6.6.1
All handlebar levers must be ball ended with a ball diameter of at least 19mm.
6.6.6.2
Control levers measured front the pivot point to the extremity of the ball must
not exceed 200mm.
6.6.6.3
All controls must be independently mounted.
6.6.6.4
The handlebar grips must not be longer than 150mm and be attached to the
ends of the handlebar.
6.6.6.5
Steering of the front wheel must be by non-adjustable handlebars fixed directly
to the steering head of the motorcycle.
6.6.6.6
The handlebars must be above the mid-point of the rider's seat.
6.6.6.7
The front wheel axle must support the machine equally on each side of the
wheel.
6.6.6.8
Handlebar width must be 450 mm and handlebars and all steering bearings
must be located on the sprung portion of the front suspension.
6.6.6.9
Steering lock angle each side of straight ahead position and measured
horizontally at ground level must be a minimum of twenty degrees.
6.6.6.10
Whatever the position of the handlebars the front wheel must never touch the
streamlining.
6.6.6.11
Handlebar clamps must be radiused and engineered so as to avoid fracture
points in the bar.
6.6.6.12
The steering head centre may be offset no more than 75mm from the centre
line of the rear wheel.
6.6.6.13
The lower fairing must be constructed:
In the area directly below the engine, the oil containment tray must be
constructed to hold, in the case of an engine breakdown, at least half of
the total oil and engine coolant capacity used in the engine (minimum 5
litres). The surrounding edges of the tray must be at least 50mm above
the bottom of the tray. The rear wheel must be protected from any
possible oil spray. Tray to have a frontal edge from the wall that extends
upwards to arrive at the base of the barrel line if the barrel is integral.
6.7 COMPETITION RULES
6.7.1 Solo Road Race 80cc-Eligibility.
6.7.1.1
Subject to the required and permitted alterations set out below, to be eligible to
compete a machine must:
a) Be of no greater capacity than 80cc.
b) Carry all relevant chassis and engine numbers.
c) Be one of at least 10 machines sold in Australia.
d) Be as constructed by the manufacturer in accordance with specifications
supplied by MA.
6.7.1.2
Tyres must:
a) Be commercially available in Australia, and homologated.
b) Be worn to no more than the minimum tread depth indicators.
c) Not have an augmented or modified tread pattern.
6.7.1.3
Tyre warmers and tyre treatment may not be used.
6.7.1.4
The following may be altered or modified.
a) The fuel system so as to provide for a steel or aluminium tank with a one
way vented system breathing into a separate catch bottle having a
minimum capacity of 250cc.
b) Fuel metering jets.
98
ROAD RACING
c)
6.7.1.5
6.7.1.6
OEM carburetors must be used. The throat diameter must not exceed
28mm.
d) The cylinder and cylinder head for the purposes of repair but original
materials must be used.
e) Spark plug type and range.
f)
Front fork oil and spring pre-load settings.
g) Brake friction materials.
h) Sprockets and chains.
i)
The cooling system but only water may be used as a coolant.
j)
No other alterations or modifications are permitted.
Paper or foam type filters must be fitted.
Still air boxes or air filter assemblies may not be fitted.
6.7.2 Solo Road Race 160cc
6.7.3 Junior
6.7.3.1
In addition to the general rules regulating all competition, the following apply to
junior competition.
a) Competitors must be 13 to under 16 years of age;
b) No more than 20 competitors may compete in any junior event.
6.7.4 125cc GP Class
6.7.4.1
Fifteen year old competitors may participate in the 125cc GP class only
provided they:
a) Satisfy their SCB of their competence.
b) Obtain a licence endorsement for road racing only.
c) 15 year old riders cannot compete in combined capacity/class races.
6.7.5 Refueling
6.7.5.1
During refueling, each machine must be stationary with the engine stopped.
6.7.5.2
Refueling will be deemed to have commenced when the fuel tank has been
opened and completed when the tank is closed.
6.7.5.3
While refueling is being undertaken in pit lane it is compulsory for there to be
one pit crew member designated to attend to any fire which may occur. This
crew member must stand near the machine and overhead tower (if used) and
be poised with a fire extinguisher ready to operate, which is a minimum of 9kg
in size and suitable for extinguishing inflammable liquid fires.
6.7.6 Refueling Devices
6.7.6.1
When the event SR allow for refueling in pit lane during an event, the scrutineer
of the meeting, or his nominee, prior to that event must specifically approve the
refueling equipment. The inspection procedure will be detailed in SR.
6.7.6.2
Refueling may only be carried out by the use of either:
a) An overhead tower; or
b) A refueling churn.
6.7.6.3
Overhead tower refueling systems must comply with the following:
a) Fuel to be stored in a single container no more than 2 metres above pit
lane.
b) The container must not exceed 40 litres in capacity and must have a
closed top.
c) A filler cap must be fitted.
d) A breather pipe not exceeding 70mm inside diameter must be fitted.
e) The container may have a conical bottom, with the overall height of the
container and cone not exceeding 800mm.
f)
A flexible hose not exceeding 40mm inside diameter and 2000mm in
length must be fitted to the bottom of the container and equipped with a
“dead man” shut off valve.
99
ROAD RACING
g)
6.7.6.4
6.7.6.5
6.7.6.6
6.7.6.7
6.7.6.8
6.7.6.9
The container may be fitted with tubing of not more than 120mm in length
and inside diameter of 25mm beyond the shut off valve.
h) The container must be mounted on a self supporting tower and must not
be held by or attached to any person.
i)
Cistern type fuel cocks are not permitted.
The Overhead tower including reservoir and delivery hose must:
a) Remain behind the pit wall; or
b) Be contained entirely within the pit garage.
Delivery hoses may be moved into the pit lane from pit garages a maximum of
three minutes prior to any pit stop and must be held by the relevant attendant at
all times while in pit lane.
Refueling churns must comply with the following:
a) A maximum capacity of 40 litres.
b) Be designed to prevent fuel spillage regardless of the angle at which the
churn is oriented.
c) May have a conical bottom, with the overall height of the churn and cone
not exceeding 800mm.
d) Be fitted with a single flexible delivery hose with minimum flexibility
between the churn and the fuel cock.
All churns and associated equipment must;
a) Remain behind the pit wall; or
b) Be contained entirely within the pit garage.
Churns may be moved into the pit lane from pit garages a maximum of three
minutes prior to any pit stop and must be held by the relevant attendant at all
times while in pit lane.
Any refueling in pit lane or paddock area not utilising the above procedures
must;
a) Be under taken with the machine either totally within a pit garage; or
b) In an area of the paddock specifically designated for the purpose of
refueling.
6.7.7 Starting Grid Format - Solo
6.7.7.1
The starting grid format for solo machines will be as follows:
a) The fastest qualifying machine will occupy pole position which will be in
the front row on the opposite side of the track from the direction of the first
corner;
b) The remaining machines will be arranged on the grid in descending order
of qualifying times according to the following pattern:
Pole
1m
2
1m
9m
3
1m
4
5
1m
6
1m
9m
7
1m
8
9
1m
10
1m
9m
11
1m
12
13
1m
14
1m
15
1m
16
100
ROAD RACING
6.7.8 Starting Grid Format - Sidecars
6.7.8.1
The starting grid format for sidecars will be as follows:
a) The fastest qualifying machine will occupy pole position which will be in
the front row on the opposite side of the track from the direction of the first
corner.
b) The remaining machines will be arranged on the grid in descending order
of qualifying times according to the following pattern:
Pole
2
3
5
4
6
6.7.9 Qualifying
6.7.9.1
Unless otherwise provided for in the SR, qualifying for starting grid positions
must be held.
6.7.9.2
For events consisting of more than one race, starting grid positions will be
determined by the following methods:
a) For the first, by qualifying speed.
b) Subject to the SR, for a subsequent race in the same event, by qualifying
order or by the order of finishing in the immediately preceding race.
6.7.9.3
In the absence of qualifying, the Clerk of the Course must allocate starting grid
positions.
6.7.9.4
Subject to the SR, the Clerk of the Course may permit any competitor who
does not qualify to start.
6.7.10 Stopping and Re-Running
6.7.10.1
The Steward or Clerk of the Course who has excluded a competitor for unfair
conduct and considers that such conduct has:
a) Given an advantage to the team of which the offender is a member; or
b) In the case of a non-team event, jeopardised the fair chances of one or
more of the other competitors in the event;
may declare the event void and order a re-run.
6.7.10.2
If the event continues, any competitor unable to cross the finish line as a result
of such conduct on the part of the excluded competitor may be deemed to have
finished the race in the place:
a) Held immediately before such conduct; or
b) having regard to any advancement in placing following the exclusion, in
some other place.
6.7.10.3
A Steward or Clerk of the Course may stop an event and order it to be re-run if
it would be dangerous for it to continue.
6.7.10.4
In any re-run:
a) Any competitor who:
i)
Fell in the stopped event as a result of having been fouled.
ii)
Intentionally laid down his or her machine in the interests of
safety; or
iii)
Left the course in the interests of safety;
may participate.
b) Any competitor who:
i)
Caused or contributed to the event being stopped;
ii)
Failed to start in;
iii)
Retired from;
iv)
Was excluded from; or
v)
Had been lapped during the course of the stopped event;
101
ROAD RACING
6.7.10.5
may not participate.
Where the Steward or Clerk of the Course has stopped a race due to danger
the following will apply:
a) If no more than two laps of the stopped race were completed:
i)
The stopped race will be declared null and void.
ii)
The race may be re-run.
iii)
The re-run race will be for the full race distance.
iv)
The original grid positions will be used.
v)
The place of any machine unable to take part in the re-run race
will be left vacant.
vi)
Machines may be repaired or replaced provided they have been
approved by the scrutineer.
b) If more than two laps, but less than 75% of the race distance, have been
completed:
i)
The race may be re-started, but only once.
ii)
The restart must occur no more than 30 minutes after the race
has been stopped.
iii)
The re-started race distance will be equal to the balance of the
stopped race distance.
iv)
Positions on the grid for the re-started race will be determined
by the order of competitors at the finish line of the last full lap of
the stopped race.
v)
Only competitors who have completed at least 75% of the laps
completed by the leading competitor at the time of stopping will
be permitted to participate in the re-started race.
vi)
Machines may be repaired or replaced provided they have been
approved by the scrutineer.
vii)
The stopped race and any re-run will be deemed to be parts of
the one race.
viii)
The winner will be the competitor having the highest number of
laps at the finish.
ix)
Where two or more competitors complete the same number of
laps the winning order will be determined by the time taken by
each to complete those laps.
x)
If at least 75% of the scheduled race distance is completed full
points will be awarded.
xi)
If less than 75% of the scheduled race distance is completed
half points will be awarded.
6.7.11 Scoring
6.7.11.1
The results for each competitor in each event will be determined by the
allocation to that competitor of points in accordance with the following table.
Place
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
6.7.11.2
Points
25
22
20
18
16
15
14
Place
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Points
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
Place
15
16
17
18
19
20
Points
6
5
4
3
2
1
If a tie on points occurs for any position in an event which is conducted over
more than one race, the tying competitor who has the higher finishing position
in the final race of the event will be awarded the position.
102
ROAD RACING
6.7.11.3
If a tie on points occurs for any position in a series, the tying competitor who
has the greatest number of higher placings in the series will be awarded the
position.
6.7.12 False Starts
6.7.12.1
Each machine must remain stationary in its grid position until the start signal is
given.
6.7.12.2
A false start occurs when:
a) The front axle of a solo machine; or
b) The leading edge of a sidecar machine crosses the line indicating the front
of that machine’s grid position before the starting signal is given.
103
7. MOTOCROSS AND SUPERCROSS
7.1 PROTECTIVE CLOTHING
7.1.1 Helmets, Clothing, Gloves and Footwear
7.1.1.1
No competitor may practise, start or compete in any motocross or supercross
competition unless wearing:
a) An approved and correctly fitting helmet which must:
i)
Carry the Standards Association of Australia "AS 1698" label;
or
ii)
Be approved under Rule 01.69 & 01.70 of the FIM Technical
Rules.
b) Trousers of leather or synthetic material of similar durability. Trousers of
other than leather must be non-combustible and be fitted with a lining.
c) A jersey which:
i)
Must be of close knit fabric of natural or synthetic fibre; and
ii)
Must be a snug fit and provide protection against abrasion to
the body and arms.
d) Footwear which must:
i)
Be of recognised motocross type;
ii)
Be constructed of leather, plastic or other similarly durable
material; and
iii)
Be of a length that must at least cover ¾ of the length of the
lower leg, with the rider in a racing position on the machine.
e) Gloves of leather or other material of similar or greater durability.
f)
Goggles or visors as specified in rule 7.1.3.
7.1.2 No person may wear open footwear in the pits.
7.1.3 Goggles and Visors
7.1.3.1
Spectacles, protective goggles, helmet visors and tear-offs may be worn
provided:
a) Eye protectors and spectacles are made of non-shattering material.
b) Metal or perspex face shields are not used.
c) Eye shades or peaks are of a flexible material.
7.1.4 Junior Clothing
7.1.4.1
In addition to the general requirements for clothing, juniors must comply as
follows:
a) Protective clothing must not be loose or flapping.
b) Synthetic or rubber boots may be worn as an alternative to leather for
competitors with smaller than size one feet.
c) Commercially manufactured body armour must be worn.
7.1.5 Hair and Jewellery
a) Hair longer than shoulder length must be confined in the helmet or jersey;
b) Body jewellery is to be removed or securely covered with tape prior to
competition.
104
MOTOCROSS AND SUPERCROSS
7.2 FRAMES AND PARTS
7.2.1 Solo
7.2.1.1
Hand lever protectors:
a) Must be single mounted for motocross and Supercross.
b) May be double mounted on machines in club and interclub natural terrain
motocross events.
7.2.1.2
Efficient brakes must be fitted to the front and rear wheels. When the brake
cam arm or lever is of the open or hooked type, the brake actuating rod or
cable must be secured so as to prevent accidental dislodgment.
7.2.1.3
No machine may be fitted with scoop or paddle tyres.
7.2.2 Sidecar
7.2.2.1
Wheel track measurement, taken between the longitudinal centres of the rear
and sidecar wheels must be between 810mm and 1100mm.
7.2.2.2
The minimum ground clearance must be 175mm unladen.
7.2.2.3
The maximum lean of the motorcycle at saddle height must be 50mm.
7.2.2.4
There must be no less than 4 sidecar attachment points.
7.2.2.5
The dimensions of the sidecar baseboard in plan view, taken from a line drawn
no further rearwards than the lowest point of the front down-tube to the forward
most point of the sidecar wheel tyre and terminating no further rearwards than a
line drawn at right angles to the machine from the rearmost point of the rear
tyre, must be:
a) At least 760mm long adjacent to the sidecar wheel.
b) At least 300mm width with at least 25mm radius to all corners.
7.2.2.6
There must be no more than 50mm between baseboard and motorcycle and
between baseboard and sidecar wheel. The baseboard must be arranged so
as not to allow the passenger's feet to be trapped.
7.2.2.7
All handholds must be finished with a loop of at least 100mm.
7.2.2.8
Stirrup fitting for the passenger's feet are not permitted.
7.2.2.9
Handholds on the sidecar must not project beyond a line taken with the outer
edge of the sidecar mudguard or bodywork. All hand holds adjacent to the
nose section of the sidecar and less than 200mm from the track surface must
be at an angle of at least 45 degrees from the horizontal.
7.2.2.10
The rear end of the rear wheel mudguard must terminate not more than 65
degrees above a horizontal line drawn through the rear wheel axle and be
valanced to baseboard level on the inside.
7.2.2.11
The sidecar mudguard must cover at least 135 degrees of the periphery of the
wheel and be valanced to baseboard level on the inside.
7.2.2.12
No machine may be fitted with scoop or paddle tyres.
7.3 SENIOR CAPACITY CLASSES
7.3.1 Machines Other Than Junior
7.3.1.1
The capacity classes for machines other than junior for competitions other than
Australian Championships are:
125cc
250cc
500cc
7.3.1.2
up to 125cc
over 125cc & up to 250cc
over 350cc & up to 500cc 2 stroke and
over 350cc & up to 650cc 4 stroke
SCBs may authorise 125cc 2 stroke and 250cc 4 stroke machines be
combined into one class.
105
MOTOCROSS AND SUPERCROSS
7.4 JUNIOR
7.4.1 50cc motorcycles are to comply with GCR 5.9.
7.4.2 80cc Four Stroke Class
7.4.2.1
Machines used in the 80cc four stroke classes must remain standard with the
manufacturer’s specifications with the exception of:
a) Exhaust system;
b) Gearing;
c) Carburettor jetting;
d) Plastics; and
e) Handlebars.
7.5 FUEL
7.5.1 Fuel
7.5.2 Fuel for all machines must be:
a) Unleaded; and
b) Be no more than 98 RON; and
c) Contain no additives other than those added at the point of manufacture
except for lubricating oil for two stroke engines; and
d) Be readily available from retail petrol pumps within Australia; or
e) Be a brand of fuel homologated by MA.
7.6 COMPETITION RULES - ALL AGES AND CLASSES
7.6.1 Starting
7.6.1.1
Unless otherwise determined in the SR, massed starts must be used.
7.6.1.2
The order and position of each competitor will be at the discretion of the
promoter and will be determined on the day of the event.
7.6.1.3
The starting grid for all events will:
a) Have not less than one metre space for each solo motorcycle;
b) Be in one straight line
c) Allow for no more than 40 competitors
7.6.1.4
The maximum number of starters must be specified in SR.
7.6.1.5
Unless otherwise determined in the SR, for solo events:
a) Individually backward falling devices, with each gate a minimum of 500mm
and a maximum of 600mm in height, must be used.
b) A rear barrier must be placed to prevent riders from moving their
motorcycles no more than 600mm back from the gate.
7.6.1.6
Unless otherwise determined in the SR, for sidecar events the width of the
starting grid must permit a minimum of fifteen machines in one row, with two
metre space for each machine.
7.6.1.7
Unless otherwise determined in the SR:
a) All competitors must be called to the start line at least two minutes before
each start.
b) At the end of the two minutes, and when the starter is ready, the starter
will hold up a thirty second sign for a full thirty seconds.
c) At the end of thirty seconds a five second sign will be displayed.
d) The gate will drop between five and ten seconds after the five second sign
is shown.
106
MOTOCROSS AND SUPERCROSS
7.6.2 Finishing
7.6.2.1
The finish line must:
a) Be marked with a flexible post at each side of the track; and
b) Be clearly visible to the judge.
7.7 SUPERCROSS
7.7.1 Supercross Licence Conditions
7.7.1.1
A person may not compete in a supercross race unless:
a) That person is at least 12 years of age:refer rule 5.2.2.1 (d)
b) Has a current national competition licence which is endorsed under the
following rule.
7.7.1.2
To be endorsed as a supercross competitor a person must:
a) Use a solo machine with a capacity of at least 80cc;
b) Attend a supercross training school conducted by an MA accredited coach
c) At the conclusion of the supercross training school be able to competently
display to the MA accredited coach the following:
i)
Jump a double jump, which is:
a) 4 metres for 80cc riders
b) 6 metres for 125/250cc riders
ii)
Jump a tabletop, which is:
c) 8-10 metres for 80cc riders
d) 10-12 metres for 125/250cc riders
iii)
Ride through stutters at a competitive speed in a straight line
iv)
A sound knowledge of supercross rules and safety issues as
examined by a multiple-choice questionnaire.
7.7.1.3
The coach conducting the assessment under the preceding rule may endorse
the licence of a person as a supercross competitor. A decision to:
a) Endorse the licence;
b) Refuse an endorsement; or
c) Grant an endorsement conditionally will have the same force and effect as
if it was a decision by an SCB under Rule 3.3.1.12.
7.7.1.4
A person who:
a) Has entered a supercross competition;
b) Paid the entry fee for the relevant meeting
c) Is required to submit to an assessment under these rules.
d) Fails to be endorsed as a supercross competitor at the meeting.
Is entitled to a refund of the fee.
7.7.1.5
Once endorsed for supercross a person retains that endorsement unless:
a) They fail to participate in a supercross event each year;
b) During the course of a supercross meeting, the Steward or Clerk of the
Course determines otherwise.
7.7.2 No Jump Signals
7.7.2.1
Yellow flags will be waved in supercross events to indicate immediate danger.
7.7.2.2
When yellow flags are waved competitors must not:
a) Jump.
b) Overtake other competitors.
at the set of jumps where the yellow flags are waved.
7.7.2.3
The penalties for breaching this rule are:
a) First offence, relegation of 3 places and up to a $500 fine.
b) Subsequent offences in the same year, exclusion and $500 fine.
107
MOTOCROSS AND SUPERCROSS
7.7.3 Warm Up Lap
7.7.3.1
During the first lap of any practice yellow flags are to be waved indicating there
is to be no jumping.
7.8 GRADING
7.8.1 Senior Grades - Motocross and Supercross
7.8.1.1
There will be three grades of competitors in all senior classes as follows:
a) Pro Class.
b) Intermediate Class.
c) Clubman.
7.9 FREESTYLE MOTOCROSS
7.9.1 Freestyle Motocross Licence Conditions
7.9.1.1
A person may not participate in Freestyle Motocross unless:
a) That person is at least 16 years of age; and
b) Has a current MA Senior National competition licence which is endorsed
under the following rules.
7.9.1.2
To be endorsed as a Freestyle Motocross competitor a person must:
a) Use a solo machine with a capacity of at least 125cc
7.9.1.3
There are two levels of Endorsement. They are:
a) Freestyle Motocross
b) Professional Freestyle Motocross
7.9.1.4
To gain a Freestyle Motocross endorsement a rider must:
a) Have a MA Senior National Licence and be endorsed for Supercross
b) Attend a Freestyle Motocross Training School conducted by an accredited
Freestyle Motocross Coach
c) Successfully complete the MA competency assessment
d) A rider with this level of endorsement can only perform under the following
conditions:
i)
Jump with a minimum take-off and landing zone of 25m
(distance is from front wheel to base of ramp)
ii)
Jump a maximum distance of 18m (distance is from end of
jump ramp to start of landing ramp)
7.9.1.5
To gain a Professional Freestyle Motocross endorsement a rider must: a) Have a MA Senior National Licence
b) Be endorsed for Freestyle Motocross
c) Perform at a minimum of 6 MA permitted events with a Freestyle
Motocross Endorsement
d) Consistently demonstrate an ability to jump a minimum distance of 23m
with a run-up and run-off of 20m or less
e) Successfully complete the MA competency assessment for Professional
Freestyle Motocross conducted by approved coach
7.9.1.6
The Endorsing Coach Must:
a) Be identified and approved by the MA Motocross Commission to endorse
Freestyle Motocross
b) Obtain a Coaching Permit from the state controlling body office in which
the assessment is taking place
108
8. DIRT TRACK
8.1 PROTECTIVE CLOTHING
8.1.1 Helmets, Clothing, Footwear and Gloves
8.1.1.1
No competitor may practise, start or compete in any dirt track competition
unless:
a) Wearing an approved and correctly fitting helmet which must:
i)
Carry the Standards Association of Australia "AS 1698" label;
or
ii)
Be approved under Rule 01.69 & 01.70 of the FIM Track
Racing Technical Rules.
b) Wearing trousers of leather or synthetic material of similar durability.
Synthetic trousers must be non combustible and be fitted with a nonremovable lining.
c) Wearing a jersey which:
i)
Must be of close knit fabric of natural or synthetic fibre.
ii)
Must be a snug fit and provide protection against abrasion to
the body and arms.
d) A commercially manufactured back protector, which continuously covers
the back area between the collar line and the base of the spine if wearing
leathers, or a full kevlar suit.
e) In the case of competitors wearing apparel as described in 8.1.1.1.b) & c)
above:
i)
Commercially manufactured armour which protects the elbows,
shoulders and the back.
ii)
Protection of the back must be continuous and cover all of the
back area between the collar and the base of the spine.
f)
Wearing footwear which must:
i)
Be constructed of leather or other similarly durable material.
ii)
Be of a length that must at least overlap the trousers with the
rider in a racing position on the machine.
g) Wearing gloves of leather or other material of similar or greater durability,
provided that fingerless gloves may be worn by passengers on sidecars.
h) Wearing Goggles or visors as specified in rule 8.1.2.
8.1.1.2
No person may wear open footwear in the pits.
8.1.1.3
There may be advertising on clothing.
8.1.2 Goggles and Visors
8.1.2.1
Spectacles, protective goggles, helmet visors and tear-offs may be worn
provided:
a) Eye protectors and spectacles are made of non shattering material.
b) Metal or perspex face shields are not used.
c) Eye shades or peaks are of a flexible material.
8.1.3 Hair and Jewellery
a) Hair longer than shoulder length must be confined in the helmet or jersey.
b) Body jewellery is to be removed or securely covered with tape prior to
competition.
109
DIRT TRACK
8.2 ENGINES - SENIOR
8.2.1 Capacity Classes - Senior
8.2.1.1
The capacity classes for senior machines are:
Solo
125cc
250cc
500cc Slider
500cc
450cc 4 stroke
Over 450cc 4
stroke.r
Sidecar
600cc
1100cc
8.2.1.2
Up to 125cc
Over 125cc & up to 250cc
Slider Type – over 250c & up to 500cc
2 Stroke MX Frame - over 250cc & up to 500cc
4 Stroke MX Frame – over 250cc & up to 450cc
4 Stroke MX Frame – over 450cc
Four cylinder engines - up to 600cc And Twin or single cylinder
engines - up to 650cc
Over 600cc and up to 1100cc
For a machine competing in any 1100cc sidecar event the engine must comply
as follows:
a) Supercharged and turbocharged engines must not exceed 500cc.
b) On liquid cooled engines an overflow pipe must be used to direct any
overflow of coolant away from the rider and passenger.
8.2.2 Fuel
8.2.2.1
For Senior and Classic competition the following fuels are permitted:
a) Methanol of a commercial make; or
b) Unleaded fuel which complies with rule 8.2.2.2.
8.2.2.2
For Junior competition and those competitors not using methanol under rule
8.2.2.1, fuel must be:
a) Unleaded.
b) Be no more than 98 RON.
c) Contain no additives other than those added at the point of manufacture
except for lubricating oil for two stroke engines.
d) Be readily available from retail petrol pumps within Australia; or
e) Be a brand of fuel homologated by MA.
8.3 FRAMES AND PARTS
8.3.1 Senior - Solo
8.3.1.1
For Dirt Track competition a machine:
a) May be constructed as either a slider type or motocross type.
b) Must have a gearbox with a minimum of two gear ratios.
c) Must have rear suspension.
d) Must have a minimum of one working brake.
8.3.1.2
Tyres
a) The rear tyre must be a maximum width of 150mm when measured at a
point on the tyre located at 90º to the where the tyre contacts the ground
and at a pressure inflated to 14 psi.
b) Tyre pressure may be adjusted after measurement.
8.3.2 Senior - Sidecar
8.3.2.1
The wheel track must be between 810mm 1100mm measured between the
longitudinal centres of the rear and sidecar wheels.
110
DIRT TRACK
8.3.2.2
8.3.2.3
8.3.2.4
8.3.2.5
8.3.2.6
8.3.2.7
8.3.2.8
8.3.2.9
8.3.2.10
8.3.2.11
8.3.2.12
8.3.2.13
8.3.2.14
8.3.2.15
8.3.2.16
8.3.2.17
8.3.2.18
8.3.2.19
8.3.2.20
8.3.2.21
The drive must be transmitted to the track through the rear wheel of the
motorcycle.
Ground clearance must be at least 75mm unladen.
The lean of the motorcycle at saddle height must be no more than 50mm.
When multiple tyres on one wheel are used, the maximum collective width of
the tyres must not exceed 280mm.
One efficient rear wheel brake must be fitted.
Safety chains must be fitted to all machines equipped with girder type front
forks.
A passenger must be carried in a suitably constructed sidecar.
There must be no less than 4 sidecar mounting points.
The dimensions of the sidecar baseboard in plan view, taken from a line drawn
no further rearwards than the lowest point of the front down tubes to the forward
most point of the sidecar wheel tyre and terminating no further rearwards than a
line drawn at right angles to the machine from the rearmost point of the rear
tyre, must be:
a) At least 760mm long adjacent to the sidecar wheel.
b) At least 300mm wide, having at least 25mm radius to all corners.
The leading edge of the sidecar floor must be protected by a nose cone or a rail
of at least 50mm height.
There must be no more than 50mm between baseboard and motorcycle and
baseboard and sidecar wheel. The baseboard must be arranged so as not to
allow the passenger's feet to be trapped.
All handholds must be finished with a loop of at least 100mm.
Stirrup fittings for the passenger's feet are not permitted.
Handholds on the sidecar must not project beyond a line taken with the outer
edge of the sidecar mudguard or bodywork.
A suitable passenger handhold must be provided on the off side of the rear
wheel.
All hand holds adjacent to the nose section of the sidecar and less than 200mm
from the track surface must be at a minimum angle of 45 degrees from the
horizontal.
The rear end of the rear wheel mudguard must terminate not more than 45
degrees above a horizontal line drawn through the rear wheel axle and be
valanced to baseboard level on the inside and to axle level on the outside, with
the suspension depressed.
The sidecar mudguard must cover at least 180 degrees of the periphery of the
wheel and be valanced to baseboard level on both sides.
All footrests, brake levers, and gear levers on the opposite side of the
motorcycle to the sidecar must be folding, or be shielded by a continuous bar of
12mm minimum diameter.
Any open area between the footrests, the continuous bar and the offside of the
motorcycle must be filled in with a suitable material.
8.4 JUNIOR
8.4.1 50cc motorcycles are to comply with GCR 5.9.
8.5 CLASSIC DIRT TRACK CHAMPIONSHIPS
8.5.1 Age Group Classes
8.5.1.1
There will be the following age group classes.
a) 16 years to under 30 years.
b) 30 years to under 40 years.
c) 40 years to under 50 years.
d) 50 years and over.
111
DIRT TRACK
8.5.1.2
If there are fewer than ten entries per class the classes may be combined into:
a) Under 40 years;
b) 40 years and over.
8.6 COMPETITION RULES
8.6.1 Entries
8.6.1.1
No machine may be entered more than once in a class.
8.6.1.2
Any machine, which is entered, in more than one class, must display the
allocated riding number for that class on all three number plates when being
used in each class.
8.6.2 Practice and Qualifying
8.6.2.1
Practice and qualifying shall be as prescribed in SR.
8.6.3 Starts
8.6.3.1
The method of starting will be prescribed in SR
8.6.3.2
Starting positions will be prescribed in SR
112
9. SPEEDWAY AND TRACK
9.1 PROTECTIVE CLOTHING
9.1.1 Helmets, Colours, Clothing and Footwear
9.1.1.1
No competitor may practice, start or compete in any speedway/track
competition unless:
a) Wearing a correctly fitting helmet which must:
i)
Carry the Standards Association of Australia "AS 1698" label;
or
ii)
Be approved under Rule 01.69 & 01.70 of the FIM Track
Technical Rules.
b) Wearing clothing as follows:
i)
A one-piece suit or jacket and trousers constructed of leather or
other material of similar or greater durability which meets FIM
requirements written in Art 65.07 and 65.08.
ii)
Where jackets or one-piece suits are fitted with front opening
slide fasteners a safety strap must be fitted and secured at the
neck.
iii)
In the case of jackets and trousers, provision must be made to
attach the rear of the jacket securely to the trousers.
iv)
The following areas must be padded with at least a double layer
of leather or enclosed plastic foam at least 8mm thick.
a) Shoulders
b) Elbows
c) Both sides of torso and hip joint
d) Knees
c) Wearing boots with ankle and calf protection which:
i)
Must be constructed of leather or other material of similar or
greater durability but must not be constructed of rubber.
ii)
Must at least overlap the suit or trousers when the rider is in the
normal riding position.
iii)
Must, for solo competitors, in the case of the left foot, have a
steel skid and be made with a curved front extending at least
50mm over the toe of the boot.
d) Wearing gloves of non-split leather or other material of similar or greater
durability and having the following properties:
i)
A minimum thickness of 1.5mm.
ii)
Be fire retardant.
iii)
Be resistant to abrasion.
iv)
Have perspiration absorbing qualities.
v)
Be medically non-toxic and non-allergenic.
e) Wearing a commercially manufactured back protector, which continuously
covers the back area between the collar line and the base of the spine;
f)
Wearing goggles or visors as specified in Rule 9.1.2;
9.1.1.2
Hair and Jewellery
a) Hair longer than shoulder length must be confined in the helmet or jersey;
b) Body jewellery is to be removed or securely covered with tape prior to
competition.
113
SPEEDWAY AND TRACK
9.1.1.3
9.1.1.4
Speedway, competitors must:
a) Wear helmet colours, as prescribed in the programme for the competition,
selected from the following, and subject to the following sub-rules:
i)
For scratch races of:
a) Four riders - red, blue, white, yellow or yellow & black.
b) Six riders - red, blue, white, yellow / yellow & black, green,
orange.
i)
For handicap races - in addition to the above colours, green,
orange, black or black & white.
ii)
The helmet of each competitor must be clearly visible to the
referee, the judge and the timekeeper throughout each event.
iii)
A competitor who has a helmet of the specified colour for an
event may wear the helmet in that event without a helmet
cover.
b) Wear racing numbers allocated to the competitor by the relevant
controlling body as follows:
i)
A number worn on a competitor's back must:
a) Measure 230mm x 230mm, width of number.
b) Be black, with solo background white and sidecar
background yellow.
c) Have a maximum background area of 300mm square.
ii)
A number worn on a competitor's front must:
d) Measure at least 100mm x 80mm width of number.
c) Be black, with solo background white and sidecar background yellow.
d) Be worn on the left breast.
e) Must not have advertising on clothing within 25mm of number
backgrounds.
No competitor may practice, start or compete on a motocross or enduro type
machine in any long track competition unless wearing:
a) An approved and correctly fitting helmet which must:
i)
Carry the Standards Association of Australia "AS 1698" label;
or
ii)
Be approved under Rule 01.69 & 01.70 of the FIM Technical
Rules.
b) Trousers of leather or synthetic material of similar durability. Trousers of
other than leather must be non-combustible and be fitted with a nonremovable lining.
c) A jersey which must be:
i)
Of close knit fabric of natural or synthetic fibre.
ii)
A snug fit and provide protection against abrasion to the body
and arms.
d) Footwear which must be:
i)
Of recognised motocross type.
ii)
Constructed of leather, plastic or other similarly durable
material.
iii)
Of a length that must at least overlap the trousers with the rider
in a racing position on the machine.
e) A commercially manufactured back protector, which continuously covers
the back area between the collar line and the base of the spine if wearing
leathers or a full kevlar suit.
f)
In the case of competitors wearing apparel as described in 9.1.1.4.b) & c)
above:
i)
Commercially manufactured armour which protects the elbows,
shoulders and the back.
114
SPEEDWAY AND TRACK
ii)
g)
h)
Protection of the back must be continuous and cover the
majority of the back area between the collar and the base of the
spine.
Gloves of leather or other material of similar or greater durability.
Goggles or visors as specified in Rule 9.1.2.
9.1.2 Goggles and Visors
9.1.2.1
Spectacles, protective goggles, helmet visors and tear-offs may be worn
provided:
a) Eye protectors and spectacles are made of non shattering material;
b) Eye protectors do not cause visual disturbance;
c) Visors are an integral part of the helmet;
d) Metal or perspex face shields are not used;
e) Eye shades or peaks are of a flexible material.
9.1.2.2
Visors mounted on the helmet or peak may not be used unless:
a) The visor is made of a flexible material that will not shatter on impact;
b) Any rivets or screws used to mount the mechanism are fitted with their
heads flush with the inner or lower surface, provided that where flush
finishing is impractical on a peak, round headed screws or pop rivets
projecting no more than 3mm from the surface may be used; and
9.1.3 No person may wear open footwear in the pits.
9.2 SPEEDWAY - ENGINES
9.2.1 General
9.2.1.1
Primary chain guard protection must be provided by:
a) Fully enclosing the chain with a steel guard; or
b) If a plastic, fibreglass or part open chain guard is used, a steel bolt of not
less than 10mm minimum diameter, placed outside the bottom rear
quadrant of the clutch sprocket. This bolt, if damaged, must be replaced.
9.2.1.2
Mechanical carburettor linkages must be:
a) Enclosed by a suitable material; or
b) Fully enclosed by a box.
9.2.1.3
Noise emissions must not exceed 98dB(A).
9.2.2 500 Solo
9.2.2.1
Engine capacity must not exceed 500cc.
9.2.2.2
Engines must be single cylinder four stroke, four valves maximum, fitted with
one carburettor of 34mm + 0.1mm diameter, and one spark plug. Two valve
engines may use a carburettor of 36mm + 0.1mm diameter. The carburettor
measurements must remain constant over a distance of no less than 25mm on
the engine side and 5mm on the air intake side. The measurements must be
taken from the edges of the throttle valve or throttle butterfly.
9.2.2.3
The fuel output section of the carburettor must be of circular shape.
9.2.2.4
Direct injection must comply with the above carburettor sizes.
9.2.2.5
Supercharging and turbo charging are not permitted.
9.2.3 Sidecar
9.2.3.1
An event may be restricted to machines of a capacity of no more than 500cc,
which will be known as a 500cc class event.
9.2.3.2
For a machine competing in a 500cc class event, the engine must comply as
follows:
a) Where electronic fuel injection is installed it must be of a standard
production type.
b) The engine may not be turbocharged or supercharged.
115
SPEEDWAY AND TRACK
9.2.3.3
For a machine competing in any event other than a 500cc class event the
engine must comply as follows:
a) The engine capacity must not exceed 1045cc.
b) Supercharged and turbocharged engines must not exceed 500cc.
c) On liquid cooled engines an overflow pipe must be used to direct any
overflow of coolant away from the rider and passenger.
9.2.4 Junior – 125cc Solo
9.2.4.1
If the engine is fitted with a gearbox, the gearshift lever must be removed and
the machine must remain in one gear while racing.
9.2.4.2
The engine capacity must not exceed 125cc with a plus 1mm tolerance of the
bore diameter.
9.2.4.3
A single cylinder, 4-stroke engine, fitted with one carburettor, of a mass
produced commuter type must be used.
9.2.4.4
The cylinder head must be as follows
a) Two valve construction and with one spark plug.
b) The action of the valves must be controlled by valve springs.
c) The cylinder head may be ported and, if damaged in use, bearing journals
may be bored and bearings replaced with either roller or bronze bearings.
d) Exhaust valve size must be no more than 25mm and inlet no more than
30mm.
9.2.4.5
There must be a plate of at least 6mm thickness in the manifold between the
cylinder head and the carburettor with a round hole of no more than 24mm
diameter parallel for a distance of 6mm. There must be provision for sealing
wire between the cylinder head and the plate.
9.2.4.6
Early model crankcases may be used with late model heads but the
compression ratio must not exceed 9.7:1.
9.2.4.7
Any type of ignition system may be used.
9.2.4.8
Later model parts, or parts of different manufacture, may be installed.
9.2.4.9
The “Shupa” brand junior speedway machine is approved for competition
in the Junior 125 Solo class, when the machine is fitted with the two valve
head, and compression ratio as per rule 9.2.4.6.
9.2.5 Junior - Sidecar
9.2.5.1
Engine capacity must not exceed 250cc.
9.2.5.2
Machines must be fitted with unmodified production engines and may be fitted
with an operating gearbox.
9.2.5.3
Junior sidecar competitors on junior sidecar machines are allowed to
practice on senior tracks. NOTE: Both rider and passenger must be aged
15 years, and only one machine at a time is allowed.
9.3 SPEEDWAY - FRAMES AND PARTS
9.3.1 General
9.3.1.1
Titanium may not be used in the construction of the engine, the frame, the front
forks, the handlebars, the swing-arms or the wheel axles of any machine.
9.3.1.2
Handlebars must:
a) Be fitted to the unsprung part of the front suspension;
b) Be fitted with a blanking device at each end;
c) Have a width of not more than 900mm nor less than 700mm; and
d) Have handlebar grips attached to the ends with a maximum length of
150mm.
9.3.1.3
Clutch levers must:
a) Have a ball end of a diameter of at least 19mm which is integral with the
lever;
b) Measure no more than 200mm from the fulcrum to the extremity of the
ball.
116
SPEEDWAY AND TRACK
9.3.1.4
9.3.1.5
9.3.1.6
9.3.1.7
9.3.1.8
9.3.1.9
9.3.1.10
9.3.1.11
9.3.1.12
Throttle controls and mechanical carburettor linkages must:
a) Be self closing.
b) Be enclosed so as to prevent jamming.
There must be a kill switch which must:
a) Cut out the ignition.
b) Operate on the primary circuit.
c) Be fitted with a lanyard which must:
i)
Have a total extended length of not exceeding 500mm.
ii)
Be attached around the rider’s (right) wrist when the machine is
in motion.
iii)
Not be secured to the handlebar unless by a readily torn
material.
Stops or other devices must be fitted to ensure a minimum clearance of 30mm
between the handlebar levers and the tank when on full lock.
Steering must be:
a) Direct.
b) Through the front wheel.
c) By a classic telescopic fork, leading link, earls, or girder type.
Light alloys may not be used for wheel axles.
The front wheel must be fitted with a knockout spindle or an approved clamp to
fasten on fork tips.
Brakes may not be fitted.
For any cast or welded wheel, the gaps between the spokes must be filled in.
Machines need not carry number plates.
9.3.2 500 Solo
9.3.2.1
Rear chain guards:
a) Must be fitted to the back end of the rear assembly of machines.
b) Must provide protection where the rear chain enters onto the rear wheel
sprocket.
9.3.2.2
Exhaust systems must not extend beyond the outer circumference of the rear
wheel rim and tyre.
9.3.2.3
The gap between the silencers and the tyre must not exceed 60mm.
9.3.2.4
Exhaust gases must be discharged from the system horizontally and parallel to
the centre line of the machine.
9.3.2.5
The exhaust pipe must be fixed to the cylinder head and frame with a minimum
of three clips, one of which must be attached to the cylinder head.
9.3.2.6
The silencer must be attached to the frame with at least one clip. A second
moveable coupling must be fitted from the first third of the silencer to the frame
with steel cable of at least 3mm or strong steel spring.
9.3.2.7
The diameter of the exhaust pipe must not exceed 50mm or an equivalent area
and must remain constant up to the silencer.
9.3.2.8
The outlet area of the silencer must remain constant over a length of 50mm,
must not exceed 45mm, or an equivalent area, and must not be perforated.
9.3.2.9
The outside shell of the silencer must form one unit. The end of the pipe must
be cut at right angles.
9.3.2.10
Where turbo or similar types of approved silencers are fitted:
a) The silencer must be mounted in a position to discharge the exhaust
fumes at a minimum deflection of 15 degrees from the centre line of the
machine and a maximum of 30 degrees to the ground.
b) The silencer must not be altered in shape or modified in any way, other
than a welded transition section to allow clamping to the exhaust pipe.
c) The maximum internal outlet diameter must be 47mm and must remain as
manufactured.
117
SPEEDWAY AND TRACK
9.3.2.11
9.3.2.12
9.3.2.13
9.3.2.14
9.3.2.15
9.3.2.16
9.3.2.17
9.3.2.18
9.3.2.19
Machines must be fitted with front mudguards that extend at least five degrees
ahead of a vertical line running through the centre of the front wheel axle and at
least five degrees under the top edge of the mud-shield protecting the front of
the engine.
The rear mudguard must extend at least five degrees behind a vertical line
running through the centre of the rear axle.
Rear tyre requirements are as follows:
a) Subsequent modification of tyres is not permitted.
b) The overall width must not exceed 100mm.
c) The tyre must be mounted and inflated to 14 psi at scrutineering.
d) The tread depth must not exceed 8mm measured at right angles to the
face of the tread.
e) All blocks in the same circumference must be of the same depth.
f)
The space between the blocks must not exceed 9.5mm across the tyre or
13mm in a circumferential direction.
g) The space between the blocks must not exceed 22mm. The space across
EC in the relevant diagram must not extend completely across the tyre
measured at right angles to the wall of the tyre, unless broken by a block.
The front tyre may be of any size or type but limited to an overall width of
80mm.
Tyres may not be treated by chemicals, tyre warmers or other means which
tend to alter the shape, minimum shore hardness, construction or other
characteristics.
The minimum weight, without fuel, is 80kg.
Footrests:
a) Must be on the right hand side of the machine and must not exceed
320mm in length measured from the centre line of the motorcycle.
b) Must have metal protection at the end of at least 8mm radius.
c) May be folding and, if so, must be fitted with a device which automatically
returns them to the normal position.
Rear suspension is prohibited.
A single gear only is permitted.
9.3.3 Sidecar
9.3.3.1
No part of the streamlining:
a) May be in front of a vertical line drawn through the leading edge of the
front tyre.
b) May be to the rear of the vertical line drawn through the exterior edge of
the rear rim.
c) Motorcycle framework may come into contact with the ground, with the
rear wheel raised 300mm from the ground.
9.3.3.2
In all handlebar positions, there must be a space of at least 30mm between the
streamlining and the ends of the handlebars, including any attachments.
9.3.3.3
Aero panels, side panels and similar attachments may be used provided they
are constructed of metal, fibreglass or polycarbonate material, are free of sharp
or protruding edges and are not dangerous to the rider or other competitors.
Horizontal wings and aerodynamic friction assisting devices are prohibited.
9.3.3.4
Fuel tanks must be of a material approved by the Australian Standards
Association for fuel containers.
9.3.3.5
The overall width must not exceed 1.5 metres.
9.3.3.6
The length from the leading edge of the front tyre to the outside of the rear
mudguard must not exceed 2.6 metres.
9.3.3.7
Overall height must not exceed 1.2 metres.
9.3.3.8
The wheel base taken at axle height from the centre of the front axle to the
centre of the rear axle must measure between 1280mm and 1800mm.
9.3.3.9
The wheel track, taken between the tracks left by the centre lines of the rear
motorcycle wheel and the sidecar wheel, must measure between 500mm and
1100mm.
118
SPEEDWAY AND TRACK
9.3.3.10
9.3.3.11
9.3.3.12
9.3.3.13
9.3.3.14
9.3.3.15
9.3.3.16
9.3.3.17
9.3.3.18
9.3.3.19
9.3.3.20
9.3.3.21
9.3.3.22
9.3.3.23
9.3.3.24
9.3.3.25
9.3.3.26
9.3.3.27
9.3.3.28
9.3.3.29
Drive must only be transmitted through the rear wheel of the motorcycle.
Tyres may be cut or grooved and of any size or type provided:
a) Solo 2 ply and 4 ply 76mm (3”) tyres may not be used on rear rims
exceeding 127mm (5”) in width.
b) The rear wheel rim width must not exceed 175mm (7”).
c) Knobby tyres may not be used.
The centre lines of the tracks made by the front and rear wheels of the
motorcycle when the machine is proceeding directly forward must be no further
apart than 75mm.
The width of the kneeling pad on the offside of the machine must not exceed
400mm.
The tubing used in the construction of the main frame of a sidecar motorcycle
must have a minimum wall thickness of 1.5mm
The sidecar must be on the left of the motorcycle and if not an integral part of
the chassis must be fixed to the motorcycle in at least four places.
The sidecar wheel must be staggered inwards. If the sidecar wheel is mounted
by a plate on both sides, the diameter of the axle must exceed 12mm.
The area inside a spoked wheel must be covered by a disc or shield so as to
prevent a rider's or passenger's feet or hands coming into contact with the
spoked area.
Any space between the sidecar body and the rear wheel of the motorcycle
greater than 76mm must be decked so as to prevent the passenger's hands or
feet entering between the chassis bars.
Where the sidecar wheel is mounted with a bracket on one side only the axle
diameter must be a least 20mm.
Stub axles must have a minimum diameter at the base plate of 40mm.
a) The sidecar wheel must be covered by a non-rotating shield over at least the
outward facing spoked area, and, if trials tyres are fitted, the tyre area as well.
The shield must be fitted securely to the sidecar and incorporate a 25mm
horizontal crash bar surrounding the outer side of the sidecar wheel, at floor
level.
b) The wheel must be either spoked, moulded type mag., or other
approved wheel. Riveted type mag. wheels are not permitted.
The shield must be constructed of sheet metal, fibreglass or similar material
and be flat or nearly so.
The fitting of a front mudguard is not compulsory.
Rear mudguards:
a) Must be valanced on both sides down to axle level.
b) Must be fitted with a flexible mud flap, which:
i)
Is a minimum thickness of 6mm and be of a reinforced belting
type rubber.
ii)
Is attached to the rear mudguard.
iii)
Ends no more than 20 mm above ground level.
iv)
Is attached to 3 sides of the mudguard and projects forward by
a minimum of 75 mm on each side.
c) May be incorporated into the passenger’s seat moulding.
d) Promoters may require additional specifications for the protection of
spectators.
Footrests must be on the right hand side to the direction of travel and linked by
a continuous bar.
Any open area between the footrests, the continuous bar and the right hand
side to the direction of travel must be filled in with a suitable material so as to
stop a rider or passenger from trapping their feet.
All exterior barwork and tube work ends must be plugged or capped so as to
present a flush or convex end.
A suitable handhold must be provided for the passenger on the offside of the
machine and near the front.
119
SPEEDWAY AND TRACK
9.3.3.30
9.3.3.31
Exhaust fumes must be discharged towards the rear of the machine. Exhaust
fumes must not be discharged so as to raise dust, foul the tyres or
inconvenience the passenger or any other rider or passenger.
The exhaust must be attached to the machine at a minimum of two locations on
the frame, one to the rear, and to the cylinder head.
9.3.4 Junior – 125cc Solo
9.3.4.1
Wheelbase must not exceed 1375mm.
9.3.4.2
Rear rim diameter must not exceed 432mm (17”).
9.3.4.3
Front rim diameter must not exceed 482mm (19”).
9.3.4.4
Rear tyres:
a) Trial pattern tread tyres must be fitted.
b) Manufacturers stamping must not exceed 90mm x 432.mm (3.5” x 17”).
c) Width must not exceed 90mm (3.5”).
d) Tyres may not be modified.
9.3.4.5
Front tyres:
a) Trial pattern tread tyres must be fitted.
b) The diameter must not exceed 482mm (19”).
c) Tyres may not be modified.
9.3.5 Junior - Sidecar
9.3.5.1
Overall length from the leading edge of the front tyre to the outside edge of the
rear mudguard must not exceed 2.1 metres.
9.3.5.2
Overall width must not exceed 1250mm.
9.3.5.3
Wheelbase, taken at axle height and from the centre of the front axle to the
centre of the rear axle, must measure between 1500mm and 1200mm.
9.3.5.4
Stub axles must have a minimum diameter at the base plate of 25mm.
9.3.5.5
Wheel track, taken between the tracks left by the centre lines of the rear
motorcycle wheel and the sidecar wheel, must measure between 800mm and
600mm.
9.3.5.6
The width of the kneeling pad on the off side of the motorcycle must not exceed
300mm.
9.3.5.7
The sidecar wheel must be covered by a non-rotating shield over at least the
outward facing spoked area, and, if trials tyres are fitted, the tyres.
9.3.5.8
The shield must be fitted securely to the sidecar and incorporate a 20mm
horizontal crash bar surrounding the outer side of the sidecar wheel, at floor
level.
9.3.5.9
Rear mudguards must be within 100mm from the ground and valanced down to
ground level with a prescribed rear mud flap.
9.3.5.10
Front and rear rim diameter for the motorcycle must not exceed 482mm (19”).
9.3.5.11
Rear rim width for the motorcycle must not exceed 102mm and trial pattern
tread tyres must be fitted.
9.3.5.12
Hand holds and footrests must comply with the requirements for Senior
Speedway sidecars.
9.3.5.13
Sidecar wheels and tyres:
a) No restriction on type or size except knobby tyres are not permitted.
b) Cutting or grooving tyres is permitted.
c) The sidecar wheel must be either spoked, moulded type mag., or
other approved type wheel. Riveted type mag. wheels are not
permitted.
120
SPEEDWAY AND TRACK
9.4 TRACK - ENGINES
9.4.1 General
9.4.1.1
Noise emissions must not exceed 98dB(A).
9.4.2 Motorcycle and Sidecar
9.4.2.1
An event may be restricted to machines of a capacity of no more than 500cc,
which will be known as a 500cc class event.
9.4.2.2
For a machine competing in any event other than a 500cc class event the
engine must comply as follows:
a) The engine capacity must not exceed 1100cc.
b) Supercharged and turbocharged engines must not exceed 500cc.
c) On liquid cooled engines an overflow pipe must be used to direct any
overflow of coolant away from the rider and passenger.
9.5 TRACK - FRAMES AND PARTS
9.5.1.1
9.5.1.2
9.5.1.3
9.5.1.4
9.5.1.5
Unless otherwise stated in SR for the meeting, brakes must not be fitted unless
there are multi-row starts.
Rear suspension and swinging arm must be fitted.
Must have a minimum of two gears.
Minimum weight of 85 kg.
For long track only the rear wheel rim must have a maximum width of 100 mm,
be 19” or 22” in diameter, as defined in SR.
9.5.2 Motorcycle and Sidecar
9.5.2.1
The wheel track must be between 635mm and 1000mm measured between the
longitudinal centres of the rear and sidecar wheels.
9.5.2.2
The drive must be transmitted to the track through the rear wheel of the
motorcycle.
9.5.2.3
The ground clearance must be at least 75mm unladen.
9.5.2.4
The stagger at the top of the sidecar wheel must be:
a) Inwards, no more than 300mm;
b) Outwards, nil.
9.5.2.5
Safety chains must be fitted to all machines equipped with girder type front
forks.
9.5.2.6
A passenger must be carried in a suitably constructed sidecar.
9.5.2.7
The sidecar must be attached to the left hand side of the motorcycle.
9.5.2.8
There must be no less than 4 sidecar mounting points.
9.5.2.9
The dimensions of the sidecar baseboard in plan view, taken from a line drawn
no further rearwards than the lowest point of the front down tubes to the forward
most point of the sidecar wheel tyre and terminating no further rearwards than a
line drawn at right angles to the machine from the rearmost point of the rear
tyre, must be:
a) At least 760mm long adjacent to the sidecar wheel.
b) At least 300mm wide, having at least 25mm radius to all corners.
9.5.2.10
All edges of the sidecar floor, not otherwise protected, must be protected by a
nose cone or a rail of at least 50mm height.
9.5.2.11
There must be no more than 50mm between baseboard and motorcycle and
baseboard and sidecar wheel. The baseboard must be arranged so as not to
allow the passenger's feet to be trapped.
9.5.2.12
All handholds must be finished with a loop of at least 100mm.
9.5.2.13
Stirrup fittings for the passenger's feet are not permitted.
9.5.2.14
Handholds on the sidecar must not project beyond a line taken with the outer
edge of the sidecar mudguard or bodywork.
9.5.2.15
A suitable passenger handhold must be provided on the off side of the rear
wheel.
121
SPEEDWAY AND TRACK
9.5.2.16
9.5.2.17
9.5.2.18
9.5.2.19
9.5.2.20
9.5.2.21
9.5.2.22
All hand holds adjacent to the nose section of the sidecar and less than 200mm
from the track surface must be at a minimum angle of 45 degrees from the
horizontal.
The rear end of the rear wheel mudguard must terminate not more than 45
degrees above a horizontal line drawn through the rear wheel axle and be
valanced to baseboard level on the inside and to axle level on the outside, with
the suspension depressed.
The sidecar mudguard, if fitted, must cover at least 180 degrees of the
periphery of the wheel and be valanced to baseboard level on both sides.
A sidecar wheel disc may be fitted instead of a sidecar mudguard.
The rear wheel sprocket must have an approved guard, being either:
a) A fully enclosed steel chain guard; or
b) If a plastic or part open chain guard is used, a steel bolt of not less than
10mm minimum diameter placed outside the bottom rear quadrant of the
clutch sprocket. This bolt, if damaged, must be replaced.
Where Harley type forks are used an approved bolt must be fitted to lock the
triple clamp.
The machine must be fitted with a lanyard type cut out switch. The lanyard
must be around the rider’s right wrist while the machine is in motion and must
be of a maximum length of 500mm fully extended.
9.6 TRACK - JUNIOR
9.6.1 50cc motorcycles are to comply with GCR 5.9.
9.7 FUEL
9.7.1 Senior
9.7.1.1
For Senior and Classic competition the following fuels are permitted:
a) Methanol of a commercial make; or
b) Unleaded fuel which complies with rule 9.7.2.1.
9.7.2 Junior
9.7.2.1
Fuel must be:
a) Unleaded; and
b) Be no more than 98 RON; and
c) Contain no additives other than those added at the point of manufacture
except for lubricating oil for two stroke engines; and
d) Be readily available from retail petrol pumps within Australia; or
e) Be a brand of fuel homologated by MA that is compatible with the “Fuel
Quality Standards Act 2000”.
9.8 COMPETITION RULES - SPEEDWAY
9.8.1 General
9.8.1.1
Competitions may be solo events or team events.
9.8.2 Change of Machines
9.8.2.1
Subject to the SR, a competitor may compete on a machine other than that
described in the competitor's entry application but:
a) Must inform a key official of any change; and
b) May not, in any heat or final, use the machine on which another rider has
qualified for the same heat or final.
9.8.3 Identification of Machines
9.8.3.1
All machines must have the competitor's name displayed on the rear mudguard
or valance, in letters of a minimum of 25mm in height.
122
SPEEDWAY AND TRACK
9.8.4 Log Books
9.8.4.1
Each competitor must possess a prescribed log book which must:
a) Be produced by the competitor at scrutineering.
b) Be available for production at any other time during the meeting.
c) Contain provision for the following entries:
i)
The meeting date and place.
ii)
The scrutineer's report as to any defects or faults in the
machine.
iii)
Any penalties imposed by the Referee.
9.8.4.2
A competitor must correct any machine defects noted in the log book before
being permitted to compete on that machine again.
9.8.5 New Competitors
9.8.5.1
A competitor who has entered for a meeting may practise on a machine on the
track before the commencement of the meeting where the competitor has:
a) Not ridden on the track previously.
b) Had an accident, which has damaged the machine so as to require major
repairs to the frame.
9.8.5.2
The referee may require any:
a) Newly licensed competitor.
b) A competitor whose abilities are not known to the referee;
to submit to such test as the referee considers proves that the competitor is
able to perform safely in competition.
9.8.6 Late Arrival
9.8.6.1
The referee may refuse permission to compete to a competitor who arrives at
the venue for a meeting later than the arrival time prescribed in the SR.
9.8.7 Starting
9.8.7.1
Competitors must be ready for the start when called upon to do so by the
relevant official.
a) The referee may sound a two-minute warning signal in the pit area.
b) At the order of the clerk of the course, competitors must leave the pit area
together and proceed by the shortest practical route to the starting tapes
and there stop under the control of the starting marshal.
c) Any competitor not ready to start at the expiration of two minutes after the
signal will be excluded from the race.
d) A competitor so excluded may be replaced by a reserve.
e) Unless otherwise directed by the Referee the time between the finish of
one race and the start of the next will not exceed five minutes.
9.8.7.2
Competitors who are members of the same team or pair may exchange their
starting positions.
9.8.7.3
Standing starts, operated by the referee, are to be used.
9.8.7.4
For other than handicap starts:
a) Competitors must form up in the prescribed order behind the tapes;
b) Once all competitors are correctly positioned and stationary, a green light
or flag is shown;
c) The starting marshal then leaves the area of the tapes.
d) After a pause of not less than two seconds, the referee then releases the
gate to start the race.
e) The first competitor whose machine touches one or more of the tapes
during the pause before the gate is raised will be excluded and the event
will be restarted.
9.8.7.5
For handicap starts in Speedway:
a) Competitors must form up at their handicap marks on indication by red
light or red flag.
123
SPEEDWAY AND TRACK
b)
9.8.7.6
9.8.7.7
9.8.7.8
9.8.7.9
9.8.7.10
Once all competitors are correctly positioned and stationary, the red light
is extinguished or flag withdrawn to indicate that a start is imminent.
c) After a pause, the referee then shows a green light or flag to start the
race.
d) The first competitor whose machine crosses the applicable starting line in
the pause before the green light or flag is shown will be excluded and the
event will be restarted.
e) A machine is deemed to have crossed the starting line when its rear wheel
axle passes over the line.
A race may be re-started if, in the opinion of the referee:
a) Any aspect of the start is unfair or incorrect.
b) The actions of any competitor have given that competitor an unfair
advantage over another.
A competitor may not receive outside assistance after the showing of the green
light or flag, or, in handicap events, the red light or flag, other than if:
a) The engine has stalled.
b) The assistance is from authorised pushers.
c) The assistance is given before the machine reaches the thirty metre
marker.
For the purposes of the preceding sub-Rule:
a) A marker must be placed on the track thirty metres from the starting line.
b) A machine will be deemed to have reached the thirty metre marker when
the front wheel axle passes it.
A competitor will be excluded if, in the opinion of the referee:
a) The competitor's machine is not moving under its own power at the thirty
metre marker.
b) The competitor fails to ride directly and without delay from the pits to the
starting line.
c) The competitor touches the tapes or crosses the applicable starting line at
the start.
A competitor excluded under the preceding Rule:
a) In individual contests, may be replaced by a reserve.
b) In teams contests, may be replaced by a track reserve.
c) In test and teams matches, may be replaced by a team reserve.
must leave the track without delay and return to the pits as soon as the race
finishes or is stopped.
9.8.8 Retirements
9.8.8.1
A competitor who, in the opinion of the timekeeper:
a) Has not completed the race distance within three minutes of the start.
b) Has not started the last lap before the winner has crossed the finish line.
will be deemed to have retired from the race.
9.8.8.2
If the chequered flag has not been shown after the race distance has been
completed by the leading competitor, it will be deemed to have been shown and
that competitor will be declared the winner.
9.8.9 Reserves
9.8.9.1
The Clerk of the Course may direct a reserve to compete in the place of any
competitor who is unable to compete or continue in a competition or who has
been excluded.
9.8.9.2
Reserves will be used in rotation.
9.8.9.3
A reserve is not entitled to any points towards any subsequent race but must
be paid any prize monies to which the reserve would have been entitled if the
reserve had been an original competitor.
9.8.9.4
A reserve who replaces an excluded competitor in pairs or team races may
use:
a) The reserve's original start position.
124
SPEEDWAY AND TRACK
b)
The competitor's original start position.
9.8.10 Re-runs
9.8.10.1
When a chequered flag is displayed before the race distance has been
completed by the leading competitor the referee must order a re-run.
9.8.10.2
In a re-run:
a) Competitors must start from their original starting positions; and
b) Reserves must occupy the position of the replaced competitors.
9.8.10.3
Any competitor who has failed to start in or been excluded from any race may
not compete in the re-run.
9.8.10.4
Any competitor who has retired from any race may not compete in the re-run
unless, in the opinion of the referee, the competitor retired in the interests of
safety or after being fouled.
9.8.11 Scoring
9.8.11.1
In every heat, unless otherwise prescribed by the SR:
a) The winner receives three points.
b) The second receives two points.
c) The third receives one point.
9.8.11.2
In individual events, ties will be resolved by a run-off between the tied
competitors.
9.8.11.3
Alternatively, in individual events ties may be resolved as follows:
a) The competitor who attains the highest number of firsts in the heats will be
the winner.
b) If there is still a tie, the competitor who attains the highest number of
seconds in the heats will be the winner.
c) If there is still a tie, the competitor who receives the highest number of
thirds in the heats will be the winner.
d) If there is still a tie, the winner of the heat in which the tied competitors
first met will be the winner.
9.8.11.4
In team events, ties will be resolved by a run-off with one competitor from each
team.
9.8.11.5
All competitors taking part in a run-off in the event of tied scores must be paid
prize money for the run-off.
9.8.12 Dead Heats
9.8.12.1
In the event of a dead heat between two or more competitors the combined
points will be shared between the tied competitors.
9.8.13 Flags and Signals
9.8.13.1
The dimensions of flags must be 60 x 60 cm.
a) All control lights:
i)
Must be visible to all competitors.
ii)
May only be operated by the Referee or the Referee’s nominee.
b) In addition to or substitution for the flags and lights applicable to other
disciplines the following signals apply:
i)
Start - Green or National flag.
ii)
Race stoppage - Red flag.
iii)
Last lap - Yellow flag with black diagonal cross 50mm wide.
iv)
Exclusion- Black flag, light or disc, indicating competitor's
number or helmet colour.
9.8.14 Pit Control
9.8.14.1
No persons other than:
a) Competitors.
b) Competitors' mechanics.
c) Police, fire or medical staff.
d) Officials.
125
SPEEDWAY AND TRACK
9.8.14.2
9.8.14.3
9.8.14.4
e) Others authorised by the Clerk of the Course or pit marshal;
may be or remain in the pits during a meeting.
The pits will be under the control of the pit marshal who may:
a) Report to the Clerk of the Course any person who breaches any Rule or
disobeys any instruction given by the pit marshal;
b) Direct any person as to that person's mode of dress or behaviour;
c) Eject any person who, in the opinion of the pit marshal, is behaving in an
unsafe or unsatisfactory manner.
Mechanics may not enter the racing area unless authorised to do so by the
Clerk of the Course for the purposes of:
a) Push starting the competitor's machine.
b) Attending to the accident damaged machine of the relevant competitor.
A mechanic may not attend any riders briefing without the permission of the
referee.
9.8.15 Payments
9.8.15.1
Prize monies and travelling expenses must be prescribed in SR.
9.8.15.2
All travelling monies must be paid in cash unless the competitor otherwise
agrees.
9.8.15.3
A competitor will be deemed to have qualified for starting money if, after
receiving the starting signal, the competitor moves forward under power from
the starting position.
9.8.15.4
In races other than handicaps, a competitor who defeats a competitor of a
higher grade is entitled to prize monies at the level of the defeated rider.
9.8.16 Referee - Speedway
9.8.16.1
In Speedway the functions and authority of Steward and Clerk of the Course,
as described in chapter 2, will be exercised by the referee. The Clerk of Course
shall be responsible to the Referee for the conduct of the meeting and its
administration in accordance with these regulations and the official programme.
To put into effect all instructions given by the referee received verbally or in
writing, directly or by telephone and ensure that all the necessary officials,
riders and spectators are informed without delay of the Referee’s decision. He
must prevent any person from communicating directly with the Referee,
including communicating by telephone, during the meeting without the
Referee’s permission. He must ensure that protests are in order and
accompanied by the appropriate fees before passing them to the Referee.
9.8.17 Stewards - Long Track
9.8.17.1
There must be a Steward and an Assistant Steward at all meetings in Long
Track.
9.8.18 Junior - age groups and capacities - solo and sidecar
7 years to under 9 years
9 years to under 16 years
11 years to under 16 years
9 years to under 16 years
125cc Single 4 Stroke Solo
125cc Single 4 Stroke Solo
250cc 4 Stroke Sidecar
250cc 4 Stroke Sidecar Passenger
9.9 COMPETITION RULES - TRACK
9.9.1 Starts
9.9.1.1
All starts, other than handicap starts, will be single row. Grid positions
will be pre-drawn and listed in the programme for heats and/or rounds.
Riders choice for grid positions in the finals will apply, top scorer has
first choice down through points score. If electronic timing is used
qualifying time will determine the choice of grid position for the first heat
only, the grid positions thereafter will be determined by finishing position
in the previous race.
126
SPEEDWAY AND TRACK
9.9.2 Flags and Signals
9.9.2.1
The dimensions of flags must be 60 x 60 cm.
a) All control lights:
i)
Must be visible to all competitors.
ii)
May only be operated by the Steward or the Steward’s
nominee.
b) In addition to or substitution for the flags and lights applicable to other
disciplines the following signals apply:
i)
Start - Green or National flag.
ii)
Race stoppage Red flag.
iii)
Last lap - Yellow flag with black diagonal cross 50mm wide.
iv)
Exclusion. Black flag, light or disc, indicating competitor's
number or helmet colour.
9.10 250CC INTERMEDIATE SPEEDWAY CLASS
9.10.1 Introduction
9.10.1.1
This class is for club level competition only and will be conducted under the
requirements of this chapter.
9.10.1.2
Promoters intending to conduct competition for 250cc intermediate class must:
a) Obtain approval from the Speedway Commission, in addition to obtaining
approval from the SCB.
b) Furnish the Commission with a report on the merits of the class. The
report should include statements from riders and officials and engineering
personnel.
9.10.2 Engines
9.10.2.1
An upright single cylinder up to 250cc 4 stroke engine.
9.10.2.2
If the engine is fitted with a gearbox, the gearshift lever must be removed and
the machine must remain in one gear ratio while racing.
9.10.3 Frames and Parts
9.10.3.1
With the following exceptions rules 9.3.1 and 9.3.2 apply:
a) Telescopic forks must be used
b) No minimum weight restriction.
9.10.4 Eligibility
9.10.4.1
Classes
Junior
Senior
13 years to under 16 years
16 years and over
127
SPEEDWAY AND TRACK
9.11 350CC SOLO SPEEDWAY CLASS.
9.11.1 Permits may be issued, with the approval of MA, for the use of 350cc Solo
Speedway machines, to evaluate their suitability for competition.
9.11.2 Riders using these machines must be 14 years to under 17 years.
9.11.3 Other special conditions will apply to the use of these machines and these
conditions will be made available from MA upon request.
9.12 CLASSIC LONG TRACK AND CLASSIC SPEEDWAY
9.12.1 Eligibility - solo
9.12.1.1
Engines must have been manufactured before 31st December 1976.
9.12.1.2
Competitors must be aged at least 30 years at the date of the competition with
which the eligibility is concerned.
9.12.2 Engine Specifications
9.12.2.1
The engine must be:
a) Single cylinder.
b) Two valve, push rod operated.
c) Single spark plug.
d) Of a maximum capacity of 500cc with a 2% tolerance.
e) Vertical in the chassis.
f)
Fitted with a round slide carburettor (of 38mm maximum bore.)
g) Must not be fitted with a centre port cross flow cylinder head.
9.12.3 Gearbox - Classic Long Track
9.12.3.1
The gearbox must have at least two gears.
9.12.4 Frame - Classic Long Track
9.12.4.1
The frame:
a) Must have conventional swing arm rear suspension with twin shock
absorbers.
b) Must have a front wheel diameter of 594mm(23”).
c) Must have a rear wheel diameter of 482mm (19”) or 560mm (22”), as
specified in SR.
d) Must have rear tyres with a maximum tread pattern depth of 8mm.
e) Must not be fitted leading link front forks.
9.12.5 Frame - Classic Speedway
9.12.5.1
The frame
a) Must have a front wheel diameter of 594mm (23”).
b) Must have a rear wheel diameter of 482mm (19”).
c) Must have rear tyres with a maximum tread pattern depth of 8mm.
d) Must not be fitted leading link front forks.
9.13 ELIGIBILITY – SIDECARS
9.13.1 Engine Specifications for Sidecars
9.13.1.1
Engines must have been manufactured before 31st December 1976.
9.13.2 Frames for Sidecars
9.13.2.1
Conventional type frames as used prior to 31st December 1976 must be used.
128
SPEEDWAY AND TRACK
9.14 DIAGRAMS – SOLO
129
SPEEDWAY AND TRACK
9.15 DIAGRAM - SIDECAR
Mudflap to
extend forward
by 75mm
130
10. MOTO-TRIALS
10.1 PROTECTIVE CLOTHING
10.1.1 Helmets Clothing and Footwear
10.1.1.1
No competitor may practise, start or compete in any trials competition unless
wearing:
a) An approved and correctly fitting helmet which must:
i)
Carry the Standards Association of Australia "AS 1698" label;
or
ii)
Be approved under Rule 01.69 & 01.70 of the FIM Technical
Rules - Trial.
b) Trousers and a shirt;
c) Calf length boots constructed of leather or similar durable material;
10.1.1.2
No person may wear open footwear in the pits.
10.2 FUEL
10.2.1 Fuel for machines other than Classic competition must be:
a) Unleaded; and
b) Be no more than 98 RON.
c) Contain no additives other than those added at the point of manufacture
except for lubricating oil for two stroke engines.
d) Be readily available from retail petrol pumps within Australia; or
e) Be a brand of fuel homologated by MA that is compatible with the “Fuel
Quality Standards Act 2000”.
10.3 MACHINE SPECIFICATIONS
10.3.1 Tyre Types
10.3.1.1
Unless otherwise directed by the Moto-Trials Commission in respect of minibikes and sidecars, tyres must be of a Trials Universal pattern on all machines.
10.3.2 Ignition cut-out switch
10.3.2.1
All machines must be fitted with an effective ignition cut-out switch operating on
the primary circuit and attached to the handlebars.
10.4 MOTO-TRIALS - SIDECAR
10.4.1 Designs and Dimensions
10.4.1.1
There must be a platform and nose cone or platform and front plates with the
following dimensions:
a) Overall length must be at least 775mm;
b) The nose cone or front plate must be at least 200mm wide and 200mm
high at the rear. The nose cone must taper to at least 100mm at the front.
c) The width from the rear of the nose cone to the rear of the sidecar must be
at least 200mm.
d) The inner sideboard of the platform must be either 130mm high or there
must be a gap of no more than 50mm between the sideboard and any
adjacent point on the motorcycle.
10.4.1.2
The sidecar and machine wheels, if exposed, must be valanced on the inside.
10.4.1.3
The wheel track must be at least 750mm.
10.4.1.4
Passenger grab rails, handles and straps may be fitted.
131
MOTO-TRIALS
10.4.1.5
10.4.1.6
10.4.1.7
10.4.1.8
Sidecar wheel drive is prohibited.
An effective cut out switch must be attached to the handlebars.
Identification plates are required.
Efficient brakes must be fitted to the front and rear wheels. When brake cam
arms or lever are of open or hooked type, the brake actuating rod or cable must
be secured so as to prevent accidental dislodgment.
10.5 COMPETITION RULES
10.5.1 General
10.5.1.1
The result of an observed trial or any class of observed trial is decided on the
total number of points lost, the winner being the competitor who loses the least
number of points.
10.5.1.2
In the hearing and determination of any protest or appeal arising out of an
observed trial, no video evidence may be used.
10.5.1.3
In the event of a tie in points the tie is to be broken as follows:
a) The competitor who completes the greatest number of sections without
loss of points wins.
b) If the tie continues, the competitor wins who completes the greatest
number of sections with the loss of one point, two points, three points and
so on.
c) If there is still a tie, a ride-off must take place, starting from the first
section at a severity level decided by the Clerk of Course and continuing in
numerical order until the tie is broken.
10.5.1.4
Meetings may be held in the following categories:
a) Trials.
b) No-Stop Trials.
c) Super Trials.
10.5.1.5
The SR for a meeting may determine the category in which the meeting will be
conducted.
10.5.2 Courses
10.5.2.1
Observed sections:
a) Must be clearly named or numbered.
b) Must have a clearly marked start and finish.
c) Must have clearly marked boundaries.
d) Must be preceded by an observed area of the route where the competitors
are controlled.
e) Must, wherever possible, be bounded by natural obstacles, although
artificial boundaries may be used to define the lateral limits of sections.
f)
May be reduced in places by the use of gates at a minimum width of 1.2
metres for solos and two metres for sidecars.
10.5.2.2
A machine is deemed to be in an observed section from the time the front axle
passes the "Section Begins" gate until the front axle passes the "Section Ends"
gate.
10.5.2.3
Passage through section must be indicated by gates which consist of:
a) Two arrows pointing inwards.
b) An arrow and a natural obstacle or boundary.
c) Coloured rectangles, red for right and white for left may be used to
indicate section outer boundaries.
10.5.2.4
The available width between two successive gates may be limited by means of
tape which must be:
a) Placed no more than 50cm above the ground.
b) Not inside the line of markers on the same side.
10.5.2.5
Where a section is marked by stakes they must be:
a) Of flexible material;
132
MOTO-TRIALS
10.5.2.6
b) Connected by tape placed no more than 50cm above the ground.
c) Coloured Red for right and White for left.
The promoter:
a) May modify the design of a section between the passage of the last
competitor on one lap and the first competitor on the following lap; and
b) Must give adequate notice to competitors of these modifications provided
that such modification will not justify a supplementary time allowance for
the modified section to be inspected.
10.5.3 Penalties - Competitions
10.5.3.1
The following terms have the following respective meanings:
a) Footing occurs when:
i)
Any part of the body of the rider.
ii)
Any part of the machine other than.
a) The footrests.
b) The wheels.
c) The tyres.
d) The engine casing.
e) The frame.
f)
The protection plates under the engine.
g) The sidecar body touches the ground or an obstacle
without stopping progress of the machine.
Sliding a foot along the ground is deemed to be footing more than twice.
b) Stopping occurs when:
i)
The machine fails to maintain forward progress relative to the
direction of the course.
c) Dismounting occurs when:
i)
The rider has both feet on the ground, on the same side of or
behind the machine.
10.5.3.2
The following penalties apply:
Trials
Footing once
Footing twice
Footing more than twice
Stopping without footing
Stopping whilst footing once
Footing twice whilst stopped
Footing more than twice whilst stopped
Moving backwards without footing
Moving backwards whilst footing
Moving either wheel sideways whilst stopped, without footing
The machine crosses a boundary with either wheel, that wheel being
on the ground
The machine passes the wrong side of a boundary or grade marker
for a riders own grade with either wheel, that wheel being on the
ground.
The machine jumps over a boundary or marker for a riders own
grade with both wheels to avoid part of a course.
Breaking a boundary tape or dislodging a boundary marker
Riding over or riding on or dislodging a grade marker for a riders
133
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
5
5
0
5
No
Stop
trials:
1
2
3
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
Super
Trials
1
2
3
0
5
5
5
0
5
0
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
MOTO-TRIALS
own grade.
Missing a gate or riding through a gate in the wrong direction, for a
riders own grade.
Rider does not have both hands on the handlebar when he foots,
whilst stationery
Engine stopping whilst rider stationary and rider footing or leaning
Crossing machine tracks whilst moving forward
The handlebar of the motorcycle touches the ground
Dismounting from the machine with both feet on the ground, on the
same side or behind the machine
Any part of sidecar passenger touching ground or other obstacle
Practising on course prior to event
For disorderly conduct towards an official
Rider or minder arguing with an official
Not vacating a section after failure
Handing in scorecard after finish time (per minute)*
Handing in scorecard more than 30 minutes after finish time*
* Or as detailed in the SR
Losing a scorecard (per section)
Rider or minder altering a section
Missing a section
Refusing to attempt a section
Minder obstructing or conversing with observer regarding scoring
Late to scrutineering (per minute)
a)
b)
c)
d)
Trials
No
Stop
trials:
Super
Trials
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
All Trials
Exclusion
100
10
10
1
Exclusion
5
5
5
5
5
1
The greatest penalty incurred in a section is the only one to be taken into
account for each competitor.
A competitor who receives the maximum five point penalty in a section
must vacate that section either:
i)
At the first available opportunity; or
ii)
As directed by an official.
Where necessary, for “Trials” organisers may include a 90 second time
limit to complete each section. A competitor will receive the maximum five
point penalty for not completing a section within the time period. This
instruction should be included in the SR.
Where necessary, for “Trials” organisers may include a time limit to
complete the first lap. This instruction should be included and defined in
the SR.
10.5.4 Minder - Moto-trials
10.5.4.1
Each competitor in an event may have a minder who, for the purposes of these
Rules, will be a competitor.
10.5.4.2
A minder must be identified as such in accordance with the requirements of the
SR.
10.6 CLASSES AND GRADES
10.6.1 Classes
10.6.1.1
There will be the following classes in moto-trials:
a) Open solo which may be sub-divided into A, B, C and Clubman grades;
b) Open sidecar;
134
MOTO-TRIALS
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
Juniors;
Greybeards;
Classic;
Post Classic; and
Ladies
Masters
10.6.2 Description of Classes
10.6.2.1
The classes are described as follows:
a) The Greybeard Class is for competitors 40 years of age and over and will
use the Venables handicap system. (This handicap system is based on a
formula devised by the late Ralph Venables, in that the riders’ age is
subtracted from 70. The number remaining is added to the riders points
lost, as a handicap).
b) Classic is for machines manufactured before 1965;
c) Post Classic (Twin Shock) is for machines manufactured before 1986.
The machines may not be fitted with disc brakes or mono shocks.
d) Masters class is for competitors of 35 years of age and over. No
handicapping system will apply.
10.6.3 Grades - Identification
10.6.3.1
The following grades will have the following identification plates.
A grade and experts
B grade
C grade & Greybeards
Juniors, Clubman & Post Classic
Sidecars - A grade
Sidecars - B grade
Classic
Red background
Yellow background
Blue background
White background
Red background
Yellow background
Black background
10.6.4 Identification Plates
10.6.4.1
Identification plates:
a) Must measure 200mm x 150mm +10%.
b) Must have the riders name displayed on the identification plate, using
lettering of 25mm minimum height.
c) May include reference to:
i)
Where a rider completed the Australian Moto-trials
Championship in the first ten places in the previous year, that
rider’s place in the Championship; and
ii)
The rider's club or sponsor, providing the background colour of
the plate remains prominent and clearly visible.
10.6.5 Junior
10.6.5.1
The following age groups and capacity classes may compete on courses for
junior competitions.
Age
Up to 16 years
Up to 16 years
13 to 16 years
13 to 16 years
Capacity
Up to 100cc
Up to 200cc
Open Capacity
Open Capacity-Women only
135
MOTO-TRIALS
10.7 CLASSIC TRIALS
10.7.1 Eligibility
10.7.1.1
The eligibility and dating of Classic motorcycles shall be considered in terms of
major and minor components and the period of the motorcycle shall be the
period of the latest major component.
10.7.1.2
Major components are:
a) All engine and gearbox external castings;
b) Frames;
c) Brakes;
d) Wheel hubs;
e) Forks; and
f)
Carburettors (Mk1 Amal Concentric may be used).
10.7.1.3
Major components that were manufactured outside the period, but which are
visually indistinguishable from period components shall be eligible for that
period.
10.7.1.4
All other components shall be considered as minor components.
10.7.1.5
Minor components may be modified or updated provided that they remain
visually compatible with the period being depicted.
10.7.1.6
For the purposes of determining eligibility machines are categorised as follows:
a) Pre 1965 - Manufactured before 31st December 1964.
b) Pre 1965 heavyweight solo.
i)
Non-unit construction engines with an original capacity of over
250cc; or
ii)
Unit construction engines with an original capacity of over
350cc.
c) Pre 1965 lightweight solo.
i)
Non-unit construction engines with an original capacity of 250cc
or less.
ii)
Unit construction engines with an original capacity of 350cc or
less.
d) Post Classic (Twin Shock) – For models designed and first manufactured
between 1st January 1965 to 31st December 1986. Disc brake models are
not eligible. Pre 1965 machines that have been modified so as to provide
a ground clearance or chassis performance more in keeping with this era
shall compete as specials in this post classic category.
136
11. ENDURO AND RELIABILITY TRIALS
11.1 PROTECTIVE CLOTHING
11.1.1 Helmets, Clothing and Footwear
11.1.1.1
No competitor may practise, start or compete in any enduro or reliability trials
competition unless wearing:
a) An approved and correctly fitting helmet which must:
i)
Carry the Standards Association of Australia "AS 1698" label;
or
ii)
Be approved under Rule 01.69 & 01.70 of the FIM Technical
Rules - Enduro.
b) Trousers of leather, other natural or synthetic material of similar durability.
Synthetic trousers must be non-combustible and be fitted with a nonremovable lining. Trousers must be worn so that no part of the body
uncovered when the competitor is in the normal racing position. Trousers
other than leather must be any one of the following
i)
Nylon lined motocross type.
ii)
Padded denim motocross type.
iii)
Reinforced padded nylon.
iv)
Padded waterproof waxed cotton.
c) A jacket which must be any of:
i)
A jersey which must be
a) Of close knit fabric of natural or synthetic fibre.
b) Be snug fitting.
c) Provide protection against abrasion to the body and arms.
ii)
A jacket of leather, reinforced nylon, or waxed cotton which
leaves no part of the body uncovered when the competitor is in
the normal riding position; or
iii)
A one piece suit of leather, reinforced nylon, or waxed cotton
d) Footwear which must:
i)
Be of recognised motocross type;
ii)
Be constructed of leather, plastic or other similarly durable
material; and
iii)
Be of a length that must at least cover ¾ of the length of the
lower leg, with the rider in a racing position on the machine.
e) Gloves of leather or other material of similar or greater durability.
f)
Goggles or visors as specified in rule 11.1.2
11.1.1.2
No person may wear open footwear in the pits.
11.1.2 Goggles and Visors
11.1.2.1
Spectacles, protective goggles, helmet visors and tear-offs may be worn
provided:
a) Eye protectors and spectacles are made of non shattering material;
b) Metal or perspex face shields are not used;
c) Eye shades or peaks are of a flexible material.
11.2 FRAMES AND PARTS
11.2.1 Solo Classes
11.2.1.1
The classes for solo are to be determined by the RCB.
137
ENDURO AND RELIABILITY TRIALS
11.3 FUEL
11.3.1 Fuel must be:
a) Unleaded.
b) Be no more than 98 RON.
c) Contain no additives other than those added at the point of manufacture
except for lubricating oil for two stroke engines.
d) Be readily available from retail petrol pumps within Australia; or
e) Be a brand of fuel homologated by MA that is compatible with the “Fuel
Quality Standards Act 2000”.
f)
For enduro events it is recommended that fuel containers do not
exceed 10 litres, and be fitted with a suitable pouring spout.
11.4 JUNIOR
11.4.1 Solo wheel sizes:
Class
50cc Auto Div 1
50cc Auto Div 2
65cc
85cc 2 &4 stroke
85cc Big Wheel
100cc
125cc
250cc 4 stroke
Front
254mm (10”)
254mm (10”) or 305mm (12”)
356mm (14”) to 381mm (15”)
381mm (15”) to 432mm (17”)
457mm (18”) to 534mm (21”)
457mm (18”) to 534mm (21”)
432mm (17”) to 534mm (21”)
432mm (17”) to 534mm (21”)
Rear
254mm (10”)
254mm (10”)
305mm (12”)
356mm (14”)
407mm (16”) to 482mm (19”)
407mm (16”) to 482mm (19”)
407mm (16”) to 482mm (19”)
407mm (16”) to 482mm (19”)
11.4.2 Handlebars
Solo handlebars must be securely plugged and have the following widths.
80cc
80cc 4 stroke
100cc
125cc and 250cc 4 stroke
800mm
800mm
850mm
850mm
11.5 COMPETITION RULES
11.5.1 Courses
11.5.1.1
Courses must be clearly marked.
11.5.1.2
Each course:
a) Must have time check points which:
i)
Must have a digital clock showing hours minutes and seconds
at the control table
ii)
Must have a check list showing arrival time of each competitor
in the time check.
iii)
Must be placed at the entrance to the parc ferme for the start
and finish of each day of the event.
iv)
Must be placed at intermediate points selected by the promoter
and indicated on the itinerary.
v)
Preferably should be no less than five nor more than thirty five
kilometres apart;
138
ENDURO AND RELIABILITY TRIALS
vi)
11.5.1.3
11.5.1.4
Must be indicated by:
a) White flags placed two hundred metres, and yellow flags
placed twenty metres, before the control table; and
b) Green flags placed two metres after the control table;
c) Flags placed on both sides of the course so as to be
clearly visible to the competitors;
d) The area between the yellow and green flags is
considered “parc ferme” concerning access.
b) May have route check points which:
i)
Need not be marked on the route card;
ii)
Must be indicated by blue flags placed on either side of the
course two hundred metres before the route check.
iii)
Have a check list of the progress of each competitor.
c) May have time check points with no service which:
i)
(i) Will display a white flag with a black cross on both sides of
the track 70 metres before the control table.
ii)
(ii) Rules 11.5.10.1(b),(d) and (f) do not apply.
d) For multi-day events must:
i)
Have a final service area before the final time check point;
ii)
Have before the final service area, a pre-finish Time Check.
a) Which is a no service time check.
b) After which competitors have 15 minutes to reach the final
time check.
Any time check without service will display a white flag with black cross, on
both sides of the track, 70 metres before the control table.
Enduro Flags.
a)
For Enduros, flags will have the following meanings:
iii)
White flags displayed on pegs. Entry to fuel control; Time
check 200 metres.
iv)
Yellow flags displayed on pegs. Entry to time check.
v)
Blue flags displayed on pegs. Route check approx. 200 metres.
vi)
White flag with Black Cross displayed on pegs. No service time
check approx. 70 metres.
11.5.2 Entries
11.5.2.1
After the closing date for entries:
a) A competitor may apply in writing to the Race Secretary for permission to
change machines,and be entered in the relevant class.
b) A team may apply in writing to the Race Secretary for permission:
i)
For a team member to change machines and be entered in the
relevant class.
ii)
To substitute one entered team member for another.
c) Applications must be delivered to the Race Secretary before the
preliminary machine examination.
d) The Race Secretary may grant permission subject to such conditions as
he or she thinks fit or may refuse permission.
e) A competitor who is substituted may not compete without the permission
of the Race Secretary.
f)
No team or competitor may change the capacity of an entered machine.
11.5.3 The Starting Area
11.5.3.1
The starting area must:
a) Contain:
i)
A parc ferme to which all access and egress is controlled and
which connects directly to the working area.
139
ENDURO AND RELIABILITY TRIALS
ii)
11.5.3.2
11.5.3.3
A working area from which there is only one exit to the starting
enclosure and where machine maintenance may be carried out.
iii)
A starting enclosure at one end of which is the starting line and
in which the competitors await the starting signal.
b) Be secured by fencing or otherwise regulated as to access so as to
prevent the entry of unauthorised persons.
c) Be in the charge of officials who are clearly identified.
d) Have its entrance and exit marked.
No competitor or person other than:
a) The Steward.
b) The Clerk of the Course; or
c) Any other official in charge thereof;
may enter the starting area unless authorised by a relevant official or otherwise
for purposes permitted under these Rules.
SR may prescribe the time for delivery of machines into the starting area before
the start of an event and thereafter machines must:
a) Remain in the starting area until the start.
b) Be returned at the end of each day for detention overnight.
c) Be released in time for the start of the next day.
d) Be in the open air and not covered in any manner.
11.5.4 Preliminary Examination
11.5.4.1
Before each event there must be a preliminary examination of competing
machines.
11.5.4.2
At the preliminary examination each machine may be tested for noise and
marked if it does not exceed the prescribed noise emission levels.
11.5.4.3
At the conclusion of the preliminary examination each machine must be
delivered into the parc ferme. No motorcycle may enter parc ferme without a
stand approved at machine examination.
11.5.4.4
An event commences at the conclusion of the preliminary examination.
11.5.5 Starting Order and Numbers
11.5.5.1
The starting order of groups or classes will be as determined by the SR.
11.5.5.2
The starting numbers of riders will be determined by a draw for each class.
11.5.6 Starting Procedures
11.5.6.1
The start signal for each competitor must be given as nearly as practicable to
that competitor's scheduled starting time.
11.5.6.2
It is not permitted to start the engine in:
a) The parc ferme, working area; or
b) The starting area before the starting signal is given.
11.5.6.3
Within one minute of the signal being given, the competitor must:
a) Start the engine at the starting line using the machine's kick starter or
starter motor.
b) Cross a second line twenty metres from the starting line under engine
power.
11.5.6.4
A competitor who arrives at the starting line more than one minute late for that
competitor’s allocated starting time:
a) Will lose 60 points for every minute late;
b) Must be allocated a new start time which must be the indicated time of
arrival at the starting line ignoring seconds;
c) Must comply with standard starting procedures.
d) If the competitor is more than 60 minutes late, will be excluded for the day.
11.5.6.5
On each day of the event competitors may enter the parc ferme 15 minutes
before their starting times and move their machines by hand to the entry to the
work area.
140
ENDURO AND RELIABILITY TRIALS
11.5.6.6
Competitors will have ten minutes before their starting times to carry out
machine preparation.
11.5.7 Event Procedures
11.5.7.1
For enduros the total time for the day of competition must not exceed seven
and one half-hours, including the fifteen minutes at the final time check.
11.5.7.2
Competitors must at all times during the event:
a) Remain on the course.
b) Follow the competition direction;
11.5.7.3
At the beginning or end of a lap, a section or day the Clerk of the Course, due
to weather or other conditions, may:
a) Declare a section of the course to be impassable and in that event:
i)
That section will cease to be part of the course; and
ii)
Any penalties incurred in that section will not be taken into
account in scoring for the event.
b) Change the time schedule for the section to a slower schedule.
11.5.7.4
Each competitor must be allocated a starting time and a time for each section
between time checks.
11.5.7.5
The recorded arrival time for each competitor in a section is the starting time for
that competitor in the next section.
11.5.7.6
During an event a competitor must not stop between the yellow flags and the
control table.
11.5.7.7
A competitor may pass the final time check at the entrance to the parc ferme
early, without penalty.
11.5.7.8
At the end of any event there may be a final examination at which any one or
more of the machines may be impounded for examination.
11.5.7.9
If a competitor can convince the Jury he was delayed by abnormal
circumstances outside his control, (e.g. providing assistance to an injured
competitor), an allowance may be granted. Alleged baulking by another
competitor is not an abnormal circumstance.
11.5.7.10
When the case of a rider is under discussion he may continue in the event until
the jury makes the final decision.
11.5.8 Restarts
11.5.8.1
A competitor who retires, or is excluded, from an event for a day:
a) For multi-day events, may restart in the competition on following days from
the rear of the field.
b) For single-day events, or if the competitor is excluded or retires for a
second time from a multi-day event:
i)
Must obliterate or remove the racing number from the
competitor’s machine; and
ii)
May not continue on the course.
11.5.8.2
To be eligible to restart, a competitor must deliver the machine to the parc
ferme no more than two hours after the competitor's scheduled finishing time.
11.5.9 Time Cards, Route Cards and Itinerary
11.5.9.1
Each competitor must stop at all time check points and route check points.
11.5.9.2
Time cards must be issued and route cards may be issued:
a) For the first day, at the preliminary examination.
b) For all other days, as competitors leave the parc ferme at the end of the
previous day.
11.5.9.3
Time cards:
a) Must be presented at each control table, or, on demand, to an official;
b) Must be handed in at the end of each day to the final control official;
c) Must not be altered or obliterated by any competitor;
d) Must not be exchanged between competitors;
e) Must, in the event of loss, be replaced by the official in charge of the next
time control;
141
ENDURO AND RELIABILITY TRIALS
11.5.9.4
11.5.9.5
f)
May show the prescribed running time for each section.
Route cards:
a) Must be presented at all route checks.
b) Must be handed in at the end of each day to the final control official.
c) Must not be altered or obliterated by any competitor.
d) Must not be exchanged between competitors.
e) Must, in the event of loss, be replaced by the official in charge of the next
time control.
Itineraries
a) Must be issued at the preliminary examination or displayed prominently in
the starting area.
b) Must clearly indicate all competition distances and show prescribed
running time for each section.
c) Must contain samples of signs or indicators used for course markings.
d) Are, for all purposes connected with the competition, deemed to be
accurate.
11.5.10 Maintenance, Repair, Alteration and Refueling
11.5.10.1
A machine may be cleaned, altered, repaired or refueled during an event as
follows:
a) Subject to sub-Rule b), assistance is not permitted during the course of an
event.
b) A competitor may receive assistance for the following:
i)
Refueling;
ii)
Removing, replacing and replenishing:
a) Coolant.
b) Engine and gearbox lubricating oils.
iii)
Removing air from the braking circuit.
iv)
Inflating tubes and tyres;
c) No work on the machine may take place:
i)
In any tent, vehicle or other enclosed place;
ii)
In the Parc Ferme.
iii)
In the Time Check area.
d) Subject to sub-Rule e), a competitor may, for the purposes of carrying out
alterations or repairs, receive tools, tubes and air bottles at any place on
the course.
e) A competitor may not receive or use the following tools:
i)
Any form of welding equipment other than for repairs to the
exhaust system;
ii)
Pressure cleaning apparatus.
iii)
Electrical and air powered tools operated by remote
connection.
f)
A competitor may, for the purposes of carrying out alterations or repairs,
receive spare parts:
i)
In the working area in the starting area.
ii)
Between the white and yellow flags adjacent to a time check
point.
g) A competitor may leave used parts where the alterations or repairs were
carried out.
h) For repairs to an exhaust system:
i)
Repairs must be carried out under the supervision of an official;
ii)
A competitor will be allowed thirty minutes before attracting
time penalties;
142
ENDURO AND RELIABILITY TRIALS
iii)
i)
j)
k)
l)
m)
The repaired machine must submit to a noise emission test
before entering the parc ferme at the end of the day:
The engine must be stopped during refueling.
No fuel may be carried other than in a tank or container permanently
attached to the machine.
Unless otherwise stated in SR replacement of any fluids except water or
coolant is only permitted in the work area and at a Time Check between
the white and yellow flags where service is permitted.
There must be at least one refueling depot every 60 kilometres.
Tyres may only be changed:
i)
At the final service area.
ii)
In the work area at the start.
11.5.11 Assistance
11.5.11.1
All outside assistance is forbidden, other than the normal assistance given at
the Official Time Checks and to clean the number plates and plastic parts of
the motorcycle with the aid of a sponge or cloth. The term “outside assistance”
refers to the act involved when any person, other than the rider or an official
performing his duties, comes into contact with the motorcycle.
11.5.11.2
No machine may be moved otherwise than by:
a) Its engine; or
b) The actions of its rider.
11.5.11.3
No competitor may be accompanied anywhere on the course or receive or
transmit communications electronically.
11.5.12 Inspection and Marking
11.5.12.1
At any time check a relevant official:
a) Must record the time as displayed on the clock when the competitor's time
card is presented.
b) May inspect any machine.
c) May mark any part.
d) May direct the alteration of any machine which does not comply with any
requirement of these Rules or the SR.
e) May direct the administration of any noise or other test.
f)
May report any competitor or machine to the jury or a key official.
11.5.12.2
Any competitor required to submit to a noise test under the preceding Rule:
a) May request a further test during the thirty minutes next after the
completion of the required test;
b) May be required, at the expiration of that time, to submit to a further test.
c) May not continue in the event if, at the expiration of that time, the machine
does not comply with the prescribed noise emission levels.
11.5.13 Timed Tests
11.5.13.1
Timed tests must be as follows:
a) Average speed must not exceed fifty km/h.
b) Competitors may inspect test courses on foot but not by wheeled vehicle.
c) Be safe and of a reasonable degree of difficulty.
d) For multi-day events, be marked not less than forty eight hours before the
scheduled start time for the test.
e) A rider who leaves the test course and gains an advantage may incur
penalties as provided for in the MA Manual of Motorcycling Rule 3.4.2.1.
11.5.14 Cross Tests and Enduro Tests
11.5.14.1
Cross tests and enduro tests must be as follows:
a) Cross test courses must:
i)
Be between 2 and 5 kilometres in length;
ii)
Be especially prepared for the test.
143
ENDURO AND RELIABILITY TRIALS
iii)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
Have safety zones at all bends and other places of potential
danger to spectators, with a minimum width of one metre to
which spectators have no access.
iv)
Start within one kilometre of a time check point.
v)
Have the start and finish line in the same vicinity.
Enduro test courses must:
i)
Be readily accessible to a four wheel drive vehicle.
ii)
Be on a section of the course between two time checks.
iii)
Be between 2 and 5 kilometres in length.
iv)
Be untimed during the first lap and timed during subsequent
laps.
Each competitor must start:
i)
With the engine running.
ii)
Come to a stop at the start line, as directed by an official, and
start within ten (10) seconds after being directed by the official.
iii)
The riders start time will be the moment the front wheel moves
past the recording device or at the expiration of the ten (10)
seconds.
More than one test may be run on the same course in each day.
Tests must have flying finishes with each competitor's time being recorded
at the point of crossing the finish line.
Competitors may inspect special test courses on foot.
As each competitor finishes he or she must resume the principal course
without stopping.
11.5.15 Final Test
11.5.15.1
At the end of an event there may be a final test which must:
a) Be conducted on a closed circuit.
b) Consist of not less than five nor more than ten laps, with the actual
number of laps prescribed in the SR.
c) Cover not less than ten or more than eighteen kilometres.
11.5.15.2
Before the start of the test all machines must be delivered to a parc ferme.
11.5.15.3
Prior to competition there will be a voluntary escorted preliminary lap of the
course.
11.5.15.4
Tests will be divided into groups based on classes.
11.5.15.5
Restart competitors must compete in a separate test.
11.5.15.6
For multi-day events, massed starts must be used with grid positions
determined by placings at the end of the previous day.
11.5.15.7
For one day events, grid positions must be allocated by the promoter.
11.5.15.8
The test will not be complete until the expiration of five minutes from the
winning competitor being shown the chequered flag.
11.5.15.9
Should a competitor finish the road test late, the competitor may be transferred
to another group.
11.5.16 Finish of Event
11.5.16.1
All finishing machines may be impounded for 30 minutes.
11.5.16.2
For each machine an event finishes:
a) If there is a final examination, at the conclusion of the examination of the
machine.
b) If there is no final examination, at the moment the machine arrives at the
final time check.
11.5.17 Penalties
11.5.17.1
Subject to the arrival allowance, penalty points are incurred as follows:
144
ENDURO AND RELIABILITY TRIALS
Penalty points
Late arrival at the start line
Not crossing the 20m line under power within time
Early and late arrival at a time check
Stopping between yellow flags and control table at time check
Starting of engine in starting area prior to start signal
Starting the engine in the parc ferme or work area
Uncompleted day for a competitor
Special tests - for each 1/100 sec
Final test – for each uncompleted lap plus the time of the
slowest completed test time in the same class
Individuals who restart – per day plus points for completed
special tests
60 points per minute
10 points
60 points per minute
60 points
60 points
120 points
7200 points
1/100 point
60 points
15000 points
11.5.18 Classification
11.5.18.1
Classification of Individuals and Teams.
a) Classification will be determined inversely by the number of penalty points
incurred by each competitor or team.
b) For individuals, daily penalty points will be accumulated.
c) For teams:
i)
On any day, the score awarded to a team from an individual
competitor will be the difference between that competitor’s point
score for that day and the point score of the lowest scoring
competitor for that day in the same class.
ii)
Daily penalty points will be accumulated.
d) Where a competitor is a member of a team:
i)
The team will incur 15,000 penalty points for each day of the
event that that rider does not complete.
ii)
If the competitor is permitted to restart after exclusion for a day,
the team will incur 15,000 points for the day the competitor was
excluded plus 15,000 for each following day.
11.5.19 Exclusion from an Event
11.5.19.1
A competitor is liable to be excluded from an event for any of the following acts
during the event:
a) Competing on a machine with an engine capacity different from that stated
on the entry form.
b) Receiving spare parts:
i)
Outside the working area; or
ii)
At time checks outside the area between the white and yellow
flags.
c) Replacing any marked part without authorisation.
d) Without authorisation, entering the parc ferme other than to collect or
deliver the machine;
e) In the parc ferme:
i)
Touching any other competitor’s machine.
ii)
Touching his or her machine other than for purposes of
collection or delivery.
f)
Smoking in the parc ferme, working area, or between the white and yellow
flags.
g) Placing the machine in the parc ferme more than two hours after the
competitor's scheduled finishing time.
h) Without authorisation, placing the machine in any tent, vehicle or other
enclosed place.
i)
Carrying fuel on a machine other than in a permanently attached tank or
container;
145
ENDURO AND RELIABILITY TRIALS
j)
k)
l)
m)
n)
o)
p)
q)
r)
Not stopping the engine during refueling.
Without authorisation:
i)
Communicating with accompanying persons.
ii)
Being accompanied by another competitor.
iii)
Accompanying another competitor.
Not observing traffic regulations.
Knowingly failing to hand in time cards at the finish of each day.
Altering a time card or route card or using another riders card.
Practising on the special test course.
Inspecting the special test course other than on foot.
Riding against the direction of the course.
Competing on a machine the engine of which exceeds the maximum
capacity of the entered class.
11.5.20 Exclusion for a Day
11.5.20.1
A competitor is liable to be excluded for the day from an event if, during that
day, they do any of the following:
a) Failing to pass a noise control test.
b) Refueling outside refueling areas.
c) Failing to deposit the machine in the parc ferme forthwith after the final
check-in of the day.
d) Entering the parc ferme with the engine running.
e) Receiving outside assistance other than for purposes of:
i)
Refueling;
ii)
Removing, replacing and replenishing:
a) Coolant.
b) Brake fluids.
c) Engine and gearbox lubricating oils.
iii)
Inflating tubes and tyres.
f)
Arriving more than sixty minutes late for:
i)
The start.
ii)
A time check.
g) Moving the machine otherwise than by:
i)
Its engine; or
ii)
The actions of the competitor;
h) Riding off the course or against the course direction.
i)
Failing to get the time card and/or control check list marked at a time
check.
j)
Missing a time check or a route check.
k) Changing tyres other than:
i)
At the final service area; or
ii)
In the working area in the start area.
l)
Receiving or using prohibited tools.
11.5.20.2
A competitor liable to the penalties prescribed in the two preceding Rules may
apply to the steward for a reduction in penalty. The steward, on being satisfied
that penalties were incurred in exceptional circumstances, may:
a) Determine that no penalty should be imposed.
b) Impose a lesser penalty.
11.5.21 Explanation of Results
11.5.21.1
A competitor may, no more than 24 hours after the publication of the results of
any day’s run, request from the Clerk of the Course an explanation of those
results.
146
12. QUADS
12.1 PROTECTIVE CLOTHING
12.1.1 Helmets, Clothing, Gloves and Footwear
12.1.1.1
No competitor may practise, start or compete in any Quad competition unless
wearing:
a) An approved and correctly fitting helmet which must:
i)
Carry the Standards Association of Australia "AS 1698" label;
or
ii)
Be approved under Rule 01.69 & 01.70 of the FIM Technical
Rules.
b) Trousers of leather or synthetic material of similar durability. Trousers of
other than leather must be non-combustible and be fitted with a nonremovable lining.
c) A jersey which:
i)
Must be of close knit fabric of natural or synthetic fibre; and
ii)
Must be a snug fit and provide protection against abrasion to
the body and arms.
d) Commercially manufactured armour which protects the elbows, shoulders
and the back. Protection of the back must be continuous and cover the
majority of the back area between the collar and the base of the spine.
e) Footwear which must:
i)
Be of recognised motocross type.
ii)
Be constructed of leather, plastic or other similarly durable
material.
iii)
Be of a length that must at least overlap the trousers with the
rider in a racing position on the machine.
f)
Gloves of leather or other material of similar or greater durability.
g) Goggles or visors as specified in rule 12.1.2
12.1.1.2
No competitor may compete unless wearing the machine identification number
on his or her back in contrasting colours and with a minimum size of 125mm
height and 20mm width of stroke.
12.1.1.3
No person may wear open footwear in the pits.
12.1.2 Goggles and Visors
12.1.2.1
Spectacles, protective goggles, helmet visors and tear-offs may be worn
provided:
a) Eye protectors and spectacles are made of non-shattering material;
b) Metal or perspex face shields are not used;
c) Eye shades or peaks are of a flexible material.
12.1.3 Junior Clothing
12.1.3.1
In addition to the general requirements for clothing, juniors must comply as
follows:
a) Protective clothing must not be loose or flapping.
b) Synthetic or rubber boots may be worn as an alternative to leather for
competitors with smaller than size one feet.
12.1.4 Hair and Jewellery
a) Hair longer than shoulder length must be confined in the helmet or jersey;
b) Body jewellery is to be removed or securely covered with tape prior to
competition.
147
QUADS
12.2 FRAMES AND PARTS
12.2.1 General
12.2.1.1
A quad must have the following:
a) Four wheels at the corners of the machine.
b) The front wheels must be used for steering and the rear wheels for driving.
c) There must be a seat for one person.
d) The rider must straddle the seat.
e) Chain guards are optional but front sprocket covers must remain if
originally supplied by the manufacturer.
f)
Mudguards must be fitted over rear wheels.
g) Mudguards fitted over front wheels (optional).
h) Between the front and back wheels, a frame must be fitted (Nerf bars)
They must be of closed loop design and not extend beyond a point of the
widest dimensions of the vehicle, measured with a straight edge touching
the outside of the front and rear tyres. The bars must be covered with a
material to prevent the riders feet from going below the bars (material
webbing is acceptable). The Nerf bars must be bolted or welded to the
frame and must be close enough to the front and rear wheels to prevent
locking together of competitors machines. No sharp, protruding or open
end tubing is allowed.
i)
A self closing throttle.
j)
An engine cut out switch, of lanyard type attached to the body.
k) Effective brakes on all wheels.
l)
A maximum overall width, including the rear tyres, of 1400mm.
m) A maximum wheel base 1500mm.
n) Handlebars, rubber hand grips, handlebar levers and number plates.
o) Noise emissions of no more than 102 dB(A).
p) No sharp or protruding extremities.
q) Glass, mirrors and headlights to be removed.
r)
Number plates are to:
i)
Comply with rule 5.4.
ii)
Be mounted centrally at the front and rear of the machine.
12.3 CLASSES
12.3.1 Club Level Racing
50cc STD
50cc STD
80cc 2 stroke Std
90cc 4 stroke Std
80cc 2 stroke Modified
90cc 4 stroke Modified
200cc 2 stroke Modified
250cc 4 stroke Modified
Open 2 stroke Modified, (max capacity 550cc)
Open 4 stroke Modified, (max capacity 700cc)
148
No suspension,
With suspension,
Race Together
Race Together
Race Together
Race Together
QUADS
12.3.2 Stadium Classes
Open 2 stroke Modified, (max capacity 550cc)
Race Together
Open 4 stroke Modified, (max capacity 700cc)
12.3.3 Tolerances
12.3.3.1
The actual engine capacity of a machine competing in a capacity class is not to
exceed the prescribed capacity for that class by more than 5%.
12.3.3.2
Engine Capacities.
12.3.3.3
The maximum engine capacity for a two stroke engined quad shall not exceed
550cc, and be no more that two cylinders.
12.3.3.4
The maximum capacity for a four stroke engined quad shall not exceed 700cc
and be no more that two cylinders.
12.3.3.5
Junior Quad Age Groups.
a) 8 to U 13years-up to 90cc 2 or 4 stroke.
b) 13 to U 16 years-up to 200cc 2 stroke or 250cc 4 stroke.
c) Junior ATV’s must use OEM engine cases and frames.
12.4 FUEL
12.4.1 Fuel must be:
a) Unleaded; and
b) Be no more than 98 RON.
c) Contain no additives other than those added at the point of manufacture
except for lubricating oil for two stroke engines.
d) Be readily available from retail petrol pumps within Australia; or
e) Be a brand of fuel homologated by MA that is compatible with the “Fuel
Quality Standards Act 2000”.
12.5 TYRES
12.5.1.1
Rear tyres types will be prescribed in SR.
12.6 COMPETITION RULES
12.6.1 Starting
12.6.1.1
Unless otherwise determined in the SR, massed starts must be used.
12.6.1.2
The order and position of each competitor will be at the discretion of the
promoter and will be determined on the day of the event.
12.6.1.3
The starting grid for all events will:
a) Have not less than two metre space for each quad.
b) Be in one straight line.
c) Allow for no more than 20 competitors.
12.6.1.4
The maximum number of starters must be specified in SR.
12.6.1.5
Unless otherwise determined in the SR:
a) All competitors must be called to the start line at least two minutes before
each start.
b) At the end of the two minutes, and when the starter is ready, the starter
will hold up a thirty second sign for a full thirty seconds.
c) At the end of thirty seconds a five second sign will be displayed.
d) The gate will drop between five and ten seconds after the five second sign
is shown.
149
QUADS
12.6.2 Finishing
12.6.2.1
The finish line must:
a) Be marked with a flexible post at each side of the track.
b) Be clearly visible to the judge.
12.6.3 Age Groups
12.6.3.1
As per age groups for solo motorcycles in respective disciplines.
150
13. HISTORIC ROAD RACING
13.1 AN OVERVIEW
13.1.1.1
13.1.1.2
13.1.1.3
13.1.1.4
13.1.1.5
13.1.1.6
13.1.1.7
13.1.1.8
13.1.1.9
13.1.1.10
13.1.1.11
The following Rules governing Historic road racing motorcycles are written to
facilitate the organisation of uniform, and fair competitions.
The express purpose of these Rules is to ensure the motorcycles are in a
condition, which is visually compatible with the period of racing being portrayed.
These rules are to be interpreted so as to ensure that motorcycles are
presented in the spirit of the period.
The onus of proof of eligibility shall rest wholly upon the rider or entrant of the
machine. Service and Parts Manual publication dates are not proof of
eligibility.
Log books are mandatory for historic competitions from 1 January 2003.Log
books must:
Be produced by the entrant at scrutineering.
Be available for presentation at any other time during the race meeting.
Contain provision for scrutineers to record any alterations or changes to
machine.
Bona-fide international competitors riding machines from other countries may
compete without a log book providing prior approval is granted by MA, and the
machine complies with a safety inspection.
Machines that do not hold a log book cannot compete, with the exception of
machines covered by 13.1.1.4 (d).
Log book applications are available from MA, the MA website, or from the
SCB’s.
Before commencing the building of a machine for any period that consists
primarily of replicated parts, plans and specifications must be submitted to MA
for interim approval. This will assist in the issuing of a logbook upon completion
of the machine.
13.2 PROTECTIVE CLOTHING
13.2.1 Helmets, Clothing, Footwear, Gloves and Goggles
13.2.1.1
No competitor may practice, start or compete in any historic road racing
competition unless wearing:
a) An approved and correctly fitting helmet which must:
i)
Carry the Standards Association of Australia "AS 1698" label;
or
ii)
Be approved under Rule 01.69 & 01.70 of the Road Racing FIM
Technical Rules.
b) A one-piece suit or jacket and trousers, which must be securely attached
to each other, constructed of leather or other material of similar or greater
durability.
c) Boots which must be constructed of leather or other material of similar or
greater durability but must not be constructed of rubber.
d) Gloves of leather or other material of similar or greater durability.
Passengers on sidecars need not wear gloves.
e) Spectacles, protective goggles or helmet visors as specified in rule 13.2.2.
f)
A back protector which is commercially manufactured.
13.2.2 Goggles and Visors
13.2.2.1
Spectacles, protective goggles, helmet visors and "tear-offs" may be worn
provided:
a) Eye protectors and spectacles are made of non-shattering material.
b) Eye protectors which cause visual disturbance are not to be used.
151
HISTORIC ROAD RACING
c)
d)
e)
Visors are an integral part of the helmet.
Metal or perspex face shields are not used.
Eye shades or peaks are of a flexible material.
13.3 SOLO AND SIDECAR
13.3.1 Categories
13.3.1.1
For the purposes of determining eligibility machines are categorised as follows:
Period 1
Period 2
Period 3
Period 4
Period 5
Veteran
Vintage
Classic
Post Classic
Forgotten Era
Up to 31st December 1919.
1st January 1920 to 31st December 1945.
1st January 1946 to 31st December 1962.
1st January 1963 to 31st December 1972.
1st January 1973 to 31st December 1980.
13.3.2 Classes
13.3.2.1
For the purposes of determining eligibility there will be the following classes:
Ultra lightweight
Lightweight
Junior
Senior
Unlimited
Sidecar
Period 2 Junior
Period 2 Unlimited
Period 3 Formula 700
Period 4 Formula 750
Solo
Solo
Solo
Solo
Solo
Sidecar
Solo
Solo
Solo
Solo
Up to 125cc
132cc to 250cc
263cc to 350cc
368cc to 500cc
526cc to 1300cc
Up to 1300cc
Up to 350cc
368cc to 1300cc
526cc to 700cc
526cc to 750cc
13.3.3 Eligibility
13.3.3.1
The eligibility and dating of Historic motorcycles shall be considered in terms of
major and minor components and the period of the motorcycle shall be the
period of the latest major component.
13.3.3.2
For all historic competitions the year of the manufacture of a motorcycle
is defined as the year of manufacture of its latest major component.
13.3.3.3
The dating of replicated major components is defined as the year of
manufacture of the original component being replicated.
13.3.3.4
Entrants must enter their motorcycles at historic meetings quoting the
year of manufacture.
13.3.3.5
Major components are:
a) All engine and gearbox external castings;
b) Frames;
c) Swinging arms;
d) Brakes;
e) Forks and fork yokes.
f)
Carburettors.
13.3.3.6
All other components shall be considered as minor components.
13.3.3.7
Major components that were manufactured outside a specific period, but which
are visually indistinguishable from period components shall be eligible for that
period. Modifications to major components are allowed providing such
modifications are visually indistinguishable from modifications proven to have
been used in the period.
152
HISTORIC ROAD RACING
13.3.3.8
13.3.3.9
13.3.3.10
13.3.3.11
13.3.3.12
13.3.3.13
13.3.3.14
Minor components may be modified or updated provided that they remain
visually compatible with the period being depicted.
Components manufactured outside the period are eligible if permitted under
these by-laws.
Fairings, stream linings and cosmetic components must be based on patterns
known and used in the period.
Worm drive hose clamps on oil lines are permitted.
All machines, whether standard or modified, must comply with the
specifications of the period.
Components, (whether major or minor), prohibited from use in any period will
be deemed to be prohibited from use in all earlier periods unless specifically
permitted under these rules.
Everything that is not authorized and prescribed for use under these rules is
strictly forbidden.
13.3.4 Modification
13.3.4.1
The following parts must be removed from any machine before it may be
entered in a competition:
a) Headlamp;
b) Tail lamp;
c) Traffic indicators;
d) Reflectors;
e) Horns;
f)
Rear vision mirrors;
g) Centre and side stands; and
h) Registration plate and label holder.
Any sharp edges left by the removal of these components must be protected by
a rolled edge or beading of a minimum diameter of 3mm.
13.3.5 Capacities
13.3.5.1
On all machines, engine capacities must not exceed 1300cc.
13.3.6 Noise Control
13.3.6.1
Provided noise emission levels are not exceeded, exhaust systems on all
machines may operate without silencers.
13.3.7 Engine Cut Out Switch
13.3.7.1
All machines must be fitted with an engine cut out switch which must be either
a lanyard type or handle bar mounted.
13.4 SOLO - REQUIREMENTS
13.4.1 Periods 1 and 2
13.4.1.1
At least one efficient braking system and a primary drive guard if so driven;
13.4.1.2
Oval number plates.
13.4.1.3
Unless otherwise contained in the machine’s original specifications wheel rim
widths must not exceed WM3.
13.4.2 Period 3
13.4.2.1
Unless otherwise contained in the machine’s original specifications, wheel rim
dimensions of a minimum of 457mm (18”) diameter, and maximum WM3 width
on all wheels.
13.4.2.2
Oval number plates.
13.4.2.3
Front and Rear Brakes:
a) Manufactured in the period; or
b) Which replicate those manufactured in the period.
153
HISTORIC ROAD RACING
13.4.3 Period 4
13.4.3.1
Unless otherwise contained in the machine’s original specifications, wheel rim
dimensions of a minimum of 457mm (18”) diameter, and maximum WM4 width
on all wheels.
13.4.3.2
Oval or rectangular number plates.
13.4.3.3
Reed valves and crank case induction on two stroke engines but only if the
engine of original manufacture was so fitted
13.4.4 Period 5
13.4.4.1
Unless otherwise contained in the machine’s original specifications,
a) For 125cc to 500cc machines, the wheel rim must have a minimum
diameter of 457mm (18”), and a maximum width of 63.5mm (2.5”) front
and 101.6mm (4”) rear.
b) Unlimited class wheel rim dimensions of a minimum of 407mm (16”)
diameter front and a minimum of 432mm (17inch) rear, and maximum
width of 89 mm (3.5”) front and 114 mm (4.5”) rear.
13.4.4.2
Period forks:
a) Forks of a type manufactured in the period up to a maximum diameter of
41mm;
b) Forks which replicate the type manufactured in the period up to a
maximum diameter of 41mm.
13.4.4.3
Rectangular number plates.
13.4.4.4
Front and rear brakes:
a) Manufactured in the period; or
b) Which replicate those manufactured in the period.
13.5 SOLO - PROHIBITED USES
13.5.1 Periods 1 and 2
13.5.1.1
Reed valves on two strokes.
13.5.1.2
Gear boxes with more than four gear ratios.
13.5.1.3
Hydraulic and telescopic steering dampers.
13.5.2 Period 3
13.5.2.1
Direct crankcase induction other than rotary disc valve on two strokes.
13.5.2.2
Reed valves on two strokes.
13.5.2.3
Non motorcycle engines and transmissions.
13.5.2.4
Disc brakes.
13.5.3 Period 4
13.5.3.1
Accessory air assisted front forks.
13.5.3.2
Electronic fuel injection.
13.5.3.3
Power jet carburettors.
13.5.3.4
Mono-shock rear ends.
13.5.3.5
The following machines or their major components:
a) Kawasaki 900Z1.
b) Yamaha TZ.
c) Yamaha RD.
13.5.3.6
Mag wheels – (Cast metal wheels)
13.5.3.7
Rear disc brakes, unless originally factory fitted.
13.5.4 For all periods except period 5:
13.5.4.1
Slick or grooved slick tyres.
13.5.4.2
Shock absorbers with remote or external reservoirs.
154
HISTORIC ROAD RACING
13.5.5 Period 5
13.5.5.1
Floating front and rear discs unless:
a) Manufactured in the period; or
b) Which replicate those manufactured in the period.
13.5.5.2
Suzuki Katana and RG500 MkV1 and Yamaha TZ250H major and minor
components.
13.5.5.3
Unless contained in the machine’s original specifications, all anti-dive devices
and external fork damping. Replica fork sliders, calipers and anti-dive must be
visually indistinguishable from factory original.
13.5.5.4
Electronic fuel injection.
13.6 SOLO - PERMITTED USES
13.6.1 Periods 1 and 2
13.6.1.1
Methanol.
13.6.1.2
Amal GP, Monobloc and MK1 concentric and all period carburettors to 35mm
(1 3/8 inch).
13.6.1.3
All period carburettors.
13.6.2 Period 3
13.6.2.1
The following carburettors:
a) All non-period Amal carburettors up to 38mm; or
b) Dellorto SS1and Dellorto concentric non-pumper carburettors up to 38mm;
c) Keihin CR & PW round bore series carburettors up to a nominal 30mm;
13.6.2.2
Diaphragm clutches, tooth belt drives and electronic ignition, provided they are
concealed from view.
13.6.2.3
Triumph eight and nine stud cylinder heads.
13.6.2.4
Methanol.
13.6.2.5
Reinforced gearbox castings.
13.6.3 Period 4
13.6.3.1
Mechanical fuel injection.
13.6.3.2
Methanol.
13.6.3.3
Keihin CR Special round slide carburettors up to 33mm bore size.
13.6.3.4
Lockheed 4 fin brake calipers.
13.6.4 Period 5
13.6.4.1
The following machines or their major components:
a) Kawasaki 900Z1.
b) Yamaha TZ.
c) Yamaha RD and LC.
13.6.4.2
Spoked and mag type wheels.
13.6.4.3
Slick type racing tyres, cut slicks and racing wets.
13.7 SIDECARS AND CYCLECARS- REQUIREMENTS
13.7.1 Period 1&2
13.7.1.1
At least one efficient braking system and a primary drive guard if so driven.
13.7.1.2
Outfits must use a frame of a type which could be ridden solo, with an outrigger
sidecar chassis of tubular steel construction attached by bolting at a minimum
of four points.
13.7.1.3
Wheel rim dimensions of a minimum of 457mm (18”) diameter, and maximum
WM4 width on all wheels.
13.7.1.4
Oval number plates.
155
HISTORIC ROAD RACING
13.7.1.5
Ground clearance for the whole of the underside of the machine
(excluding wheels), measured with the machine handlebars in the straight
ahead position, race ready with rider and passenger on board be no less
than 65mm.
13.7.2 Period 3
13.7.2.1
The height to the top bearing of the steering head must be at least 710mm
(28”) unladen. Ground clearance for the whole of the underside of the
machine (excluding wheels),measured with the machine handlebars in
the straight ahead position, race ready with rider and passenger on board
be no less than 65mm.
13.7.2.2
Wheel rim diameters of at least:
a) Front 406mm (16”).
b) Rear 330mm (13”).
c) Sidecar
254mm (10”).
13.7.2.3
Wheel rim widths of no more than:
a) Front 76mm (3”).
b) Rear 115mm (4.5”).
c) Sidecar
102mm (4”).
13.7.2.4
Tyre outside diameters must be at least 560mm(22”) front and rear.
13.7.2.5
Oval or rectangular number plates.
13.7.2.6
Front and rear Brakes:
a) Manufactured in the period.
b) Which replicate those manufactured in the period.
c) Sidecar wheel brake prohibited.
d) Linking of brakes is prohibited.
e) Front brakes are to be hand controlled and rear brakes are to be foot
controlled.
13.7.3 Period 4
13.7.3.1
Wheel rim diameters of be at least 254mm (10”).
13.7.3.2
Wheel rim widths of no more than 153mm (6”).
13.7.3.3
Moulded tread type tyres.
13.7.3.4
Front and rear Brakes:
a) Manufactured in the period.
b) Which replicate those manufactured in the period.
c) Sidecar brake permitted.
d) Only mechanical brake bias adjustment permitted.
e) Linking of front and rear brakes prohibited.
f)
Linking of rear and sidecar brakes permitted.
g) Disc brakes manufactured in the period or are an exact replica of those
manufactured in the period.
13.7.3.5
Front exit sidecar chassis configuration.
13.7.3.6
Oval or rectangular number plates.
13.7.3.7
Ground clearance for the whole of the underside of the machine
(excluding wheels), measured with the machine handlebars in the straight
ahead position, race ready with rider and passenger on board be no less
than 65mm.
13.7.4 Period 5
13.7.4.1
Wheel rim diameters to be no greater 330mm (13”).
13.7.4.2
Wheel rim widths to be no greater than:
a) Front
178mm (7”).
b) Rear
229mm (9”)
c) Sidecar
203mm (8”)
13.7.4.3
Rectangular number plates.
156
HISTORIC ROAD RACING
13.7.4.4
13.7.4.5
13.7.4.6
13.7.4.7
13.7.4.8
Front, rear and sidecar brakes:
a) Manufactured in the period.
b) Which replicate those manufactured in the period.
c) Hydraulic bias adjusters permitted.
d) Linking of brakes permitted.
e) Must be fitted with an emergency system operated by a handlebar lever
with a simple circuit operating on either front or rear of the motorcycle.
Front and rear sidecar exit configuration.
Steering / front forks:
a) Leading or trailing forks, with front wheel equally supported on both sides;
b) A cycle car with two forward wheels that was manufactured in the period
or is an exact replica of those manufactured in the period.
Outfits must use a frame of circular or non-circular tubular steel construction
with a maximum diameter of 102mm (4”) at the broadest point, which was
manufactured in the period or is a replica of a frame manufactured in the
period.
Ground clearance for the whole of the underside of the machine
(excluding wheels), measured with the machine handlebars in the straight
ahead position, race ready with rider and passenger on board be no less
than 65mm.
13.8 SIDECARS AND CYCLECARS. PROHIBITED USES
13.8.1 Period 3
13.8.1.1
Sidecar kneelers.
13.8.1.2
Non motorcycle engines and transmissions except where originally fitted.
13.8.1.3
Disc brakes.
13.8.2 Period 4
13.8.2.1
The following machines or their major components:
a) Kawasaki 900Z1.
b) Yamaha TZ.
c) Yamaha RD.
13.8.2.2
Electronic fuel injection.
13.8.2.3
Power jet carburettors.
13.8.3 Period 5
13.8.3.1
Liquid cooled four stroke motorcycle engines.
13.8.3.2
Rear engine sidecars.
13.8.3.3
Steerable sidecar wheels.
13.8.3.4
Alcohol fuels.
13.8.3.5
Monocoque construction.
13.8.3.6
Banking sidecars.
13.8.3.7
Electronic fuel injection.
13.8.3.8
Floating front discs unless:
a) Manufactured during the period; or
b) Which replicate those manufactured during the period
13.8.3.9
Suzuki Katana and RG500 MKVI and Yamaha TZ250H major and minor
components.
13.8.3.10
Unless contained in the machines original specifications, all anti dive devices
and external fork damping. Replica fork sliders, calipers and anti dive must be
visually indistinguishable from factory original.
157
HISTORIC ROAD RACING
13.9 SIDECARS AND CYCLECARS. PERMITTED USES
13.9.1 Period 3
13.9.1.1
The following carburettors:
a) All Amal carburettors up to 38mm.
b) Dellorto SSI and Dellorto concentric non-pumper carburettors up to 38mm.
c) Keihin CR & PW round bore series carburettors up to a nominal 30mm.
d) All period carburettors.
13.9.1.2
Diaphragm clutches, tooth belt drives and electronic ignition, provided they are
concealed from view.
13.9.1.3
Triumph eight and nine stud cylinder heads.
13.9.1.4
Alcohol fuels.
13.9.1.5
Non motorcycle wheels and brakes providing they meet existing dimensional
criteria.
13.9.1.6
Reinforced gearbox castings.
13.9.2 Period 4
13.9.2.1
Mechanical fuel injection.
13.9.2.2
Alcohol fuels.
13.9.2.3
Non motorcycle wheels and brakes providing they meet existing dimensional
criteria.
13.9.2.4
Hydraulic brake master cylinders of cylindrical appearance.
13.9.2.5
Keihin CR Special round slide carburettors up to 33mm bore size.
13.9.3 Period 5
13.9.3.1
Slick type racing tyres, cut slicks and racing wets.
13.9.3.2
Motorcycle engines that were manufactured in the period.
13.10 FUEL.
13.10.1.1
13.10.1.2
13.10.1.3
13.10.1.4
13.10.1.5
13.10.1.6
13.10.1.7
13.10.1.8
Fuel for historic racing must be:
Methanol (with the exception of Period 5).or,
Unleaded that is no more than 98RON.
Contains no additives other than those added at the point of manufacture
except for lubricating oil.
Be a brand of fuel homologated by MA that is compatible with the “Fuel Quality
Standards Act 2000”.
Leaded fuel providing that:
The fuel is purchased from suppliers approved by Environment Australia.
The fuel purchase is logged in a Leaded Fuel Passbook issued by Environment
Australia through MA.
158
14. CLASSIC MOTOCROSS
14.1 PROTECTIVE CLOTHING
14.1.1 Helmets, Clothing, Gloves and Footwear
14.1.1.1
No competitor may practise, start or compete in any classic motocross
competition unless wearing:
a) An approved and correctly fitting helmet which must:
i)
Carry the Standards Association of Australia "AS 1698" label;
or
ii)
Be approved under Rule 01.69 & 01.70 of the FIM Technical
Rules.
b) Trousers of leather or synthetic material of similar durability. Trousers of
other than leather must be non-combustible and be fitted with a nonremovable lining.
c) A jersey which:
i)
Must be of close knit fabric of natural or synthetic fibre.
ii)
Must be a snug fit and provide protection against abrasion to
the body and arms.
d) Footwear which must:
i)
Be of recognised motocross type;
ii)
Be constructed of leather, plastic or other similarly durable
material.
iii)
Be of a length that must at least overlap the trousers with the
rider in a racing position on the machine.
e) Gloves of leather or other material of similar or greater durability.
f)
Goggles or visors as specified in rule 14.1.2
14.1.1.2
No person may wear open footwear in the pits.
14.1.2 Goggles and Visors
14.1.2.1
Spectacles, protective goggles, helmet visors and tear-offs may be worn
provided:
a) Eye protectors and spectacles are made of non-shattering material;
b) Metal or perspex face shields are not used.
c) Eye shades or peaks are of a flexible material.
14.2 ELIGIBILITY
14.2.1 Eligible Machines
14.2.1.1
Only machines conforming to the following requirements will be acceptable.
14.2.1.2
Acceptable machines are those which can be proven to have been
manufactured prior to 31 December 1959, 1964, 1969, 1974, 1977 or
assembled from parts made before that date. The only exception to this rule is
where the model remained unaltered after that date. It is inevitable that some
machines first designed, developed, built and available to the public before the
class cut off dates were also available after that date. Allowance has been
made to accommodate these machines as outlined in the tables for Machine
Eligibility Guidelines.
14.2.1.3
The tables set out in this by-law lists the machines and components which the
sub-committees and scrutineers may use as a guide in determining eligibility.
14.2.1.4
The onus of proof of eligibility rests with the owner and/or rider/entrant.
14.2.2 Classes
14.2.2.1
The following classes shall be recognised for Classic Motocross.
159
CLASSIC MOTOCROSS
14.2.2.2
a) Pre 1960: Solo All Powers
b) Pre 1965: Solo 250
c) Pre 1965: Solo 263 & over
d) Pre 1970: Solo 250
e) Pre 1970: Solo 263 & over
f)
Pre 1975: Solo 125
g) Pre 1975: Solo 250
h) Pre 1975: Solo 263 & over
i)
Pre 1975: Solo All Powers 4 stroke
j)
Pre 1975: Sidecar up to 650cc
k) Pre 1975: Sidecar up to 1300cc
l)
Pre 1978: Solo 125
m) Pre 1978: Solo 250
n) Pre 1978: Solo 263 & over
Pre 1960,Pre 1965,Pre 1970.
Should a class have insufficient entrants (10) then the entries will compete in
the next later period and compete as that class.
e.g. Pre 1960 has less that 10 riders, the entrants will then combine with pre
1965 and race as pre 1965. Should that combined class still not have sufficient
numbers then both the entrants in pre 1960 and pre 1965 will combine with pre
1970 and race as that class. This rule applies equally to the pre 1965 250cc
who will combine with pre 1970 250cc if there are insufficient numbers for a pre
1965 class.
14.2.3 Age Groups
14.2.3.1
Age groups are:
a) Under 30
b) 30 - 39
c) 40 - 49
d) 50 plus
e) 60 plus
14.2.3.2
Age is determined as at the date of the meeting or 1st round for series events.
14.2.3.3
Age group racing is relevant for all machines up to and including Pre 1975
class.
14.2.4 Machine Requirements
14.2.4.1
General
a) Number plates shall be either oval or rectangular and the following
colours:
i)
125cc black background, white numbers;
ii)
250cc green background, white numbers;
iii)
Over 263cc yellow background, black numbers.
b) Methanol is permitted.
c) Maximum engine capacity shall be 1300cc.
d) Number of gears ratios shall remain as per original model specifications.
e) Exhaust may be modified but must generally follow original lines.
f)
Self returning folding footrests must be fitted.
14.2.4.2
Class Identification
14.2.4.3
Letters will be used to identify the classes a machine is to compete in.
14.2.4.4
The letter will be placed on the left side of all three race plates.
14.2.4.5
The letter will be 50mm, and upper case.
14.2.4.6
The letter will be the same colour as the race number.
14.2.4.7
Identification letters per class will be:
14.2.4.8
Pre 1960 “A”
14.2.4.9
Pre 1965 “N”
160
CLASSIC MOTOCROSS
14.2.4.10
14.2.4.11
14.2.4.12
14.2.4.13
Pre 1970 “H”
Pre 1975 “X”
Pre 1978 “Z”
Evolution “E”
14.2.5 Chassis
14.2.5.1
Replica frames are acceptable provided they conform with the original, and
they meet the year cut-off dates for the class in which the machine is to
compete. It is not acceptable for frame tube runs to be different to the original
even if the frame geometry is apparently the same. The machine must look like
the original.
14.2.5.2
No plastic or fibreglass is permitted for tanks, mudguards, seats and side
panels within the pre 1960 class
14.2.5.3
Brakes:
a) As per relevant period for the class in which the machine is to compete.
b) Disc brakes as originally fitted by manufacturers (Rokon, Dalesman and
Tyron/Wassel)
14.2.5.4
For the rear tyre, any modern motocross tyre may be used provided the width
across the tread does not exceed:
a) 114mm (4,5”) Pre 1960
b) 127mm (5”) Pre 1965, Pre 1970, Pre 1975.
14.2.5.5
Lightweight alloy rims for the Pre 1960 class must be of the Borani pattern
(mud catcher type).
14.2.5.6
Suspension
a) Front wheel travel shall be no more than 178mm (7”).
b) Rear wheel travel must be no more than 102mm (4”).Measured at the
axle.
c) Machines fitted with suspension of more than 102mm (4”) of rear travel
standard, shall have spacers fitted to the shock absorber shaft to reduce
wheel travel to 102mm (4”).
d) Rear shock absorbers shall be in the original position, using the original
mounting points.
e) Remote reservoir rear shocks are not eligible, except where fitted as
standard for that model.
f)
Maximum travel by leading/trailing link suspension is limited to 150mm (6”)
vertical movement at the axle. Pre 1960 class: No Ceriani-type forks are
permitted, this includes M.P., REH, Husqvarna, CZ, Betor, Bultaco,
Montesa or late BSA/Triumph.
g) Maximum of 35mm front fork tubes only permitted except where originally
fitted to that machine (exception Maico 36mm) only Maico and Honda CR
125 (with 31mm tubes) AJS, Bultaco Matador and Hatta leading axle forks
allowed.
14.2.6 Modifications
14.2.6.1
Engines
a) Must remain externally unchanged.
b) All major components must have been manufactured within the period, or
be replicas of components manufactured within the period, specified for
the class in which the machine competes, other than those listed in the
Components Tables.
c) Specials must comprise of components manufactured within the period, or
be replicas of components manufactured within the period, specified for
the class in which the machine competes and be a true reflection of the
period depicted.
14.2.6.2
Carburettors
a) Any round slide carburettor of a type available Pre 1975 may be used
except the Pre 1960 class where a Mk 1 Amal Concentric or period
carburettor may be used.
b) Flat slide carburettors are prohibited.
161
CLASSIC MOTOCROSS
14.2.6.3
c) No reed valves permitted on machines up to and including Pre 1970.
Ignition
a) Any ignition system can be used as long as the external appearance of the
engine remains unchanged.
14.2.7 Tables of Machines and Components - Pre 1960
UK
AJS/Matchless
Ariel
BSA
Cotton
DOT
DMW
Frances Barnett
Greeves
James
Norman
Norton
Metisse
All except G85CS and G85ICS
All four strokes
All pre-unit, C15 distributor models and Bantams (No Cheney frames allowed).
Single down tube, leading link only (250cc conversion allowed)
Round tube frames only (250cc conversion allowed)
Up to and including Mk12 (250cc conversion allowed)
Up to Falcon 82.
Up to and including Hawkstone SAS, 25SA, 24 and 20SAS and SCS.
Up to Cotswold with AMC engine.
All
All singles, 500 and 650 twins
Mk1 Triumph engine BSA duplex frame and Mk2 Triumph engine (The Mk2 has
fibreglass bodywork which is acceptable).
Sun
All
Tandon
All
Triumph
All pre-unit and distributor unit models only.
Villiers
Only Ajax and Vale Onslow conversions for Villiers engines are acceptable. No
Starmaker engines.
Vincent
All
Velocette
All
PRE 1960 OTHER MACHINES
ESO
4-stroke
FN
All
Gilera
Saturno Cross
Husqvarna
175cc 3-speed 2-stroke
500cc Albin-based 4-stroke
LITO
All BSA/LITO engines
Some LITO/Albin engines
Sarolea
All
Japanese
All pre-1960
14.2.8 1st January 1960 to 31st December 1964.
UK
AJS
Ariel
BSA
Cotton
DOT
DMW
Frances Barnett
Greeves
James
Matchless
All four strokes
All
All except B44 and B50.
All originally fitted with leading link forks. (Also permissible are
machines fitted with telescopic forks at a later date. Villiers and
Triumph engines only).
All
All
All
All 250cc alloy beam up to Mk3.
All
All
162
CLASSIC MOTOCROSS
Norman
Norton
Royal Enfield
Sprite
Sun
Tandon
Triumph
All
All except P11 and Commando
All
All Villiers and Triumph engines
All
All
All except T140, TSS, T150, T160 and BSA unit single
derivatives
Velocette
All
Vincent
All
PRE 1965 OTHER MACHINES
Bultaco
Pre 1965 only
CZ
250cc Twin port models only
DKW
All pre-65
Enfield
All Enfield of India without modern attributes which
contravene the general requirements.
ESO
All 2-valve four strokes
FN
All
Gilera
Saturno Cross
Hedlund
All
Husqvarna
2-stroke: 250 bolt up frames only to 1967. Later
American enduro frames are not acceptable.
4-stroke: All Alibi-based engines.
Jawa
2-stroke: All except ISDT
4-stroke: All 2 valve
LITO
All
Maico
MC175
Maico 250
Pre 1965 only
Montesa
All pre-1965
Monark
All Albin-based engines.
Some early 2-strokes may be eligible.
Moto Parilla
250cc 4-stroke engines.
Puch
Some early 2-strokes may be eligible
Sarolea
All 4-strokes
All pre-1965
Japanese
All pre 1965
14.2.9 Specials - Table of Machines
Cheney
Greeves
Kyffin
MABSA
Metisse
Pulssant
TRIBSA
Wasp
Cochise
All Gold Star
Triumph: all
DOT and Sapphire
All
Up to Mk3 only
4-strokes only
All
All
All
163
CLASSIC MOTOCROSS
14.2.10 Table of Acceptable Components Pre 1965 Only
The following parts, or replicas of, do not necessarily comply with the cut-off date, but offer
no real technological advantage over components made before that date. Components must
not exceed manufacturing date of 31/12/1969.
Forks
Wheels
Controls
Handlebars
Brakes
Frames
Engines
Ceriani, MP, REH, Husqvarna, CZ, Betor, Bultaco, Montesa BSA/Triumph. (Note: Latetype Ceriani and Betor (Can-Am) with long sliders are not permitted).
Rickman alloy and magnesium, REH, BSA/Triumph conical alloy, AJS Stormer,
Greeves conical, small Husqvarna, CZ motocross and pattern parts to these designs.
Early Bultaco full width hubs and Montesa full width hubs are allowed.
All side pull throttles and late clutch and front brake levers.
All, including alloy.
Single leading shoe brakes only unless manufactured prior to 31/12/1964.
This includes replica frames. BSA B50 and B25SS frames are not permitted.
All JAP (J A Prestwitch)
14.2.11 Table of Machines - 1st January 1965 to 31st December 1969.
AJS
BSA
Bultaco
CZ
DKW
DOT
Greeves
Honda
Hodaka
Husqvarna
Jawa
Kawasaki
Maico
Montesa
MZ
Ossa
Suzuki
Triumph
Yamaha
Zundapp
Stormer (all)
B44 up to & incl. B25, C15, Bantam
Up to & incl. MK4 boat tail Pursang & El Bandido, Sherpas & their enduro
versions (Lobito, Matador, Campera).
Twin port, 360(969-0), 250(980-02)
5 speed
Any
Any alloy beam model. All steel tubing frame models numbers 56, 58, & 59
CL175, CL350
Ace 100, Ace 90
Any oval case engine in original frame 250, 360 & 400
Scrambler & banana frame 6 day bike, Jawa early CZ 250 trail bike
F2IM(250), F4(250), F5(350)
Oval case engine square barrel 250 & 360
Lacrosse 250, Orange Capra GP250, GP360 & early King Scorpion
ISDT
Stiletto 4 speed, 230 Pioneer 4 speed
TS250 1969 model, points ignition & appropriate engine cases
T100 and all pre 1970 models
AT1, DT1, CT1, rectangular swinging arm DT1 & RT1 pre reed block
ISDT
14.2.12 Table of Machines - 1st January 1970 to 31st December 1974
AJS
Benelli
BSA
Bultaco
Carabela
Can-Am
CCM
Cooper
CZ
DKW
410 (all inclusive)
175 trail
B50
Up to & incl. MK7 125, 250 & 360
200
175, 250 TNT only
BSA based
All
Up to & incl. 1974 models incl CMS framed CZ’s
6 speed radial finned 125
164
CLASSIC MOTOCROSS
Ducati
Gemini
Greeves
Honda
Hodaka
Husqvarna
Harley Davidson
Indian
Jawa
Kawasaki
KTM
Maico
Montesa
Monark
MZ
Ossa
Puch
Rickman
Rokon
Suzuki
SWM
Triumph
Wassel
Yamaha
Zundapp
RT 450
175 trail
All models
CR125M, CR250M, XL250 K0, XL350 K0,K1, all SL100, all
SL125, all SL350, all XL100 K0, MT250.
All 100 & 125 models
Up to & incl. Magnesium engine reed valve 250 & others. Pre
Mikkola replica - no radial finned engines.
All SX125, SX250, SX175 trail
All
ISDE 250, 402
KX125 74, KX250 74, KX450 74, F11M, F12M, F81M
Up to & incl. 74GS & MC125, 175, 250. Check date stamp on
engine below counter shaft right case
Up to & incl. 1974; 250, 400, 440LTR, 501. Check date
stamp on top of barrel & nut holding sprocket to countershaft.
4 speed gearbox only.
Cappra 250 VR,
All
400 ISDT
Phantom 250, 125, SDR 250, Stiletto 250
MC 125, MC 175 only.
Montesa 250 & Zundapp 125
RT 340
TM125, 250, 400 K, L, R. TS185, TS250, TS125, TS100
J,K,L and R models.
Sachs engine model only 125cc
Pre 1975
125
MX100, 125, 175, 250, 360 A models, YZ125, 250, 360A & B
models, DT250 and 360A
All 125 models
14.2.13 Pre 78 Classes and Eligibility
14.2.13.1
The Pre 78 classes are intended to represent the "first generation" of longtravel bikes that were commercially available in the 1975-77 periods. The time
frame is provided only as a guideline, as some 1977 models are of the second
generation long-travel bikes that would clearly outclass the earlier models if
allowed to run together. For this reason we do not classify motorcycles strictly
by the year they were produced, but by some similar characteristics that were
possessed by the majority of these first-generation long-travel motorcycles,
such as suspension travel.
14.2.13.2
Pre 78 classes technical specifications. The following specifications apply to all
motorcycles, regardless of the year of manufacture, that fall within the scope of
the classes.
a) Regardless of original specification, no motorcycle may have more than 9
inches of suspension travel at the front and rear wheels.
b) No water-cooled motorcycles.
c) 35mm leading-axle Husqvarna and Betor forks are allowed, provided
travel is limited to a maximum of 9 inches. Early 9-inch-travel Simons
forks are allowed. Fox Factory Forks are prohibited.
d) 38mm is the maximum diameter of fork tube allowed.
Pre 78 125: Certain 125cc and smaller machines built up to and including the
1977 model year that made up the first generation long-travel, small bore
motorcycles. Eligible machines include:
1975-77 Bultaco Pursang 125
165
CLASSIC MOTOCROSS
1975-77 Can-Am TNT, Qualifier and MX 125, up to MX3
1975-78 CZ 125
1975-77 Honda CR, MR, MT 125
1975-77 Husqvarna CR, WR 125
1975-77 Kawasaki KX, KE, KD 125
1975-77 Maico 125 GP
1975-77 Montesa Cappra 125 VA & Enduro 125
1975-77 Penton/KTM 125 with Sachs or KTM engine.
1975-77 Suzuki RM, TM, 125
1975-77 Yamaha MX, YZ, DT, 125
Pre 78 250: Certain 126-250cc machines built up to and including the 1977
model year that made up the first generation long-travel motorcycles. Eligible
machines include:
1975-77 Bultaco Pursang, Frontera, Alpina 250, to include the 1977
MK10 Pursang
1975-77 Can-Am MX, TNT and Qualifier 175-250, up to MX3
1975-78 CZ 250 Falta Replica
1975-77 Honda CR, MT, MR, XL 175-250
1975-76 Husqvarna CR, WR 250 and 1977 WR 250. 1977
Husqvarna CR/OR models are allowed, with fork travel limited to 9
inches.
1975-77 Kawasaki KX, KLX, KD, 175-250.
1975-77 Maico MC, AW 250. 1977 model AW 250 must comply with
the class suspension limits.
1975-77 Montesa King Scorpion & Cappra VR 250 V-75, VA &
Enduro 250H (VB models see the Gran Prix classes)
1975-77 Ossa Phantom & Desert Phantom 250, up to GPIII model
1975-77 Penton-KTM 175-250. 1977 models must meet the Class
suspension limits.
1975-77 Suzuki RM, TM, PE 175 & 250
1975-77 Yamaha MX, YZ, DT, IT 175-250
Pre 78 500: Certain 325-460cc two-stroke and up to 636cc four-stroke
machines, built up to and including the 1977 model year, that make up the
first generation long-travel motorcycles. Eligible motorcycles include:
1975-77 Bultaco Frontera, Alpina, Pursang 360-370
1975-78 CCM MX up to 636cc. No CCM four-valve heads are
allowed. Wheel travel must comply with class requirements.
1975-78 CZ 400 Falta Replica
1975-77 Honda XL 350, side- or centre-port engine
1975-76 Husqvarna CR, WR 360. 1977 WR 360 is allowed. 1977
Husqvarna CR & OR 390 models are allowed, with fork travel limited
to 9 inches.
1975-77 Kawasaki KX 400-450
1974-77 Maico MC, AW 400-440. 1977 AW 400-440 must comply
with the class suspension limits.
1975-77 Montesa Cappra 360 VA,
1975-77 Penton-KTM 400. 1977 models must meet the class
suspension limits.
1975-77 Suzuki RM, TM, PE 370
1975-77 Yamaha YZ, MX, DT, IT 360 and 400
1975-78 Yamaha TT500, up to 500cc displacement, with allowable
overbore.
Motorcycles in all of the Pre 78 classes may use an aftermarket frame. Many
were available during the intended time frame of the class, including, C&J,
Champion, Dick Mann, Cheney, Cycle Factory, Hallman-Aberg and many
166
CLASSIC MOTOCROSS
others. Regardless of the manufacturer, all motorcycles must meet the class
technical specifications for wheel travel and suspension components.
14.2.14 Eligibility - Sidecars
a) All performance parts except frames must be manufactured before 31
December 1974 and comply with the below table of specifications.
b) Wheel track measurement, taken between the longitudinal centres of the
rear and sidecar wheels must be between 810mm and 1100mm.
c) The minimum ground clearance must be 175mm unladen.
d) The maximum lean of the motorcycle at saddle height must be 50mm.
e) There must be no less than 4 sidecar attachment points.
f)
The dimensions of the sidecar baseboard in plan view, taken from a line
drawn no further rearwards than the lowest point of the front down-tube to
the forward most point of the sidecar wheel tyre and terminating no further
rearwards than a line drawn at right angles to the machine from the
rearmost point of the rear tyre, must be:
i)
At least 760mm long adjacent to the sidecar wheel;
ii)
At least 300mm wide with at least 25mm radius to all corners.
g) There must be no more than 50mm between baseboard and motorcycle
and between baseboard and sidecar wheel. The baseboard must be
arranged so as not to allow the passenger's feet to be trapped.
h) All hand holds must be finished with a loop of at least 100mm.
i)
Stirrup fitting for the passenger's feet are not permitted.
j)
Hand holds on the sidecar must not project beyond a line taken with the
outer edge of the sidecar mudguard or bodywork. All hand holds adjacent
to the nose section of the sidecar and less than 200mm from the track
surface must be at an angle of at least 45 degrees from the horizontal.
k) The rear end of the rear wheel mudguard must terminate not more than 65
degrees above a horizontal line drawn through the rear wheel axle and be
valanced to baseboard level on the inside.
l)
The sidecar mudguard must cover at least 135 degrees of the periphery of
the wheel and be valanced to baseboard level on the inside.
m) No machine may be fitted with scoop or paddle tyres.
n) Suspension travel must not exceed:
i)
152mm (6”) measured at the front axle;
ii)
102mm (4”) at the rear axle.
o) Rear tyre width must not exceed 135mm(5.3”).
p) Brakes:
i)
Front - single caliper, single disc may be fitted provided they
were manufactured before 31st December 1974;
ii)
Rear - rear disc brakes may be used provided they were fitted
as standard equipment for that particular combination.
q) Only round slide carburettors manufactured within the relevant period may
be used.
r)
Engine capacity must be:
i)
Junior up to 650cc;
ii)
Senior up to 1300cc;
iii)
Within the tolerances in Chapter 5.
167
CLASSIC MOTOCROSS
The following table sets out the machines and components which eligibility
scrutineers may use as a guide in determining eligibility. Entrants must
prove eligibility of machines not listed below.
Wasp
Hagon
Yamaha
Honda
Norton
Weslake
Triumph
CCM
All up to and including RT2, RT8 and RT14
All up to 31st December 1974
XS 650 all models
Any K series
All 750, 850 to MK2 only
All up to 850cc and 31st December 1974
All up to T150
All BSA B50 based models
14.2.15 Evolution Class
14.2.15.1
Evolution class shall be run as a national championship and can be
independent of other classic motocross classes.
14.2.15.2
Rules of the class
14.2.15.3
Bikes will be OEM. Modifications converting later equipment to comply will not
be allowed
All components will be of the period the machine was
manufactured.
a) No linkage suspension
b) No Disc brakes
c) Air cooled motors
14.2.15.4
Capacities.
a) Solo 125cc.
b) Solo 250cc.
c) Solo 263cc and over.
14.2.15.5
No age group classes will be run.
14.3 CLASSIC DIRT TRACK
14.3.1 Eligibility
14.3.1.1
The tables set out in rule 14.2 for classic motocross:
a) Apply to classic dirt track as if they were set out in this rule;
b) List the machines and components which the sub-committees and
scrutineers may use as a guide in determining eligibility under this rule.
14.3.1.2
The capacity classes for classic machines are:
Solo
125cc
250cc
500cc
500cc Slider
Unlimited
Sidecar
650cc
Unlimited
up to 125cc
Over 125cc & up to 250cc
MX Frame over 250cc & up to 500cc
Slider frame over 250cc & up to 500cc
Over 500cc – any frame
Up to 600cc 4 cylinder and Up to 650cc single or twin cylinder
Machines which are ineligible for the 650cc class
168
CLASSIC MOTOCROSS
14.3.2 Classic Engine Types
14.3.2.1
500cc Machines must have been manufactured before 31st December 1974
provided that any machine so manufactured is fitted with either ESO, JAWA, or
JAP Speedway type 2-valve push-rod engines. Engines manufactured after that
date, which are visually identical with engines manufactured before that date,
are also eligible.
14.3.2.2
Slider type machines must be fitted with either:
a) A two stroke engine.
b) A single cylinder, four stroke, two valve, push rod engine.
c) A twin cylinder, four stroke, two valve, push rod engine.
14.3.2.3
Solo
a) Machines must be fitted with at least one working brake.
b) Motocross type machines must have:
i.
Twin rear shock absorbers.
iv)
Conventional swinging arms mounted in their original positions.
14.3.2.4
Sidecar
a) Sidecar outfits may be of any period of construction.
169
15. SUPERMOTO
15.1 PROTECTIVE CLOTHING
15.1.1 Helmets, Clothing, Gloves and Footwear
15.1.1.1
No competitor may practise, start or compete in any supermoto competition
unless wearing:
a) An approved and correctly fitting full-faced helmet which must:
i)
Carry the Standards Association of Australia "AS 1698" label;
or
ii)
Be approved under Rule 01.69 & 01.70 of the FIM Technical
Rules.
b) A one piece suit or jacket and trousers constructed of leather or other
material of similar or greater durability.
i)
Where jackets or one piece suits are fitted with front opening
slide fasteners a safety strap must be fitted and secured at the
neck.
ii)
In the case of jackets and trousers, provision must be made to
attach the rear of the jacket securely to the trousers.
iii)
The following areas must be padded with at least a double layer
of leather or enclosed plastic foam at least 8mm thick.
a) Shoulders.
b) Elbows.
c) Both sides of torso and hip joint.
d) Knees.
c) A back protector which is commercially manufactured.
d) Boots with ankle and calf protection which:
i)
Must be constructed of leather or other material of similar or
greater durability but must not be constructed of rubber.
ii)
Must at least overlap the suit or trousers when the rider is in the
normal riding position.
iii)
Must not have soft leather soles.
iv)
Motocross boots are approved.
e) Gloves of leather or other material of similar or greater durability.
f)
Goggles or visors as specified in rule 15.1.2
15.1.1.2
No person may wear open footwear in the pit area.
15.1.2 Goggles and Visors
15.1.2.1
Spectacles, protective goggles, helmet visors and "tear-offs" may be worn
provided:
a) Eye protectors and spectacles are made of non-shattering material.
b) Eye protectors which cause visual disturbance are not to be used.
c) Visors are an integral part of the helmet.
d) Metal or perspex face shields are not used.
e) Eye shades or peaks are of a flexible material.
15.2 ENGINES
15.2.1 General
15.2.1.1
Plugs or caps which, if removed, permit the discharge of any lubricating,
cooling or hydraulic fluids, must be wire-locked or otherwise secured in a
manner approved by the scrutineer in the tightened position.
170
SUPERMOTO
15.2.1.2
15.2.1.3
15.2.1.4
15.2.1.5
15.2.1.6
15.2.1.7
15.2.1.8
15.2.1.9
Where flexible oil lines other than those supplied as standard equipment by the
original machine manufacturer are used, they must incorporate high pressure
hose secured by high pressure connections. For other than historic machines,
worm drive hose clamps may not be used.
All hoses must be securely fitted and guarded to prevent contact with:
a) The ground.
b) Tyres or other moving parts over the full movement of the suspension.
Only single or twin cylinder engines may be used. On 4 stroke engines, an oil
catch tank of 500cc minimum, properly fastened, or a closed breather system
must be installed.
The only liquid coolant permitted is water.
Lubricating, cooling and hydraulic fluid levels must be maintained within
manufacturers' specifications.
A self-closing throttle must be fitted.
A non-return valve must be fitted to the tank breather pipe which must
discharge into a catch tank with a minimum capacity of 500cc.
Lock wiring used on oil and water filler caps and drain plugs must be visible.
15.2.2 Fuel
15.2.2.1
Fuel for all machines must be:
a) Unleaded.
b) Be no more than 98 RON.
c) Contain no additives other than those added at the point of manufacture
except for lubricating oil for two stroke engines.
d) Be readily available from retail petrol pumps within Australia; or
e) Be a brand of fuel homologated by MA that is compatible with the “Fuel
Quality Standards Act 2000”.
15.3 FRAMES AND PARTS
15.3.1 Tyres
15.3.1.1
Knobby tyres are not permitted. Additional cuts and/or grooves may be made
to tyres.
15.3.2 Rims
15.3.2.1
Rims must be 17” in S1, S2 and S3 classes.
15.3.2.2
Rims other than 17” may be used in S4, S5, S6 classes. Any rim size can be
used in S7/S8 classes.
15.3.3 Brakes
15.3.3.1
A pin or locknut must be fitted to the brake pad fixture. The safety wire used on
the brake caliper bolts must be visible.
15.4 CAPACITY CLASSES
15.4.1 Capacities.
15.4.1.1
S1 Prestige class over 250cc 2 stroke and over 450cc to 700cc 4 stroke;
15.4.1.2
S2 Sport class up to 250cc 2 stroke and up to 450cc 4 stroke;
15.4.1.3
S3 Light class 125cc to 200cc 2 stroke and up to 250cc 4 stroke;
15.4.1.4
S4 Clubman Open Class
15.4.1.5
S5 Clubman 250cc 2 stroke and up to 450cc 4 stroke
15.4.1.6
S6 Clubman 125cc 2 stroke and up to 250cc 4 stroke
15.4.1.7
S7 Junior 13-15 years, up to 125cc 2 stroke
15.4.1.8
S8 Junior 13-15 years, up to 250cc 4 stroke.
15.4.1.9
Senior classes of the same capacity may be combined if provided for in SR.
171
SUPERMOTO
15.5 COMPETITION RULES
15.5.1 Starting
15.5.1.1
Unless otherwise provided for in SR, massed starts must be used.
15.5.1.2
Unless otherwise provided for in SR, qualifying for starting grid positions must
be held.
15.5.1.3
In the absence of qualifying, the Clerk of Course must allocate starting grid
positions.
15.5.2 Grid Positions
15.5.2.1
There must be a maximum of four riders per row with a minimum of one metre
between riders; and
15.5.2.2
There must be a minimum of four metres between rows.
15.5.2.3
No more than thirty riders may participate in each race.
15.5.3 Stopping and Re-Running
15.5.3.1
The Steward or Clerk of the Course who has excluded a competitor for unfair
conduct and considers that such conduct has:
a) Given an advantage to the team of which the offender is a member.
b) In the case of a non-team event, jeopardised the fair chances of one or
more of the other competitors in the event.
may declare the event void and order a re-run.
15.5.3.2
If the event continues, any competitor unable to cross the finish line as a result
of such conduct on the part of the excluded competitor may be deemed to have
finished the race in the place:
a) Held immediately before such conduct.
b) having regard to any advancement in placing following the exclusion, in
some other place.
15.5.3.3
A Steward or Clerk of the Course may stop an event and order it to be re-run if
it would be dangerous for it to continue.
15.5.3.4
In any re-run:
a) Any competitor who:
i)
Fell in the stopped event as a result of having been fouled.
ii)
Intentionally laid down his or her machine in the interests of
safety; or
iii)
Left the course in the interests of safety;
may participate.
b) Any competitor who:
i)
Caused or contributed to the event being stopped.
ii)
Failed to start in.
iii)
Retired from.
iv)
Was excluded from; or
v)
Had been lapped during the course of the stopped event;
may not participate.
15.5.3.5
Where the Steward or Clerk of the Course has stopped a race due to danger
the following will apply:
a) If no more than two laps of the stopped race were completed:
i)
The stopped race will be declared null and void.
ii)
The race may be re-run.
iii)
The re-run race will be for the full race distance.
iv)
The original grid positions will be used.
v)
The place of any machine unable to take part in the re-run race
will be left vacant.
vi)
Machines may be repaired or replaced provided they have been
approved by the scrutineer.
172
SUPERMOTO
b)
c)
If more than two laps, but less than 75% of the race distance, have been
completed:
i)
The race may be re-started, but only once.
ii)
The restart must occur no more than 30 minutes after the race
has been stopped.
iii)
The re-started race distance will be equal to the balance of the
stopped race distance.
iv)
Positions on the grid for the re-started race will be determined
by the order of competitors at the finish line of the last full lap of
the stopped race.
v)
Only competitors who have completed at least 75% of the laps
completed by the leading competitor at the time of stopping will
be permitted to participate in the re-started race.
vi)
Machines may be repaired or replaced provided they have been
approved by the scrutineer.
vii)
The stopped race and any re-run will be deemed to be parts of
the one race.
viii)
The winner will be the competitor having the highest number of
laps at the finish.
ix)
Where two or more competitors complete the same number of
laps the winning order will be determined by the time taken by
each to complete those laps.
x)
If at least 75% of the scheduled race distance is completed full
points will be awarded.
xi)
If less than 75% of the scheduled race distance is completed
half points will be awarded.
Anticipated Start.
15.5.3.6
15.5.3.7
15.5.3.8
a) Stop/Go Penalty.
Upon recommendation of the Clerk of Course a board showing “Stop & Go” as
well as the riding number will be shown at the finish area to the rider who made
the false start.
The rider in question must go to the designated “Stop & Go” penalty zone, must
bring the machine to a stop (the engine must not be turned off) and remain
stationary for a full 5 seconds. The rider may then rejoin the race. This
procedure is under the strict control of the designated marshals. Failure by the
rider to stop after being shown the board three times will result in the rider
being black flagged. If more that one rider is penalized, the riders will be
signaled on subsequent laps. Where the marshals have been unable to carry
out the stop/go procedure before the end of the race, the rider will incur a time
penalty of 15 seconds
173
16. CHAMPIONSHIP MEDALLIONS AND TROPHIES
16.1 CHAMPIONSHIP MEDALLIONS
16.1.1 Individual Competitions
MA medallions will be presented to the first, second and third riders in each
championship solo class and the first, second and third rider and passenger in the
championship sidecar class at all Australian championship meetings.
16.1.2 Teams Competitions
MA medallions will be presented to the members of the first, second and third placed
teams in the state trophy and junior trophy competition at the Australian enduro
teams championships.
16.1.3 All Competitions
At least the first three place getters in any Australian Championship event must be
awarded a sash or similar permanent memento of the achievement by the promoter,
irrespective of MA awards.
16.2 DUKE OF EDINBURGH TROPHIES
16.2.1.1
16.2.1.2
16.2.1.3
The Duke of Edinburgh Trophies will be inscribed each year with the names of
the winners of the highest capacity solo and sidecar Australian championship
for the following:a) Australian Superbike Championship – Superbike and Sidecar;
b) Open class of the Australian Motocross Championships;
c) Australian Dirt Track Championships – 500cc Solo and Sidecar;
d) Australian Speedway Championships — Solo and Sidecar.
The winners of the Duke of Edinburgh Trophy will be entitled to have a
photograph taken of themselves with the trophy. The cost of the photograph
will be subject to price approval by the SCB and recoverable from MA.
The trophies will be held by MA.
174
17. AUSTRALIAN FOUR DAY ENDURO
17.1 AUSTRALIAN ENDURO CHAMPIONSHIPS:
17.1.1 Description of A4DE
17.1.1.1
The Australian Enduro championships will be a four day event known as the
Australian Four Day Enduro (“A4DE”). The A4DE will determine both the
Australian Teams and the Australian Individual Championships.
17.1.1.2
Entries
a) The number of entries, both as to maximum and minimum numbers, will
be as specified in the SR.
b) The closing date for entries will be 14 days before the event.
c) Priority will be given to teams over individuals.
d) Each team entering for the event may nominate a manager.
e) Team manager's names must be submitted to the promoter no later than
the end of the preliminary examination.
f)
The team manager is responsible for representing the team.
17.1.1.3
Jury
a) Each state which has entered a Trophy Team, or a Junior Trophy Team
may nominate a representative for the Jury, subject to rule 2.5.10.3.
17.1.2 Solo Classes
17.1.2.1
The classes for solo are:
CLASS 1
CLASS 2
CLASS 3
CLASS 4
CLASS 5
Up to 200cc Two Stroke.
Over 220cc Two Stroke
Up to 250cc Four Stroke.
270CC to 450cc Four Stroke.
Over 500cc Four Stroke.
17.1.2.2
Veteran Class
Riders must have turned 35 years before 1st January in the year of competition.
Machines may be of any capacity.
17.1.2.3
Masters Class
Riders must have turned 45 years of age before the 1st January in the year of
competition. Machines of any capacity.
17.1.3 Change of Machine
17.1.3.1
After the closing date for entries:
a) A competitor may apply in writing to the jury for permission to change
machines.
b) A team may apply in writing to the jury for permission:
i)
For a team member to change machines or to ride the entered
machine in a class different from the one for which it was
entered;
ii)
To substitute one entered team member for another.
c) Applications must be delivered to the Clerk of the Course before the
preliminary machine examination.
d) The jury may grant permission subject to such conditions as it thinks fit or
may refuse permission.
e) No team or competitor may change the capacity of an entered machine.
17.1.4 Eligibility
17.1.4.1
Only solo machines are eligible for the A4DE.
175
AUSTRALIAN FOUR DAY ENDURO
17.1.4.2
All machines entered in the A4DE must have:
a) Working commercially available headlight and tail light, visible to other
road users, either:
b) Permanently wired to illuminate; or
c) Able to be switched on or off by a single switch mounted on the handlebar
or headlight assembly;
d) A working brake light, visible to other road users, operated by the brake
pedal or handlebar brake lever.
e) Other requirements as specified in the SR to comply with road traffic laws
of the host state.
f)
No motorcycle may enter the A4DE parce ferme without a fixed stand
approved at machine examination.
17.1.5 Cancellation
17.1.5.1
MA may, if it considers that there are insufficient entries for an A4DE, cancel
the event. In the event of a cancellation under this Rule, entry fees must be
refunded.
17.2 THE COURSE
17.2.1 Requirements
17.2.1.1
The course must consist of roads that are passable in all kinds of weather.
17.2.1.2
The total distance to be covered will be no less than 600 km nor more than
1000 km with no more than three laps each day.
17.2.1.3
The course must be marked with a different colour for each day.
17.2.1.4
A draft of the proposed SR for the event, together with samples of all marking
signs to be used in the event, must be delivered to the Enduro Commission not
less than 4 months before the date of the event.
17.2.1.5
The starting order will be established to allow the Trophy and Junior Trophy
Teams to start first.
17.2.1.6
At the end of each day, each competitor:
a) After passing the pre-service time check point; and
b) Before passing the final time check point.
may, within a period of 15 minutes, carry out maintenance and repairs in the
final service area.
17.2.2 Completion of Course
17.2.2.1
Subject to the following sub-Rules, each competitor must complete all four
runs.
17.2.2.2
A competitor who is excluded for one day:
a) May restart on the next following day; but
b) If excluded for a further one day, may not restart.
17.2.2.3
For a team to be classified as finishing, at least one rider must complete the
course.
17.2.2.4
If the event is stopped prematurely by the jury it cannot be re-run.
17.2.2.5
If the event is stopped before the majority of riders have completed half the
total distance the event will be declared null and void.
17.2.2.6
If the event is stopped at a later stage the jury will decide whether the event is
void or declare such results and awards as they consider justified according to
the circumstances.
17.2.3 Tests
17.2.3.1
On each of the first three days there must be at least two cross tests and at
least two enduro tests.
17.2.3.2
i)
At the end of the final day there may be a final test, or
ii)
There may be a shortened final day with at least three timed
tests.
176
AUSTRALIAN FOUR DAY ENDURO
17.3 PRELIMINARY EXAMINATION
17.3.1 Marking of Parts
17.3.1.1
The scrutineer must, using paint, mark the following parts with competitor’s
numbers as follows:
a) Front number plate 1
b) Main section of the frame on the right hand side of steering head - 1
c) Hub of each wheel 2
d) Right side of crankcase 1
e) Exhaust system 1
17.3.1.2
The markings on wheel hubs, crankcase and exhaust system must be heat
resistant.
17.3.1.3
Other than for the purpose of repairs and maintenance authorised under these
Rules, no competitor may, during an event, without authorisation replace or
change, or cause or permit to be replaced or changed, any part marked at the
preliminary examination.
17.4 PUBLICATION OF RESULTS
17.4.1 Requirements
17.4.1.1
Subject to the following Rule, the results of each day of the competition must
be published as soon as possible after the completion of the day.
17.4.1.2
If it is impracticable to publish in accordance with the preceding Rule, the
results must be published before the evening jury meeting and competitors
must be informed not later than the time for resumption of the next day.
17.5 A4DE AWARDS:
17.5.1 The Challenge Trophy
17.5.1.1
The Trophy is an Australian Championship competition for State teams, and
other invited teams.
17.5.1.2
Subject to the following two Rules, each SCB may enter one team comprising
six competitors whose licences must have been issued by that SCB.
17.5.1.3
MNSW may enter, in addition to its own team, an ACT team which comprises a
team of competitors in which each competitor:
a) Must hold a licence issued by MNSW;
b) Must have a licence, which names an ACT Club.
17.5.1.4
An SCB, which includes in its team a competitor:
a) Who has previously held a licence issued in Australia; and
b) Who is competing under Rule 3.3.1.6;
must have been the issuing SCB for that previous Australian licence.
17.5.1.5
The six motorcycles of each team must belong to at least three different
capacity classes.
17.5.1.6
The winning team will be awarded the Challenge Trophy.
17.5.1.7
Each member of the winning team will be awarded a souvenir trophy.
17.5.1.8
The second and third placed teams will receive special awards.
17.5.1.9
The results of the Challenge Trophy will be established in the following order:
a) The team with the highest number of riders finishing the event.
b) The team with the lowest number of points.
17.5.1.10
Ties will be resolved in the following manner:
a) The score of the rider with the highest number of points will be deducted
from the team’s total points.
b) If a tie still exists, the scores of the two riders with the highest number of
points will be deducted from the team's total points.
17.5.1.11
Riders nominated as veterans and Masters are not eligible for the Trophy
Team.
177
AUSTRALIAN FOUR DAY ENDURO
17.5.2 The Junior Trophy
17.5.2.1
The Junior Trophy is an Australian Championship for State Teams, and other
invited national teams.
17.5.2.2
Subject to the following two Rules, each SCB may enter one team comprising
four competitors whose licences must have been issued by that SCB.
17.5.2.3
MNSW may enter, in addition to its own team, an ACT team which comprises a
team of competitors in which each competitor:
a) Must hold a licence issued by MNSW;
b) Must have a licence, which names an ACT Club.
17.5.2.4
An SCB, which includes in its team a competitor:
a) Who has previously held a licence issued in Australia; and
b) Who is competing under Rule 3.3.1.6.
must have been the issuing SCB for that previous Australian licence.
17.5.2.5
Each competitor must be of or under the age of 23 years.
17.5.2.6
A rider nominated for a Trophy Team cannot also be a member of a Junior
Trophy Team.
17.5.2.7
The four motorcycles in each team must be at least of two different classes.
17.5.2.8
Results will be determined as for the Trophy Teams.
17.5.2.9
Each member of the winning team will be awarded a souvenir trophy.
17.5.2.10
The second and third placed teams will receive special awards.
17.5.3 The Club Team Awards
17.5.3.1
The Club Team Awards are a competition into which each SCB may enter one
or more teams.
17.5.3.2
A Club Team:
a) Must be nominated by a motorcycling club affiliated to the SCB;
b) Must consist of three riders;
17.5.3.3
No competitor may be a member of more than one club team
17.5.3.4
Competitors in the Trophy, Junior Trophy or Motorcycle Trade team events are
ineligible for this competition.
17.5.3.5
Results will be determined as for the Trophy Teams.
17.5.3.6
The first three club teams will receive special awards.
17.5.3.7
Riders nominated as Veterans and Masters are eligible and classification
points will be calculated as per the Veterans class.
17.5.4 The Motorcycle Trade Team Awards
17.5.4.1
The Motorcycle Trade Team Awards are a competition in which any trader
within the motorcycle trade may enter a team consisting of three riders.
17.5.4.2
A competitor may not be a member of more than one motorcycle trade team
17.5.4.3
A competitor in a Club team is ineligible for this competition.
17.5.4.4
Results will be determined as for the Trophy Teams.
17.5.4.5
The three best teams will receive special awards.
17.5.4.6
Riders nominated as Veterans and Masters are eligible but will be scored as
per the capacity class of the motorcycle they are riding.
17.5.5 The Individual Riders Medals
17.5.5.1
The Gold Medal of MA will be awarded to all riders whose total number of
points do not exceed 110% of the number of points achieved by the first rider of
that class.
17.5.5.2
The Silver Medal of MA will be awarded to all riders whose total number of
points do not exceed 140% of the number of points achieved by the first rider of
that class.
17.5.5.3
The Bronze Medal of MA will be awarded to all riders who complete the A4DE
within the allotted time.
17.5.5.4
Restarting riders who complete the A4DE will be presented with an appropriate
award at the organiser's discretion.
178
18. AUSTRALIAN ROAD RACE CHAMPIONSHIPS
18.1 AUSTRALIAN SUPERBIKE CHAMPIONSHIP
18.1.1 Allocation of Numbers
18.1.1.1
In each year, riding numbers 1 to 10 in each class of the ASC will be
allocated in that order to the competitors who finished in the same order in the
previous year’s series.
18.1.2 Starting
18.1.2.1
Each event in the ASC:
a) Must use a clutch start.
b) Must be preceded by a sighting lap and a warm-up lap. Any competitor
who does not complete the warm-up lap must start the event from Pit
Lane.
18.1.3 Restriction on Tyres
18.1.3.1
In ASC Superbike events, where there is a restriction on the number of tyres
used, hand cut slicks will be deemed to be slicks.
18.1.4 ASC Points
18.1.4.1
ASC pole positions
a) The competitor who obtains pole position will receive one additional point
in the Championship.
b) Pole position will be on the side of the track opposite to the direction taken
by the track in the first corner after the start.
18.1.5 Ties
18.1.5.1
In the event of a tie in the ASC, the competitor with the greatest number of
highest placings will be awarded one bonus point.
18.1.5.2
Where a tie still exists, the competitor with the highest placing in the round,
which is that competitors lowest scoring event in the series will be awarded one
bonus point.
18.1.6 ASC Race Distances
18.1.6.1
The race distances for the ASC will be according to the Series
Supplementary Regulations.
18.1.7 Delivery of Machines for eligibility scrutineering
18.1.7.1
Machines must be delivered to an area nominated by the series scrutineer at
the conclusion of each series race and qualifying session. Machines may not
be removed from that area without the permission of the series scrutineer.
18.2 AUSTRALIAN HISTORIC ROAD RACE CHAMPIONSHIPS
18.2.1 Format
18.2.1.1
The Australian Historic Road Race Championship will be conducted as a single
meeting at a venue selected by the Historic Commission.
18.2.1.2
The Australian Championship shall consist of no more than two races per
period per class.
18.2.1.3
Race distances will be determined by the Historic Commission, in consultation
with the Promoter.
18.2.2 Log Books
18.2.2.1
Machines entered in the Australian Historic Road Race Championships must
have a log book issued by MA, or be covered by rule 13.1.1.4 (d)
18.2.2.2
Log book application forms are available on www.ma.org.au or from SCBs.
18.2.2.3
Log book applications may not be processed if lodged within 6 weeks of the
Championship.
179
19. AUSTRALIAN MOTOCROSS AND SUPERCROSS CHAMPIONSHIPS
19.1 AUSTRALIAN PRO-LITE & PRO-OPEN MOTOCROSS CHAMPIONSHIPS
19.1.1 Classes
19.1.1.1
Championship classes will be:
a) Pro-Lites – for machines up to 125cc two stroke and up to 250cc four
stroke;
b) Pro-Open – for machines over 125cc and up to 250cc two stroke, over
251cc to 450cc four stroke.
19.1.2 Format
19.1.2.1
The Championship format will be determined by the Motocross Commission
and published in SR.
19.1.3 Practice and Qualifying
19.1.3.1
Unless otherwise directed in the SR, any heats and qualifiers are to be held on
the day of the meeting.
19.1.3.2
Timed practice for any event may be held either on Saturday afternoon or
Sunday morning.
19.1.3.3
All grid positions will be determined by qualifying times.
19.1.3.4
No competitor may enter the track for practising on any of the seven days
immediately preceding the event other than the official press day.
19.1.3.5
The top ten competitors from the previous year’s championship will qualify for
Round 1.
19.1.3.6
The ten competitors leading the Championship prior to each subsequent round
will qualify for the round.
19.1.3.7
The remaining thirty competitors for all rounds will be determined by qualifying
times.
19.1.4 The Event
19.1.4.1
For each class, a round will consist of three races. The duration of each race
will be specified in SR.
19.1.4.2
The races must be conducted on the same day with a minimum of fifteen and a
maximum of forty competitors in each race.
19.1.4.3
Each competitor may compete on a substitute machine, provided that the
competitor must notify the Clerk of Course before commencement of the race
in which the substitution is to be made.
19.1.5 Numbers
19.1.5.1
The No 1 plate in each class will be allocated to the winner of the previous
year’s championship.
19.1.5.2
Number plates 2 to 20 in each class will be determined by competitors’ overall
position in both the previous year’s Motocross and Supercross Championships
which is determined by aggregating championship points awarded in both
competitions and aggregating them as a percentage as calculated by the
Motocross Commission. If two or more competitors aggregate the same
number of points preference will be given to:
a) Competitors who competed in the most championship events; then
b) The competitor who achieved the highest number of points at the last
championship round they both competed in.
19.1.5.3
Competitors entitled to a top 20 number must use it in all national
championships events.
19.1.5.4
No competitor may compete unless wearing the machine identification number
on his or her back in contrasting colours and with a minimum size of 125mm
height and 20mm width of stroke.
180
AUSTRALIAN MOTOCROSS AND SUPERCROSS CHAMPIONSHIPS
19.1.6 Scoring for Each Race
Place
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Points
25
22
20
18
16
15
14
Place
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Points
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
Place
15
16
17
18
19
20
Points
6
5
4
3
2
1
19.2 AUSTRALIAN JUNIOR MOTOCROSS CHAMPIONSHIPS
19.2.1 Format
19.2.1.1
The format of the championships will be:
Under 80cc and Sidecars
80cc and over
19.2.1.2
19.2.1.3
19.2.1.4
19.2.1.5
7 minutes + 1 lap
10 minutes + 1 lap
At least five laps practice must be offered to riders prior to the commencement
of racing.
There will be a minimum of five legs per class.
If heats and finals are required:
a) Heats will be three legs per class, with heats to be mixed; and
b) Finals will be three legs per class.
A competitor’s racing number will be determined as follows:
a) The first digit will be the first digit of the postcode for the competitor’s state
of residency, except the Northern Territory, which will be 1;
b) The remainder of the number will be at the discretion of the RCB.
19.2.2 Venues
19.2.2.1
Venues used for Australian Junior Motocross Championships will be closed for
a minimum of 21 days prior to the event.
19.2.3 Eligibility
19.2.3.1
Competitors eligibility is determined by their age at July 1, regardless of
when the Championship is conducted.
19.3 AUSTRALIAN SUPERCROSS CHAMPIONSHIP
19.3.1 Classes
19.3.1.1
Championship classes will be:
a) SX-Lites– for machines up to 125cc two stroke and up to 250cc four
stroke.
b) SX Open– for machines over 125cc and up to 250cc two stroke, and
251cc to 450cc four stroke.
19.3.2 Format
19.3.2.1
The format for both classes of the championships will be as determined by the
Motocross and Supercross Commission and published in SR.
19.3.3 Qualifying
Conditions of qualifying must be stipulated in the SR.
181
AUSTRALIAN MOTOCROSS AND SUPERCROSS CHAMPIONSHIPS
19.3.3.1
19.3.3.2
For Round 1:
a) The top ten competitors in the previous year’s championship will qualify;
and
b) The remaining ten competitors will be determined by qualifying races.
For remaining rounds the ten competitors leading the championship will qualify.
19.3.4 Grid Positions
19.3.4.1
Grid positions for Final 1 of Round 1 will be determined by:
a) The placings of the top ten competitors in the previous years
championships; and
b) The placings of the top ten competitors in the Qualifying Final.
19.3.4.2
Grid positions for Final 1 of subsequent rounds will be determined by:
a) The ten competitors leading the Championship at that time; and
b) The placings of competitors in the Qualifying Final.
19.3.4.3
Grid positions for Finals 2 and 3 of all rounds will be determined by placings in
the previous Final.
19.3.5 Support Events
19.3.5.1
Support events may be conducted at the discretion of the Motocross and
Supercross Commission.
19.3.5.2
There must be no less than two four lap practices available.
19.3.6 Awards
19.3.6.1
Total prize money for each round of the Championship must be not less than
$20,000.00.
19.3.7 Practice
19.3.7.1
Practice for championship events must be:
a) Outdoor events - minimum 8 minutes for first session
b) - minimum 10 minutes for second session
c) Indoor events - minimum 5 minutes first session
d) - minimum 8 minutes for second session
19.3.7.2
If the track is altered during the course of the meeting at least one inspection
lap must be offered to all qualified competitors.
19.3.8 Points
Place
1
2
3
4
19.3.8.1
Points
15
12
10
8
Place
5
6
7
8
Points
6
5
4
3
Place
9
10
Points
2
1
Points Allocation:
a) For events which have a minimum of 10 start gates points will be allocated
in accordance with the previous rule.
b) For events which have fewer than 10 start gates points will be allocated to
finishers in the Final and Last Chance Qualifier on a descending basis.
c) If a tie on points occurs for any position in the championship, the tying
competitor who has the greatest number of higher placings will be the
awarded the position.
19.3.9 Numbers
19.3.9.1
The No 1 plate in each class will be allocated to the winner of the previous
year’s championship.
182
AUSTRALIAN MOTOCROSS AND SUPERCROSS CHAMPIONSHIPS
19.3.9.2
19.3.9.3
Number plates 2 to 20 in each class will be determined by competitors’ overall
position in both the previous year’s Motocross and Supercross Championships
which is determined by aggregating championship points awarded in both
competitions and aggregating them as a percentage as calculated by the
Motocross Commission. If two or more competitors aggregate the same
number of points preference will be given to:
a) Competitors who competed in the most championship events; then
b) The competitor who achieved the highest number of points at the last
championship round they both competed in.
Competitors entitled to a top 20 number must use it in all national events.
183
20. AUSTRALIAN DIRT TRACK CHAMPIONSHIPS
20.1 FORMATS
20.1.1 Solo Format for more than 12 entries per class
20.1.1.1
The championship comprises:
a) Qualifying events to determine the entries for heats.
b) Three rounds of heats.
c) A one race repercharge.
d) A one race final.
20.1.2 Qualifying
20.1.2.1
To be eligible to compete in heats and finals a competitor must either:
a) Be graded A or B in Dirt Track; or
b) Qualify for the available heat positions having regard for the previous sub
rule.
c) For single row starts, starting positions will be determined by ballot.
20.1.3 Heats and Final
20.1.3.1
The number of heat positions must not exceed twelve.
20.1.3.2
The right to compete in the final will be filled by;
a) The ten competitors accumulating the highest number of points during the
course of heats.
b) The first two placings of the repercharge.
20.1.3.3
The repercharge will be contested by competitors who finish in eleventh to
twenty-second places inclusive during the course of heats.
20.1.3.4
The finishing order of each competitor in the final will determine Championship
placings.
20.1.3.5
Grid positions will be pre drawn and listed in the programme for heats and/or
rounds. Riders choice for grid positions in the finals will apply. Top points
scorer has first choice and so on as per point score result. If electronic timing
is used, qualifying time will determine the choice of grid position for the
first heat only, thereafter the grid positions are determined by the
finishing position in the previous race.
20.1.4 Solo Format for less than 12 entries per class
20.1.4.1
The championship comprises four races.
20.1.4.2
Points accumulated by each competitor in the four races will determine
Championship placings.
20.1.5 Sidecar Format for more than Six entries per class
20.1.5.1
The championship comprises:
a) Three rounds of heats.
b) A one race repercharge.
c) A one race final.
20.1.6 Heats and Final
20.1.6.1
The number of heat positions must not exceed six.
20.1.6.2
The right to compete in the final will be filled by;
a) The five competitors accumulating the highest number of points during the
course of heats;
b) The winner of the repercharge.
20.1.6.3
The repercharge will be contested by competitors who finish in sixth to eleventh
places inclusive during the course of heats.
20.1.6.4
The finishing order of each competitor in the final will determine Championship
placings.
184
AUSTRALIAN DIRT TRACK CHAMPIONSHIPS
20.1.7 Sidecar Format for Six entries or Fewer per class
20.1.7.1
The championship comprises four races.
20.1.7.2
Points accumulated by each competitor in the four races will determine
Championship placings.
20.2 SCORING
20.2.1 Scoring
20.2.1.1
All races will be scored in accordance with the scoring system in Chapter Five.
20.3 PREFERRED CHAMPIONSHIPS DATES
20.3.1.1
20.3.1.2
The Australian Classic Dirt Track Championship shall generally be conducted
on either the 2nd or 3rd weekend of September each year.
The Australian Dirt Track Championship shall generally be conducted on the
2nd or 3rd weekend of October each year.
20.4 AUSTRALIAN JUNIOR DIRT TRACK CHAMPIONSHIPS
20.4.1 Solo Format for more than 12 entries per class
20.4.1.1
The championship comprises:
a) Four rounds of qualifying heats;
b) Three rounds of final heats.
20.4.2 Heats and Final
20.4.2.1
The number of heat positions must not exceed twelve.
20.4.2.2
The right to compete in the finals will be filled by the twelve competitors
accumulating the highest number of points during the course of heats;
20.4.2.3
Points accumulated by each competitor in the three finals will determine
Championship placings.
20.4.3 Solo Format for less than 12 entries per class
20.4.3.1
The championship comprises seven races.
20.4.3.2
Points accumulated by each competitor in the seven races will determine
Championship placings.
20.4.4 Sidecar Format for more than 6 entries per class
20.4.4.1
The championship comprises:
a) Four rounds of qualifying heats;
b) Three rounds of final heats.
20.4.5 Heats and Final
20.4.5.1
The number of heat positions must not exceed six.
20.4.5.2
The right to compete in the finals will be filled by the six competitors
accumulating the highest number of points during the course of heats;
20.4.5.3
Points accumulated by each competitor in the three finals will determine
Championship placings.
20.4.6 Sidecar Format for less than 6 entries per class
20.4.6.1
The championship comprises seven races.
20.4.6.2
Points accumulated by each competitor in the seven races will determine
Championship placings.
20.5 JUNIOR FORMAT
20.5.1 Scoring
20.5.1.1
All races will be scored in accordance with the scoring system in Chapter Five.
185
AUSTRALIAN DIRT TRACK CHAMPIONSHIPS
20.5.2 Race Distance
20.5.2.1
All races will be a minimum of four laps and a maximum of five laps.
20.5.3 Venues
20.5.3.1
Venues used for Australian Junior Dirt Track Championships will be closed for
a minimum of 21 days prior to the event.
186
21. SPEEDWAY CHAMPIONSHIPS
21.1 WORLD SOLO CHAMPIONSHIPS
21.1.1 Eligibility and Qualifying
21.1.1.1
Qualifying rounds will be run in a manner prescribed by the Commission and
advised to SCBs by August 1st each year.
21.1.1.2
Each SCB must conduct its own championships for eligible competitors.
21.1.1.3
The placings from the Australian championship will be the basis of selection.
21.1.1.4
The 1st and 2nd place getters from the Australian under 21 solo championship,
or the placings directed by FIM, will automatically qualify for the next round of
the world junior championship.
21.1.1.5
A qualifying competitor who declines selection will be replaced by a competitor
selected on merit by the Commission.
21.2 AUSTRALIAN CHAMPIONSHIPS
21.2.1 Applications to Conduct
21.2.1.1
Applications for the conduct of Australian championships, must be delivered to
MA by 1st June each year.
21.2.2 Dates for Conduct
21.2.2.1
Unless otherwise determined by the Commission, the Australian 500cc Solo
Championships must be run in January or February of each year and the
Australian Sidecar Championships at the Easter weekend in each year.
21.2.3 Selection Committee
21.2.3.1
The selection committee will be the Commission which must;
a) Forward the competitor and reserve selections to MA.
b) MA will notify the competitors and the promoter of the selections.
21.2.4 Selection and Qualification
21.2.4.1
To qualify for selection for an Australian championship event, a competitor
must:
a) Be the current Australian Champion; or
b) Be the best performing competitor in the state championship of the state
which issued the competitors licence; or
c) Apply in writing to MA no less than 30 days from the event and be
selected by the Selection Committee.
21.2.4.2
Any state unable to conduct a championship of 12 entries or more prior to the
Australian championship may nominate one competitor for the Commission’s
approval to represent that state.
21.2.4.3
The team for a state will be selected by that state’s speedway sub-committee.
21.2.5 Alternate Qualification
21.2.5.1
A promoter may run qualifying and, if so:
a) The promoter must obtain the permission of MA.
b) Current state and Australian champions automatically qualify;
c) Should there be more nominations than positions:
i)
The promoter may increase the number of qualification races;
or
ii)
The commission may select to compete those competitors it
considers to be appropriate, based on merit. Prizemoney
187
SPEEDWAY CHAMPIONSHIPS
21.2.5.2
Prizemoney will be as follows
First
Second
Third
Fourth
Fifth
Sixth
Seventh
Eighth
21.2.5.3
21.2.5.4
$3.000.00
$2,500.00
$2,000.00
$1,700.00
$1,500.00
$1,300.00
$1,200.00
$1.050.00
Ninth
Tenth
Eleventh
Twelfth
Thirteenth
Fourteenth
Fifteenth
Sixteenth
$1,000.00
$900.00
$800.00
$750.00
$700.00
$700.00
$700.00
$700.00
Prizemoney for reserve riders will be determined by the promoter and the
selection committee.
The selected competitors must notify the promoter of their acceptance of the
conditions and the anticipated time of arrival at the track concerned.
21.2.6 Practice
21.2.6.1
Practice must be conducted for all Australian Championships.
21.2.6.2
Practice times and format must be stipulated in the SR for each Championship.
21.2.7 21 Race Format
21.2.7.1
Format
a) There will be 20 heats and a final.
b) The four competitors who accumulate the most points during the course of
the heats will compete in the final.
c) Starting positions will be offered to the four riders in descending order of
points accumulated in the heats. In the case of riders for the final being
tied on points, gate choice will be determined by countback.
d) In case of riders being tied on points,
i)
Finalists will be determined by run off;
ii)
Other places will be determined by countback.
21.2.7.2
There must be 16 competitors with the heat format according to the following
table.
Helmet
Colour
Heat
Number
1
2
3
4
5
Red(Inside)
Blue
White
Yellow/Black(Outside)
1
5
10
15
13
2
7
11
14
1
3
6
9
16
5
4
8
12
13
9
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
14
11
4
6
12
8
13
10
15
8
16
5
9
4
2
7
12
1
15
3
10
6
3
16
11
2
14
7
13
14
15
7
2
16
12
13
3
14
8
10
1
11
5
Competitor's Starting Numbers
Interval
188
SPEEDWAY CHAMPIONSHIPS
Helmet
Colour
16
17
18
19
20
Red(Inside)
Blue
White
Yellow/Black(Outside)
9
1
9
3
5
6
8
2
12
14
4
15
7
13
11
15
10
16
6
4
21.2.8 12 Race Format
21.2.8.1
As an alternative to the preceding Rule there may be a 12 race format of three
laps, with eighteen competitors plus reserves, according to the following table.
Helmet
Red(Inside) Blue White Yellow/ Black Green White/Black (Outside)
Colour
Heat Number
Competitor's Starting Numbers
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
2
7
8
9
10
11
12
3
13
14
15
16
17
18
4
3
17
1
15
8
10
5
16
12
5
2
9
13
6
4
6
11
18
14
7
7
18
15
7
12
2
1
8
5
10
17
11
16
4
9
14
9
13
6
3
8
21.2.8.2
21.2.8.3
21.2.8.4
21.2.8.5
21.2.8.6
21.2.8.7
21.2.8.8
21.2.8.9
The above format must be used where the track is over 450 metres in length
and is licensed for 6 competitors.
In races 10 and 11 the highest twelve point scorers in heats 1 to 9 must
participate as follows:
a) Race 10:
Competitors finishing in 1st, 4th, 5th, 8th, 9th & 12th places.
b) Race11:
Competitors finishing in 2nd, 3rd, 6th, 7th, 10th & 11th
places.
c) Final: The highest six point scorers.
Any vacancies for races 10 and 11 must be filled from those competitors who
were placed 13th or lower after heats 1 to 9 in descending order of point scores
Any vacancies for the Final must be filled from those competitors who were
placed 7th or lower after races 10 and 11 in descending order of point scores
Starting positions for races 10 and 11 must be balloted in the presence of the
referee or clerk of course.
Starting positions for the Final will be offered to the six competitors in
descending order of points accumulated in the heats. In the case of
competitors for the Final being tied on points, gate choice will be determined by
countback.
In the case of competitors being tied on points at the conclusion of heats;
a) Finalists will be determined by run off;
b) Other places will be determined by countback.
The finishing order of each competitor in the final will determine Championship
placings.
21.2.9 Examination before an Event
21.2.9.1
Before an event, the promoter must set a time and place, giving reasonable
notice to every competitor, for:
a) Identification and examination of licences;
b) Examination of motorcycles;
189
SPEEDWAY CHAMPIONSHIPS
21.2.9.2
c) Noise testing;
d) Checking of helmets and protective clothing; and
e) Such other examinations as are necessary.
The Referee may forbid:
a) Any competitor who does not comply with the rules mentioned above; or
b) Any competitor who can be a danger to other participants or to spectators
from participating in any practice or event at the meeting.
21.2.10 Carburettor Examination
21.2.10.1
All solo machine carburettors must be checked, measured and sealed before
the meeting.
21.2.10.2
The carburettor seal must be secured to the cylinder head by wire and lead
seal.
21.2.10.3
During the meeting carburettors may not be measured, but the seals may be
checked.
21.2.10.4
Every machine at the end of the meeting must have the seal of the carburettor
checked by the machine examiner as the competitors come out for the last four
rides.
21.3 AUSTRALIAN TEAMS' CHAMPIONSHIPS
21.3.1 Qualifying
21.3.1.1
Teams championships will consist of qualifying rounds run in each state and
one final.
21.3.1.2
Seven Teams will take part in each meeting.
21.3.1.3
One team from each state will qualify. Should a state not have qualified
competitors, or decide not to nominate a team, the extra team required will be
selected by the Commission based on performance during any qualifying
rounds.
21.3.1.4
The Commission must send the names of the seven qualifying Teams to the
promoter of the event as well as the RCB.
21.3.1.5
For championship qualifying rounds, the SCB must send the results within 48
hours after the meeting, to MA and to the SCB organising the final.
21.3.2 Practice
21.3.2.1
Practice for a meeting must not be earlier than two days before the meeting.
21.3.2.2
All competitors must report at the time stipulated in the SR.
21.3.2.3
Competitors will be divided into groups of four as listed in the SR.
21.3.2.4
Competitors from the host state will practice last.
21.3.2.5
Competitors not ready to take their turn must fall back and wait until the next
group has finished its practice.
21.3.2.6
Competitors will practice in the same order for free practice and starting gate
practice.
21.3.2.7
Between each group there must be an interval for track preparation.
21.3.2.8
The format for practice will be as determined by SR.
21.3.2.9
Practice will be organised in two sessions:
a) Free practice:
i)
Twelve minutes for each group's session, divided into:
ii)
1 session of 12 minutes per group;
iii)
2 sessions of 6 minutes each per group, same order followed
twice; or
iv)
4 sessions of 3 minutes each per group, same order followed
four times.
v)
Competitors testing more than one machine may bring them on
to the track in the same outing, but may not bring extra fuel on
to the track.
190
SPEEDWAY CHAMPIONSHIPS
vi)
b)
Competitors with mechanical trouble may be allowed extra time
for practice.
vii)
Competitors may not practice starts in the starting area.
Practice with the starting gate in operation:
i)
No more than four competitors at a time may practise.
ii)
Each competitor may have two practice starts and full laps.
iii)
Green lights will be used to familiarise competitors with starting
procedures.
iv)
21 Heat Format – Teams
Heat No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Interval
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Competitor's Numbers & Colours
Red(Inside)
White
Blue
Yellow/Black
(Outside)
1
3
2
4
5
7
6
8
9
11
10
12
13
1
14
2
3
5
4
6
7
9
8
10
13
11
14
12
1
5
2
6
7
3
8
4
9
13
10
14
11
1
12
2
3
5
13
1
11
5
7
3
9
11
9
11
7
9
3
13
1
13
5
7
4
6
14
2
12
6
8
4
10
12
10
12
8
10
4
14
2
14
6
8
21.3.3 14 Heat Format - Teams
21.3.3.1
There must be 14 heats with three Teams per heat according to the following
table.
Gate Position
Heat
Red
1
1
2
3
3
9
4
5
5
13
6
7
7
11
Interval
8
10
9
6
Blue
10
6
14
12
8
4
2
White
7
1
3
9
5
11
13
Yellow
2
4
10
6
14
8
12
Green
9
5
13
11
7
3
1
Black & White
8
2
4
10
6
12
14
1
3
2
4
7
1
8
2
9
5
191
SPEEDWAY CHAMPIONSHIPS
Gate Position
10
14
11
12
12
8
13
4
14
2
21.3.3.2
21.3.3.3
9
5
13
7
11
10
6
14
8
12
3
9
5
11
13
4
10
6
12
14
13
11
7
3
1
The above format must be used where the track is over 400 metres in length
and is licensed for more than 4 competitors.
Heats must be as follows:
a) There must be 7 teams with each team having 6 heats and each team
meeting all Teams twice.
b) Between each heat there must be either another event or a four minute
break.
c) Competitors cannot change gate position.
21.3.4 Ties
21.3.4.1
A tie for 1st, 2nd or 3rd places will be resolved by one heat with one rider from
each tied team taking part.
21.3.5 Finals
21.3.5.1
If one or both competitors of a team who qualify for the final cannot participate
they may be replaced by competitors nominated by the selection committee.
21.3.5.2
If a qualified team is not present, its place in the final will be taken by the team
which has scored the next highest number of points in the previous meeting.
21.3.5.3
Inability to take part in the final must be notified to the RCB as soon as
possible.
21.3.5.4
When competitors of the same team finish first and second or second and third
in a heat, the competitor finishing second or third respectively will be awarded a
bonus point, entitling that competitor to remuneration, but the point will not be
counted towards the heat or in the finals.
21.4 TEST MATCHES
21.4.1 Definition
21.4.1.1
A test match is an international event between two or more countries appointed
by their respective FMNs.
21.4.2 Format
21.4.2.1
There must be 18 heats in a format according to the following table.
Heat Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Home Team
Blue
2
4
6
4
6
2
6
2
4
Interval
1
2
3
4
5
6
Red
1
3
5
3
5
1
5
1
3
192
White
1
3
5
1
3
5
1
3
5
1
3
5
Visiting Team
Yellow &Black
2
4
6
2
4
6
2
4
6
2
4
6
SPEEDWAY CHAMPIONSHIPS
Heat Number
Home Team
Visiting Team
13
3
4
1
14
5
6
3
15
1
2
5
16
5
6
1
17
1
2
3
18
3
4
5
Competitors Nos. 7 & 8 or No. 7 of each team are the reserves.
2
4
6
2
4
6
21.4.3 Bonus Points
21.4.3.1
Bonus points are allotted for prize money only with an additional bonus point for
a competitor who finishes second or third immediately behind their team mate.
21.4.4 Starting Positions
21.4.4.1
The captains of each team will toss for starting positions in the first heat, the
choice being positions 1 and 3 or positions 2 and 4, counting from the inside of
the track.
21.4.4.2
The team that selects positions 1 and 3 in the first heat must take positions 2
and 4 in the second heat, and so on alternately throughout the meeting.
21.4.4.3
The relative positions of the two competitors of each team in each heat may be
changed.
21.4.5 Reserves
21.4.5.1
A competitor who has been unable to commence or complete an event due to
an accident, and who has not been excluded, may be replaced by a reserve.
The event will be deemed to be a new event with the reserve as a competitor.
21.4.5.2
A reserve may not ride in more than six events.
21.4.5.3
Only one reserve may participate in each event.
193
22. AUSTRALIAN TRACK CHAMPIONSHIPS
22.1 AUSTRALIAN JUNIOR LONG TRACK CHAMPIONSHIPS
22.1.1 Solo Format for more than 12 entries per class
22.1.1.1
The championship comprises:
a) Four rounds of qualifying heats.
b) Three rounds of final heats.
22.1.2 Heats and Final
22.1.2.1
The number of heat positions must not exceed twelve.
22.1.2.2
The right to compete in the finals will be filled by the twelve competitors
accumulating the highest number of points during the course of heats.
22.1.2.3
Points accumulated by each competitor in the three finals will determine
Championship placings.
22.1.2.4
For single row starts, starting positions will be determined by ballot.
22.1.3 Solo Format for less than 12 entries per class
22.1.3.1
The championship comprises seven races.
22.1.3.2
Points accumulated by each competitor in the seven races will determine
Championship placings.
22.1.4 Sidecar Format for more than 6 entries per class
22.1.4.1
The championship comprises:
a) Four rounds of qualifying heats.
b) Three rounds of final heats.
22.1.5 Heats and Final
22.1.5.1
The number of heat positions must not exceed six.
22.1.5.2
The right to compete in the finals will be filled by the six competitors
accumulating the highest number of points during the course of heats.
22.1.5.3
Points accumulated by each competitor in the three finals will determine
Championship placings.
22.1.6 Sidecar Format for less than 6 entries per class
22.1.6.1
The championship comprises seven races.
22.1.6.2
Points accumulated by each competitor in the seven races will determine
Championship placings.
22.2 FORMAT
22.2.1 Scoring
22.2.1.1
All races will be scored in accordance with the scoring system in Chapter Five.
22.2.2 Race Distance
22.2.2.1
All races will be a minimum of four laps and a maximum of five laps.
22.2.3 Venues
22.2.3.1
Venues used for Australian Junior Long Track Championships will be closed for
a minimum of 21 days prior to the event.
194
23. AUSTRALIAN MOTO-TRIALS CHAMPIONSHIPS
23.1 AUSTRALIAN MOTO-TRIALS CHAMPIONSHIPS
23.1.1 Use of Course
23.1.1.1
For the Australian Moto-Trials Championships, only those competing for the
championships may use the course during the period of competition.
23.1.2 Time of Event
23.1.2.1
The Australian Moto-Trials Championship must be conducted in late
September or early October in each year.
23.1.3 Standards
23.1.3.1
Promoters must ensure that the standards of sections must provide for all
levels of competitor in each class.
23.1.3.2
Riders of any nationality may be awarded an Australian Championship. The
trials commission recommends that the promoter provides a trophy for the best
Australian should an Australian not win the title.
23.1.4 Handicap
23.1.4.1
The Venables handicap must be used for the Greybeard class.
195
24. INTERNATIONAL EVENTS
24.1 NATIONAL TEAMS SELECTION POLICY
24.1.1 Objectives
24.1.1.1
To maintain and improve best possible results in all International competitions.
24.1.2 Process of Selection
24.1.2.1
All athletes wishing to be considered for selection must:
a) Sign the Motorcycling Australia Code of Conduct at the time of entering
the relevant National Championship.
24.1.2.2
Selected Riders
a) Riders selected in National Teams in all disciplines must sign a contract
with Motorcycling Australia.
Note: Riders should not sign either document unless they have a full and clear understanding
of all terms and conditions. Riders may wish to contact the following for clarification:
Your legal advisor
Motorcycling Australia ( 03 9684 0500 )
ANZSLA Sports Law Referral Service ( 1800 804 031 )
b)
The Code of Conduct will be attached to all entry forms for each event.
Both documents will be posted on the MA website at www.ma.org.au.
24.1.3 General Selection Policy
24.1.3.1
Each discipline selection committee may at its discretion apply specific
objective criteria according to the requirements of the particular discipline.
In general terms, each committee will make selections with regard to but not
restricted by:
A rider’s fitness subject to a medical examination by a medical practitioner appointed
or approved by MA.
Results attained in the relevant National Championship of the selection year in
question.
Results attained in international and World championships of the year prior to and
during the year of selection.
The Rider’s behaviour as outlined in the code of conduct in relation to previous
selections and dealings with administrators.
The rider’s ability to adapt to a team oriented environment.
The Riders record in relation to any appearances before any state or national
tribunal.
The availability of the rider to compete in the relevant World Championship.
The willingness of the rider to sign the Riders contract with MA.
Whether a rider has incurred a previous ban by failing a drug test conducted in
accordance with the Anti Doping policy of Motorcycling Australia.
The potential of a rider to represent Australia on a long term basis.
The availability of machinery to a potential candidate.
24.1.3.2
Note: Riders must be Australian citizens to qualify for selection
24.1.4 Other Criteria
24.1.4.1
Each relevant discipline may contain specific criteria not set down in the policy
above. This information will appear in Attachment 1 of this document, in the MA
Manual of Motorcycle Sport and on the MA website – www.ma.org.au.
196
INTERNATIONAL EVENTS
24.1.4.2
24.1.4.3
Application of Criteria
Each selection committee will apply the principles of natural justice to the policy
as well as to each individual selection. The committee shall also be conscious
and apply equal weight under the criteria to the consideration of each selection.
The committee should also be prepared to provide feedback either written or
verbal to rider who has missed selection and may wish query the reasons
behind their non selection so that their future opportunities may be enhanced.
24.1.5 Appeals
24.1.5.1
The sole ground for any appeal in relation to the non selection of a competitor
will be that this selection policy was not followed or implemented in a just or fair
manner.
In the first instance, any complaint will be referred to the Tribunal of
Motorcycling Australia. The appeal must:
Be in writing and signed by the appellant
Be lodged within twenty one days of the original decision with the Tribunal.
Be accompanied by the prescribed fee.
In some instances, the fee may be refunded in part or whole if the appeal is upheld.
Other requirements for the appeal appear in the Manual of Motorcycle Sport under
the heading “Appellate Bodies”.
Only one further avenue of appeal exists to the National Sport Dispute Centre.
24.1.5.2
Riders should seek legal advice prior to any further appeal action
24.1.6 Injuries/Misadventure
24.1.6.1
The relevant selection committee shall have at its absolute discretion, the right
to replace any rider as long as at all times it complies with the selection policy
of MA. All selected riders must be willing to undergo a medical examination to
determine their fitness to compete.
24.1.6.2
In case of bereavement, machine problems or other extenuating
circumstances, the selection committee will make a determination on a case by
case basis.
24.1.7 Removal from National Squad
24.1.7.1
A Team Manager may at their discretion remove a team member from the
squad if:
The member breaches or fails to comply with the Riders contract and code of
conduct.
By reason of injury, the member is unable to complete team requirements.
The member breaches or fails to comply with the requirements of the Anti Doping
policy of Motorcycling Australia.
Fails to comply with a reasonable direction of the team Manager that is given in
accordance with the role description of Team managers.
The decision to remove a team member must be ratified by the Chief Executive of
MA.
197
25. RELEVANT FIM REGULATIONS
25.1 APPROVAL LABELS FOR HELMETS
25.1.1.1
25.1.1.2
Helmets must carry one of the following approval labels, as listed in Rule 01.70
of the FIM Technical Rules.
a) Europe: ECE 22 – 04, ECE 22 - 05
b) Great Britain: BS 6658 Grade A & B (All disciplines)
c) USA: DOT Federal Standard No 218 / SNELL M95, M2000
d) Japan: JIS T 8133:2000
International Helmet Standards
198
26. RELEVANT CONTROLLING BODY
26.1 MA EVENTS
26.1.1 Events for which MA is the RCB
26.1.1.1
The events for which MA is the RCB are detailed in rule 2.1.1.1 (b).
26.2 PROTOCOLS
26.2.1 Protocols for MA Series Events and International Meetings.
26.2.1.1
Promoters are to deal directly with MA including:
a) The submission of date applications.
b) The submission of draft SR.
c) Payment of fees, bonds and levies.
26.2.1.2
Commencing 2001 MA will advise SCBs of series dates by 1 October in order
that SCBs may avoid clashes.
26.2.1.3
Permits may not be issued for supercross meetings at venues within 100kms of
a round of the Australian Supercross Championship 8 weeks prior to and 4
weeks after the Championship round.
26.2.2 Protocols for Australian Championships Not Forming a Series
26.2.2.1
SCBs make application to MA on behalf of promoters to host championships.
The application will include the proposed dates, venue, promoter and address
the criteria in rule 5.10.1.4.
26.2.2.2
MA will award a championship to an SCB which becomes responsible for
ensuring the meeting is conducted to a standard be-fitting an Australian
Championship.
26.2.2.3
The host SCB will lodge a performance bond with MA which may be totally or
partially forfeited if key performance criteria are not met.
26.2.2.4
SCB Responsibility
The host SCB is responsible for:
a)
b)
c)
d)
Providing MA with email draft SR for approval.
Paying MA the performance bond, permit fee and rider insurance levy.
The adequate circulation of SR;
Providing MA with comprehensive and accurate results by email the day
after the meeting;
e) Ensuring there is appropriate promotion and publicity, which is to also
incorporate the MA logo.
f)
Ensuring all rules governing the administration of Australian
Championships are adhered to.
g) Ensuring the prescribed level of medical service is provided.
26.2.2.5
Key Performance Criteria for SCBs
The following issues are key performance criteria SCBs will be assessed on:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
Adequate number of officials and other personnel to properly conduct the
meeting;
The performance of officials.
The appropriate promotion of Championships.
Providing prescribed medical services.
Ensuring there are no date clashes with the Championship.
Correct signage.
An effective radio communication system.
An adequate control tower (where appropriate).
199
RELEVANT CONTROLLING BODY
i)
j)
k)
A safe venue.
Adequate public facilities.
Ensuring the MA logo and flag are displayed as required.
26.2.3 SR and Entry Forms
26.2.3.1
MA will publish SR and entry forms on www.ma.org.au for entrants to
download.
26.2.3.2
SR and entry forms for:
a) Series Championships may only be accessed from the MA website or the
promoter.
b) Stand alone Championships may be accessed from the MA website, the
host SCB or the promoter.
26.2.4 Protest Fees, Licence Declaration Fees and Fines
26.2.4.1
Protest fees, licence declaration fees and fines are to be collected by the
Steward and paid to MA.
26.2.5 Venues
26.2.5.1
Venues will be licensed by:
a) MNSW in the case of all NSW venues;
b) MA – Road Racing venues;
c) Stewards / Race Director – temporary Supercross venues.
d) SCBs – all other venues; and
e) FIM – World Championships.
200
27. MEMBER PROTECTION REGULATION
27.1 MEMBER PROTECTION REGULATION
27.1.1 Policy Availability
27.1.1.1
The Member Protection Regulation was adopted by the Board in November
2002. It is available on www.ma.org.au and from the MA Office.
27.2 CODE OF CONDUCT
27.2.1 Background
a) This Code of Conduct has been developed to provide competitors,
officials, parents and coaches with a guide to appropriate behaviour at all
motorcycle race meetings. The following points are based on those
established by the Australian Sports Commission.
27.2.2 Competitors
a) At all times you must comply with the Motorcycling Australia General
Competition Rules as well as the supplementary rules of the competition
in which you participate.
b) You are responsible for your own conduct as well as the conduct of any
person associated with you, including team members, mechanics and
team managers
c) Most officials give their time freely to ensure that meetings are conducted
efficiently and that rules are applied fairly. You should avoid public
argument with officials. If you disagree with a decision, you should
approach the official quietly to determine how the decision was reached.
d) Verbal and/or physical abuse of officials or other competitors and
deliberately distracting or provoking others, whether on or off the track, is
not acceptable or permissible behavior.
e) Treat all other competitors in a respectful and courteous manner.
f)
Avoid the use of coarse or derogatory language.
g) Compete within your skill level. Only try to extend these skills when there
is no likelihood of danger to any other person, and personal risk is
controlled.
h) At all times follow all reasonable directions given by meeting officials that
are within the framework of the Motorcycling Australia General
Competition Rules and supplementary rules of the competition in which
you are participating.
27.2.3 Officials
a) Be consistent and objective at all times.
b) Understand the purpose of the rules of competition.
c) Be co-operative and understanding in the interpretation and application of
rules or any penalties.
d) Make a personal commitment to keep informed of sound officiating
principles and rule updates.
e) Ensure behavior is consistent with the principles of good sporting
behavior. Actions speak louder than words!
f)
Condemn unsporting behavior and promote respect for all competitors.
g) Ensure the "spirit" of competition is maintained.
h) Avoid the use of derogatory language based on gender or race.
27.2.4 Parent/Guardian
a) Encourage children to participate, if they are interested. Do not force any
child who is not willing to participate.
201
MEMBER PROTECTION REGULATION
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)
k)
l)
Focus upon the child's efforts and performance rather than the overall
outcome of the event.
Assist the child to set realistic goals based on his/her ability.
Teach children that an honest effort is as important as victory, so that the
result of each event is accepted without undue disappointment.
Encourage children to follow the rules and any official's decision.
Never ridicule or scold a child for making a mistake during a competition.
Positive comments are motivational.
Remember children are involved in motorcycling for their enjoyment, not
yours.
Children learn best from example. Applaud good performance by all
competitors.
Respect an official's decision. If you disagree with an official, raise the
issue through the appropriate channels. Do not question the official's
judgement/honesty in public.
Support all efforts to remove verbal and physical abuse from sporting
activities.
Recognise the importance and value of volunteers. They give of their time
to provide recreational activities for your children and deserve your
support.
Demonstrate appropriate social behavior by not using foul or derogatory
language.
27.2.5 Coaches
a)
Teach competitors to follow the rules
Ensure that equipment and facilities meet safety standards and are appropriate to
the age and ability of competitors
Wherever possible, group competitors of similar age and ability
Never ridicule a competitor for making a mistake or losing
Be reasonable on your demands of a young competitor’s time, energy and
enthusiasm.
Remember that many competitors compete mainly for pleasure. Winning is only part
of the fun.
Do not focus all of your energies on the most talented competitors. The “just
average” need and deserve equal time.
Keep up to date with the latest coaching practices. In particular, the principles of
growth and development of children.
Follow the advice of a physician when determining if an injured competitor is ready to
recommence training or competition.
27.2.6 Spectators
a) Recognise good performance and efforts from all competitors.
Congratulate all competitors on their performance regardless of the
outcome.
b) Respect the decisions of officials and teach young competitors to do the
same.
c) Never ridicule or scold a child for mistaking a mistake during a
competition. Positive comments are motivational.
d) Condemn the use of violence in any form, whether it is by other
spectators, coaches, officials or competitors.
e) Show respect for all opponents. Without them there would be no
competition.
f)
Encourage competitors to follow the rules and the officials’ decisions.
g) Do not use violence, harassment or abuse in any form (ie do not use foul
language, sledge or harass players, coaches, officials or other spectators).
h) Respect the rights, dignity and worth of every person regardless of their
gender, ability, cultural background or religion.
202
28. MOTORCYCLING AUSTRALIA’ S ANTI-DOPING POLICY
28.1 WHAT IS MA'S POSITION ON DOPING?
28.1.1.1
28.1.1.2
28.1.1.3
MA condemns the Use of performance enhancing drugs and doping practices
in sport. The Use of performance enhancing drugs and doping practices is
contrary to the ethics of sport and potentially harmful to the health of Riders.
The only legitimate Use of drugs in sport is under the supervision of a physician
for a clinically justified purpose in accordance with Rule 28.7.4 of this policy.
MA aims to stop doping practices in sport by:
a) imposing effective sanctions on Persons who commit Anti-Doping Rule
violations;
b) educating and informing Persons about drugs in sport issues; and
c) supporting the drug testing programs and education initiatives of ASDA
and other Anti-Doping Organisations.
28.2 WHO DOES THIS POLICY APPLY TO?
This policy applies to:
a) Members;
b) Riders;
c) Rider Support Personnel; and
d) Employees and contractors of MA.
28.3 OBLIGATIONS
28.3.1 Standards
The policies and minimum standards set forth in the FIM Anti-Doping Code ("FIM
Code") and implemented in these Anti-Doping Rules represent the consensus of a
broad spectrum of stakeholders with an interest in fair sport. The persons identified
in Rule 28.2 agree to be bound by these Anti-Doping Rules as a condition of their
participation and involvement in the sport.
28.3.2 Roles and responsibilities – Riders:
28.3.2.1
must be knowledgeable of and comply with all anti-doping policies and rules
applicable to them;
28.3.2.2
must read and understand the Prohibited List as it relates to them;
28.3.2.3
must be available for Sample collection and provide appropriate whereabouts
information for this purpose;
28.3.2.4
must take full responsibility, in the context of anti-doping, for what they ingest
and Use;
28.3.2.5
must inform medical Personnel of their obligations not to Use Prohibited
Substances and Prohibited Methods and to take responsibility to make sure
that any medical treatment received does not violate anti-doping policies and
rules applicable to them; and
28.3.2.6
who are not regular Members of MA must be available for Sample collection
and provide accurate and up-to-date whereabouts information on a regular
basis if required by the conditions of eligibility established by MA or the FIM or
as applicable.
28.3.3 Roles and responsibilities – Rider Support Personnel must:
28.3.3.1
be knowledgeable of and comply with all anti-doping policies and rules
applicable to them or the Riders whom they support;
28.3.3.2
cooperate with the Rider Testing; and
28.3.3.3
use their influence on Riders values and behaviour to foster anti-doping
attitudes.
203
MOTORCYCLING AUSTRALIA’ S ANTI-DOPING POLICY
28.3.4 Roles and responsibilities – National Anti-Doping Organisations (including
ASC and ASDA) must:
28.3.4.1
adopt and implement anti-doping rules and policies that conform with the
WADA Code and these Anti-Doping Rules;
28.3.4.2
cooperate with other relevant national organisations and other Anti-Doping
Organisations;
28.3.4.3
encourage reciprocal Testing between National Anti-Doping Organisations;
28.3.4.4
promote anti-doping research;
28.3.4.5
require as a condition of funding or recognition that MA's anti-doping policies
and rules are in compliance with the Australian Government’s position; and
28.3.4.6
withhold some or all funding to its funded National Sporting Organisations that
are not in compliance with the Australian Government’s position.
28.3.5 Roles and responsibilities – MA must:
28.3.5.1
provide Anti-Doping Organisations, including ASDA, timely and accurate Rider
contact information;
28.3.5.2
support and assist Anti-Doping Organisations, including ASDA to conduct
Doping Control;
28.3.5.3
make this Policy available to Members, Riders and Rider Support Personnel;
28.3.5.4
develop and implement, in consultation with ASDA and the FIM, drug education
and information programs for Riders and Rider Support Personnel;
28.3.5.5
support the initiatives of the ASC and the FIM to stop doping in sport;
28.3.5.6
adopt and implement anti-doping policies and rules which conform with the
WADA Code, the FIM Code and the Australian Government;
28.3.5.7
require as a condition of membership that the policies, rules and programs of
Members are in compliance with the WADA Code, the FIM Code, the
Australian Government and these Anti-Doping Rules;
28.3.5.8
require all Riders and Rider Support Personnel within their jurisdiction to
recognise and be bound by anti-doping rules in conformance with the WADA
Code, the FIM Code, the Australian Government and these Anti-Doping Rules;
28.3.5.9
require Rider(s) who are not regular Members of MA or one of its Member
organisations to be available for Sample collection and provide accurate and
up-to-date whereabouts information if required by the conditions for eligibility
established by MA, the FIM or, as applicable, the Major Event Organisation;
28.3.5.10
not disclose or use any information about a person who is alleged to have, or
has committed an Anti-Doping Rule Violation until after the conclusion of the
hearing, except (for a purpose under these rules) to the ASC, ASDA or the FIM
(if required under the FIM Code).
28.4 DEFINITION OF DOPING
Doping is defined as the occurrence of one or more of the Anti-Doping Rule
Violations set out in Rule 28.5.1 through Rule 28.5.8 of these Anti-Doping Rules.
28.5 ANTI-DOPING RULE VIOLATIONS
The following constitute Anti-Doping Rule Violations:
28.5.1 The presence of a Prohibited Substance or its Metabolites or Markers in a
rider's bodily Specimen.
28.5.1.1
It is each Rider's Personal duty to ensure that no Prohibited Substance enters
his or her body. Riders are responsible for any Prohibited Substance or its
Metabolites or Markers found to be present in their bodily Specimens.
Accordingly, it is not necessary that intent, fault, negligence or knowing Use on
the Rider's part be demonstrated in order to establish an Anti-Doping Rule
Violation under Rule 28.5.1.
204
MOTORCYCLING AUSTRALIA’ S ANTI-DOPING POLICY
28.5.1.2
28.5.1.3
Excepting those substances for which a quantitative reporting threshold is
specifically identified in the Prohibited List, the detected presence of any
quantity of a Prohibited Substance or its Metabolites or Markers in a Rider’s
Sample shall constitute an Anti-Doping Rule Violation.
As an exception to the general rule of Rule 28.5.1, the Prohibited List may
establish special criteria for the evaluation of Prohibited Substances that can
also be produced endogenously.
28.5.2 Use or Attempted Use of a Prohibited Substance or a Prohibited Method.
28.5.2.1
The success or failure of the Use of a Prohibited Substance or Prohibited
Method is not material. It is sufficient that the Prohibited Substance or
Prohibited Method was Used or Attempted to be Used for an Anti-Doping Rule
Violation to be committed.
28.5.3 Refusing
Refusing, or failing without compelling justification, to submit to Sample collection
after notification as authorised in these Anti-Doping Rules, or otherwise evading
Sample collection.
28.5.4 Violation of the requirements regarding Rider availability
Violation of the requirements regarding Rider availability for Out-of Competition
Testing including failure to provide required whereabouts information in Rule 28.8.5
(Rider whereabouts requirements).
28.5.5 Tampering or Attempting to tamper, with any part of Doping Control.
28.5.6 Possession of Prohibited Substances and Methods.
28.5.6.1
Possession by a Rider at any time or place of a substance that is prohibited in
Out-of-Competition Testing or a Prohibited Method unless the Rider establishes
that the Possession is under a Therapeutic Use Exemption granted in
accordance with Rule 28.7.4 (Therapeutic Use) or other acceptable
justification.
28.5.6.2
Possession of a Prohibited Substance that is prohibited in Out-of-Competition
Testing or a Prohibited Method by Rider Support Personnel in connection with
a Rider, Meeting or training, unless the Rider Support Personnel establishes
that the Possession is under a Therapeutic Use Exemption granted to a Rider in
accordance with Rule 28.7.4 (Therapeutic Use) or other acceptable justification.
28.5.7 Trafficking in any Prohibited Substance or Prohibited Method.
28.5.8 Violation of the requirements regarding Rider availability
Administration or Attempted administration of a Prohibited Substance or Prohibited
Method to any Rider, or assisting, encouraging, aiding, abetting, covering up or any
other type of complicity involving an Anti-Doping Rule Violation or any Attempted
violation.
28.6 PROOF OF DOPING
28.6.1 Burdens and Standards of Proof.
MA shall have the burden of establishing that an Anti-Doping Rule Violation has
occurred. The standard of proof shall be whether MA has established an Anti-Doping
Rule Violation to the comfortable satisfaction of the hearing body bearing in mind the
seriousness of the allegation which is made. This standard of proof in all cases is
greater than a mere balance of probability but less than proof beyond a reasonable
doubt. Where these Rules place the burden of proof upon the Rider or other Person
alleged to have committed an Anti-Doping Rule Violation to rebut a presumption or
establish specified facts or circumstances, the standard of proof shall be by a balance of
probability.
205
MOTORCYCLING AUSTRALIA’ S ANTI-DOPING POLICY
28.6.2 Methods of Establishing Facts and Presumptions.
Facts related to Anti-Doping Rule Violations may be established by any reliable means,
including admissions. The following rules of proof shall be applicable in doping cases:
28.6.2.1
WADA-accredited laboratories are presumed to have conducted Sample
analysis and custodial procedures in accordance with the International Standard
for laboratory analysis. The Rider may rebut this presumption by establishing
that a departure from the International Standard occurred.
28.6.2.2
If the Rider rebuts the preceding presumption by showing that a departure from
the International Standard occurred, then MA shall have the burden to establish
that such departure did not cause the Adverse Analytical Finding.
28.6.2.3
Departures from the International Standard for Testing which did not cause
an Adverse Analytical Finding or other Anti-Doping Rule Violation shall not
invalidate such results. If the Rider establishes that departures from the
International Standard occurred during Testing then MA shall have the burden
to establish that such departures did not cause the Adverse Analytical Finding
or the factual basis for the Anti-Doping Rule Violation.
28.7 THE PROHIBITED LIST
28.7.1 Incorporation of the Prohibited List.
These Anti-Doping Rules incorporate the Prohibited List which is published and
revised by WADA as described in Article 4.1 of the WADA Code. MA will make the
current Prohibited List available to its Members and constituents. Refer to Appendix
3 of this Chapter or go to WADA's website at: www.wada-ama.org to view the
Prohibited List.
28.7.2 Prohibited Substances and Prohibited Methods Identified on the Prohibited List.
Unless provided otherwise in the Prohibited List and/or a revision, the Prohibited List
and revisions shall go into effect under these Anti-Doping Rules three months after publication
of the Prohibited List by WADA without requiring any further action by MA or the FIM.
As described in Article 4.2 of the WADA Code, the FIM may upon the
recommendation of its CMI request that WADA expand the Prohibited List for all or
certain disciplines within the sport of motorcycling. The FIM may also upon the
recommendation of the CMI request that WADA include additional substances or
methods, which have the potential for abuse in the sport of motorcycling, in the
monitoring program described in Article 4.5 of the WADA Code.
28.7.3 Criteria for Including Substances and Methods on the Prohibited List.
As provided in Article 4.4.3 of the WADA Code, WADA's determination of the
Prohibited Substances and Prohibited Methods that will be included on the Prohibited
List shall be final and shall not be subject to challenge by a Rider or other Person.
28.7.4 Therapeutic Use.
28.7.4.1
Riders with a documented medical condition requiring the Use of a Prohibited
Substance or a Prohibited Method must first obtain a Therapeutic Use
Exemption (TUE).
28.7.4.2
Riders included by the FIM or MA in their respective Registered Testing
Pool and other Riders prior to their participation in any FIM World
Championship and Prize Events must obtain a TUE from the FIM or MA
(as the case may require) (regardless of whether the Rider previously has
received a TUE at the national level). TUEs granted by the FIM shall
be reported to MA and to WADA. Other Riders subject to Testing may
obtain a TUE from the Australian Sports Drug Medical Advisory
Committee (ASDMAC) or other body designated by MA. MA shall
promptly report any such TUEs to ASDA.
28.7.4.3
The CMI shall appoint a board of doctors to consider requests for TUEs (the
“TUE board”). The TUE Board member(s) so designated shall promptly
evaluate such request in accordance with the International Standard for
Therapeutic Use Exemptions and render a decision on such request, which
shall be the final decision of the FIM.
206
MOTORCYCLING AUSTRALIA’ S ANTI-DOPING POLICY
28.7.4.4
Riders who are included in the FIM's Registered Testing Pool or MA’s
Registered Testing Pool, should apply to the FIM or MA (as the case may be)
for the TUE at the same time the Rider first provides whereabouts information
to the FIM or to MA and, except in emergency situations, no later than 21 days
before the Rider’s participation at the relevant meeting.
28.8 TESTING
28.8.1 Authority to Test
All Riders affiliated with MA agree to submit to In-Competition Testing and Out-ofCompetition Testing (at any time or place, with or without advance notice) by the
FIM, MA or any other Drug Testing Authority and/or an Anti-Doping Organisation
responsible for Testing at a Competition or Meeting in which they participate.
28.8.2 Responsibility for FIM Testing
The CMI shall be responsible for overseeing all Testing conducted by the FIM.
Testing may be conducted by members of the CMI or by other qualified persons so
authorised by the FIM.
28.8.3 Testing Standards
All Testing shall be conducted substantially in conformity with the WADA
International Standard for Testing in force at the time of Testing.
28.8.3.1
Blood (or other non-urine) Samples may be used:
either to detect Prohibited Substances or Prohibited Methods or for screening
procedure purposes only. If the blood is collected for screening only, it will have
no other consequences for the Rider other than to identify him for a urine test
under these anti-doping rules. In these circumstances, MA may decide at its
own discretion which blood parameters are to be measured in the screening
Sample and what levels of those parameters will be used to indicate that a
Rider should be selected for a urine test.
28.8.4 Coordination of Testing
The FIM and MA shall promptly report completed tests through the WADA
clearinghouse to avoid unnecessary duplication in Testing.
28.8.5 Rider Whereabouts Requirements
Riders must provide accurate whereabouts information to the relevant authority and
keep this information updated at all times.
The ultimate responsibility for providing whereabouts information rests with each
Rider, however, it shall be the responsibility of MA to use its best efforts to
assist the FIM and/or Drug Testing Authority in obtaining whereabouts information
as requested by the FIM and/or Drug Testing Authority and/or an Anti-Doping
Organisation.
28.8.5.1
International level Riders
a) The FIM shall establish a Registered Testing Pool of those Riders who are
required to provide up-to-date whereabouts information to the FIM. The
FIM may revise its Registered Testing Pool from time to time as
appropriate.
b) Each Rider in the FIM Registered Testing Pool shall file semi-annual
reports with the FIM on forms provided by the FIM which specify on a daily
basis the locations and times where the Rider will be residing, training and
competing. Riders shall update this information as necessary so it is
current at all times.
c) Any Rider in the FIM Registered Testing Pool who is unavailable for
Testing on three Attempts during any period of 18 consecutive months
shall be considered to have committed an Anti-Doping Rule Violation
under Rule 28.5.4.
d) Any Rider in the FIM Registered Testing Pool who fails to timely submit a
required semi-annual whereabouts report after receipt of two formal written
warnings from the FIM or MA to do so in the preceding 18 months shall be
considered to have committed an Anti-Doping Rule Violation under Rule
28.5.4.
207
MOTORCYCLING AUSTRALIA’ S ANTI-DOPING POLICY
28.8.5.2
28.8.5.3
28.8.5.4
National level Riders
a) MA shall establish a national level MA Registered Testing Pool of top level
national Riders who are not already included in the FIM's Registered
Testing Pool. The following Rider whereabouts requirements shall apply
to all National Level Riders under these Anti-Doping Rules:
b) Each Rider in the MA Registered Testing Pool shall file semi-annual
reports with MA on forms provided by MA which specify on a daily basis
the locations and times where the Rider will be residing, training and
competing. Riders shall update this information as necessary so it is
current at all times.
c) Any Rider in the MA Registered Testing Pool who is unavailable for
Testing on three Attempts during any period of 18 consecutive months
shall be considered to have committed an Anti-Doping Rule Violation
under Rule 28.5.4.
d) Any Rider in the MA Registered Testing Pool who fails to timely submit a
required semi-annual whereabouts report after receipt of two formal written
warnings from the FIM or MA to do so in the preceding 18 months shall be
considered to have committed an Anti-Doping Rule Violation under Rule
28.5.4.
Riders who do not meet these applicable requirements will have committed an
Anti-Doping Rule Violation under Article 5.4 of the WADA Code and Rule
28.5.4 of these Anti-Doping Rules.
Whereabouts information provided under Rule 28.8.5.1 and 28.8.5.2 shall be
shared with WADA and other Drug Testing Authorities having jurisdiction to test
a Rider on the strict condition that it be used only for Doping Control
purposes.
28.8.6 Retirement and Return to Competition.
28.8.6.1
A Rider who has been identified by the FIM for inclusion in the FIM’s
Registered Testing Pool shall continue to be subject to these Anti-Doping
Rules, including the obligation to be available for No Advance Notice Out-ofCompetition Testing, unless and until the Rider gives written notice to the FIM
that he has retired or until he no longer satisfies the criteria for inclusion in the
FIM’s Registered Testing Pool and has been so informed by the FIM.
28.8.6.2
A Rider who has been identified by MA for inclusion in the MA Registered
Testing Pool shall be subject to the following rules:
a) A Person may retire from competition by notifying MA in writing.
b) The Person’s retirement date will be the date MA receives the notice.
c) Retirement does not:
d) excuse the Person from giving a sample requested on or before their
retirement date;
e) prevent the analysis of a sample given by the Person on or before their
retirement date;
f)
affect the results of testing under (a) or (b) above; or
g) exempt the Person from this Policy in relation to an Anti-Doping Rule
Violation committed before their retirement date.
h) A Person may make a written request to MA for reinstatement six months
after their retirement date. The request is taken to be made on the date
MA receives the request.
i)
Reinstatement will be at the discretion of MA.
j)
This Policy will apply to the Person from the date of their reinstatement
request.
k) During the six month period following the reinstatement request the
Person must be available for unannounced Out-of-Competition Testing in
accordance with these Anti-Doping Rules.
l)
A retired Person may not compete in Competitions and Events conducted
by or under the auspices of MA until the following periods expire:
m) For international Competitions and Meetings
n) 24 months from the date of the reinstatement request.
o) For domestic Competitions and Meetings
208
MOTORCYCLING AUSTRALIA’ S ANTI-DOPING POLICY
p)
q)
r)
24 months from the date of the reinstatement request.
A Person may apply to the Court of Arbitration for Sport (CAS) Appeals
Division to be eligible to compete in international Competitions and
Meetings before the period set out in Rule 28.8.6.2.h) expires.
A Person may apply to the Anti-Doping Control Officer (ADCO) to be
eligible to compete in domestic Competitions and Meetings before the
period set out in Rule 28.8.6.2.h) expires.
28.8.7 Selection of Riders to be tested.
28.8.7.1
At Meetings conducted by or under the auspices of MA, where testing is to be
conducted, it is compulsory to test a minimum of four riders. Selection of
Riders can be on a final position basis and/or random basis. If there are
several classes (eg. 125, 250, 500cc and Sidecar), the tests must be carried
out in at least two classes. In the case of sidecars, the “term” Rider is deemed
to include the passenger. In the case of Endurance, the term “Rider” is
deemed to include the whole team. For all other team competitions the term
“Rider” means one Rider from the first placed team and one Rider from 2 other
teams selected by ballot. The Riders from these 3 teams will also be selected
by ballot.
28.8.7.2
Any Rider that establishes or breaks a world record must be tested.
28.8.7.3
The classes to be tested at MA Meetings will be determined by the Steward or
Referee and at International and FIM Meetings will be determined by the Jury
President or Chief Steward. In addition, selection of further riders may be
ordered at the discretion of the Jury President, Steward, Referee or Chief
Steward by any method that he shall choose so long as such Target Testing is
not used for any purpose other than legitimate Doping Control purposes.
28.8.7.4
Riders shall be selected for Out-of-Competition Testing by the CMI or by MA
through a process that substantially complies with the International Standard
for Testing in force at the time of selection.
28.8.7.5
MA and organisers for International Meetings shall provide access to
Independent Observers at Meetings as directed by the FIM.
28.9 ANALYSIS OF SAMPLES
Doping Control Samples collected under these Anti-Doping Rules shall be
analysed in accordance with the following principles:
28.9.1 Use of Approved Laboratories.
Doping Control Samples collected under these Anti-Doping Rules must be analysed
by WADA-accredited laboratories or as otherwise approved by WADA.
28.9.2 Substances Subject to Detection.
Doping Control Samples shall be analysed to detect Prohibited Substances and
Prohibited Methods identified on the Prohibited List and other substances as may be
directed by WADA under the Monitoring Program described in Article 4.5 of the
WADA Code.
28.9.3 Research on Samples.
No Sample may be used for any purpose other than the detection of substances (or
classes of substances) or methods on the Prohibited List, or as otherwise identified
by WADA under its Monitoring Program, without the Rider's written consent, and in
accordance with the relevant WADA International Standard/s.
28.9.4 Standards for Sample Analysis and Reporting Riders.
Laboratories shall analyse Doping Control Samples and report results in accordance
with the relevant WADA International Standard/s.
28.10 RESULTS MANAGEMENT
MA will recognise the results of laboratory analysis of Testing by Anti-Doping
Organisations and ASDA conducted in accordance with the WADA International
Standard for Testing.
209
MOTORCYCLING AUSTRALIA’ S ANTI-DOPING POLICY
Results Management for Tests initiated by the FIM (including Tests performed by
WADA under agreement with the FIM) shall proceed in accordance with Article 7 of
the FIM Code.
Results management conducted by MA shall be consistent with the general
principles for effective and fair results management. Results of all Doping Controls
shall be reported to the FIM within 14 days of the conclusion of MA's results
management process. Any apparent Anti-Doping Rule Violation by a Rider who is a
Member of MA or who is otherwise subject to these Anti-Doping Rules shall be
promptly referred to an appropriate hearing panel established under Rule 28.11.
Apparent Anti-Doping Rule Violations by Riders who are Members of another FMN
shall be referred to the Rider’s FMN for hearing.
28.10.1 Notification of an Alleged Anti-Doping Rule Violation.
For any apparent Anti-Doping Rule Violation MA will conduct any necessary follow-up
investigation and shall then promptly, within 10 days, send the Person a letter
('infraction notice') which:
28.10.1.1
Notifies the Person of the Anti-Doping Rule/s which appear/s to have been
violated and the basis of the violation.
28.10.1.2
Encloses a copy of this Policy.
28.10.1.3
States that the ADCO will refer the matter to hearing within 21 days (unless the
Person gives a written waiver under Rule 28.10.4).
28.10.1.4
States that if the Person does not respond within 14 days a hearing can be held
in absentia or MA may apply a sanction in accordance with Rule 28.13.
28.10.2 The ADCO will:
28.10.2.1
Immediately disclose information about a Person who is alleged to have or has
committed an Anti-Doping Rule Violation under this policy to the ASC and the
FIM.
28.10.2.2
Consult the ASC and/or the FIM, about their participation in any investigation
and hearing.
28.10.2.3
Assist in any investigation and hearing on behalf of the ASC and/or the FIM.
28.10.2.4
Consult the ASC and/or the FIM about a joint referral to a hearing.
28.10.3 The ADCO will refer the matter to a hearing in accordance with Rule 28.11.
28.10.4 The ADCO may decide not to refer the matter to hearing if the Person in
writing:
28.10.4.1
Acknowledges they have admitted the Anti-Doping Rule Violation; and waives
the right to hearing in relation to:
a) whether the Person committed an Anti-Doping Rule Violation; and
b ) what sanction apply.
c) MA will then apply sanction as set out in Rule 28.13.
28.10.5 Provisional Suspensions.
28.10.5.1
MA may impose a Provisional Suspension on any person whose Sample is the
subject of an Adverse Analytical Finding or who is issued with an infraction
notice.
28.10.5.2
MA may impose the following Provisional Suspension:
a) Suspend financial or other assistance to the Person.
b) Suspend the Person from competition in Meetings conducted by or under
the auspices of MA.
c) Suspend the Person's licence or participation permit (if relevant).
28.10.5.3
MA may apply the Provisional Suspension from:
a) The date of the infraction notice
b) Following the 14 day submission period.
c) Or as deemed appropriate by MA,
d) until the determination of the hearing.
210
MOTORCYCLING AUSTRALIA’ S ANTI-DOPING POLICY
28.10.5.4
If a Provisional Suspension is imposed, either the hearing in accordance with Rule
28.11 shall be advanced to a date which avoids substantial prejudice to the Rider,
or the Rider shall be given an opportunity for a Provisional Hearing before
imposition of the Provisional Suspension or on a timely basis after imposition
of the Provisional Suspension.
28.11 RIGHT TO A FAIR HEARING
28.11.1 Principles of a Fair Hearing
All hearings conducted under Rules 28.11 will respect the following principles:
28.11.1.1
A timely hearing.
28.11.1.2
Fair and impartial hearing body.
28.11.1.3
The right to be represented by counsel at the Person's own expense.
28.11.1.4
The right to be fairly and timely informed of the asserted anti-doping rule
violation.
28.11.1.5
The right to respond to the asserted anti-doping rule violation and resulting
consequences.
28.11.1.6
The right of each party to present evidence, including the right to call and
question witnesses (subject to the hearing body's discretion to accept
testimony by telephone or written submission).
28.11.1.7
The Person's right to an interpreter at the hearing, with the hearing body to
determine the identity, and responsibility for the cost of the interpreter.
28.11.1.8
A timely, written, reasoned decision.
Subject to these principles, the hearing will be conducted in the manner that the
hearing body determines is appropriate, with as little formality and technicality,
and as quickly, as proper consideration of the issue permits.
28.11.2 ADCO Waiting Period
The ADCO will wait 14 days (or a shorter period agreed between the ADCO
and the Person) after sending an infraction notice under Rule 28.10.1 and then
will appoint to conduct the hearing:
28.11.2.1
a committee established in accordance with the rules of the FIM; or
28.11.2.2
CAS; or
28.11.2.3
MA’s judicial or disciplinary panel.
The Chair of the hearing body must be a lawyer.
28.11.3 The hearing body or the CAS will determine:
28.11.3.1
If the Person has committed a violation of these anti-doping rules.
28.11.3.2
If so, what sanction will apply.
28.11.3.3
How long the sanction will apply.
28.11.4 The hearing body will give the ADCO a written statement of:
28.11.4.1
The findings of the hearing.
28.11.4.2
What sanction (if any) will apply.
28.11.4.3
For how long the sanction (if any) will apply.
28.11.4.4
This will be read in accordance with Rule 28.13.
28.11.5 Reporting
Results of all Doping Controls shall be reported to the ASC, ASDA and the FIM and
other relevant organisations within 14 days of the conclusion of the results
management process.
28.11.6 Hearings
Hearings under this Rule shall be completed expeditiously and in all cases, unless
there are exceptional circumstances, within three months of the completion of the
Results Management process described in Rule 28.10. Hearings held in connection
with Meetings may be conducted by an expedited process.
211
MOTORCYCLING AUSTRALIA’ S ANTI-DOPING POLICY
28.11.7 Attendance Rights
The ASC, ASDA and the FIM have the right to attend hearings as an observer or
interested party.
28.11.8 Decisions
Decisions by MA, whether as the result of a hearing or the Rider or other Person's
acceptance of Consequences, may be appealed as provided in Rule 28.16.
28.11.9 Hearing decisions
Hearing Decisions by MA shall not be subject to further administrative review at the
national level except as provided in Rule 28.16 or required by applicable national law.
28.11.10 International Meetings
Hearings arising out of the FIM Testing or Tests at International Meetings shall be
conducted in accordance with Article 8 of the FIM Code.
28.12 AUTOMATIC DISQUALIFICATION OF INDIVIDUAL RESULTS
A violation of these Anti-Doping Rules in connection with an In-Competition Test
automatically leads to Disqualification of the individual result obtained in that
Meeting with all resulting Consequences, including forfeiture of any medals, points
and prizes.
28.13 SANCTIONS ON INDIVIDUALS
28.13.1 Disqualification of Results in Event During which an Anti-Doping Rule
Violation Occurs.
An Anti-Doping Rule violation occurring during or in connection with a Meeting may
lead to Disqualification of all of the Rider's individual results obtained in that Meeting
with all Consequences, including forfeiture of all medals, points and prizes, except as
provided in Rule 28.13.1.1.
28.13.1.1
If the Rider establishes that he bears No Fault or Negligence for the violation,
the Rider's individual results in another Meeting shall not be disqualified unless
the Rider's results in the Meeting other than the Meeting in which the AntiDoping Rule Violation occurred were likely to have been affected by the Rider's
Anti-Doping Rule Violation.
28.13.2 Imposition of Suspension for Prohibited Substances and Prohibited Methods.
Except for the specified substances identified in Rule 28.13.3, the period of
Suspension imposed for a violation of Rule 28.5.1 (presence of Prohibited Substance
or its Metabolites or Markers), Rule 28.5.2 (Use or Attempted Use of Prohibited
Substance or Prohibited Method) and Rule 28.5.6 (Possession of Prohibited
Substances and Methods) shall be:
First violation: Two (2) years' Suspension.
Second violation:
Lifetime Suspension.
However, the Rider or other Person shall have the opportunity in each case, before a
period of Suspension is imposed, to establish the basis for eliminating or reducing
this sanction as provided in Rule 28.13.6.
28.13.3 Specified Substances.
The Prohibited List may identify specified substances which are particularly susceptible
to unintentional Anti-Doping Rules Violations because of their general availability in
medicinal products or which are less likely to be successfully abused as doping
agents. Where a Rider can establish that the Use of such a specified substance was
not intended to enhance sport performance or that it did not create a danger to the rider or
other riders or otherwise unsafe competition, the period of Suspension found in Rule
28.13.2 shall be replaced with the following:
212
MOTORCYCLING AUSTRALIA’ S ANTI-DOPING POLICY
First violation: At a minimum, a warning and reprimand and no period of
Suspension from future Meetings, and at a maximum, one (1) year's Suspension.
Second violation:
Two (2) years' Suspension.
Third violation: Lifetime Suspension.
However, the Rider or other Person shall have the opportunity in each case, before a
period of Suspension is imposed, to establish the basis for eliminating or reducing (in
the case of a second or third violation) this sanction as provided in Rule 28.13.6.
28.13.4 Optional Sanction
28.13.4.1
MA and/or the ASC may require the Rider or other Person to repay all funding
and grants received from the MA and/or the ASC of the occurrence of the AntiDoping Rule Violation.
28.13.4.2
A hearing body may determine that a Person that has committed an AntiDoping Rule Violation, in addition to apply the sanction outlined in Rules
28.13.1-28.13.3, is required to go to counselling for a specified period.
28.13.4.3
Where the hearings or appeals body determines that an employee or contractor
of MA has committed an Anti-Doping Rule Violation, MA will take disciplinary
action against the employee or contractor.
28.13.5 Suspension for Other Anti-Doping Rule Violations.
28.13.6 The period of Suspension for other violations of these Anti-Doping Rules
shall be:
28.13.6.1
For violations of Rule 28.5.3 (refusing or failing to submit to Sample collection)
or Rule 28.5.5 (Tampering with Doping Control), the Suspension periods in
Rule 28.13.2 shall apply.
28.13.6.2
For violations of Rule 28.5.7 (Trafficking) or Rule 28.5.8 (administration of
Prohibited Substance or Prohibited Method), the period of Suspension
imposed shall be a minimum of four (4) years up to lifetime Suspension. An
Anti-Doping Rule Violation involving a Minor shall be considered a particularly
serious violation, and, if committed by Rider Support Personnel for violations
other than specified substances referenced in Rule 28.13.3, shall result in
lifetime Suspension for such Rider Support Personnel. In addition, violations
of such Articles which also violate non-sporting laws and regulations, may be
reported to the competent administrative, professional or judicial
authorities.
28.13.6.3
For violations of Rule 28.5.4 (Whereabouts Violations or Missed T e s t s ) , the
period of Suspension shall be:
28.13.6.4
First violation: Three (3) months to one (1) year Suspension.
28.13.6.5
Second and subsequent violations: Two (2) years' Suspension.
28.13.7 Elimination or Reduction of Period of Suspension Based on Exceptional
Circumstances.
28.13.7.1
If the Rider establishes in an individual case involving an Anti-Doping Rule
Violation under Rule 28.5.1 (presence of P r o h i b i t e d S u b s t a n c e or its
Metabolites or Markers) or Use of a Prohibited Substance or Prohibited
Method under Rule 28.5.2 that he bears No Fault or Negligence for the
violation, the otherwise applicable period of Suspension shall be eliminated.
When a Prohibited Substance or its Markers or Metabolites is detected in a
Rider's Specimen in violation of Rule 28.5.1 (presence of Prohibited
Substance), the Rider must also establish how the Prohibited Substance
entered his system in order to have the period of Suspension eliminated. In the
Event this Article is applied and the period of Suspension otherwise applicable
is eliminated, the Anti-Doping Rule Violation shall not be considered a
violation for the limited purpose of determining the period of Suspension
for multiple violations under Rule 28.13.2, 28.13.3 and 28.13.5.
213
MOTORCYCLING AUSTRALIA’ S ANTI-DOPING POLICY
28.13.7.2
28.13.7.3
This Rule 28.13.6.2 applies only to Anti-Doping Rule Violations involving Rule
28.5.1 (presence of Prohibited Substance or its Metabolites or Markers), Use of
a Prohibited Substance or Prohibited Method under Rule 28.5.2, failing to
submit to Sample collection under Rule 28.5.3, or administration of a
Prohibited Substance or Prohibited Method under Rule 28.5.8. If a Rider
establishes in an individual case involving such violations that he bears No
Significant Fault or Negligence, then the period of Suspension may be
reduced, but the reduced period of Suspension may not be less than one-half
of the minimum period of Suspension otherwise applicable. If the otherwise
applicable period of Suspension is a lifetime, the reduced period under this
section may be no less than 8 years. When a Prohibited Substance or its
Markers or Metabolites is detected in a Rider's Specimen in violation of Rule
28.5.1 (presence of Prohibited Substance), the Rider must also establish how
the Prohibited Substance entered his system in order to have the period of
Suspension reduced.
The FIM or MA may also reduce the period of Suspension in an individual case
where the Rider has provided substantial assistance to the FIM and/or MA
which results in the FIM and/or MA discovering or establishing an Anti-Doping
Rule Violation by another Person involving Possession under Rule 28.5.6.2
(Possession by Rider Support Personnel), Rule 28.5.7 (Trafficking) or Rule
28.5.8 (administration to a Rider). The reduced period of Suspension may not,
however, be less than one-half of the minimum period of Suspension
otherwise applicable. If the otherwise applicable period of Suspension is
a lifetime, the reduced period under this Article may be no less than 8
years.
28.13.8 Rules for Certain Potential Multiple Violations.
28.13.8.1
For purposes of imposing sanctions under Rules 28.13.2, 28.13.3,
28.13.4 and 28.13.5, a second Anti-Doping Rule Violation may be considered
for purposes of imposing sanctions only if the FIM or MA can
establish that the Rider or other Person committed the second Anti-Doping
Rule Violation after the Rider or other Person received notice, or after the FIM
or MA made a reasonable attempt to give notice, of the first Anti-Doping Rule
Violation; if the FIM or MA cannot establish this, the violations shall be
considered as one single first violation, and the sanction imposed shall be
based on the violation that carries the more severe sanction.
28.13.8.2
Where a Rider, based on the same Doping Control, is found to have committed
an Anti-Doping Rule Violation involving both a specified substance under Rule
28.13.3 and another Prohibited Substance or Prohibited Method, the Rider shall
be considered to have committed a single Anti-Doping Rule Violation, but the
sanction imposed shall be based on the Prohibited Substance or Prohibited
Method that carries the most severe sanction.
28.13.8.3
Where a Rider is found to have committed two separate Anti-Doping Rule
Violations, one involving a specified substance governed by the sanctions in
Rule 28.13.3 (specified substances) and the other involving a Prohibited
Substance or Prohibited Method governed by the sanctions in Rule 28.13.2
or a violation governed by the sanctions in Rule 28.13.5.1, the period of
Suspension imposed for the second offence shall be at a minimum two years'
Suspension and at a maximum three years' Suspension. Any Rider found to
have committed a third Anti-Doping Rule Violation involving any combination of
specified substances under Rule 28.13.3 and any other Anti-Doping Rule
Violation under Rule 28.13.2 or 28.13.5.1 shall receive a sanction of lifetime
Suspension.
28.13.9 Disqualification of Results in Meetings Subsequent to Sample Collection.
In addition to the automatic Disqualification of the results in the Competition which
produced the positive Sample under Rule 28.12 (Automatic Disqualification of
Individual Results), all other competitive results obtained from the date a positive Sample
was collected (whether In-Competition or Out-of-Competition), or other doping
violation occurred, through the commencement of any Provisional Suspension or
Suspension period, shall, unless fairness requires otherwise, be Disqualified with all
of the resulting consequences including forfeiture of any medals, points and prizes.
214
MOTORCYCLING AUSTRALIA’ S ANTI-DOPING POLICY
28.13.10 Commencement of Suspension Period.
The period of Suspension shall start on the date of the hearing decision providing for
Suspension or, if the hearing is waived, on the date Suspension is accepted or
otherwise imposed. Any period of Provisional Suspension (whether imposed or
voluntarily accepted) shall be credited against the total period of Suspension to be
served. Where required by fairness, such as delays in the hearing process or other
aspects of Doping Control not attributable to the Rider, the hearing body imposing the
sanction may start the period of Suspension at an earlier date commencing as
early as the date of Sample collection.
28.13.11 Status During Suspension.
No Person who has been declared suspended may, during the period of Suspension,
participate in any capacity in a Meeting or activity (other than authorised anti-doping
education or rehabilitation programs) authorised or organised by the FIM or MA or its
Members. In addition, for any Anti-Doping Rule Violation not involving specified
substances described in Rule 28.13.3, some or all sport-related financial support or
other sport-related benefits received by such Person will be withheld by the FIM or
MA. A Person subject to a period of Suspension longer than four years may, after
completing four years of the period of Suspension, participate in local sport Events in
a sport other than sport subject to the jurisdictions of the FIM or MA, but only so long
as the local sport event is not at a level that could otherwise qualify such Person directly or
indirectly to compete in (or accumulate points toward) a national championship or
International Event. A Rider who is suspended due to doping should not participate in
any capacity in an authorised event or activity during the Suspension period, conducted
by or under the auspices of MA or its Members. This would preclude, but not be limited
to:
28.13.11.1 Practising/training with a national team.
28.13.11.2 Acting as a coach or sport official.
28.13.11.3 Selection in any representative team.
28.13.11.4 Competing in any Meeting.
28.13.11.5 Receiving, directly or indirectly, funding or assistance from MA.
28.13.11.6 Use of official MA or Member facilities.
28.13.11.7 Holding any position with MA.
28.13.11.8 This Article would not prohibit the Person from participating in sport on a purely
recreational level, however the Person could not receive any official sanction or
licence from MA, such as a recreational licence.
28.13.12 Reinstatement T e s t i n g .
As a condition to regaining eligibility at the end of a specified period of Suspension, a
Rider must, during any period of Provisional Suspension or Suspension, make himself
available for Out-of-Competition Testing by the FIM or MA, and any other Anti-Doping
Organisation having Testing jurisdiction, and must provide current and accurate
whereabouts information as required under Rule 28.8.5. If a Rider subject to a period of
Suspension retires from the sport and is removed from Out-of-Competition
Testing pools and later seeks reinstatement, the Rider shall not be eligible for
reinstatement until the Rider has notified the FIM and/or MA and has been subject to
Out-of-Competition Testing for a period of time equal to the longer of the period in Rule
28.8.6 or the period of Suspension remaining as of the date the Rider had retired.
28.14 CONSEQUENCES TO TEAM
28.14.1 Teams
If a Member of a team is found to have committed a violation of these Anti-Doping Rules
during a Meeting, the team shall be Disqualified from the Meeting.
215
MOTORCYCLING AUSTRALIA’ S ANTI-DOPING POLICY
28.15 REVIEW OF A FINDING OF AN ANTI-DOPING RULE VIOLATION OR A
SANCTION
28.15.1 Review
A Person may make an application to the ADCO for review of a finding of a doping
offence or a sanction where new and relevant information becomes available which
was:
28.15.1.1
Not considered by the hearing body at the hearing.
28.15.1.2
Not available to the Person at the time of the hearing.
28.15.2 The Application Must:
28.15.2.1
Be in writing; and
28.15.2.2
Set out the new and relevant information.
28.15.3 Application Consideration
The ADCO will consider the application and if he considers it more probable than not
that the new information would have altered either the finding of a doping offence or
the sanction will refer the application to the hearing body to:
28.15.3.1
Review the finding that the Person committed the doping offence.
28.15.3.2
Decide whether to reduce or withdraw the sanction.
28.15.4 Application of Rules
Any review conducted under Rule 28.15.3 will apply Rules 28.4, 28.5, 28.6, 28.7,
28.12 and 28.13 of these Anti-Doping Rules.
28.15.5 Sanction
A sanction will remain in force during the review unless the hearing body decides
otherwise.
28.15.6 The ADCO must inform:
28.15.6.1
Any relevant sporting organisations.
28.15.6.2
The Person.
28.15.6.3
The ASC.
28.15.6.4
ASDA.
28.15.6.5
Any Person or organisation informed of the original determination under Rule
28.11.5,
28.15.6.6
of any change to the original determination as a result of the review. The
ADCO may then inform other Persons or organisations as the ADCO thinks
appropriate.
28.16 APPEALS
28.16.1 Decisions Subject to Appeal.
Decisions made under these Anti-Doping Rules may be appealed as set out in Rules
28.16.2-28.16.4. Such decisions shall remain in effect while under appeal unless the
appellate body orders otherwise. Before an appeal is commenced, any post-decision
review authorised in Rules 28.11.9 must be exhausted.
28.16.2 Appeals from Decisions Regarding Anti-Doping
Rule Violations,
Consequences, and Provisional Suspensions.
A decision that an Anti-Doping Rule Violation was committed, a decision imposing
Consequences for an Anti-Doping Rule Violation, a decision that no Anti-Doping Rule
Violation was committed, a decision that the FIM or MA lacks jurisdiction to rule on an
alleged Anti-Doping Rule Violation or its Consequences, and a decision to impose a
Provisional Suspension as a result of a Provisional Hearing or otherwise in violation of
Rule 28.10.5 may only be appealed as provided for in this Rule 28.16.2.
Notwithstanding any other provision herein, the only Person that may appeal from a
Provisional Suspension is the Rider or other Person upon whom the Provisional
Suspension is imposed.
216
MOTORCYCLING AUSTRALIA’ S ANTI-DOPING POLICY
28.16.2.1
28.16.2.2
28.16.2.3
28.16.2.4
In cases arising from Competition in an International Meeting, World
Championship or Prize Event or in cases involving International-Level Riders,
the decision may be appealed to the International Tribunal of Appeal (TIA) and
in last instance to the CAS in accordance with the provisions applicable before
such court. Any such appeal will apply Articles 28.4, 28.5, 28.6, 28.7, 28.12
and 28.13 of these Anti-Doping Rules.
In cases involving Riders that do not have a right to appeal under Rule
28.16.2.1, MA shall have in place an appeal procedure that respects the
following principles of natural justice: a timely hearing, a fair and impartial
hearing body; the right to be represented by a counsel at the
Person's expense; and a timely, written, reasoned decision. Any such
appeal will apply Rules 28.4, 28.5, 28.6, 28.7, 28.12 and 28.13 of these AntiDoping Rules.
a) Any appeal from a determination of the MA judicial or disciplinary panel
must be solely and exclusively resolved by the CAS Appeals Division.
The determination of the CAS Appeals Division will be final and binding on
the parties to the appeal and no Person may institute or maintain
proceedings in any court or tribunal. In particular, and without restricting
the generality of the foregoing and for further and better assurance,
notwithstanding that such provisions have no applicability, neither party
will have the right of appeal under section 3 of the Commercial Arbitration
Act of any of the Australian States or to apply for the determination of a
question of law under section 39(1)(a) of such Act.
b) The ADCO must inform any Person or organisation informed of the
original determination of any change to the original determination as a
result of the appeal.
c) The outcome of all appeals must be reported to the ASC and ASDA within
14 days of the conclusion of the appeal.
d) The ADCO may then inform other Persons or organisations as the ADCO
thinks appropriate. The FIM's rights of appeal with respect to these cases
are set forth in Rule 28.16.2.3.
In cases under Rule 28.16.2.1, the following parties shall have the right to
appeal to CAS:
a) The Rider or other Person who is the subject of the decision being
appealed.
b) The other party to the case in which the decision was rendered.
c) The FIM and any other Anti-Doping Organisation under whose rules a
sanction could have been imposed.
d) WADA.
In cases under Rule 28.16.2.2, the parties having the right to appeal to the
national-level reviewing body shall be as provided in MA's rules but, at a
minimum, shall include:
a) The Rider or other Person who is the subject of the decision being
appealed.
b) The other party to the case in which the decision was rendered.
c) The FIM.
d) WADA.
e) An appeal will be a re-hearing of the matters appealed against and the
provisions of Rule 28.11 will apply, mutatis mutandis1 to any appeal.
f)
For cases under Rule 28.16.2.2, the ASC, WADA and the FIM shall also
have the right to appeal to CAS with respect to the decision of the
national-level reviewing body.
1
Mutatis mutandis means the necessary changes being made.
28.16.3 Appeals from Decisions Granting or Denying a Therapeutic Use Exemption.
Decisions by W A D A reversing the grant or denial of a TUE may only be appealed to
CAS and the only persons who have a right to appeal are the Rider, t h e F I M or
MA or other body designated by MA which granted or denied the exemption. Decisions
to deny TUEs, and which are not reversed by WADA, may be appealed by InternationalLevel Riders to the FIM TIA in the first instance and to CAS in the second instance
217
MOTORCYCLING AUSTRALIA’ S ANTI-DOPING POLICY
and by other Riders to CAS as described in Rule 28.16.2.2. If CAS reverses the
decision to deny a TUE, that decision may be appealed to CAS by WADA.
28.16.4 Time for Filing Appeals.
The time to file an appeal to CAS shall be within twenty (20) days of the date of
delivery of the hearing decision.
28.17 CONFIDENTIALITY AND REPORTING
28.17.1 Incorporation of the FIM Code.
MA shall comply with the FIM Code. MA shall obtain the written acknowledgement
and agreement, in the form attached as Appendix 2, of all Riders seeking an FIM
licence or seeking to be eligible for participation in FIM World Championships or
Prize Events or who are otherwise subject to FIM Doping Control.
28.17.2 Statistical Reporting
MA shall report to the FIM at the end of every year results of all Doping Controls
within its jurisdiction sorted by Rider and identifying each date on which the Rider
was tested, the entity conducting the test, and whether the test was In-Competition or
Out-of-Competition. The FIM may periodically publish Testing data received from
MA as well as comparable data from Testing conducted under the FIM's jurisdiction.
28.17.3 Recognition of Decisions by the FIM and other FMNs
Any decision of the FIM or MA regarding a violation of these Anti-Doping Rules shall
be recognised by all FMNs, which shall take all necessary action to render such
results effective.
28.17.4 Incorporation of Relevant Anti-Doping Rules.
All Members shall comply with these Anti-Doping Rules. Any procedural rules
necessary to effectively implement these Anti-Doping Rules shall be deemed to be
included in them. The Rules of each Member (where applicable or relevant) shall
specifically provide that all Riders, Rider Support Personnel and other Persons under
the jurisdiction of the Member shall be bound by these Anti-Doping Rules.
28.17.5 Public Disclosure.
MA must Publicly Report the disposition of the anti-doping matter no later than
twenty (20) days after it has been determined in a hearing in accordance with Rule
28.11 that an Anti-Doping Rule Violation has occurred, or such hearing has been
waived, or the assertion of an Anti-Doping Rule Violation has not been timely
challenged, and no appeal has been lodged against any determination made.
28.18 RECOGNITION OF DECISIONS BY OTHER ORGANISATIONS
MA will recognise and enforce a Testing, TUE and hearing results or other final
adjudications properly imposed on a Person who has committed an anti-doping rule
violation under the anti-doping policy of:
28.18.1 The FIM.
28.18.2 Another organisation recognised by the ASC,
where the violation would be an Anti-Doping Rule Violation under these rules.
28.19 STATUTE OF LIMITATIONS
No action may be commenced under these Anti-Doping Rules against a Rider or
other Person for an Anti-Doping Rule Violation contained in these Anti-Doping Rules
unless such action is commenced within eight years from the date the violation
occurred.
218
MOTORCYCLING AUSTRALIA’ S ANTI-DOPING POLICY
28.20 AMENDMENT AND INTERPRETATION OF ANTI-DOPING RULES
28.20.1 Amendments and Interpretations
28.20.1.1
These Anti-Doping Rules may be amended from time to time by MA.
28.20.1.2
Except as provided in Rule 28.20.5, these Anti-Doping Rules shall be
interpreted as an independent and autonomous text and not by reference to
existing law or statutes.
28.20.1.3
The headings used for the various Parts and Articles of these Anti-Doping Rules
are for convenience only and shall not be deemed part of the substance of these
Anti-Doping Rules or to affect in any way the language of the provisions to
which they refer.
28.20.1.4
The INTRODUCTION and the APPENDIX I DEFINITIONS are integral parts of
these Anti-Doping Rules.
28.20.1.5
These Anti-Doping Rules have been adopted under the applicable provisions of
the FIM Code and the WADA Code and shall be interpreted in a manner that
is consistent with applicable provisions of the FIM Code. The comments
annotating various provisions of the FIM Code or the WADA Code may, where
applicable, assist in the understanding and interpretation of these Anti-Doping
Rules.
28.20.1.6
These Anti-Doping Rules shall not apply retrospectively to matters pending
before the date these Anti-Doping Rules came into effect.
28.20.1.7
Words in the singular include the plural and vice versa.
28.20.1.8
A Person includes a body corporate.
28.20.1.9
Words not defined in these rules have the meaning ascribed to them in the FIM
Code unless a contrary meaning appears from the context. Words not defined
in these rules or the FIM Code have the meaning ascribed to them in the FIM
Code unless a contrary meaning appears from the context.
28.20.1.10 Reference to “including” and similar words are not words of limitation.
28.21 APPENDIX 1 – DEFINITIONS
Adverse Analytical Finding. A report from a laboratory or other approved Testing entity
that identifies in a Specimen the presence of a Prohibited Substance or its Metabolites or
Markers (including elevated quantities of endogenous substances) or evidence of the Use
of a Prohibited Method.
Anti-Doping Control Officer (ADCO) means the Anti-Doping Control Officer appointed by
MA to give effect to these Anti-Doping Rules and, if no Person is appointed the Chief
Executive or equivalent officer of MA.
Anti-Doping Organisation. A Signatory that is responsible for adopting rules for initiating,
implementing or enforcing any part of the Doping Control process. This includes, for
example, the WADA, the FIM, FMNs and National Anti-Doping Organisations.
Attempt. Purposely engaging in conduct that constitutes a substantial step in a course of
conduct planned to culminate in the commission of an Anti-Doping Rule Violation.
Provided, however, there shall be no Anti-Doping Rule Violation based solely on an
Attempt to commit a violation if the Person renunciates the Attempt prior to it being
discovered by a third party not involved in the Attempt.
Australian Sports Commission (ASC).
Means the Australian Sports Commission
established by the Australian Sports Commission Act 1989.
Australian Sports Drug Agency (ASDA). Means the Australian Sports Drug Agency
established by the Australian Sports Drug Agency Act 1990.
Australian Sports Drug Medical Advisory Committee (ASDMAC). Means the Australian
Sports Drug Medical Advisory Committee established by the Australian Sports Drug
Agency Act 1990.
CAS. The Court of Arbitration for Sport.
Competition. The distinction between a Competition, race, heat, course and a Meeting is
provided in the applicable rules of the FIM and/or MA.
Consequences of Anti-Doping Rules Violations. A Rider’s or other Person's Anti-Doping
Rule Violation may result in one or more of the following: (a) Disqualification means the
Rider’s results in a particular Competition or Meeting are invalidated, with all resulting
219
MOTORCYCLING AUSTRALIA’ S ANTI-DOPING POLICY
consequences including forfeiture of any medals, points and prizes; (b) Suspension means
the Rider or other Person is barred for a specified period of time from participating in any
Competition or other activity or funding as provided in Rule 28.13.9; and (c) Provisional
Suspension means the Rider or other Person is barred temporarily from participating in
any Competition or Meeting prior to the final decision at a hearing conducted under Rule
28.11.
Doping. The occurrence of one or more of the Anti-Doping Rule Violations in Rule 28.5.1Rule 28.5.8 of these Anti-Doping Rules.
Doping Control. The process including test distribution planning, Sample collection and
handling, laboratory analysis, results management, hearings and appeals.
Drug Testing Authority. Means:
ASDA;
an agency appointed by ASDA, the FIM or MA or a national drug testing authority which:
operates under its own statute, rules and regulations; and
has samples analysed by an FIM approved or a WADA accredited laboratory, or
an agency which conducts testing on Riders for the detection of prohibited substances
where:
the methods of testing substantially accord with International Testing Standards; and
the sample is analysed by an FIM approved or an WADA accredited laboratory.
FIM. The Federation Internationale de Motorcyclisme.
FIM Code. The FIM Anti-Doping Code.
FMN. A national entity which is a member of the FIM and recognised s the entity
governing motorcycling sport in that nation or region.
In-Competition. For purposes of differentiating between In-Competition and Out-ofCompetition Testing, unless provided otherwise in the rules of the FIM or other relevant
Anti-Doping Organisation, an In-Competition test is a test where a Rider is selected for
Testing in connection with a specific Competition.
Independent Observer Program. A team of observers, under the supervision of WADA,
who observe the Doping Control process at certain Meetings and report on observations.
If WADA is Testing In-Competition at a Meeting, the observers shall be supervised by an
independent organisation.
International Event. An Event where the FIM, a Major Event Organisation, a FMN or
another international sport organisation is the ruling body for the event or appoints the
technical officials for the event.
International-Level Rider. Riders designated by the FIM as being within the FIM
Registered Testing Pool.
International Standard. A standard adopted by WADA in support of the WADA Code.
Compliance with an International Standard (as opposed to another alternative standard,
practice or procedure) shall be sufficient to conclude that the procedures addressed by the
International Standard were performed properly.
Major Event Organisations. This term refers to the continental associations of National
Olympic Committees and other international multi-sport organisations that function as the
ruling body for any continental, regional or other International Meeting.
Marker. A compound, group of compounds or biological parameters that indicates the Use
of a Prohibited Substance or Prohibited Method.
Meeting. One or more individual Competitions, races, heats, courses conducted together
under one ruling body (e.g., FIM, MA, CONU or FMNR) and disciplinary body.
Member. A Person who, or a body which, is a member of MA; a Person who, or body
which, is affiliated with MA; a Person who is a member of a body which is a Member of or
affiliated with MA; and a Person taking part in, or involved in or associated with any
sporting activity conducted, authorised or recognised by MA.
Metabolite. Any substance produced by a biotransformation process.
Minor. A natural Person who has not reached the age of majority as established by the
applicable laws of his country of residence.
National Anti-Doping Organisation. The entity(ies) designated by each country as
possessing the primary authority and responsibility to adopt and implement anti-doping
rules, direct the collection of Samples, the management of test results, and the conduct of
hearings, all at the national level. If this designation has not been made by the competent
220
MOTORCYCLING AUSTRALIA’ S ANTI-DOPING POLICY
public authority(ies), the entity shall be the country's National Olympic Committee or its
designee.
National Meeting. A sport Meeting involving international or national-level Riders that is
not an International Meeting.
National Olympic Committee. The organisation recognised by the International Olympic
Committee. The term National Olympic Committee shall also include the National Sport
Confederation in those countries where the National Sport Confederation assumes typical
National Olympic Committee responsibilities in the anti-doping area.
No Advance Notice. A Doping Control which takes place with no advance warning to the
Rider and where the Rider is continuously chaperoned from the moment of notification
through Sample provision.
No Fault or Negligence. The Rider’s establishing that he did not know or suspect, and
could not reasonably have known or suspected even with the exercise of utmost caution,
that he had Used or been administered the Prohibited Substance or Prohibited Method.
No Significant Fault or Negligence. The Rider’s establishing that his fault or negligence,
when viewed in the totality of the circumstances and taking into account the criteria for No
Fault or Negligence, was not significant in relationship to the Anti-Doping Rule Violation.
Out-of-Competition. Any Doping Control which is not In-Competition.
Person. A natural Person or an organisation or other entity.
Possession. The actual, physical possession, or the constructive possession (which shall
be found only if the person has exclusive control over the Prohibited Substance/Method or
the premises in which a Prohibited Substance/Method exists); provided, however, that if
the person does not have exclusive control over the Prohibited Substance/Method or the
premises in which a Prohibited Substance/Method exists, constructive possession shall
only be found if the person knew about the presence of the Prohibited Substance/Method
and intended to exercise control over it. Provided, however, there shall be no Anti-Doping
Rule Violation based solely on possession if, prior to receiving notification of any kind that
the Person has committed an Anti-Doping Rule Violation, the Person has taken concrete
action demonstrating that the Person no longer intends to have Possession and has
renounced the Person's previous Possession.
Prohibited List. The list identifying the Prohibited Substances and Prohibited Methods.
Prohibited Method. Any method so described on the Prohibited List.
Prohibited Substance. Any substance so described on the Prohibited List.
Provisional Hearing. For purposes of Rule 28.10.5, an expedited abbreviated hearing
occurring prior to a hearing under Rule 28.11 (Right to a Fair Hearing) that provides the Rider
with notice and an opportunity to be heard in either written or oral form.
Publicly Disclose or Publicly Report. To disseminate or distribute information to the
general public or persons beyond those persons entitled to earlier notification in
accordance with Rule 28.13.
Recognised Medical Authority. The Australian Sports Drug Medical Advisory Committee
(ASDMAC) established under the amended ASDA Act 1990, or an authority recognised by
the ASDMAC which may authorise the Use of a Prohibited Substance and/or Prohibited
Method for a therapeutic purpose.
Registered Testing Pool. The pool of top level Riders established separately by the FIM,
MA and National Anti-Doping Organisation who are subject to both In-Competition and
Out-of-Competition Testing as part of the FIM's, MA's or Organisation’s test distribution
plan.
Rider. For purposes of Doping Control, any Person who participates in motorcycling sport
at the international level (as defined by the FIM) or national level (as defined by MA) and
any additional Person who participates in a motorcycling sport at a lower level if
designated by the Person’s National Anti-Doping Organisation. For purposes of antidoping information and education, any Person who participates in motorcycling sport under
the authority of any Signatory, government, other sports organisation accepting the Code.
Rider Support Personnel. Any coach, trainer, manager, agent, team staff, official, medical
or para-medical personnel working with or treating Riders participating in or preparing for
meetings.
Sample/Specimen. Any biological material collected for the purposes of Doping Control.
Signatories. Those entities signing the WADA Code and agreeing to comply with the
WADA Code, including the International Olympic Committee, International Federations,
221
MOTORCYCLING AUSTRALIA’ S ANTI-DOPING POLICY
International Paralympic Committee, National Olympic Committees, National Paralympic
Committees, Major Event Organisations, National Anti-Doping Organisations, and WADA.
Tampering. Altering for an improper purpose or in an improper way; bringing improper
influence to bear; interfering improperly to alter results or prevent normal procedures from
occurring.
Target Testing. Selection of Riders for Testing where specific Riders or groups of Riders
are selected on a non-random basis for Testing at a specified time.
Team Sport. A sport in which the substitution of players is permitted during a Competition.
Testing. The parts of the Doping Control process involving test distribution planning,
Sample collection, Sample handling, and Sample transport to the laboratory.
Therapeutic Use Exemption (TUE). Therapeutic Use Exemption in accordance with the
WADA International Standard for Therapeutic Use Exemptions.
Trafficking. To sell, give, administer, transport, send, deliver or distribute a Prohibited
Substance or Prohibited Method to a Rider either directly or through one or more third
parties, but excluding the sale or distribution (by medical personnel or by Persons other
than a Rider’s Support Personnel) of a Prohibited Substance for genuine and legal
therapeutic purposes.
Use. The application, ingestion, injection or consumption by any means whatsoever of
any Prohibited Substance or Prohibited Method.
WADA. The World Anti-Doping Agency.
WADA Code. The World Anti-Doping Code.
28.22 APPENDIX 2 – ACKNOWLEDGEMENT AND AGREEMENT
I, as a Member of MA and/or a participant in a MA or the FIM authorised or recognised
Meeting, hereby acknowledge and agree as follows:
I have received and had an opportunity to review the FIM Anti-Doping Code and MA's AntiDoping Rules ("collectively "Anti-Doping Rules").
I consent and agree to comply with and be bound by all of the provisions of the Anti-Doping
Rules, including but not limited to, all amendments to them and all International Standards
incorporated in them.
I acknowledge and agree that MA and the FIM have jurisdiction to impose sanctions as
provided in the Anti-Doping Rules.
I also acknowledge and agree that any dispute arising out of a decision made under the AntiDoping Rules, after exhaustion of the process expressly provided for in the Anti-Doping
Rules may be appealed exclusively as provided in Rule 28.12 of the FIM Anti-Doping Code to
an appellate body for final and binding arbitration to the Court of Arbitration for Sport.
I acknowledge and agree that the decisions of the arbitral appellate body referred to above
shall be final and enforceable, and that I will not bring any claim, arbitration, lawsuit or
litigation in any other court or tribunal.
I have read and understand this Acknowledgement and Agreement.
Date
Date of Birth
Print Name (Last Name, First Name)
Signature (or, if a minor, signature of legal guardian)
222
MOTORCYCLING AUSTRALIA’ S ANTI-DOPING POLICY
28.23 APPENDIX 3 – THE 2005 INTERNATIONAL STANDARDS – PROHIBITED LIST
For information on this refer to www.wada-ama.org
28.24 APPENDIX 4 – PROCEDURE FOR ALCOHOL BREATH TESTING
28.24.1 Overview
28.24.1.1
This procedure applies to competitors and officials.
28.24.1.2
Testing of competitors and officials to determine the presence of alcohol in their
body, by analysis of their expired air, is appropriate and necessary for the
safety of competitors, officials and the public.
28.24.1.3
In order to test fairly, an initial test will be undertaken. Should this test return a
positive reading, a second test will be undertaken a short time later under
controlled conditions to confirm that positive result.
28.24.1.4
Any competitors or officials detected with a blood alcohol content above 0.0
milligrams per 100 millilitres (0.0mg/100ml) will be excluded from further
participation in the day’s competition (under 3.4.8.5) and subject to sanctions
under 28.3 and other provisions of the Anti-Doping Policy.
28.24.2 Notification to Competitors or Officials
28.24.2.1
Competitors or officials must be informed by written notice or in SR at least 24
hours prior to any testing being conducted during the event. They do not need
to be informed of the actual times when the tests will be conducted. Evidence
of such notice being given must be lodged with the Stewards prior to any tests
being performed.
28.24.3 Requirements of Competitors or Officials
28.24.3.1
Competitors and officials being tested will be asked not to consume any
substances by mouth for a period of five minutes prior to any breath analysis
test being carried out.
28.24.3.2
Should an initial test indicate the presence of alcohol, a participant will be
isolated for approximately 20 minutes, in the company of a witness. Another
test will be undertaken no less than 15 minutes after the initial test. No
substances may be consumed by the competitor or official by mouth during this
period.
28.24.3.3
Should a competitor or official refuse to submit to an alcohol breath test, or fails
to follow the proper and reasonable instructions of the testing official, the
competitor or official will be considered to have returned a positive result. In
these circumstances, no further testing is required and the competitor or official
will be excluded from further participation in the day’s competition.
28.24.4 Requirements for Testing
28.24.4.1
All tests must be conducted using an appropriate instrument which has been
certified as being calibrated in accordance with the requirements of the
manufacturer or their agent, within the previous six months.
28.24.4.2
The result of all tests performed must be recorded, together with the names of
the competitor or official and the witness, the time and date of the test and the
result of the test eg, OK if 0, or actual reading if >0.
28.24.5 Procedure for Testing
28.24.5.1
Testing should normally be carried out in the morning, prior to any competition,
but may be undertaken at any time during the event.
28.24.5.2
Testing will be carried out by an official authorised by MA for the purpose (refer
to 3.4.8.2 and 28.4.3) and that official must have been trained and accredited
by the manufacturer of the testing equipment or their agent. Such officials may
include doctors and police.
223
MOTORCYCLING AUSTRALIA’ S ANTI-DOPING POLICY
28.24.5.3
28.24.5.4
28.24.5.5
28.24.5.6
28.24.5.7
28.24.5.8
28.24.5.9
Any competitor or official, whose blood alcohol level is above 0.00mg/100ml, as
identified by the instrument, will be given the opportunity to undertake a further
test, which will be undertaken no sooner that 15 minutes and no later than 20
minutes after the initial (positive) test. In all cases, the participant shall be
accompanied by a witness appointed by the Testing Official for the entire period
between the two tests.
Should the subsequent test indicate a positive blood alcohol reading (ie above
0.00mg/100ml, as identified by the instrument) the competitor or official will be
excluded from further participation in the day’s event sanctioned and
sanctioned under the other provisions of the MA Anti-Doping Policy.
A positive alcohol result is a breach of the MA Anti-Doping Policy.
Should the subsequent (second) test be negative, then no further action will be
taken against the competitor or official. The RCB reserves the right however to
ask the same participant to undertake a further test during the meeting.
In any case, the result of the tests may be reported to the RCB and/or MA by
the official undertaking the tests in the general event report. Any positive result
on the initial test followed by a negative test shall not be recorded in the
competitor or official’s history file.
The following extract must be read to competitors or officials prior to
undertaking testing:
“You are about to have your expired air tested to ensure compliance with the
MA’s Anti-Doping Policy in relation to the presence of alcohol in your body.
Should the test be positive, a further test will be undertaken shortly to confirm
the test. Please follow the instructions of the testing official.”
In the event of a positive result in the initial test (single positive), the following
must be read to the competitor or official:
“Your expired air has indicated the presence of alcohol in your body, this is a
breach of the MA Anti-Doping Policy. Another test will be performed shortly to
confirm the initial test. You will be requested to be accompanied by a witness
at all times for the next 20 minutes. You will not be permitted to consume any
substance by mouth until after the test.”
28.24.6 Procedure for Processing a “Double Positive” Result
28.24.6.1
The competitors and officials must be advised by the testing official of the result
of both tests e.g. the reading noted on the instrument.
28.24.6.2
The competitors and officials must be advised that under the MA Anti Doping
Policy, no further participation in the meeting will be permitted.
28.24.7 Procedure following a report of a “Double Positive” Result
28.24.7.1
The applicable action having been taken, the procedures for notification of a
positive result will be followed (see rule 28.2).
28.24.8 Report by Testing Official
28.24.8.1
In the case where no positive reading was achieved on the confirming test, the
results shall be included with the Stewards’ report of the meeting.
28.24.8.2
In the case where one or more positive readings were achieved on the
confirming test, the original of the report must be hand delivered or sent to the
RCB by registered post the following day, together will all appropriate Stewards
Reports.
28.25 APPENDIX 5 – ALCOHOL BLOOD TESTING
28.25.1 Alcohol Blood Testing
28.25.1.1
Any competitor or official detected with a blood alcohol content above
0.0mg/100ml as a result of a blood test performed by qualified medical
practitioners or police will be subject to sanctions under rule 28.3.
224
29. RECREATIONAL MOTORCYCLE ACTIVITY
29.1 THE BY LAWS
29.1.1 Purpose of By-laws
29.1.1.1
The purpose of these by laws is to regulate and control recreational motorcycle
activity which seeks to be sanctioned by MA.
a) The by laws are made under paragraph 2 of the Constitution.
b) The by laws, and any determination made under them, and in accordance
with them, bind all controlling bodies and all participants in recreational
activity.
c) The by laws are to be interpreted with the intent that recreational activity
be safe.
29.2 THE CONTROLLING BODIES
29.2.1 Administration of By laws
29.2.1.1
SCBs are responsible for the administration of these by laws
29.3 OFFICIALS
29.3.1 The Licensing and Powers of Officials
29.3.1.1
Officials controlling recreational activity are required to be licensed, in
accordance with Rule 2.5.
29.3.1.2
The powers, authorities and responsibilities of officials controlling recreational
activity are those in Rule 2.5.
29.3.1.3
The Appointment of Officials
a) Rule 3.2.5 applies for the appointment of officials.
29.4 VENUES
29.4.1.1
Venues for recreational activities must be inspected and licensed in
accordance with Rule 3.1
29.5 THE PROMOTION AND CONDUCT OF RECREATIONAL ACTIVITY
29.5.1 Authority to Promote
Subject to these by laws, recreational activity may be promoted or conducted by
a) An SCB
b) A club
29.6 RECREATIONAL PERMITS
29.6.1.1
29.6.1.2
No recreational activity may be promoted or conducted without a Recreational
Permit.
An application for a recreational permit must be in the prescribed form to the
SCB and must
a) Be accompanied by the prescribed fee.
b) Be submitted at least fourteen days before the date set for the meeting.
c) Be accompanied by evidence that the SCB’s requirements regarding
officials, indemnity forms and safety will be met.
d) Identify the proposed venue.
225
RECREATIONAL MOTORCYCLE ACTIVITY
29.6.1.3
29.6.1.4
e) Provide evidence the club is insured to the satisfaction of the SCB.
If a meeting does not take place, any fee paid for the permit must be repaid
unless in the opinion of the SCB the meeting did not take place because of the
conduct of the permit holder. In that event, the SCB may withhold the refund
wholly or in part at its discretion.
Rule 3.2.4 applies regarding forfeiture of a permit.
29.7 RECREATIONAL ACTIVITY
29.7.1.1
Recreational activity must not:
a) Be competitive.
b) Involve starts or finishes as defined in Chapter 5.
c) Be scored or timed.
d) Have any results which may or may not be published.
29.8.1.1
A club may invite entries from financial members of any club who hold a:
a) Club Licence – recreational.
b) A Competition Licence.
29.8 ENTRIES
29.9 LICENSING OF PARTICIPANTS
29.9.1.1
29.9.1.2
29.9.1.3
29.9.1.4
29.9.1.5
29.9.1.6
29.9.1.7
29.9.1.8
A person may not participate in any recreational activity unless licensed under
these Rules.
No person may be issued with a Club Licence – recreational unless that person
is a financial member of a club. However Single use Recreational licences
can be issued to non club members.
An application for a Club Licence – Recreational must:
a) Be to the SCB to which their club is affiliated.
b) Be in the prescribed form.
c) Be accompanied by the prescribed fee.
d) If the applicant is a minor, be accompanied by the written authorisation of
at least one of the applicant’s parents or the legal guardian of the
applicant.
An application may be lodged with
a) The club secretary, or
b) The SCB
If the application is lodged with the club secretary and
a) The club secretary ensures the form is correctly filled in.
b) The prescribed fee is paid and the applicant must be issued with the top
copy of the application form which may be issued as proof of being licence
for no more than fourteen days from the date the application is
countersigned by the club secretary.
c) Club officials are satisfied the applicant can competently control their
motorcycle.
Applications lodged with the club secretaries are to be sent to the SCB with the
prescribed fee within 48 hours of them being counter signed by the club
secretary.
On receipt of an application for the issue or renewal of a Club Licence –
Recreational the SCB may:
a) Delay the issue or renewal for no more than fourteen days.
b) Refuse to issue or renew the licence.
c) Issue or renew the licence on such terms and conditions as it thinks fit.
An applicant who is aggrieved by a decision of the SCB under the previous by
law may appeal to the appellate body of that SCB.
226
RECREATIONAL MOTORCYCLE ACTIVITY
29.9.1.9
29.9.1.10
29.9.1.11
An SCB which issues a Club Licence – Recreational must, within one month of
issue, notify MA which must enter the information on a register of licensed
recreational riders maintained for that purpose and kept at the registered office
of MA.
A Club Licence – Recreational continues in force for twelve months from date
of issue.
A recreational licensee must produce the licence on demand to any key official
during any meeting.
227
30. MINIKHANA
30.1 INTRODUCTION
30.1.1.1
30.1.1.2
30.1.1.3
The following Rules governing Minikhana are written to facilitate the
organisation of uniform, safe and fair competitions.
The express purpose of Minikhana motorcycling is the development of riding
skills and techniques for junior competitors by providing an organised
competition, where skill, rather than speed is the determining factor. Placings
can only be achieved by the correct completion of an event.
A machine may only be ridden by one rider during a meeting and may not be
substituted for another.
30.2 PROTECTIVE CLOTHING
30.2.1 Helmets, Clothing, Gloves and Footwear
30.2.1.1
No competitor or riding official may practise, start or compete in any minikhana
competition unless wearing:
a) An approved and correctly fitting helmet which must:
i)
Carry the Standards Association of Australia “AS 1698” label,
or
ii)
Be approved under Rule 01.69 & 01.70 of the FIM Technical
Rules.
b) Trousers and a long sleeved shirt or jersey of non combustible durable
material. Clothing must not be loose or flapping.
c) Footwear which must be:
i)
Constructed of leather, plastic or other similarly durable
material.
ii)
Be of a length that must at least cover ¾ of the length of the
lower leg, with the rider in a racing position on the machine.
d) Synthetic or rubber boots may be worn as an alternative to leather for
competitors with smaller than size one feet.
e) Gloves of leather or other material of similar or greater durability.
f)
Goggles or visors as specified in rule 30.2.2.
30.2.1.2
For Minicross, mini Enduro and Reliability events commercially manufactured
body armour must be worn.
30.2.1.3
All competitors must wear an approved riding vest with club and rider number
identification must be worn.
30.2.1.4
No person may wear open footwear in the pits.
30.2.2 Goggles and Visors
30.2.2.1
Spectacles, protective goggles, helmet visors and tear-offs may be worn
provided:
a) Eye protectors and spectacles are made of non-shattering material.
b) Metal and perspex face shields are not used.
c) Eye shades or peaks are of a flexible material.
30.2.3 Hair and Jewellery
a) Hair longer than shoulder length must be confined in the helmet or jersey.
b) Body jewellery is to be removed or securely covered with tape prior to
competition.
228
MINIKHANA
30.3 ENGINES
30.3.1.1
30.3.1.2
30.3.1.3
Noise emissions must not exceed 95dB(A).
50cc motorcycles are to comply with GCR5.9.
80cc four stroke machines must remain standard with the manufacturers
specifications with the exception of:
a) Exhaust system.
b) Gearing.
c) Carburettor jetting.
d) Plastics.
e) Handlebars.
30.4.1.1
With the exception of the rear shock absorber, all motorcycles shall comply
with the manufacturer’s specifications.
Efficient brakes must be fitted as per manufacturers specifications.
When the brake arm or lever is of the open or hooked type, the brake actuating
rod or cable must be secured so as to prevent accidental dislodgment.
An ignition cut out switch, operating on the primary circuit must be fitted to the
handlebars in an accessible position.
Handlebar pads must be fitted over crossbar or handlebar mounting clamp.
All glass and plastic lenses shall be either removed or covered with a fabric
backed tape.
Front and rear mudguards to be fitted.
30.4 FRAMES AND PARTS
30.4.1.2
30.4.1.3
30.4.1.4
30.4.1.5
30.4.1.6
30.4.1.7
30.5 COMPETITION RULES
30.5.1 Age Groups
30.5.1.1
No 50cc rider shall exceed the age of 11 years.
30.5.1.2
Riders in the Mini Wheel grades shall be a minimum age of 7 years and under
16 years.
30.5.1.3
Riders in the 85cc grades shall be a minimum age of 9 years.
30.5.1.4
Riders in the Big Wheel 85cc/100cc class shall be a minimum age of 12 years.
30.5.1.5
All Big Wheel 85cc/100cc riders aged between 12 years and 15 years must ride
in the Junior Combined grade Big Wheel 85cc/100cc category.
30.5.1.6
All senior riders can only ride in either the Senior Combined grade Big Wheel
85cc/100cc or Senior A grade Big Wheel 85cc/100cc categories.
30.5.2 Grading
30.5.2.1
Senior competitors can only compete in either the Senior A or Combined Grade
85/100 cc categories.
30.5.2.2
The 85 cc A Grade class shall be the premier class and shall be the final event
of the meeting.
30.5.2.3
Competitors shall be graded according to ability into one of the following
classes for their age group and machine capacity.
a) A Grade.
b) B Grade.
c) C Grade.
d) Nipper.
e) Mini Wheel Grade (7 to Under 16).
f)
Junior Combined Big Wheel 85/100cc Grade (12 to Under 16).
g) Senior Combined Big Wheel 85/100cc Grade.
h) Senior A Big Wheel 85/100cc Grade.
229
MINIKHANA
30.5.2.4
30.5.2.5
30.5.2.6
30.5.2.7
30.5.2.8
30.5.2.9
All competitors shall be graded by the SCB. A competitor may change their
grading by making formal application through the competitors club. A
competitor who successfully requests to be upgraded within the competitors
age group shall not be down graded whilst eligible for that age group
A competitor may be granted a temporary grading change for any particular
competition with the approval of the SCB Grading Officer to ensure each event
has the required number of starters. Such temporary grading changes shall be
effective for only that meeting. Points earned during temporary grading
changes shall be accredited to the competitors accumulated tally for the
competitors official grade.
All competitors may be downgraded when changing age groups or capacity
classes.
All competitors may be upgraded within the competitors age group by
successful completion of Championship events or accrual of 21 points in the
competitors accumulated tally.
Grading books will be available on all competition days.
Grading changes will not occur at Championship events.
30.5.3 Scoring
30.5.3.1
For Championship events points will be awarded as listed below:
a) Club, the club amassing the most number of places will be the
Championship Club;
1st
b)
1st
30.5.3.2
30.5.3.3
3 points
2nd
2 points
3rd
1 point
Individual, the competitors amassing the highest point score in each class
shall be the Championship winner of that class.
17 points
2nd
12 points
3rd
9 points
For other than Trials, ties for first or second will be resolved by a run-off
between the tied competitors. Trials will be resolved by a count back.
Competitors tied for third will each be awarded third place.
For all other events the method of scoring will be as prescribed in SR.
30.5.4 Number Plates
30.5.4.1
The background colour on the front and side number plates (the size of which
will be as per manufacturer’s specification) is the official grading colour.
a) A Grade — Yellow background with black numbers
b) B Grade — Red background with white numbers
c) C Grade — White background with black numbers
d) Nipper — Green background with white numbers
e) Mini Wheel Grade
— Background & number colours to be in
accordance with the appropriate grading of the rider.
f)
Junior Combined Grade
Background & number colours to be in
accordance with the appropriate grading of the rider.
g) Big Wheel 85cc/100cc
h) Senior Combined Grade — Black background with white numbers
i)
Big Wheel 85cc/100cc
j)
Senior A Grade — Yellow Background with black numbers
k) Big Wheel 85cc/100cc
230
MINIKHANA
30.6 GENERAL EVENT RULES
30.6.1 Starting Procedure
30.6.1.1
All starts shall be from the right hand end of the Start/Finish line facing towards
the course.
30.6.1.2
All starts shall be flag starts.
30.6.1.3
Minicross starts may be by mechanical means.
30.6.1.4
Footing areas shall be on the start/finish line side of marker one and on the
opposite side for all other markers.
30.6.1.5
Unless otherwise stated, only the left foot may be used when footing permitted.
30.6.1.6
Start and finish of an event is deemed to be when:
a) The front axle crosses the start line; and
b) The front axle crosses the finish line.
30.6.1.7
Competitors are to stop competing and leave the course via the finish area
when shown the Black Flag.
30.6.1.8
Competitors must be informed of faults when reported by either the flag
marshal or an official.
30.6.1.9
A minimum of three lanes will be available per each event area. Competitors to
draw for lanes.
30.6.1.10
The number of heats will be maximised to ensure maximum amount of
competitors compete in the final while not unduly increase the total number of
heats.
4=
+4
5=
+3
+2
23= +4
+4
+4
+4
+4
24= +4
+4
+4
+4
+4
+3
6=
+2
+2
+2
+4
25= +4
+3
+3
+3
+3
+3
7=
+3
+2
+2
26= +4
+4
+3
+3
+3
+3
+3
+3
8=
+2
+2
+2
+2
27= +4
+4
+4
+3
+3
+3
+3
+3
9=
+3
+3
+3
+2
+2
+2
28= +4
+4
+4
+4
+3
+3
+3
+3
10= +3
+3
+2
+2
29= +4
+4
+4
+4
+4
+3
+3
+3
11= +3
+3
+3
+2
30= +4
+4
+4
+4
+4
+4
+3
+3
12= +3
+3
+3
+3
31= +4
+4
+4
+4
+4
+4
+4
+3
13= +4
+3
+3
+3
32= +4
+4
+4
+4
+4
+4
+4
+4
14= +4
+4
+3
+3
33= +4
+4
+4
+4
+4
+4
+3
+3
+3
15= +4
+4
+4
+3
34= +4
+4
+4
+4
+4
+4
+4
+3
+3
16= +4
+4
+4
+4
35= +4
+4
+4
+4
+4
+4
+4
+4
+3
17= +2
+3
+3
+3
+3
+3
36= +4
+4
+4
+4
+4
+4
+4
+4
+4
18= +3
+3
+3
+3
+3
+3
37= +4
+4
+4
+4
+4
+4
+4
+3
+3
+3
19= +4
+3
+3
+3
+3
+3
38= +4
+4
+4
+4
+4
+4
+4
+4
+3
+3
20= +4
+4
+3
+3
+3
+3
39= +4
+4
+4
+4
+4
+4
+4
+4
+4
+3
21= +4
+4
+4
+3
+3
+3
40= +4
+4
+4
+4
+4
+4
+4
+4
+4
+4
22= +4
+4
+4
+4
+3
+3
231
MINIKHANA
30.6.1.11
30.6.1.12
The official of the event shall advise each competitor of successful completion
of the course.
Competitors must complete the course to win the event:
a) If all competitors in a final fault, one re-run must occur and if the re-run is
unsuccessfully completed the last competitor to fault shall be declared the
winner.
b) If there are insufficient competitors for more than one heat then there will
be no final. Competitors must successfully complete the course.
30.6.2 Fault
30.6.2.1
Fault, as defined by elimination fault’s for each event.
a) Competitors making more than two false starts in an event shall be
eliminated.
b) Only successful completion of an event will allow competitors to progress
to the next round.
c) Allowing front axle to cross into the footing area of a marker already
completed will be deemed to have not followed the course procedure.
d) Only competitors having been equally placed in their heat/semi finals may
compete against each other in a final. (i.e. 1st v 1st, 2nd v 2nd, etc).
30.6.3 Flags and Signals
30.6.3.1
Competitors who do not obey flag signals will be excluded from the event.
30.7 COURSES
30.7.1 Witch’s Hats
V-slot to accept
150mm Rubber Ring
25mm P.V.C. Pipe
760mm
Witches Hat
Approx
500mm
30.7.2 Basic Course
30.7.2.1
The basic course layout for one competitor will cover an area of four metres by
16.5 metres. The side and end boundary of the course shall be marked with
lane tape or rope. Traffic cones (witches hats) will be used as the required
markers placed along the centre line of the course at 2.7 metre spacings see
Basic course fig for details.
a) A = Footing area for marker 2, 3, 4, 5.
b) B = Footing area for marker 1.
c) C = 2.7 metres.
d) D = 3.0 metres.
e) E = 4 metres.
f)
F = 16.5 metres.
g) Note: There shall be 500mm between event areas.
232
MINIKHANA
E /2
E /2
30.8 ORANGE
30.8.1 Course
30.8.1.1
Basic course with traffic cones only to be used.
30.8.2 Procedure
30.8.2.1
Competitor starts at the Start line and keeping traffic cone markers to his / her
left circles marker five, returns to pass marker one and then continues to pass
marker four. This is repeated reducing the course length by one marker per
circuit until after circling marker one he / she then continues to cross the finish
line.(see fig Orange). Unlimited footing with the left foot is permitted. In case
of machine stalling the competitor may restart the engine ensuring only the left
foot makes contact with the ground. The finishing order shall be the elapsed
time of competitors who have successfully completed the course per heat /
semi final / final. The competitor who had the lowest elapsed time will be the
winner of that round of events.
30.8.3 Elimination
30.8.3.1
Competitors will be eliminated from the event for the following:
a) Touching markers or tapes;
b) Footing with the right foot;
c) Removing both hands from handlebars;
d) Not straddling machine;
e) Failing to follow course procedure;
233
MINIKHANA
f)
g)
Crossing the start / finish line before course is completed;
Front axle passing into defined footing area of previously rounded marker
(as defined in figure 1).
30.9 LOOPING
30.9.1 Course and Procedure
30.9.1.1
This uses the same course and riding procedure as the Orange event with the
exception that footing is not permitted. Competitors who stall his / her machine
may restart provided that neither foot makes contact with the ground.
Competitors will also be eliminated if either foot make any contact with the
ground. Finishing order will be achieved as in the Orange event.
234
MINIKHANA
30.10 RING RETURN
30.10.1 Course
30.10.1.1
This uses the basic course layout with the addition of poles in the centre of the
traffic cone and rubber rings. Plumber’s rings approximately 150 mm inside
diameter to be used. The pole to be inserted in the traffic cone as per figure 3.
30.10.1.2
Rubber rings to be placed on poles at markers 2, 3, 4, & 5 on the side
furthermost from the start / finish line.
30.10.2 Procedure
30.10.2.1
Competitor starts at the Start line and keeping traffic cone markers to his / her
left circles marker five, picking up the ring and returns to pass marker one and
places ring over marker one pole and then continues to pass marker four
repeating the process of retrieving the rings. This is repeated reducing the
course length by one marker per circuit until after circling marker two. After the
final ring is placed over marker one pole he / she then completes an extra
circuit around marker five before crossing the finish line(see figure 4). Footing
with the left foot is permitted in the footing areas only. The finishing order shall
be the elapsed time of competitors who have successfully completed the
course per heat / semi final / final. The competitor who had the lowest elapsed
time will be the winner of that round of events.
30.10.3 Elimination
30.10.3.1
Competitors will be eliminated from the event for the following:
a) Touching markers, poles or tapes. Poles may only be touched by the
hand during removal or placement of the ring over the pole;
b) Footing with the right foot;
c) Footing with the left foot outside of the footing area;
d) Removing both hands from handlebars;
e) Not straddling machine;
f)
Failing to follow course procedure;
g) Crossing the start / finish line before course is completed;
h) Front axle passing into defined footing area of previously rounded marker
(as defined in figure 1);
i)
Dropping ring allowing it touch the ground;
j)
Causing ring to fall over marker while attempting to pick up ring.
235
MINIKHANA
30.11 BENDING
30.11.1 Course
30.11.1.1
Basic course with traffic cones only to be used.
30.11.2 Procedure
30.11.2.1
Competitors start at the start line and passes marker one on competitors left
side, then changes direction to pass marker two on competitors right side,
marker three on competitors left side, marker four on competitors right side and
circles marker five on competitors left side and returns to the finish line passing
the markers in the same manner. I.e. markers four and two on competitors
right side and markers three and one on competitors left. Crossing the finishing
line after passing marker one. See figure 5. The finishing order shall be the
elapsed time of competitors who have successfully completed the course per
heat / semi final / final. The competitor who had the lowest elapsed time will be
the winner of that round of events.
30.11.3 Elimination
30.11.3.1
Competitors will be eliminated from the event for the following:
a) Touching markers or tapes.
b) Footing with the right foot.
236
MINIKHANA
c)
d)
e)
f)
Footing outside footing area behind marker five.
Removing both hands from handlebars.
Not straddling machine.
Failing to follow course procedure.
30.12 RING BENDING
30.12.1 Course
30.12.1.1
This uses the basic course layout with the addition of poles in the centre of the
traffic cone and three rubber rings. Rubber rings will be placed on the pole in
marker five, one per time by an official.
30.12.2 Procedure
30.12.2.1
Competitors will ride the course in the same manner as in the Bending event
with the exception that when circling marker five the competitor removes thee
rubber ring from the pole ( official will place next rubber ring on marker five
pole) and then proceeds to marker one as in the Bending event. Competitor
will circle marker one and place rubber ring over the pole in marker one and will
then continue the event until all three rubber rings have been placed over
marker one when the competitor will cross the finishing line. The finishing order
shall be the elapsed time of competitors who have successfully completed the
course per heat / semi final / final. The competitor who had the lowest elapsed
time will be the winner of that round of events.
30.12.3 Elimination
30.12.3.1
Competitors will be eliminated from the event for the following:
a) Touching markers, poles or tapes. Poles may only be touched by the
hand during removal or placement of the ring over the pole.
b) Footing with the right foot.
c) Footing with the left foot outside of the footing area.
d) Removing both hands from handlebars.
e) Not straddling machine.
f)
Failing to follow course procedure.
g) Crossing the start / finish line before course is completed.
h) Dropping ring allowing it touch the ground.
i)
Causing ring to fall over marker while attempting pt pick up ring.
237
MINIKHANA
30.13 SLOW
30.13.1 Course
30.13.1.1
The course will be a lane 500 mm wide by 16.5 metres long.
30.13.2 Procedure
30.13.2.1
Competitor will start with the machine’s front axle on the start line. At the start
order the competitor has a maximum of three seconds to enter the event area
(front axle passes start line) and ensure his / her feet are not in contact with the
ground. Forward motion does not have to be maintained. Event is complete
when front axle passes finish line. The finishing order shall be the elapsed time
of competitors who have successfully completed the course per heat / semi
final / final. The competitor who had the highest elapsed time will be the winner
of that round of events.
30.13.3 Elimination
30.13.3.1
Competitors will be eliminated from the event for the following:
a) Slow start (feet in contact with ground after three seconds).
b) Touching tapes.
c) Footing.
MINIKHANA
FINISH
500mm
16.5m
START
30.14 CLOVER
30.14.1 Course
30.14.1.1
Competitors will ride passing through the six markers placed in a triangle to
form a clover pattern. Poles placed in the centre of car tyres will be used as
course markers.
30.14.2 Procedure
30.14.2.1
Competitors will start from start line and circles marker one on his / her left side
then circles marker two on his / her right then circles marker three on his right
and exits through the start finish line markers. Competitors may foot, left foot
for left turns and right foot for right turns. The finishing order shall be the
elapsed time of competitors who have successfully completed the course per
heat / semi final / final. The competitor who had the lowest elapsed time will be
the winner of that round of events.
30.14.3 Elimination
30.14.3.1
Competitors will be eliminated from the event for the following:
a) Touching a marker;
b) Both feet making contact with the ground at the same time;
c) Failure to follow the course procedure;
d) Riding outside the course boundary.
239
MINIKHANA
30.15 NO FOOTING CLOVER
30.15.1 Course and Procedure
30.15.1.1
This uses the same course and riding procedure as the Clover event with the
exception that footing is not permitted. Competitors will also be eliminated if
either foot makes any contact with the ground. Finishing order will be achieved
as in the Clover event.
30.16 START AND PARK
A=2.3m B=7.65m C=5.65m D=6.5m
Clover
30.16.1 Course
30.16.1.1
The basic course layout will cover an area of six metres by 20 metres. The
side and end boundary of the course shall be marked with lane tape or rope.
Traffic cones (witches hats) will be used as the required markers placed along
the centre line of the course at four metre spacings see Figure Start and Park
for layout details.
30.16.2 Procedure
30.16.2.1
Four or more competitors will start at the start line and proceed to pass the
markers, marker one to the competitors left, marker two to the competitors right
and circle marker three to his / her left and returns passing marker two to his /
her right and then proceeds to the stopping area, where the competitor will stop
his /her machine, turn off the engine and place the machine on its stand and
then run by foot to the finishing line. Competitors whose machine has no stand
may have an assistant appointed by the Clerk of Course to hold the machine.
30.16.3 Elimination
30.16.3.1
Competitors will be eliminated from the event for the following:
a) Touching a marker.
b) Footing.
c) Bumping.
MINIKHANA
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
Failure to follow the course procedure.
Riding outside the course boundary.
Stopping and parking machine outside of stopping area.
Failure to turn engine off.
Machine failing to remain on stand.
30.17 O RING RELAY
30.17.1 Course and Procedure
30.17.1.1
This uses the same course and riding procedure as the Start and Park event
with the exception that competitors will be in teams. An O ring, as used in the
Ring events, shall be carried by each competitor in turn whilst riding the course.
Competitors cannot start their leg of the relay until the previous competitor has
successfully completed the course and passed on the O ring.
241
MINIKHANA
30.18 MINICROSS
30.18.1 Course
30.18.1.1
The event shall be conducted over a course with obstacles and tight corners:
a) No level straight will be longer than 20 metres.
b) Jumps, chicanes, berms etc must be positioned so that speeds are kept
low.
c) The recommended maximum separation between obstacles, which
significantly reduce speed, is 33 metres.
d) There shall be no double, triple, or reverse canyon jumps. A jump is
defined as being greater than 500 mm in vertical height.
e) There will be no man-made stutter jumps.
f)
The width of the track must allow safe overtaking.
g) Tyre barriers shall be used where different sections of the track are in
close proximity to each other.
h) The first nine metres of the track will be divided into four two metre wide
lanes.
30.18.2 Procedure
30.18.2.1
Minicross introduces competitors to motocross style riding and helps to develop
competitors riding skills and balance:
a) A maximum of four competitors will complete the course at one time.
b) Competitors will be encouraged to pass each other when it is safe to do
so.
c) When passing, competitors must not make contact with the other
competitors.
d) Competitors must ensure that at all times they do not obstruct another
competitor from successfully completing the course.
e) In the case of a competitor falling the event will be stopped. The
Competitor responsible for the fall shall be excluded from the rerun.
f)
Competitors who hit the tyre barriers or leave the course proper may reenter the course at the closest safe point to where they left the course
ensuring that no advantage is gained.
30.18.3 Practice
30.18.3.1
In practice laps a maximum of 12 competitors may compete on the track under
a stationary Yellow flag. Any competitor passing will be excluded. In the case of
a competitor falling the Yellow flag shall be waved.
30.18.4 Elimination
30.18.4.1
Competitors will be eliminated from the event for the following:
a) Crossing the lane markers during the first nine metres of the event.
b) Failure to follow the course proper.
c) Causing another competitor to fault.
d) Failure to re-enter course correctly.
e) Passing while Yellow flag is displayed.
30.18.5 Footing and No Footing Minicross
30.18.5.1
Minicross can be conducted as either a footing or no-footing event. In NoFooting Minicross any competitors will be eliminated if footing occurs.
MINIKHANA
30.19 MINI TRIALS
30.19.1 Course
30.19.1.1
Where possible this event is to be conducted over natural terrain. Artificial
boundaries and obstacles may be used. The course will be marked in red on
the right hand side and in white on the left hand side by either markers or tape.
Minimum size of markers to be no less than 10 cm in width. Tapes and
markers to be clearly visible.
30.19.2 Procedure
30.19.2.1
The start and finish of each Observed section is to be clearly defined. Artificial
boundaries may be used to define the lateral limits. A machine will be deemed
to be in an Observed Section when the front axle passes the “section Begin”
marker and until it passes the “Section Ends” marker.
30.19.3 Failure
30.19.3.1
A failure is considered to have occurred when:
a) The machine ceases to move in a forward direction, relative to the course,
with the competitor footing.
b) The competitor dismounts the machine.
c) The machine crosses a boundary.
d) The machine passes the wrong side of a boundary marker prior to the
front axle passes the “Section Ends” sign.
e) The competitor or the machine receives outside assistance.
f)
The competitor breaks the tape or dislodges the tape anchors.
30.19.4 Footing
30.19.4.1
Footing will be deemed to have occurred if any part of the body of the
competitor touches the ground or any part of the competitor leans on an
obstacle (tree, wall, etc).
30.19.4.2
Footing outside the lateral limits of a section does not constitute a failure ( i.e. 1
point loss footing penalty only).
30.19.5 Marking
30.19.5.1
Method of marking will be as listed:
0
1
2
3
5
10
Clean
Footing once
Footing twice
Footing more than twice
Failure
Not attempting a section
30.20 MINI ENDURO
30.20.1 Course and Procedure
30.20.1.1
This event is conducted over varying distances of rough terrain. Competitors
have a predetermined time to complete the course. The competitor whose time
is closest to the predetermined time will be the winner. Competitors learn the
benefits of well maintained and reliable machinery and the ability to pace
themselves.
30.20.1.2
Special sections may be added. Points will be lost for failure to observe signs
and completion of special sections. Competitors are rewarded for their skill in
completing the penalty areas.
30.20.1.3
The natural terrain course is to be well defined with directional arrows and
adequately staffed by marshals.
30.20.1.4
A number of penalty areas and checkpoints should be included.
30.20.1.5
Each grade is to attempt to complete a preset number of laps in a reasonable
time.
243
MINIKHANA
30.20.1.6
In Mini Enduro with Special Penalty sections the competitor with the least
points lost will be the winner.
30.21 HILL CLIMB
30.21.1 Course and Procedure
30.21.1.1
The course for this event will be a hill which can be readily negotiable by the
competitors. To increase the skill level a series of turns and obstacles will be
included. The competitor whose elapsed time to successfully complete the
event is closest to the predetermined time shall be the winner. Only one
competitor will ride the event at a time.
30.22 ACCELERATION AND BRAKING
30.22.1 Course and Procedure
30.22.1.1
This event is conducted on an out and back course. A marker is placed 50
metres from the start finish line. Competitors will leave start line circle the
marker and return to the stop box. Competitors machine must be completely in
the confines of the stop box. Footing with left foot is only permitted at the
marker on the side opposite to the start line and in the stop box. Competitor
who successfully completes the course with the lowest elapsed time will be the
winner. The nature of this type of event precludes it being used as a run-off
event.
30.22.2 Penalties
30.22.2.1
Penalties will be awarded against competitors for the following:
a) Footing with right foot — (+ 5 seconds);
b) Footing outside the area behind marker — (+ 5 seconds);
c) Touching the marker — (+ 5 seconds);
d) Bike not stopping within stopping box (i. e. Both axles must be wholly
within the stopping Box)
(+ 5 seconds);
e) With machine correctly in stopping box, left foot only footing is permitted
out of stopping box without penalty;
f)
Failure to follow course procedure — (+ 1 minute).
6 metres
Witch's Hat
(marker)
imaginary line thru
centre of witch's hat
50 metres
Width of box = 1 metre
Length of box = 2 metres
Stop Box
Start
31. ALTERNATIVE FORMS OF COMPETITION
31.1 INTRODUCTION
31.1.1 Activities
31.1.1.1
Promoters may seek to conduct activities which are outside mainstream
motorcycle sport. Such alternative forms of competition may include, but are
not limited to:
a) Sand drags.
b) Hill climbs.
31.2 THE CONTROLLING BODIES
31.2.1 Administration of By Laws
31.2.1.1
These by laws are to be administered in accordance with Rule 2.1.1.
31.3 OFFICIALS
31.3.1 The Licensing and Powers of Officials
31.3.1.1
Key Officials are required to be at least Level 3.
31.3.1.2
The powers, authorities and responsibilities of officials controlling these
activities are those in Rule 2.5.
31.3.1.3
The Appointment of Officials
a) Rule 3.2.5 applies for the appointment of officials.
31.4 VENUES
31.4.1 Venue Licensing
31.4.1.1
Venues must be inspected and licensed in accordance with Rule 3.1.
31.5 PERMITS
31.5.1 Permit Applications
31.5.1.1
An application for a permit must be in the prescribed form to the RCB and
must:
a) Be accompanied by the prescribed fee and draft SR.
b) Be submitted at least 2 months before the date set for the meeting.
c) Be accompanied by evidence that the RCB’s requirements regarding
officials, indemnity forms and safety will be met.
d) Identify the proposed venue.
e) Include details of all ancillary activities.
31.6 SUPPLEMENTARY REGULATIONS
31.6.1 Competition Details
31.6.1.1
Promoters must include comprehensive details of the proposed competition in
SR.
31.6.1.2
SCBs must submit the SR to MA for approval.
245
ALTERNATIVE FORMS OF COMPETITION
31.7 COMPETITORS
31.7.1 Licensing of Competitors
31.7.1.1
All competitors must be licensed in accordance with Chapter 3.
31.8 MACHINES
31.8.1 Technical Specifications
31.8.1.1
The technical specifications must be approved by MA and be included in SR.
246
32. JUDICIAL COMMITTEE GUIDELINES
32.1 MA HEARING GUIDELINES
32.1.1 Guidelines on the Conduct of Hearings
32.1.1.1
The Judicial Committee is the national appellate tribunal of Motorcycling
Australia Ltd.
32.1.1.2
Appointed members of the Committee must either be:
a) A qualified lawyer; or
b) A person with appropriately extensive knowledge of, and experience in the
sport.
In the case of the Committee’s president, that person must be a qualified
lawyer. The current President is a barrister from Melbourne. Present members
include a solicitor from Perth and four non-legal members.
32.1.1.3
The Committee sits either:
a) As a panel of up to three members chaired by a lawyer; or
b) As a committee of one – who must be a lawyer.
Hearings are usually, but not always, held in Melbourne. Interstate telephone
hook-ups are used on occasions.
32.1.1.4
Generally speaking, matters come before the Committee in one of the following
ways:
a) As appeals from state appellate tribunals.
b) As appeals from protest hearings, conducted by stewards or juries, where
the event in question is a national one or is part of a national series; and
c) (Less commonly) as disputed questions on the interpretation of the
General Competition Rules.
32.1.1.5
Suppose one is considering lodging an appeal to the Committee. (It may be, for
example, that in a particular round of a national series, one believes that one
has been wrongly excluded by the steward). The main points to note are:
a) One must lodge a Notice of Appeal at the MA Ltd. office in Melbourne.
b) The time limit for the lodging of this Notice is 21 days from the date of the
written notification of the decision being appeal from.
c) The Notice must be accompanied by the prescribed lodging fee.
d) No particular setting out or style is required for the Notice of Appeal.
Obviously, however, it should specify –
i)
The person or body whose decision is being challenged;
ii)
The date and place of the decision;
iii)
What the decision was;
iv)
A short outline (preferably in point form) of why the decision is
said to be wrong.
e) A copy of the Notice of Appeal should be posted to the person or body
whose decision is being challenged.
32.1.1.6
Hearings are normally conducted on a mid-week evening from 7.00 pm. They
are scheduled, as far as is possible, as the parties request. Enquiries and
requests about the scheduling of hearings should be directed to MA Ltd’s
General Manager.
32.1.1.7
Hearings generally last two to three hours. In the last two years, the shortest
has been a little over one hour, the longest nearly seven.
32.1.1.8
Parties to an appeal may, if they wish, choose to be represented at the hearing
by a lawyer. Alternatively, they may choose to be represented by a person
who, though not a lawyer, is familiar with their case and who can explain it to
the Committee. Parties can, of course, present their own case. In the past two
years, about one third of appellants had legal representation, another third had
non-legal representation – and the other third presented their case to the
Committee themselves.
247
JUDICIAL COMMITTEE GUIDELINES
32.1.1.9
32.1.1.10
The Committee’s decisions are not normally handed down then and there on
the evening of the hearing. More typically, the parties are notified in writing of
the Committee’s decision within ten to fourteen days. Written reasons for the
Committee’s decision accompany the decision itself. Where the Committee
sits as a panel it arrives at one decision, i.e. it does not produce a majority
decision and a dissenting minority decision.
When a hearing has concluded there can be no further communication
between the parties and the Committee. If a party loses an appeal, any request
it may make of the Committee to reconsider its decision will be ignored.
248
33. MODEL SUPPLEMENTARY REGULATIONS
33.1.1 Announcement and Jurisdiction
a) Name of promoter.
b) Name or title of competition.
c) Persons eligible to compete.
d) Types of vehicles eligible.
e) Date.
f)
Permit, class of and number.
g) Track licence number.
h) Authority granting the permit.
i)
A statement that the competition is held under these Rules.
33.1.2 Entries
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)
Date of opening of entries.
Where entries to be sent.
Date and time of closing entries.
Amount of entry fee.
Conditions as to return of fee.
Minimum and maximum number of entries.
Teams, composition of.
Teams, how and when may be entered.
Substitution of riders.
Transfer of entries.
33.1.3 Awards
a) Special awards and condition attached thereto.
b) Period of holding special awards if not won outright.
c) Other awards
33.1.4 Officials
a)
b)
c)
d)
Stewards of the meeting.
Clerk of the course.
Race Secretary.
Other officials..
33.1.5 Description - Reliability Trials
a) Place and time of start
b) Riders and vehicles
c) The course.
i)
Starting order
ii)
Route marking
iii)
Nature of course
iv)
Length of course
v)
Itinerary
vi)
Route cards
vii)
Practising
viii)
Meal stops
d) Observation.
i)
Balking
ii)
Non-stop section
iii)
Definition of a stop and a failure
iv)
Footing and failure on hills
249
MODEL SUPPLEMENTARY REGULATIONS
e)
f)
g)
h)
v)
Involuntary delays
vi)
Checks
vii)
Position of rider or passenger on vehicle
Speed.
i)
Time checks
ii)
Method of control
iii)
Time allowances
iv)
Time arrangements
Other tests.
Assessment of performance
i)
Bonus marks
ii)
Penalties
iii)
Method of allotting awards
General
i)
Outside assistance
ii)
Advertisements
iii)
Retirement
iv)
Promoters' liability
33.1.6 Description - Speed Meetings
a) Place and time of start, paddock, weighing out
b) Riders and Vehicles
c) The Course.
i)
Method of starting
ii)
Direction or danger signs
iii)
Flag signals
iv)
Length of course
v)
Nature of course
vi)
Returning to start
vii)
Practising
viii)
Replenishment
d) Observation.
i)
Method of timing
ii)
Number of runs
iii)
Handicapping
e) Assessment of performance.
i)
General
ii)
Advertisement
iii)
Promoters' Liability
250
34. SPORTING COMMISSIONS AND COMMITTEES OF MA
34.1 BACKGROUND:
34.1.1 Creation of Commissions
34.1.1.1
A special MA Board meeting held on February 12-13th, 1994 resolved that:
a) Motorcycling Australia adopt a Commission structure.
b) The existing sporting sub-committees (existing at the date of the special
Council meeting) be disbanded from 28th February 1994.
c) To ensure stability of the Commissions the first appointments be:
i)
1 person for 1 year
ii)
1 person for 2 years
iii)
1 person for 3 years, and;
iv)
Selection of the 1 year, 2 year and 3 year appointments be by
ballot.
d) The following sporting commissions be established:
i)
Road Racing Commission
ii)
Motocross and Supercross Commission
iii)
Speedway and Track Commission
iv)
Enduro Commission
v)
Trials Commission
vi)
Junior Commission
vii)
Historic Commission
e) The following Standing Committees continue or be established:
i)
Legal
ii)
Safety
f)
The following Special Sub-Committees continue or be established:
i)
Coaching
ii)
Officials Training
iii)
Rules
34.1.2 Structure of the Sporting Commissions:
34.1.2.1
Membership of commissions will be a maximum of three persons.
34.1.2.2
Positions should be canvassed as widely as possible to ensure awareness and
vacancies must be advertised in the Motorcycle Press and through SCBs.
Applications to close on the last working day in February of each year.
34.1.2.3
Appointments will be made by the Board.
34.1.2.4
Appointments will be for three (3) years with one person due for election each
year.
34.1.2.5
Casual Vacancies to be appointed by the Board for the unexpired term of the
retiree's appointment.
34.1.2.6
Appointments to be based on the ability to contribute.
34.1.2.7
The Board will appoint the chairman of each commission.
34.1.2.8
The Board has the right to dismiss all or any members of a Commission if
performance is unsatisfactory.
34.1.2.9
Positions on Commissions are honorary. Approved travel, accommodation and
out of pocket expenses will be met by MA.
34.1.3 Structure of the Standing Committees and Special Sub-Committees
34.1.3.1
Members of the standing committees and special sub-committees shall be
appointed by the Board and the membership shall be reviewed annually at the
Annual Conference.
34.1.3.2
The structure should generally consist of three persons.
251
SPORTING COMMISSIONS AND COMMITTEES OF MA
34.1.3.3
34.1.3.4
34.1.3.5
34.1.3.6
34.1.3.7
34.1.3.8
Applications for Committee positions will be directed to the Board.
Members will generally be selected because of their expertise and may be
members of the Board.
Positions on the standing committees and special sub-committees are
honorary. Approved travel, accommodation and out of pocket expenses will be
met by MA.
Casual Vacancies to be appointed by the Board for the unexpired term of the
retiree's appointment.
The Board will appoint committee chairman.
The Board has the right to dismiss all or any members of a Committee if
performance is unsatisfactory.
34.1.4 Objectives of the Sporting Commissions
34.1.4.1
To assist in the achievement of the objectives of MA.
34.1.4.2
To encourage growth, development, participation and safety in motorcycle sport
throughout Australia.
34.1.4.3
To provide an environment for the orderly and structured consideration and
decision making on the specialised aspects of motorcycle sport.
34.1.4.4
To enhance the promotion of motorcycling as a sport.
34.1.4.5
To enhance the status of National Championship competitions.
34.1.4.6
To assist riders selected in teams competing in International competition to
achieve International rankings.
34.1.4.7
To assist individual competitors, clubs, promoters, SCBs, and other interested
parties wherever possible in their specialty of the sport.
34.1.5 Terms of Reference of the Sporting Commissions
34.1.5.1
Sport specific items only, that is, those that do not affect other disciplines.
34.1.5.2
Budget.
34.1.5.3
Technical.
34.1.5.4
National Team Selection.
34.1.5.5
International Programs.
34.1.5.6
Other Development.
34.1.6 Responsibilities of the Sporting Commissions
34.1.6.1
To be responsible to the Board and to act in the best interests of MA and the
Sport.
34.1.6.2
To keep minutes of all Commission meetings.
34.1.6.3
To prepare and propose rules and/or rule amendments.
34.1.6.4
To assist and advise other Commissions and Committees.
34.1.6.5
To initiate appropriate strategies to ensure the development of the particular
discipline of the sport.
34.1.6.6
Where these strategies involve policy change, the matter must be referred to
the Board
34.1.6.7
To foster the conduct of National Championships and International competition.
34.1.6.8
To provide a report in writing to the Board annually.
34.1.6.9
To report as required to the Board.
34.1.6.10
To prepare and maintain a discipline specific strategic plan.
34.1.6.11
To advise the Board on matters of policy relevant to commission discipline.
34.1.7 Meetings of the Sporting Commissions
34.1.7.1
All meetings and communication between Commission members shall be held
on an "as needed" basis and as decided by the Board, but generally one
meeting per year in person and at other times by phone link-up, email or
facsimile.
34.1.7.2
Communication with the commissions will be through the Commissions and
Committees Manager, at the MA Office.
252
SPORTING COMMISSIONS AND COMMITTEES OF MA
34.1.8 Casual Vacancies
34.1.8.1
Upon being advised of the impending absence of a Commissioner from a
meeting (including teleconferences) the Board may appoint a casual
replacement.
34.1.8.2
The “term” of the replacement is not to exceed the absence of the incumbent
Commissioner.
34.1.9 Powers of the Sporting Commissions
34.1.9.1
To recommend GCR rule changes only after full consultation with the SCBs
and relevant state sporting sub-committees. Communication must be through
MA to the SCBs and then to the relevant state sporting sub-committees.
34.1.9.2
To deal with matters within their discipline, (subject to the overriding control of
the Board), in accordance with the Constitution. The Board may refer matters
back to the Commissions for reconsideration.
34.1.9.3
To select teams for international competitions.
34.1.10 Procedure for Consideration of Items by Commission.
Proposals from clubs,
CBs, individuals
Advice to
Stakeholders
MA Commissions Manager.
MA office for
promulgation of
decision
Referred to Commission
Board for
Ratification
Proposed action to MA
Commissions Manager
Commission
Chairman
sign off
Referred to relevant
MA Committee eg:
Safety; Medical etc
Commission
recommendati
on referred to
SCBs & other
stakeholders
Comments to MA Office
Rules Committee
Commission
Decision
Feedback referred
to Commission
253
35. NATIONAL COACHING ACCREDITATION SCHEME
35.1 BACKGROUND:
35.1.1 Establishment
35.1.1.1
The National Coaching Accreditation Scheme was launched during late 1993
and aims to:
a) Increase confidence and competence in coaching ability.
b) Incorporate an involvement with and an understanding of sport science,
enabling a more in-depth approach to coaching.
c) Encourage the development of innovative coaching techniques.
d) Improve communication skills of coaches.
e) Provide a credible education and training process to attract members.
f)
Increase the number of trained coaches.
g) Provide recognition to coaches.
35.1.2 Levels of Accreditation
35.1.2.1
It is proposed that there will be up to 3 levels of accreditation implemented over
the next decade. Each level of accreditation builds upon the previous level.
35.1.2.2
A Level One and Level Two Course have been developed by MA, in
conjunction with the Australian Coaching Council. The Level One Course is
operating on a National basis. The initial Level Two-Coaching Course was
conducted in 1999.
35.1.3 Details of Level One Coaching Accreditation
35.1.3.1
The Level 1 course is an introductory course deigned to equip the coach with
useable coaching knowledge and skills. The course is particularly aimed at:
a) Beginner coaches, working in introductory programs at the club level.
b) Parents and those persons coaching juniors.
c) People who coach one or two times per week - up to 6 hours per week.
35.1.3.2
The main accreditation requirements include:
a) Completion of a 16.5 hour integrated course consisting of two
components:
i)
Motorcycle specific component.
ii)
General coaching principles component.
b) Completion of 30 hours of practical coaching.
c) Completion of 30 hours of updating requirements over a 4 year period
following accreditation.
35.1.4 Details of Level Two Coaching Accreditation
35.1.4.1
The Level 2 course is an intermediate course designed to extend the Level 1
coach's ability to confidently and safely coach. The course is aimed at Level 1
coaches seeking to coach at a higher performance level.
35.1.4.2
The main accreditation requirements include:
a) Completion of a 30 hour motorcycling specific course.
b) Completion of a 30 hour Level 2 general coaching principles course. This
course is conducted by State Coaching Academies and Institutes of Sport.
c) Completion of 60 hours of practical coaching experience.
35.1.5 Details of Level Three Coaching Accreditation
35.1.5.1
This is a highly advanced course designed to equip the coach with skills and
knowledge to coach at the National and International levels. The course is
aimed at experienced practising coaches working with elite and high
performance riders.
254
35.1.5.2
The main accreditation requirements include:
a) Completion of 100 hour course on advanced sport specific information on
the theory and practice of coaching.
b) Completion of 100 hours as a practising coach.
35.1.6 Coaching Workshops
35.1.6.1
Level 1 Coaching Courses are conducted throughout the year. Contact your
SCB to register your interest in attending the next Level 1 Course.
255
36. NATIONAL OFFICIALS’ ACCREDITATION SCHEME
36.1 BACKGROUND
36.1.1 Establishment
36.1.1.1
One of the recognised keys to the future of motorcycle sport is the development
and training of officials. MA introduced the National Officials' Accreditation
Scheme during 1994. The National Officials' Accreditation Scheme aims to:
a) Increase confidence and competence in officiating ability.
b) Improve communication skills.
c) Promote progressive improvement in officiating knowledge and expertise.
d) Provide a credible education and training process to attract new officials
and retain existing ones.
e) Ensure a uniform approach to officiating throughout the country.
36.2 LEVELS OF ACCREDITATION
36.2.1 Level O - Basic "Orientation" Level
36.2.1.1
In the case where a person does not have any accreditation, they are
recognised as Level O, and are therefore only qualified to act as an assistant
whilst in training or assisting at a meeting.
36.2.2 Level 1 - Club Level
36.2.2.1
In order to act as an official at club level, prospective officials are to complete a
questionnaire. The questionnaires are available for Club Secretaries to
distribute or may be obtained from SCBs.
36.2.2.2
The completed questionnaire must be endorsed by the official's Club Secretary,
stating the person has competently performed duties at club level.
36.2.2.3
The completed questionnaire and licence application are to be returned to the
relevant SCB for processing
36.2.2.4
Applicants complete this questionnaire in their own time and may refer to their
GCRs. The questionnaire comprises 20 multiple choice questions. This
questionnaire needs to be successfully completed by persons wishing to
become, an accredited official.
36.2.2.5
Generally, all current officials are automatically graded at Level 1 unless
application is made for higher accreditation.
36.2.3 Level 2 - Inter Club/Zone Level
36.2.3.1
To attain this level officials are required to attend a seminar and successfully
complete the assessment requirements.
36.2.3.2
The seminars are designed to be practical by nature.
36.2.3.3
Level 2 is the lowest level for accreditation of a Steward.
36.2.3.4
Applications for Level 1 and 2 accreditation are generally, reviewed by the SCB
Manager. If there is any doubt as to the experience of the applicant, the
application may be referred to the State Officials' Review Panel for final
approval.
36.2.4 Level 3 - National Event/State Championship Level
36.2.4.1
As with Level 2, officials are required to attend a seminar and successfully
complete the written assessment.
36.2.4.2
All Level 3 applications, are reviewed by the State Officials' Review Panel
before being granted accreditation at this level.
256
NATIONAL OFFICIALS’ ACCREDITATION SCHEME
36.2.5 Level 4 - National Championship Level
36.2.5.1
To achieve Level 4 accreditation as a Steward, Referee and Clerk of Course,
applicants must attend a Key Officials Seminar conducted by MA every three
years and successfully complete the assessment requirements.
36.2.5.2
Level 4 accreditation for all positions other than those listed in the previous rule
is awarded by the National Officials Subcommittee.
36.2.5.3
Level 4 officials are required to attend seminars to retain their accreditation.
36.2.6 International (FIM) Accreditation
36.2.6.1
This includes major officials at international level.
36.2.6.2
To be accredited at the International level, an applicant must hold Level Four
Accreditation and have successfully completed an FIM Seminar. FIM seminars
are conducted in Australia as required to provide officials for World
Championships.
36.3 LICENSING:
36.3.1.1
36.3.1.2
36.3.1.3
36.3.1.4
Licences will be issued by SCBs on behalf of MA with the exception of Level 4
Stewards, Referees and Clerks of Course licences which will be issued by MA.
The rear of the Official's Licence has a matrix indicating the disciplines of the
sport and types of accreditation. Numbers indicating the level/s of accreditation
will be placed in the matrix.
It is recommended that all officials be registered, (i.e. hold an official's licence).
Any official, who has not been specifically accredited, by their SCB (or does not
wish to be), should be issued an Official's Licence with no accreditation levels,
indicated in the accreditation matrix on the rear of the licence, indicating a
"General" Official's licence not specifically accredited for any discipline or
category of the sport, and that the holder must always act in an assistant's
capacity.
36.4 NATIONAL OFFICIALS SUB-COMMITTEE GUIDELINES:
36.4.1.1
36.4.1.2
36.4.1.3
36.4.1.4
36.4.1.5
36.4.1.6
36.4.1.7
36.4.1.8
36.4.1.9
To oversee the setting up in each state of a State Official's Panel.
To oversee the accreditation procedures at state level for Levels 1, 2, and 3
and to confer accreditation at Level 4.
To set down guidelines for the conduct of the seminars at the various levels.
To provide input into the setting of the assessment papers and questionnaires.
To provide input for the production of resource materials.
To re-appraise accreditation levels of poorly performed Level 4 officials.
To liaise with MA, SCBs and Promoters in the appointment of senior officials at
Australian Championships.
To review progress of the Scheme and make any recommendations for
updating to MA.
To arbitrate on any disputes arising over the Scheme.
36.5 STATE OFFICIALS' REVIEW PANEL GUIDELINES:
36.5.1.1
36.5.1.2
36.5.1.3
36.5.1.4
36.5.1.5
36.5.1.6
36.5.1.7
36.5.1.8
To liaise with MA and the National Officials' Sub-committee.
To assess the suitability of Level 2 officials when asked to do so by the SCB.
To review and accredit Level 3 officials.
To nominate officials for Level 4 to the National Officials' Sub-committee.
To organise and conduct seminars, venues and presenters within the state
and/or zones.
To notify applicants of the success or otherwise of their application.
To establish a timetable of when and how often the Panel should meet.
To review the performance and accreditation level of officials who do not
maintain the required standard.
257
NATIONAL OFFICIALS’ ACCREDITATION SCHEME
36.5.1.9
36.5.1.10
To re-appraise accreditation levels of poorly performed officials.
Accreditation of Level 1 and 2 officials is an office function and is at the
discretion of the SCB, provided all necessary criteria have been met by the
applicant. This eliminates the time-consuming process for the State Officials'
Review Panel to review every Level 1 and 2 application.
258
37. NATIONAL PERSONAL ACCIDENT INSURANCE OUTLINE
The following is a summary of the policy coverage. Reference should be made to the policy
documents for specific details of coverage, terms and conditions. The terms and conditions
of the policies will prevail.
37.1.1 Covering
37.1.1.1
All competitors, organisers, officials, marshals, licence holders, members,
volunteers, employees, directors and committee members of or associated with
Motorcycling Australia and its state bodies whilst competing, engaged in,
and/or attending racing events, practice sessions, functions and other activities
officially organised by/or on the business of Motorcycling Australia and its state
bodies. Cover includes travel directly to and from such events from their place
of work or domicile.
37.1.1.2
A claim for the benefits provided must be made within twelve (12) months from
the date the injury was suffered.
37.1.2 Situation - Anywhere in Australia
37.1.3 Capital Benefits
37.1.3.1
Injury as defined resulting solely and directly and independently of any other
cause in:
1.
Quadriplegia or paraplegia
2.
Death
- Under 18 years of age
- If under 18 years of age with full time employment
- All other Insured Persons
Third degree burns and/or resultant disfigurement which covers more than 40%
of the entire external body
Permanent Total Disablement
Permanent and Incurable Insanity
Permanent Total Loss of Sight of Both Eyes
Permanent and Incurable Paralysis of all Limbs
Permanent Total Loss of Sight of One Eye
Loss of or the Permanent Total Loss of use of one limb
Loss of or the Permanent Total Loss of use of two limbs
Permanent Total Loss of Hearing in:
a) Both Ears
b) One Ear
Permanent Total Loss of the Lens of One Eye
Loss of or the Permanent Total Loss of use of four fingers and thumb of
either hand
Loss of or the Permanent Total Loss of use of four fingers of either hand
Loss of or the Permanent Total Loss of use of four fingers of either hand:
a) Both Joints
b) One Joint
Loss of or the Permanent Total Loss of use of fingers of either hand:
a) Three Joints
b) Two Joints
c) One Joint
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16
$100,000
259
$10,000
$50,000
$50,000
$50,000
$50,000
$50,000
$50,000
$50,000
$50,000
$50,000
$50,000
$37,500
$7,500
$25,000
$35,000
$20,000
$15,000
$7,500
$5,000
$3,750
$2,500
NATIONAL PERSONAL ACCIDENT INSURANCE
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
Loss of or the Permanent Total Loss of use of toes and disablement of foot:
a) All-one Foot
$7,500
b) Great-both Joints
$2,500
c) Great-one Joint
$1,500
d) Other than great toe, each toe
$500
Fractured leg or patella with established non-union
$5,000
Shortening of leg by at least 5cm
$3,700
Permanent Disability not otherwise provided for under Insured Events 3 to 19 inclusive. Such
percentage of the Sum Insured as the insurer shall in its absolute discretion determine and being
in its opinion not inconsistent with the benefits provided under Insured Events 3 to 19 inclusive.
Funeral expenses
$2,000
37.1.4 Weekly Benefits
22.
23.
24.
Weekly Accident Benefits for marshals and officials who are Income Earners
Home Help Weekly Benefit
Student Tutorial Weekly Benefit
$500
$250
$250
37.1.5 Parents’ Inconvenience Allowance
25
Parents’ Inconvenience Allowance – per day
Up to a maximum of
$15
$1,500
37.1.6 Weekly Benefits Excess - 30 days.
37.1.7 Weekly Benefit Period - One Hundred and Four (104) weeks maximum.
37.2 DEFINITIONS
37.2.1 Home Help Weekly Benefit
The insurer will pay for the cost of hiring help and/or child minding services
reasonably and necessarily incurred by an Insured Person as a result of injury from
an insured event causing temporary total disablement. Provided that:
a) Such child minding services and nursing help are carried out by persons
other than members of the Insured Person’s family or other relatives or
persons permanently living with the Insured Person.
b) Such child minding services and help are certified by a legally qualified
medical practitioner as being necessary for the recovery of the Insured
Person.
c) Payments will commence from the 14th day of treatment by a legally
qualified medical practitioner.
37.2.2 Student Tutorial Weekly Benefit
In respect of unmarried dependant children, the insurer will pay the cost of hiring
home tutoring services reasonably and necessarily incurred by an Insured Person as
a result of injury from an insured event causing temporary total disablement.
Provided that:
a) The Insured Person is registered as a full-time student.
b) Such home tutoring services are carried out by persons other than
members of the Insured Person’s family or other relatives or persons who
are full-time students.
c) Payments will commence from the 14th day of treatment by a legally
qualified medical practitioner.
260
NATIONAL PERSONAL ACCIDENT INSURANCE
37.2.3 Parents’ Inconvenience Allowance
The insurer will pay up to $15 per day to a maximum of $1,500 for reimbursement of
expenses incurred for travelling, child minding or other out-of-pocket expenses
incurred whilst an insured child is hospitalised arising from an insured event.
37.2.4 Total Disablement
Total disablement means disablement which entirely prevents an Insured Person
from attending to business or occupation of any and every kind other than
motorcycling, or if the Insured Person has no business or occupation other than
motorcycling, from engaging in an occupation for which the Insured Person is
reasonably qualified by education, training or experience.
261
38. FEES
38.1.1.1
All applicable fees are available from the MA office.
262
39. TRACK INFORMATION/LAP RECORDS
MALLALA
SOUTH AUSTRALIA
Phoenix Motorcycle Club
PO Box 2464
Kent Town, SA 5071
Tel: +61 (0)8 8322 0165
Fax: +61 (0)8 8365 2654
Email: mallalamotorsport@bigpond.au
Web: http://www.mallala.com/
LAP DISTANCE: 2.6km
RACING DIRECTION: clockwise
LAP RECORDS:
125 GP
250 GP
250 Production
Supersport
Superbike
Superstock
Sidecar
Joshua Brookes (Honda)
Shaun Geronimi (Yamaha)
Russell Holland (Aprilia)
Kevin Curtain (Yamaha)
Mathew Mladin (Kawasaki)
Leigh McKenzie
Andre Bosman/Dave Kellett (Kra)
1:12.4055
1:09.2900
1:14.2800
1:09.7337
1:07.7700
1:15.1675
1:13.2500
EASTERN CREEK RACEWAY
15/10/00
15/10/00
29/07/01
13/04/03
19/11/95
13/04/03
19/05/91
NEW SOUTH WALES
Australian Racing Drivers Club Ltd
PO Box 6747
Blacktown, NSW 2148
Tel: +61 (0)2 9672 1000
Fax: +61 (0)2 9672 0208
Email: sam@ardc.com.au
Web: www.eastern-creek-raceway.com
LAP DISTANCE: 3.93 km
RACING DIRECTION: anti-clockwise
LAP RECORDS:
125 GP
250 GP
250
Production
Supersport
Superbike
Superstock
Sidecar
Jay Taylor (Honda)
Shaun Geronimi (Yamaha)
Aaron Gobert (Aprilia)
1:37.93
1:34.91
1:41.32
27/08/00
12/09/99
27/08/00
Joshua Brookes (Honda)
Craig Connell (Ducati)
Alex Cudlin (Yamaha)
Andre Bosman/Dave Kellett (Kra)
1:34.27
1:32.81
1:41.96
1:40.37
05/10/03
12/09/99
31/08/03
07/07/91
263
TRACK INFORMATION/LAP RECORDS
PHILLIP ISLAND CIRCUIT
VICTORIA
Phillip Island Motor Sports Pty Ltd
RMB 500GP
Cowes, Vic 3922
Tel: +61 (03) 5952 2710
Fax: +61 (03) 5952 3160
Email: info@phillipislandcircuit.com.au
Web: www.phillipislandcircuit.com.au
LAP DISTANCE: 4.445km
RACING DIRECTION: anti-clockwise
LAP RECORDS:
125 GP
250 GP
250 Production
Supersport
Superbike
Superstock
Sidecar
Peter Galvin (Honda)
Shaun Geronimi (Yamaha)
Ben Attard (Aprilia)
Joshua Brookes (Honda)
Shawn Giles (Suzuki)
Alex Cudlin (Yamaha)
Andre Bosman/Dave Kellett (Kra)
1:41.632
1:37.448
1:44.925
1:37.111
1:35.248
1:43.290
1:42.780
WANNEROO
17/05/03
02/05/99
10/09/00
18/10/03
18/10/03
30/03/03
08/09/91
WESTERN AUSTRALIA
Western Australian Sporting Car Club
PO Box 267, Wanneroo, WA 6065
Tel: +61 (0)8 9306 8022
Fax: +61 (0)8 9306 8539
Email: wascc@wascc.asn.au
Web: www.wascc.com.au
LAP DISTANCE: 2.41km
RACING DIRECTION: clockwise
LAP RECORDS:
125 GP
250 GP
250 Production
Supersport
Superbike
Sidecar
Joshua Brookes (Honda)
Rip Crocker (Yamaha)
Aaron Gobert (Aprilia)
Kevin Curtain (Yamaha)
Steve Martin (Ducati)
Ray Spence/Jon Winders
1:00.79
0:58.05
1:03.29
0:58.78
0:56.60
1:01.55
264
08/10/00
08/10/95
08/10/00
01/08/99
01/08/99
08/10/00
TRACK INFORMATION/LAP RECORDS
WINTON
VICTORIA
Benalla Auto Club
PO Box 249, Benalla, Vic 3672
Tel: +61 (03) 5766 4235
Fax: +61 (03) 5766 4249
Email: race@wintonraceway.com.au
Web: www.wintonraceway.com.au
LAP DISTANCE: 3km
RACING DIRECTION: clockwise
LAP RECORDS:
125 GP
250 GP
250
Production
Supersport
Superbike
Superstock
Sidecar
Jay Taylor (Honda)
Shaun Geronimi (Yamaha)
Brendan Clarke (Aprilia)
1:28.667
1:26.216
1:30.716
03/06/01
07/05/00
03/06/01
Kevin Curtain (Yamaha)
Shawn Giles (Suzuki)
Alex Cudlin (Yamaha)
Vince Messina/Alison
(Alv)
1:25.137
1:23.733
1:28.674
1.32.978
04/05/03
07/05/00
04/05/03
02/06/02
Scoullar
265
TRACK INFORMATION/LAP RECORDS
QUEENSLAND RACEWAY
QUEENSLAND
PO Box 100, Amberley, Qld 4306
Tel: +61 (0)7 5461 9100
Fax: +61 (0)7 5461 9111
Email: admin@queenslandraceway.com.au
Web: www.queensland-raceway.org.au
LAP DISTANCE: 3.1km
RACING DIRECTION: clockwise
LAP RECORDS:
125 GP
250 GP
250
Production
Supersport
Superbike
Superstock
Sidecar
Joshua Brookes (Honda)
Shaun Geronimi (Yamaha)
Broc Parkes (Aprilia)
1:16.9830
1:13.2700
1:18.6000
04/06/00
15/08/99
15/08/99
Brendan Clarke (Yamaha)
Andrew Pitt (Kawasaki)
Paul Free (Suzuki)
Alex Cudlin (Yamaha)
Ray Spence/Jon Winders
(Elf)
1:12.7303
1:10.2500
1:10.2500
1:15.6787
1:17.9400
10/08/03
15/08/99
15/08/99
01/06/03
15/08/99
266
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising